\documentclass[report,inlinetitle,noprint,wbprompt,x11names]{nlctdoc}

\usepackage[inner=0.25in,outer=0.5in,includemp]{geometry}

\usepackage{array}
\usepackage{alltt}
\usepackage{pifont}
\usepackage{textcomp}
\usepackage{amssymb}
\usepackage{accsupp}
\ifpdf
 \usepackage{lmodern}
 \usepackage{mathpazo}
 \usepackage[scaled=.88]{helvet}
 \usepackage{courier}
 \usepackage{metalogo}
\else
 \newcommand{\grimace}{{\fontencoding {U}\fontfamily{futs}\selectfont \char77}}
 \providecommand{\XeLaTeX}{XeLaTeX}
 \providecommand{\XeTeX}{XeTeX}
 \providecommand{\LuaLaTeX}{LuaLaTeX}
\fi
\usepackage[colorlinks,
            bookmarks,
            linkcolor=blue,
            urlcolor=Magenta4,
            hyperindex=false,
            pdfauthor={Nicola L.C. Talbot},
            pdftitle={User Manual for glossaries.sty},
            pdfkeywords={LaTeX,package,glossary,acronyms}]{hyperref}
\usepackage{xr-hyper}
\usepackage[
  xindy,
  nonumberlist,
  toc,
  nopostdot,
  nogroupskip,
  style=altlist
]{glossaries}
\usepackage{glossary-inline}

\pagestyle{headings}

\glsnoexpandfields

\renewcommand*{\glsseeformat}[3][\seename]{%
  (\xmakefirstuc{#1} \glsseelist{#2}.)%
}

\renewcommand*{\glossarypreamble}{%
\emph{This glossary style was setup using:}
\begin{ttfamily}
\begin{tabbing}
\cs{usepackage}[\=xindy,\\
\+\>nonumberlist,\\
  toc,\\
  nopostdot,\\
  style=altlist,\\
  nogroupskip]\{glossaries\}
\end{tabbing}
\end{ttfamily}
}

\renewcommand{\nlctdocmainencap}{}

\makeglossaries

\renewcommand{\importantfmt}{}
\renewcommand{\importantsymbolfont}[1]{\textcolor{red}{\bfseries\Huge#1}}

\newcommand*{\xtrfont}[1]{\textcolor{teal}{#1}}

\newcommand*{\codecomment}[1]{\emph{\rmfamily\color{gray}#1}}

\makeatletter
\@nlctdoc@if@usingtexht
{
  % Need an extra line break in the html version
  % (Don't have time to fiddle with cfg files!)
  \renewcommand*{\glossentry}[2]{%
    \item[\glsentryitem{#1}\glstarget{#1}{\glossentryname{#1}}]\mbox{}\newline
      \glossentrydesc{#1}\glspostdescription\space #2\newline}%
  \newcommand*{\htmldoc}[2]{\href{#2.html}{\qt{#1}}}
  \newcommand{\glsxtrnote}{\HCode{<br/><span style="float: left; font-size: small; border: solid 2px green; margin-right: 1em; ">}\gls{glossaries-extra}\HCode{</span>}}
  \newcommand{\bibglsnote}{\HCode{<span style="float: left; font-size: small; border: solid 2px green; margin-right: 1em;">}\gls{bib2gls}\HCode{</span>}}
  \newenvironment{xtr}%
   {\par
    \HCode{<div title="glossaries-extra.sty" style="border: solid 2pt green;">}}%
   {\HCode{</div>}\par\noindent}
  \newenvironment{bib2gls}%
   {\par
    \HCode{<div title="bib2gls" style="border: solid 2pt green;">}}%
   {\HCode{</div>}\par\noindent}

  \newcommand{\commandpromptnote}{}
  \newcommand{\maincommandpromptnote}{}
  \newenvironment{important*}{\begin{important}\importantpar}{\end{important}}
  \renewcommand{\S}{\HCode{&\#167;}}
  \newcommand{\strong}[1]{\HCode{<strong>}#1\HCode{</strong>}}
  \newcommand*{\linkanchor}[1]{\HCode{<a title="anchor" style="font-size: x-small; text-decoration: none;" href="\##1">&\#128279;</a>}}
}
{
  \externaldocument{glossaries-code}
  \renewcommand{\idxmarker}{\textsuperscript{\xtrfont{\textdagger}}}
  \newcommand*{\htmldoc}[2]{\qt{#1}}
  \newcommand{\glsxtrnote}{%
    \leavevmode\marginpar{\glslink{glossaries-extra}{\xtrfont{\footnotesize\styfmt{glossaries-extra.sty}}}}%
  }
  \newcommand{\bibglsnote}{%
    \leavevmode\marginpar{{\footnotesize\glslink{bib2gls}{\xtrfont{\appfmt{bib2gls}}}}}%
  }
  \newenvironment{xtr}[1][\glsxtrnote]%
   {%
     \def\xtrmarginnote{#1}%
     \setlength{\fboxrule}{4pt}%
     \setlength\defwidth{\linewidth}%
     \addtolength\defwidth{-2\fboxsep}%
     \addtolength\defwidth{-2\fboxrule}%
     \begin{lrbox}{\defsbox}%
      \begin{minipage}[t]{\defwidth}%
      \setlength\parindent{1em}%
      \noindent\ignorespaces
   }%
   {%
      \end{minipage}%
     \end{lrbox}%
     \par\vskip10pt\noindent
     \xtrmarginnote
     \fcolorbox{teal}{white}{\usebox{\defsbox}}\par\vskip10pt
     \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
   }
  \newenvironment{bib2gls}{\begin{xtr}[\bibglsnote]}{\end{xtr}}
  \newcommand{\commandpromptnote}{The \texttt{\bfseries\$} symbol in the instructions
  indicates the command prompt. It should be omitted when copying the text. }
  \newcommand{\maincommandpromptnote}{The command prompt is indicated with
  \texttt{\bfseries\$} in this documentation. Don't type that character when 
  copying examples. }

  \def\verbatim@font{\MacroFont}

  \newenvironment{important*}%
  {%
     \renewcommand{\importantsymbolfont}[1]{\textcolor{red}{\bfseries\huge##1}}%
     \begin{important}\importantpar[-2][-1ex]%
  }%
  {\end{important}}
  \newcommand{\strong}{\textbf}
  \newcommand{\linkanchor}[1]{}
}
\renewcommand*{\@isty}[1]{\index{#1 package=\styfmt{#1}
  package|hyperpage}}
\renewcommand*{\s@isty}[1]{\index{#1 package=\doidxmarker\styfmt{#1}
  package|hyperpage}} 
\renewcommand*{\@icls}[1]{\index{#1 class=\clsfmt{#1}
  class|hyperpage}}
\renewcommand*{\s@icls}[1]{\index{#1 class=\doidxmarker\clsfmt{#1}
  class|hyperpage}}

\renewrobustcmd*{\iterm}[1]{\index{#1|hyperpage}}

\makeatother
\renewcommand*{\main}[1]{\hyperpage{#1}}
\newcommand*{\htextbf}[1]{\textbf{\hyperpage{#1}}}
\newcommand*{\itermdef}[1]{\index{#1|htextbf}}

\newcommand{\itempar}[1]{\item[{#1}]\mbox{}\par}

\newcommand{\Index}[1]{#1\index{#1|hyperpage}}

\newcommand{\xtrpkgoptdef}[1]{\hypertarget{pkgopt:#1}{\pkgopt*{#1}}}
\newcommand{\pkgoptdef}[1]{\hypertarget{pkgopt:#1}{\pkgopt{#1}}}
\newcommand{\deppkgoptdef}[1]{\hypertarget{pkgopt:#1}{\deprecatedpkgopt{#1}}}

\newcommand{\pkgoptsec}[2][]{%
  \pdfbookmark[2]{#2}{pkgopt.#2}
  \ifstrempty{#1}%
  {\subsection*{\protect\pkgoptdef{#2}}}%
  {\subsection*{\protect\pkgoptdef{#2}\pkgoptfmt{=\protect\marg{#1}}}}%
}

\newcommand{\deppkgoptsec}[2][]{%
  \pdfbookmark[2]{#2}{pkgopt.#2}
  \ifstrempty{#1}%
  {\subsection*{\protect\deppkgoptdef{#2}}}%
  {\subsection*{\protect\deppkgoptdef{#2}\pkgoptfmt{=\marg{#1}}}}%
}

\newcommand{\xtrpkgoptsec}[2][]{%
  \pdfbookmark[2]{#2 (glossaries-extra.sty)}{pkgopt.#2}
  \ifstrempty{#1}%
  {\subsection*{\protect\xtrfont{\protect\xtrpkgoptdef{#2} (glossaries-extra.sty)}}}%
  {\subsection*{\protect\xtrfont{\protect\xtrpkgoptdef{#2}\pkgoptfmt{=\protect\marg{#1}} 
     (glossaries-extra.sty)}}}%
}

\newcommand{\glslike}{\hyperref[sec:gls-like]{\cs{gls}-like}}
\newcommand{\glstextlike}{\hyperref[sec:glstext-like]{\cs{glstext}-like}}

\newcommand{\gallery}[2]{\href{https://www.dickimaw-books.com/gallery/#1}{#2}}
\newcommand{\galleryurl}[1]{\gallery{#1}{\nolinkurl{https://www.dickimaw-books.com/gallery/#1}}}
\newcommand{\gallerytopic}[1]{\gallery{\##1}{\styfmt{#1} gallery}}

\newcommand*{\bibglsgallery}[2][\gallerytitle]{%
 \def\gallerytitle{#2}%
 \gallery{index.php?label=bib2gls-#2}{\appfmt{bib2gls} gallery: \gallerytitle}}

\newcommand*{\bibglsbegin}{%
 \href{http://mirrors.ctan.org/support/bib2gls/bib2gls-begin.pdf}{\styfmt{glossaries-extra} and \appfmt{bib2gls}: An Introductory Guide}}

\IndexPrologue{\chapter*{\indexname}
 \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}%
 \markboth{\indexname}{\indexname}
 \par\idxmarker Requires \gls{glossaries-extra}.
}

\longnewglossaryentry{indexingapp}%
{
  name={Indexing application},
  text={indexing application}
}%
{%
  An application (piece of software) separate from
  \TeX/\LaTeX\ that collates and sorts information that has an
  associated page reference. Generally the information is an index
  entry but in this case the information is a glossary entry.
  There are two main indexing applications that are used with \TeX:
  \gls{makeindex} and \gls{xindy}. These are both 
  \gls{cli} applications.
}

\longnewglossaryentry{cli}
{
  name={Command Line Interface (CLI)},
  first={command line interface (CLI)},
  text={CLI}
}
{%
  An application that doesn't have a graphical user
  interface. That is, an application that doesn't have any windows,
  buttons or menus and can be run in 
  \href{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/novices/html/terminal.html}{a command
  prompt or terminal}. \maincommandpromptnote
}

\longnewglossaryentry{xindy}{%
  name={\appfmt{xindy}\index{xindy=\appfmt{xindy}|htextbf}},
  sort={xindy},
  text={\appfmt{xindy}\iapp{xindy}}
}%
{%
  A flexible \gls{indexingapp} with multilingual
  support written in Perl. See \opt3.
}

\newglossaryentry{makeindex}{%
name={\appfmt{makeindex}\index{makeindex=\appfmt{makeindex}|htextbf}},%
sort={makeindex},%
text={\appfmt{makeindex}\iapp{makeindex}},%
description={An \gls{indexingapp}. See \opt2.}
}

\newglossaryentry{bib2gls}{%
name={\appfmt{bib2gls}\index{bib2gls=\doidxmarker\appfmt{bib2gls}|htextbf}},%
sort={bib2gls},%
text={\appfmt{bib2gls}\iapp*{bib2gls}},%
description={An \gls{indexingapp} that combines two functions in
one: (1) fetches entry definition from a \filetype{bib} file
based on information provided in the \filetype{aux} file (similar
to \appfmt{bibtex}); (2) hierarchically sorts and collates location
lists (similar to \gls{makeindex} and \gls{xindy}).
This application is designed for use with \gls{glossaries-extra}
and can't be used with just the base \styfmt{glossaries} package.
See \opt4.}
}

\newglossaryentry{convertgls2bib}{%
name={\appfmt{convertgls2bib}\index{convertgls2bib=\doidxmarker\appfmt{convertgls2bib}|htextbf}},%
sort={convertgls2bib},%
text={\appfmt{convertgls2bib}\iapp*{convertgls2bib}},%
description={An application provided with \gls{bib2gls} that
converts \filetype{tex} files containing entry definitions to
\filetype{bib} files suitable for use with \gls{bib2gls}.
This application is designed for files that just contain entry
definitions, but it can work on a complete document file.
However, there will be a lot of \qt{undefined command} warnings as
\gls{convertgls2bib} only has a limited set of known commands. You
can limit it so that it only parses the preamble with the
\texttt{-{}-preamble-only} switch (requires at least \gls{bib2gls}
v2.0).}
}

\newglossaryentry{makeglossaries}{%
name={\appfmt{makeglossaries}\index{makeglossaries=\appfmt{makeglossaries}|htextbf}},%
sort={makeglossaries},%
text={\appfmt{makeglossaries}\iapp{makeglossaries}},%
description={A custom designed Perl script interface 
to \gls{xindy} and \gls{makeindex} provided with the \styfmt{glossaries}
package. \TeX\ distributions on Windows convert the original
\texttt{makeglossaries} script into an executable
\texttt{makeglossaries.exe} for convenience (but Perl is still
required).}
}

\newglossaryentry{makeglossaries-lite.lua}{%
name={\appfmt{makeglossaries-lite}\index{makeglossaries-lite=\appfmt{makeglossaries-lite}|htextbf}},%
sort={makeglossaries-lite},%
text={\appfmt{makeglossaries-lite}\iapp{makeglossaries-lite}},%
description={A custom designed Lua script interface 
to \gls{xindy} and \gls{makeindex} provided with the \styfmt{glossaries}
package. This is a cut-down alternative to the Perl
\gls{makeglossaries} script. If you have Perl installed, use the
Perl script instead. This script is actually distributed with the
file name \texttt{makeglossaries-lite.lua}, but \TeX~Live 
(on Unix-like systems) creates a symbolic link
called \texttt{makeglossaries-lite} (without the \texttt{.lua}
extension) to the actual \texttt{makeglossaries-lite.lua} script.}
}

\longnewglossaryentry{makeglossariesgui}{%
name={\appfmt{makeglossariesgui}\index{makeglossariesgui=\appfmt{makeglossariesgui}|htextbf}},%
sort={makeglossariesgui},%
text={\appfmt{makeglossariesgui}\iapp{makeglossariesgui}}%
}%
{%
  A Java GUI alternative to \gls{makeglossaries} that
  also provides diagnostic tools. Available separately on 
  \href{http://ctan.org/pkg/makeglossariesgui}{CTAN}.
}

\newglossaryentry{numberlist}{%
name={Number list\itermdef{number list}},%
sort={number list},%
text={number list\iterm{number list}},%
description={A list of \glslink{entrylocation}{entry locations} (also 
called a location list). The number list can be suppressed using the 
\pkgopt{nonumberlist} package option.}
}

\newglossaryentry{entrylocation}{%
name={Entry location\itermdef{entry location}},%
sort={entry location},%
text={entry location\iterm{entry location}},%
description={The location of the entry in the document. This
defaults to the page number on which the entry appears. An entry may
have multiple locations.}
}

\newglossaryentry{locationlist}{%
name={Location list},%
text={location list},
sort={location list},%
description={A list of \glslink{entrylocation}{entry locations}.
See \gls{numberlist}.}%
}

\newglossaryentry{linktext}{%
name={Link text\itermdef{link text}},
sort={link text},%
text={link text\iterm{link text}},
description={The text produced by commands such as \ics{gls}. It may
or may not be a hyperlink to the glossary.}
}

\newglossaryentry{smallcaps}{%
  name={Small caps\itermdef{small caps}},
  sort={small caps},
  text={small caps\iterm{small caps}},
  description={Small capitals. The \LaTeX\ kernel provides
  \ics{textsc}\marg{text} to produce small capitals. This uses a
  font where lowercase letters have a small capital design.
  Uppercase letters have the standard height and there's no
  noticeable difference with uppercase characters in corresponding non-small caps fonts.  
  This means that for a small caps appearance, you need to use lowercase letters in the
  \meta{text} argument. The \isty{relsize} package provides
  \ics{textsmaller}\marg{text} which simulates small caps by reducing the size
  of the font, so in this case the contents of \meta{text} should be
  uppercase (otherwise the effect is simply smaller lowercase
  letters). Some fonts don't support small caps combined with bold or slanted
  properties. In this case, there will be a font substitution
  warning and one of the properties (such as small caps or slanted) will be
  dropped.}
}

\let\glsd\glsuseri
\let\glsation\glsuserii

\longnewglossaryentry{firstuse}{%
name={First use\ifirstuse},
sort={first use},%
text={first use},%
user1={first used}}
{%
  The first time a glossary entry is used (from the start of the 
  document or after a reset) with one of the
  following commands: \ics{gls}, \ics{Gls}, \ics{GLS}, \ics{glspl},
  \ics{Glspl}, \ics{GLSpl} or \ics{glsdisp}.
  \glsseeformat{firstuseflag,firstusetext}{}
}

\longnewglossaryentry{firstuseflag}{%
name={First use flag\ifirstuseflag},
sort={first use flag},%
text={first use flag}%
}
{%
  A conditional that determines whether or not the entry
  has been used according to the rules of \gls{firstuse}. Commands
  to unset or reset this conditional are described in 
  \sectionref{sec:glsunset}.
}

\newglossaryentry{firstusetext}{%
name={First use text\ifirstusetext},
sort={first use text},%
text={first use text},%
description={The text that is displayed on \gls{firstuse}, which is
governed by the \gloskey{first} and \gloskey{firstplural} keys of
\ics{newglossaryentry}. (May be overridden by
\ics{glsdisp} or by \ics{defglsentry}.)}%
}

\longnewglossaryentry{sanitize}{%
name={Sanitize\itermdef{sanitize}},%
sort={sanitize},
text={sanitize\iterm{sanitize}},%
user1={sanitized\protect\iterm{sanitize}},%
user2={sanitization\protect\iterm{sanitize}}%
}%
{%
  Converts command names into character sequences. That is, a command called,
  say, \cs{foo}, is converted into the sequence of characters:
  \cs{}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{o}, \texttt{o}. Depending on the font,
  the backslash character may appear as a dash when used in the
  main document text, so \cs{foo} will appear as: ---foo.

  Earlier versions of \styfmt{glossaries} used this technique to write
  information to the files used by the indexing applications to
  prevent problems caused by fragile commands. Now, this is only used
  for the \gloskey{sort} key.
}

\newglossaryentry{latinchar}{%
  name={Latin Character\itermdef{Latin character}},
  text={Latin character\iterm{Latin character}},
  sort={Latin character},
  description={One of the letters \texttt{a}, \ldots, \texttt{z}, 
  \texttt{A}, \ldots, \texttt{Z}\@.
  See also \gls{exlatinchar}.}
}

\newglossaryentry{exlatinchar}{%
  name={Extended Latin Character\itermdef{extended Latin character}},
  text={extended Latin character\iterm{extended Latin character}},
  sort={extended Latin character},
  description={A character that's created by combining \glspl{latinchar}
  to form ligatures (e.g.\ \ae) or by applying diacritical marks
  to a~\gls*{latinchar} or characters (e.g.\ \'a). 
  See also \gls{nonlatinchar}.}
}

\newglossaryentry{latexexlatinchar}{%
  name={Standard \LaTeX\ Extended Latin Character\itermdef{standard
\LaTeX\ extended Latin character}},
  text={standard \LaTeX\ extended Latin character\iterm{standard
\LaTeX\ extended Latin character}},
  sort={standard LaTeX extended Latin character},
  description={An \gls{exlatinchar} that can be created by a~core
\LaTeX\ command, such as \cs{o} (\o) or \cs{'}\texttt{e} (\'e). 
  That is, the character can be produced without the need to load 
  a~particular package.}
}

\newglossaryentry{nonlatinchar}{%
  name={Non-Latin Character\itermdef{non-Latin character}},
  text={non-Latin character\iterm{non-Latin character}},
  sort={non-Latin character},
  description={An \gls{exlatinchar} or a~character that isn't
  a~\gls{latinchar}.}
}

\newglossaryentry{latinalph}{%
  name={Latin Alphabet\itermdef{Latin alphabet}},
  text={Latin alphabet\iterm{Latin alphabet}},
  sort={Latin alphabet},
  description={The alphabet consisting of \glspl{latinchar}.
  See also \gls{exlatinalph}.}
}

\newglossaryentry{exlatinalph}{%
  name={Extended Latin Alphabet\itermdef{Extended Latin Alphabet}},
  text={extended Latin alphabet},
  sort={extended Latin alphabet},
  description={An alphabet consisting of \glspl{latinchar}
  and \glspl{exlatinchar}.}
}

\newglossaryentry{nonlatinalph}{%
  name={Non-Latin Alphabet\itermdef{Non-Latin Alphabet}},
  text={non-Latin alphabet},
  sort={non-Latin alphabet},
  description={An alphabet consisting of \glspl{nonlatinchar}.}
}

\newglossaryentry{UTF-8}{%
  name={UTF-8\itermdef{UTF-8}},
  text={UTF-8},
  sort={UTF-8},
  description={A variable-width character encoding. This means that
some characters are represented by more that one byte. \XeLaTeX\ and
\LuaLaTeX\ treat the multi-byte sequence as a single token, but the
older \LaTeX\ formats have single-byte tokens, which causes
complications. Related blog article: \href{https://www.dickimaw-books.com/blog/binary-files-text-files-and-file-encodings/}{Binary Files, Text Files and File Encodings}.}
}

\newglossaryentry{glossaries-extra}{%
  name={\styfmt{glossaries-extra}},
  sort={glossaries-extra},
  description={A separate package that extends the
  \styfmt{glossaries} package, providing new features or improving
  existing features. If you want to use \styfmt{glossaries-extra}, 
  you must have both the \styfmt{glossaries} package and the 
  \styfmt{glossaries-extra} package installed.}
}


\doxitem{Option}{option}{package options}
\doxitem{GlsKey}{key}{glossary keys}
\doxitem{Style}{style}{glossary styles}
\doxitem{Counter}{counter}{glossary counters}

\setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}

\newcommand*{\tick}{\ding{51}}

\newcommand*{\yes}{\ding{52}}
\newcommand*{\no}{\ding{56}}

\newcommand*{\proyes}{\textcolor{green}{\yes}}
\newcommand*{\prono}{\textcolor{red}{\no}}

\newcommand*{\conyes}{\textcolor{red}{\yes}}
\newcommand*{\conno}{\textcolor{green}{\no}}

\makeatletter
\newcommand{\fnsymmark}[1]{#1}
\newcommand*{\fnsym}[1]{\textsuperscript{\fnsymmark{%
 \ifcase#1\or \textasteriskcentered \or \textdagger
 \or \textdaggerdbl \or \textsection
 \or $\lozenge$\or \textparagraph
 \or \#\or {\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\textreferencemark}%
 \or \@nlctdoc@if@usingtexht{\HCode{&\#x2051;}}{\shortstack{*\\[-1.5ex]*}}%
 \or $\star$%
 \or \ding{94}%
 \else
 \number#1
 \fi
}}}%
\newrobustcmd*{\optionlabel}[1]{\@glstarget{option#1}{Option~#1}}

\newcommand*{\plabel}[2][]{\linkanchor{#2}\protected@edef\@currentlabelname{#1}\label{#2}}
\makeatother

\newcounter{option}
\newcommand{\optionsec}[2][\opttitle]{%
 \def\opttitle{\appfmt{#2}}%
 \refstepcounter{option}%
 \pdfbookmark[2]{Option~\theoption\space (#2)}{option\theoption}%
 \subsection*{\linkanchor{option\theoption}\optionlabel{\theoption} (#1)}%
}

\newcommand*{\opt}[1]{\hyperlink{option#1}{Option~#1}}
\newcommand*{\optsor}[2]{Options~\hyperlink{option#1}{#1}
or~\hyperlink{option#2}{#2}}
\newcommand*{\optsand}[2]{Options~\hyperlink{option#1}{#1}
and~\hyperlink{option#2}{#2}}
\newcommand*{\optsto}[2]{Options~\hyperlink{option#1}{#1}--\hyperlink{option#2}{#2}}

\renewcommand*{\idxmarkedfont}{\xtrfont}

\newcommand*{\ifirstuse}{\iterm{first use}}
\newcommand*{\ifirstuseflag}{\iterm{first use>flag}}
\newcommand*{\ifirstusetext}{\iterm{first use>text}}

\newcommand*{\firstuse}{\gls{firstuse}}
\newcommand*{\firstuseflag}{\gls{firstuseflag}}
\newcommand*{\firstusetext}{\gls{firstusetext}}


\newcommand*{\istkey}[1]{\appfmt{#1}\index{makeindex=\appfmt{makeindex}>#1=\texttt{#1}|hyperpage}}
\newcommand*{\locfmt}[1]{\texttt{#1}\SpecialMainIndex{#1}}
\newcommand*{\mkidxspch}{\index{makeindex=\appfmt{makeindex}>special characters|hyperpage}}

\newcommand*{\mkidxopt}[1]{\texttt{-#1}\index{makeindex=\appfmt{makeindex}>#1=\texttt{-#1}|hyperpage}}

\newcommand*{\xdyopt}[1]{\texttt{-#1}\index{xindy=\appfmt{xindy}>#1=\texttt{-#1}|hyperpage}}

\newcommand*{\mkglsopt}[1]{\texttt{-#1}\index{makeglossaries=\appfmt{makeglossaries}>#1=\texttt{-#1}|hyperpage}}

\newcommand*{\bibglsopt}[1]{\xtrfont{\texttt{-{}#1}}\index{bib2gls=\doidxmarker\appfmt{bib2gls}>#1=\texttt{-{}#1}|hyperpage}}
\newcommand*{\bibglslongopt}[1]{\bibglsopt{-#1}}

\renewcommand{\csoptfmt}{\texttt}

\newcommand*{\igloskey}[2][newglossaryentry]{\icsopt{#1}{#2}}
\newcommand*{\gloskey}[2][newglossaryentry]{\csopt{#1}{#2}}

\newcommand*{\ixtrgloskey}[2][newglossaryentry]{\icsopt*{#1}{#2}}
\newcommand*{\xtrgloskey}[2][newglossaryentry]{\xtrfont{\csopt*{#1}{#2}}}

\newcommand*{\printglosskey}[2][]{\icsopt{printglossary}{#2}%
 \ifstrempty{#1}{\csoptfmt{#2}}{\csoptfmt{#2=#1}}%
}

\newcommand*{\printnoidxglosskey}[2][]{\icsopt{printnoidxglossary}{#2}%
 \ifstrempty{#1}{\csoptfmt{#2}}{\csoptfmt{#2=#1}}%
}

\newcommand*{\xtrprintglosskey}[2][]{\icsopt*{printglossary}{#2}%
 \xtrfont{\ifstrempty{#1}{\csoptfmt{#2}}{\csoptfmt{#2=#1}}}%
}

\newcommand*{\iresourceopt}[1]{\icsopt+{GlsXtrLoadResources}{#1}}
\newcommand*{\resourceopt}[2][]{%
  \xtrfont{\csoptfmt{#2}}\ifstrempty{#1}{}{\csoptfmt{\dequals#1}}%
  \icsopt+{GlsXtrLoadResources}{#2}%
}

\newcommand*{\atentry}[1]{\xtrfont{\texttt{@#1}}%
  \index{bib2gls entry types=\doidxmarker\appfmt{bib2gls} entry types>#1=\texttt{@#1}|hyperpage}}

\newcommand*{\xtrcs}[1]{\xtrfont{\cs{#1}}}

\newcommand*{\field}[1]{\csoptfmt{#1}\index{internal fields:>#1=\protect\csoptfmt{#1}|main}}
\newcommand*{\xtrfield}[1]{\xtrfont{\csoptfmt{#1}}\index{internal fields:>#1=\doidxmarker\protect\csoptfmt{#1}|main}}

\newcommand*{\glostyle}[1]{\textsf{#1}\index{glossary styles:>#1={\protect\ttfamily#1}|main}}

\newcommand*{\xtrglostyle}[1]{\xtrfont{\textsf{#1}}\index{glossary styles:>#1=\doidxmarker{\protect\ttfamily#1}|main}}

\newcommand*{\acrstyle}[1]{\textsf{#1}\index{acronym styles:>#1={\protect\ttfamily#1}|main}}
\newcommand*{\abbrstyle}[1]{\xtrfont{\textsf{#1}}\index{abbreviation styles:=\doidxmarker abbreviation styles:>#1={\protect\ttfamily#1}|main}}
\newcommand*{\cat}[1]{\xtrfont{\textsf{#1}}\index{categories=\doidxmarker categories>#1={\protect\ttfamily#1}|main}}

\makeatletter
\@nlctdoc@if@usingtexht
{
  \newcommand*{\icatattrs}[1][]{\index{category attributes=\doidxmarker category attributes#1|main}}
  \newcommand*{\ixindyattrs}[1][]{\index{xindy attributes=xindy attributes#1|main}}
  \index{attributes|see{category attributes or xindy attributes}}
}
{
\newcommand{\icatattrs}[1][]{\index{category attributes=\protect\doidxmarker\protect\glsdohypertarget{catattr}{category attributes}:#1|main}}

\newcommand*{\ixindyattrs}[1][]{\index{xindy attributes=\protect\glsdohypertarget{xindyattr}{xindy attributes}#1|main}}

\index{attributes|see{\protect\hyperlink{catattr}{category attributes} (\styfmt{glossaries-extra}) or \protect\hyperlink{xindyattr}{xindy attributes}\protect\hfill}}
}

\makeatletter

\newcommand*{\optfmt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
\newcommand*{\attr}[1]{\xtrfont{\optfmt{#1}}\icatattrs[>#1=\optfmt{#1}]{}}
\newcommand*{\xindyattr}[1]{\texttt{#1}\ixindyattrs[>#1=\texttt{#1}]{}}

\newrobustcmd{\mirrorsamplefile}[1]{%
 \href{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries/samples/#1}{\nolinkurl{#1}}%
}

\newcounter{sample}
\newcommand{\exitem}[2][sample]{%
  \par
  \pdfbookmark[2]{#1#2.tex}{exfile.#1#2}%
  \refstepcounter{sample}%
  \subsection*{\plabel[#1#2.tex]{ex:#1#2}\mirrorsamplefile{#1#2.tex}}%
}

\newcommand*{\samplefile}[2][sample]{%
  \hyperref[ex:#1#2]{\texttt{#1#2.tex}}}


\begin{document}
\MakeShortVerb{"}
\DeleteShortVerb{\|}

 \title{User Manual for glossaries.sty v4.49}
 \author{Nicola L.C. Talbot\\%
  \href{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/contact}{\nolinkurl{dickimaw-books.com/contact}}}

 \date{2021-11-01}
 \maketitle

\begin{abstract}
The \styfmt{glossaries} package provides a means to define terms or
abbreviations or symbols that can be referenced within your document.
Sorted lists with collated \glslink{entrylocation}{locations} can be 
generated either using \TeX\ or using a supplementary \gls{indexingapp}.
Sample documents are provided with the \styfmt{glossaries} package.
These are listed in \sectionref{sec:samples}.
\end{abstract}

\begin{xtr}
Additional features not provided here may be available through
the extension package \gls{glossaries-extra} which, if required,
needs to be installed separately. New features will be added to
\gls*{glossaries-extra}. Versions of the \styfmt{glossaries}
package after v4.21 will mostly be just bug fixes or minor
maintenance. Note that \gls{glossaries-extra} provides an extra indexing option
(\gls{bib2gls}) which isn't available with just the base \styfmt{glossaries} package.
\end{xtr}

If you require multilingual support you must also separately install 
the relevant language module. Each language module is distributed
under the name \texttt{glossaries-}\meta{language}, where \meta{language} is the
root language name. For example, \texttt{glossaries-french}
or \texttt{glossaries-german}. If a language module is required,
the \styfmt{glossaries} package will automatically try to load it and
will give a warning if the module isn't found. See
\sectionref{sec:languages} for further details.
If there isn't any support available for your language, use
the \pkgopt{nolangwarn} package option to suppress the warning
and provide your own translations. (For example, use
the \gloskey[printglossary]{title} key in \cs{printglossary}.)

The \styfmt{glossaries} package requires a number of other packages
including, but not limited to, \sty{tracklang}, \sty{mfirstuc},
\sty{etoolbox},
\sty{xkeyval} (at least version dated 2006/11/18), \sty{textcase},
\sty{xfor}, \sty{datatool-base} (part of the \sty{datatool} bundle) and \sty{amsgen}. These
packages are all available in the latest \TeX~Live and Mik\TeX\
distributions. If any of them are missing, please update your
\TeX\ distribution using your update manager.
For help on this see, for example,
\href{http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/55437/how-do-i-update-my-tex-distribution}{How
do I update my \TeX\ distribution?}
or (for Linux users)
\href{http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/14925/updating-tex-on-linux}{Updating
\TeX\ on Linux}.

Note that occasionally you may find that certain packages need to be
loaded \emph{after} packages that are required by \styfmt{glossaries}. For
example, a package \meta{X} might need to be loaded after \sty{amsgen}. In
which case, load the required package first (for example,
\sty{amsgen}), then \meta{X}, and finally load \styfmt{glossaries}.

\begin{important}
Documents have wide-ranging styles when it comes to presenting glossaries
or lists of terms or notation. People have their own preferences and
to a large extent this is determined by the kind of information that
needs to go in the glossary. They may just have symbols with
terse descriptions or they may have long technical words with
complicated descriptions. The \styfmt{glossaries} package is
flexible enough to accommodate such varied requirements, but this
flexibility comes at a price: a~big manual.

\aargh\ If you're freaking out at the size of this manual, start with
\texttt{glossariesbegin.pdf} (\qt{The glossaries package: a guide
for beginnners}). You should find it in the same directory as this
document or try \texttt{texdoc glossariesbegin.pdf}. Once you've got
to grips with the basics, then come back to this manual to find out
how to adjust the settings.
\end{important}

\noindent
The \styfmt{glossaries} bundle includes the following documentation:
\begin{description}
\item[\url{glossariesbegin.pdf}] 
If you are a complete beginner, start with 
\htmldoc{The glossaries package: a guide for
beginners}{glossariesbegin}.

\item[glossaries-user.pdf]
This document is the main user guide for the \styfmt{glossaries}
package.

\item[\url{glossaries-code.pdf}]
Advanced users wishing to know more about the inner workings of all the
packages provided in the \styfmt{glossaries} bundle should read
\qt{Documented Code for glossaries v4.49}.

\item[CHANGES] Change log.

\item[README.md] Package summary.

\end{description}
Related resources:
\begin{itemize}
\item \bibglsbegin.

\item \href{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/faqs/glossariesfaq.html}{\styfmt{glossaries}
FAQ}

\item \gallerytopic{glossaries}

\item
\gallery{glossaries-styles/}{a summary of all glossary styles provided by \styfmt{glossaries} and
\gls*{glossaries-extra}}

\item
\gallery{glossaries-performance.shtml}{\styfmt{glossaries}
performance} (comparing document build times for the different
options provided by \styfmt{glossaries} and \gls{glossaries-extra}).

\item \href{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/thesis/}{Using LaTeX to Write a PhD Thesis}
(chapter 6).

\item
\href{https://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/buildglossaries/}{Incorporating makeglossaries or makeglossaries-lite or bib2gls into the document build}

\item The
\href{http://ctan.org/pkg/glossaries-extra}{\styfmt{glossaries-extra} package}

\item \href{http://ctan.org/pkg/bib2gls}{\appfmt{bib2gls}}
\end{itemize}

\begin{important*}
If you use \sty{hyperref} and \styfmt{glossaries}, you must load
\sty{hyperref} \emph{first} (although \sty{hyperref} should be
loaded after most other packages). Similarly the \sty{doc} package must
also be loaded before \styfmt{glossaries}. (If \sty{doc} is loaded,
the file extensions for the default main glossary are changed to
\filetype{gls2}, \filetype{glo2} and \filetype{glg2} to avoid
conflict with \sty{doc}'s changes
glossary.)\hypertarget{pdflatexnote}{}%

If you are using \sty{hyperref}, it's best to use \app{pdflatex}
rather than \app{latex} (DVI format) as \appfmt{pdflatex} deals with
hyperlinks much better. If you use the DVI format, you will
encounter problems where you have long hyperlinks or hyperlinks in
subscripts or superscripts. This is an issue with the DVI format not
with \styfmt{glossaries}. If you really need to use the DVI format
and have a problem with hyperlinks in maths mode, I recommend you use
\gls{glossaries-extra} with the \attr{hyperoutside} and
\attr{textformat} attributes set to appropriate values 
for problematic entries.
\end{important*}

\strong{The \styfmt{glossaries} package replaces the \styfmt{glossary}
package which is now obsolete.} Please see the document
\qtdocref{Upgrading from the glossary package to the glossaries
package}{glossary2glossaries} for assistance in upgrading.

\clearpage
\pdfbookmark[0]{Contents}{contents}
\tableofcontents
\clearpage
\pdfbookmark[0]{List of Examples}{examples}
\listofexamples
\clearpage
\pdfbookmark[0]{List of Tables}{tables}
\listoftables

\clearpage
\printglossaries

\glsresetall

 \chapter{Introduction}
\label{sec:intro}

The \styfmt{glossaries} package is provided to assist generating
lists of terms, symbols or abbreviations. (For convenience, these
lists are all referred to as glossaries in this manual. The terms,
symbols and abbreviations are collectively referred to as entries.) 
The package has a certain amount of flexibility, allowing the
user to customize the format of the glossary and define multiple
glossaries. It also supports glossary styles that
include an associated symbol (in addition to a name and description)
for each glossary entry.

There is provision for loading a database of glossary entries. Only
those entries indexed\footnote{That is, if the entry has been
referenced using any of the commands described in
\sectionref{sec:glslink} and \sectionref{sec:glsadd} or via
\ics{glssee} (or the \gloskey{see} key) or commands such as
\ics{acrshort} or \ics*{glsxtrshort}.}\ in the document will be displayed in the glossary.
(Unless you use \opt5, which doesn't use any indexing but will
instead list all defined entries in order of definition.)

It's not necessary to actually have a glossary in the document. You may be
interested in using this package just as means to consistently
format certain types of terms, such as abbreviations, or you may
prefer to have descriptions scattered about the document and be able
to easily link to the relevant description (\opt6).

The simplest document is one without a glossary:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage[
  sort=none % no sorting or indexing required
]
{glossaries}

\newglossaryentry
 {cafe}% label
 {% definition:
   name={caf\'e},
   description={small restaurant selling refreshments}
 }

\setacronymstyle{long-short}

\newacronym
 {html}% label
 {HTML}% short form
 {hypertext markup language}% long form

\newglossaryentry
 {pi}% label
 {% definition:
   name={\ensuremath{\pi}},
   description={Archimedes' Constant}
 }

\newglossaryentry
 {distance}% label
 {% definition:
   name={distance},
   description={the length between two points},
   symbol={m}
 }

\begin{document}
First use: \gls{cafe}, \gls{html}, \gls{pi}.
Next use: \gls{cafe}, \gls{html}, \gls{pi}.

\Gls{distance} (\glsentrydesc{distance}) is measured in
\glssymbol{distance}.
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}
(This is a trivial example. For a real document I recommend you use
\sty{siunitx} for units.)

\glsxtrnote
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package, which is distributed as a
separate bundle, extends the capabilities of
the \styfmt{glossaries} package. The simplest document with a glossary can be
created with \gls{glossaries-extra} (which internally loads the
\styfmt{glossaries} package):
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}
\end{verbatim}
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[
 sort=none,% no sorting or indexing required
 \xtrfont{abbreviations},% create list of abbreviations
 symbols,% create list of symbols
 \xtrfont{postdot}, % append a full stop after the descriptions
 \xtrfont{stylemods},style=index % set the default glossary style
]\mgroup{glossaries-extra}
\end{alltt}
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry % provided by glossaries.sty
 {cafe}% label
 {% definition:
   name={caf\'e},
   description={small restaurant selling refreshments}
 }
\end{verbatim}
\begin{alltt}
\% provided by glossaries-extra.sty:
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}\mgroup{long-short}

\ics*{newabbreviation} \% provided by glossaries-extra.sty
 \mgroup{html}\% label
 \mgroup{HTML}\% short form
 \mgroup{hypertext markup language}\% long form

\% provided by glossaries-extra.sty 'symbols' option:
\ics*{glsxtrnewsymbol} 
 [description=\mgroup{Archimedes' constant}]\% options
 \mgroup{pi}\% label
 \mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{pi}}}\% symbol
\end{alltt}
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry % provided by glossaries.sty
 {distance}% label
 {% definition:
   name={distance},
   description={the length between two points},
   symbol={m}
 }

\begin{document}
First use: \gls{cafe}, \gls{html}, \gls{pi}.
Next use: \gls{cafe}, \gls{html}, \gls{pi}.

\Gls{distance} is measured in \glssymbol{distance}.
\end{verbatim}
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{printunsrtglossaries} \% list all defined entries
\cs{end}\mgroup{document}
\end{alltt}
Note the difference in the way the abbreviation (HTML) and symbol
(\ensuremath{\pi}) are defined in the two above examples. The
\pkgopt*{abbreviations}, \pkgopt*{postdot} and \pkgopt*{stylemods}
options are specific to \gls{glossaries-extra}. Other options are
passed to the base \styfmt{glossaries} package.

\begin{xtr}
In this user manual, commands and options displayed in teal, such as
\xtrcs{newabbreviation} and \pkgopt*{stylemods}, are only available with 
the \gls{glossaries-extra} package. There are also some commands and options (such
as \cs{makeglossaries} and \pkgopt{symbols}) that are provided by the
base \styfmt{glossaries} package but are redefined by the
\gls{glossaries-extra} package. See the \gls{glossaries-extra} user
manual for further details of those commands.
\end{xtr}

One of the strengths of the \styfmt{glossaries} package is its flexibility, however
the drawback of this is the necessity of having a large manual
that covers all the various settings. If you are daunted by the
size of the manual, try starting off with the much shorter
\docref{guide for beginners}{glossariesbegin}.

\begin{important}
There's a~common misconception that you have to have Perl installed
in order to use the \styfmt{glossaries} package. Perl is \emph{not}
a~requirement (as demonstrated by the above examples) but it does 
increase the available options, particularly if you use an \gls{exlatinalph} 
or a~\gls{nonlatinalph}.
\end{important}

This document uses the \styfmt{glossaries} package. For example,
when viewing the PDF version of this document in a
hyperlinked-enabled PDF viewer (such as Adobe Reader or Okular) if
you click on the word \qt{\gls{xindy}} you'll be taken to the entry
in the glossary where there's a brief description of
the term \qt{\gls*{xindy}}. This is the way the \styfmt{glossaries}
mechanism works. An \gls{indexingapp} is used to generate the
sorted list of terms. The \glspl{indexingapp} are \gls{cli} tools,
which means they can be run directly from a command prompt or terminal, or can
be integrated into some text editors, or you can use a build tool
such as \app{arara} to run them.

Neither of the above two examples require an \gls{indexingapp}. The
first is just using the \styfmt{glossaries} package for consistent
formatting, and there is no list. The second has lists but they are
unsorted (see \opt5).

The remainder of this introductory section covers the following:
\begin{itemize}
\item \sectionref{sec:indexingoptions} lists the available indexing
options.

\item \sectionref{sec:lipsum} lists the dummy glossary files that
may be used for testing. 

\item \sectionref{sec:languages} provides information for users who
wish to write in a language other than English.

\item \sectionref{sec:makeglossaries} describes how to use an
\gls{indexingapp} to create the sorted glossaries for your document
(\optsor23).

\end{itemize}

There are some sample documents provided with this package. They are
described in \sectionref{sec:samples}.

\section{Rollback}
\label{sec:rollback}

There is one rollback release: v4.46 (2020-03-19) for
\styfmt{glossaries.sty} and \styfmt{glossary-list.sty}.
The other associated packages haven't been changed since that
release (apart from the version numbers, which are always updated
for each new release, regardless of whether or not the file has
otherwise been changed). If you rollback to v4.46 using:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage{glossaries}[=v4.46]
\end{verbatim}
then the 4.46 version of \sty{glossary-list.sty} will automatically be
loaded. If you use \pkgopt{nostyles} and subsequently load
\sty{glossary-list} you will also need to add the rollback version: 
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[nostyles]{glossaries}[=v4.46]
\usepackage{glossary-list}[=v4.46]
\end{verbatim}
If you rollback using \sty{latexrelease} to an earlier date, then
you will need to specify v4.46 for \sty{glossaries} as there are no
earlier rollback versions available.

\section{Indexing Options}
\label{sec:indexingoptions}

The basic idea behind the \styfmt{glossaries} package is that you
first define your entries (terms, symbols or abbreviations). Then
you can reference these within your document (like \cs{cite} or
\cs{ref}).  You can also, optionally, display a~list of the entries
you have referenced in your document (the glossary). This last part,
displaying the glossary, is the part that most new users find
difficult. There are three options available with the base
\styfmt{glossaries} package (\optsto13). The \gls{glossaries-extra} extension
package provides two extra options for lists (\optsand45) as well as an option for
standalone descriptions within the document body (\opt6).

An overview of \optsto15 is given in \tableref{tab:options}.
\opt6 is omitted from the table as it doesn't produce a list.  For a
more detailed comparison of the various methods, see the
\gallery{glossaries-performance.shtml}{\styfmt{glossaries}
performance page}.

\begin{important}
If you are developing a class or package that loads
\styfmt{glossaries}, I recommend that you don't force the user into
a particular indexing method by adding an unconditional \cs{makeglossaries}
into your class or package code. Aside from forcing the user into a
particular indexing method, it means that they're unable to use any
commands that must come before \cs{makeglossaries} (such as
\cs{newglossary}) and they can't switch off the indexing whilst
working on a draft document.
\end{important}

Strictly speaking, \optsand56 aren't actually indexing options as no
indexing is performed. In the case of \opt5, all defined entries are
listed in order of definition. In the case of \opt6, the entry
hypertargets and descriptions are manually inserted at appropriate
points in the document. These two options are included here for
completeness and for comparison with the actual indexing options.

\begin{table}[htbp]
 \caption{Glossary Options: Pros and Cons}
 \label{tab:options}
 {%
 \renewcommand{\fnsymmark}[1]{\rlap{#1}}%
 \setlength{\tabcolsep}{3pt}%
 \centering
 \begin{tabular}{@{}>{\raggedright\small}p{0.35\textwidth}ccccc@{}}
   & \bfseries \opt1 & \bfseries \opt2 & \bfseries \opt3
   & \bfseries \opt4 & \bfseries \opt5\\
   Requires \gls{glossaries-extra}? &
   \conno & \conno & \conno & \conyes & \conyes\\
   Requires an external application? &
   \conno & \conyes & \conyes & \conyes & \conno\\
   Requires Perl? &
   \conno & \conno & \conyes & \conno & \conno\\
   Requires Java? &
   \conno & \conno & \conno & \conyes & \conno\\
   Can sort \glspl{exlatinalph}
   or \glspl{nonlatinalph}? &
   \prono\fnsym{1} & \prono & \proyes & \proyes & N/A\\
   Efficient sort algorithm? &
   \prono & \proyes & \proyes & \proyes & N/A\\
   Can use a different sort method for each glossary? &
   \proyes
   & \prono\fnsym{2}
   & \prono\fnsym{2} & \proyes & N/A\\
   Any problematic sort values? &
   \conyes & \conyes & \conyes & \conno & \conno\fnsym{3}\\
   Are entries with identical sort values treated as separate unique
   entries? &
   \proyes & \proyes & \prono\fnsym{4} & \proyes & \proyes\\
   Can automatically form ranges in the location lists? &
   \prono & \proyes & \proyes & \proyes & \prono\\
   Can have non-standard locations in the location lists? &
   \proyes & \prono
    & \proyes\fnsym{5}
    & \proyes
    & \proyes\fnsym{6}\\
   Maximum hierarchical depth (style-dependent) &
   $\infty$\fnsym{7} & 3 & $\infty$ & $\infty$ & $\infty$\\
   \ics{glsdisplaynumberlist} reliable? &
   \proyes & \prono & \prono & \proyes & \prono\\
   \ics{newglossaryentry} allowed in \env{document} environment?
   (Not recommended.) &
   \no & \yes & \yes & \no\fnsym{8} & \yes\fnsym{9}\\
   Requires additional write registers? &
   \conno & \conyes & \conyes & \conno & \conno\fnsym{10}\\
   Default value of \pkgopt{sanitizesort} package option &
   \texttt{false} & \texttt{true} & \texttt{true}
    & \texttt{true}\fnsym{11}
    & \texttt{true}\fnsym{11}
 \end{tabular}
 \par
 }\par
 \smallskip
 \hrulefill\par
 \smallskip\footnotesize
 \fnsym{1} Strips standard \LaTeX\ accents
(that is, accents generated by core \LaTeX\ commands) so,
for example, \ics{AA} is treated the same as A.\par
 \fnsym{2} Only with the hybrid method provided with \gls{glossaries-extra}.\par
 \fnsym{3} Provided \pkgopt[none]{sort} is used.\par
 \fnsym{4} Entries with the same sort value are merged.\par
 \fnsym{5} Requires some setting up.\par
 \fnsym{6} The locations must be set explicitly
through the custom \xtrfield{location} field provided by
\styfmt{glossaries-extra}.\par
 \fnsym{7} Unlimited but unreliable.\par
 \fnsym{8} Entries are defined in \filetype{bib}
format. \cs{newglossaryentry} should not be used explicitly.\par
 \fnsym{9} Provided \pkgopt+{true}{docdef} or
  \pkgopt+{restricted}{docdef} but not recommended.\par
 \fnsym{10} Provided \pkgopt+{false}{docdef} or
 \pkgopt+{restricted}{docdef}.\par
 \fnsym{11} Irrelevant with \pkgopt[none]{sort}. (The \pkgopt+{only}{record} 
 option automatically switches this on.)
\par
\end{table}

\optionsec[\TeX]{TeX}

This option isn't generally recommended for reasons given below.
Example Document:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
\begin{alltt}
\strong{\ics{makenoidxglossaries}} \% use TeX to sort
\end{alltt}
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{name={sample}, 
  description={an example}}
\begin{document}
\gls{sample}.
\end{verbatim}
\begin{alltt}
\strong{\ics{printnoidxglossary}}
\cs{end}\mgroup{document}
\end{alltt}
You can place all your entry definitions in a separate file
and load it in the preamble with \ics{loadglsentries} (\emph{after}
\ics{makenoidxglossaries}).

This option doesn't require an external \gls{indexingapp} but, with
the default alphabetic sorting, it's very slow with severe limitations.
If you want a sorted list, it doesn't work well for
\glspl{exlatinalph} or \glspl{nonlatinalph} and there's no guarantee
that it will work with \gls{UTF-8}.  However, if you use
the \pkgopt[false]{sanitizesort} package option (the default for
Option~1) then the \glslink{latexexlatinchar}{standard \LaTeX\
accent commands} will be ignored, so if an entry's name is set to
\verb|{\'e}lite| then the sort value will default to \texttt{elite} if
\pkgopt[false]{sanitizesort} is used and will default to
\verb|\'elite| if \pkgopt[true]{sanitizesort} is used. If you have
any other kinds of commands that don't expand to ASCII characters,
such as \cs{alpha} or \cs{si}, then you must use
\pkgopt[true]{sanitizesort} or change the sort method
(\pkgopt[use]{sort} or \pkgopt[def]{sort}) in the package options
or explicitly set the \gloskey{sort} key when you define the
relevant entries. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{alpha}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{alpha}}},
 \strong{sort=\mgroup{alpha}},description=\mgroup{...}}
\end{alltt}
\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package has a modified \pkgopt{symbols}
package option that provides \ics*{glsxtrnewsymbol}, which automatically sets the
\gloskey{sort} key to the entry label (instead of the \gloskey{name}).
\end{xtr}

This option works best with the \pkgopt[def]{sort} or
\pkgopt[use]{sort} setting. For any
other setting, be prepared for a long document build time,
especially if you have a lot of entries defined. \strong{This
option is intended as a last resort for alphabetical sorting.}
This option allows a mixture of sort methods. (For example, 
sorting by word order for one glossary and order of use for another.)
This option is not suitable for hierarchical glossaries and does
not form ranges in the \glspl{numberlist}. If you really can't use an
\gls{indexingapp} consider using \opt{5} instead.

Summary:
 \begin{enumerate}
   \item Add 
\begin{verbatim}
\makenoidxglossaries
\end{verbatim}
   to your preamble (before you start defining your entries, as described in
   \sectionref{sec:newglosentry}).

   \item Put
\begin{verbatim}
\printnoidxglossary
\end{verbatim}
   where you want your list of entries to appear (described in
  \sectionref{sec:printglossary}). Alternatively, to display all
   glossaries use the iterative command:
\begin{verbatim}
\printnoidxglossaries
\end{verbatim}

   \item Run \LaTeX\ twice on your document. (As you would do to
   make a~table of contents appear.) For example, click twice on
   the \qt{typeset} or \qt{build} or \qt{PDF\LaTeX} button in your editor.
 \end{enumerate}

\optionsec{makeindex}

Example document:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
\begin{alltt}
\strong{\ics{makeglossaries}} \% open glossary files
\end{alltt}
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{name={sample},
 description={an example}}
\begin{document}
\gls{sample}.
\end{verbatim}
\begin{alltt}
\strong{\ics{printglossary}}
\cs{end}\mgroup{document}
\end{alltt}
You can place all your entry definitions in a separate file
and load it in the preamble with \ics{loadglsentries} (\emph{after}
\ics{makeglossaries}).

This option uses a~\gls{cli} application called \gls{makeindex} to sort 
the entries. This application comes with all modern \TeX\ distributions, 
but it's hard-coded for the non-extended \gls{latinalph}. It can't
correctly sort accent commands (such as \cs{'} or \cs{c}) and fails
with \gls{UTF-8} characters, especially for any sort values that start
with a \gls{UTF-8} character (as it separates the octets resulting in an
invalid file encoding). This process involves making \LaTeX\ write
the glossary information to a temporary file which \gls{makeindex}
reads.  Then \gls{makeindex} writes a~new file containing the code
to typeset the glossary. Then \cs{printglossary} reads this file in
on the next run.

This option works best if you want to sort entries according to the
English alphabet and you don't want to install Perl or Java. This
method can also work with the restricted shell escape since
\gls{makeindex} is considered a trusted application. (So you should
be able to use the \pkgopt{automake} package option provided the
shell escape hasn't been completely disabled.)

This method can form ranges in the \gls{numberlist} but only
accepts limited number formats: \cs{arabic}, \cs{roman},
\cs{Roman}, \cs{alph} and \cs{Alph}. 

This option does not allow a mixture of sort methods. 
All glossaries must be sorted according to the same method: 
word\slash letter ordering or order of use or order of definition.
If you need word ordering for one glossary and letter ordering
for another you'll have to explicitly call \gls{makeindex} for 
each glossary type.

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package allows a hybrid mix of
\optsand12 to provide word\slash letter ordering with \opt2 and order
of use\slash definition with \opt1. See the \gls{glossaries-extra}
documentation for further details. See also the
\gls{glossaries-extra} alternative to \samplefile{Sort} in
\sectionref{sec:samplessort}.
\end{xtr}

Summary:
   \begin{enumerate}
    \item If you want to use \gls{makeindex}['s] \mkidxopt{g} option
    you must change the quote character using \ics{GlsSetQuote}. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsSetQuote{+}
\end{verbatim}
    This must be used before \cs{makeglossaries}.
    Note that if you are using \sty{babel}, the shorthands aren't
    enabled until the start of the document, so you won't be able to use
    the shorthands in definitions made in the preamble.

    \item Add 
\begin{verbatim}
\makeglossaries
\end{verbatim}
to your preamble (before you start
    defining your entries, as described in
    \sectionref{sec:newglosentry}).

    \item Put
\begin{verbatim}
\printglossary
\end{verbatim}
    where you want your list of entries to appear (described in
    \sectionref{sec:printglossary}). Alternatively, to display all
    glossaries use the iterative command:
\begin{verbatim}
\printglossaries
\end{verbatim}

    \item Run \LaTeX\ on your document. This creates files with the
    extensions \filetype{glo} and \filetype{ist} (for example, if your 
    \LaTeX\ document is called \texttt{myDoc.tex}, then you'll have 
    two extra files called \texttt{myDoc.glo} and \texttt{myDoc.ist}).
    If you look at your document at this point, you won't see the 
    glossary as it hasn't been created yet. (If you use
    \gls{glossaries-extra} you'll see the section heading and some 
    boilerplate text.)

    If you have used package options such as \pkgopt{symbols} there
    will also be other sets of files corresponding to the extra
    glossaries that were created by those options.

    \item\plabel{makeindex.run} Run \gls{makeindex} with the \texttt{.glo} file as the
    input file and the \texttt{.ist} file as the style so that
    it creates an output file with the extension \texttt{.gls}. If
    you have access to a terminal or a command prompt (for example, the
    MSDOS command prompt for Windows users or the bash console for
    Unix-like users) then you need to run the command:
\begin{prompt}
makeindex -s myDoc.ist -o myDoc.gls myDoc.glo
\end{prompt}
   (Replace \texttt{myDoc} with the base name of your \LaTeX\
    document file. Avoid spaces in the file name if possible. 
    The \textbf{\ttfamily\$} symbol indicates the command prompt and should be omitted.)

\begin{important}
The file extensions vary according to the glossary \gloskey{type}.
See \sectionref{sec:makeindexapp} for further details.
\gls{makeindex} must be called for each set of files.
\end{important}

    If you don't know how to use the command prompt, then you can probably access
    \gls{makeindex} via your text editor, but each editor has a
    different method of doing this. See \href{https://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/buildglossaries/}{Incorporating
makeglossaries or makeglossaries-lite or bib2gls into the document
build} for some examples.

    Alternatively, run \gls{makeindex} indirectly via the
\gls{makeglossaries} script:
\begin{prompt}
makeglossaries myDoc
\end{prompt}
    Note that the file extension isn't supplied in this case.
    (Replace \gls{makeglossaries} with \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua} if
    you don't have Perl installed.)
    This will pick up all the file extensions from the
    \filetype{aux} file and run \gls{makeindex} the appropriate number
    of times with all the necessary switches.

    The simplest approach is to use \app{arara} and add the following
    comment lines to the start of your document:
\begin{alltt}
\% arara: pdflatex
\% arara: makeglossaries
\% arara: pdflatex
\end{alltt}
    (Replace \texttt{makeglossaries} with \texttt{makeglossarieslite} in the 
     second line above if you don't have Perl installed. Note that
     there's no hyphen in this case.)

    The default sort is word order (\qt{sea lion} comes before \qt{seal}). 
    If you want letter ordering you need to add the \mkidxopt{l}
    switch:
\begin{prompt}
makeindex -l -s myDoc.ist -o myDoc.gls myDoc.glo
\end{prompt}
    (See \sectionref{sec:makeindexapp} for further details on using 
    \gls*{makeindex} explicitly.) If you use \gls{makeglossaries}
    or \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua} then use the \pkgopt[letter]{order}
    package option and the \mkidxopt{l} option will be added
    automatically.

    \item\plabel{makeindex.relatex} Once you have successfully completed the previous step,
    you can now run \LaTeX\ on your document again.
   \end{enumerate}
You'll need to repeat the last step if you have used the
\pkgopt{toc} option (unless you're using \gls{glossaries-extra}) to
ensure the section heading is added to the table of contents.
You'll also need to repeat steps~\ref{makeindex.run} and~\ref{makeindex.relatex} 
if you have any cross-references which can't be indexed until the glossary file has
been created.

\optionsec{xindy}

Example document:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{documentclass}\mgroup{article}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{xindy}]\mgroup{glossaries}
\strong{\ics{makeglossaries}} \% open glossary files
\end{alltt}
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{name={sample},
 description={an example}}
\begin{document}
\gls{sample}.
\end{verbatim}
\begin{alltt}
\strong{\ics{printglossary}}
\cs{end}\mgroup{document}
\end{alltt}
You can place all your entry definitions in a separate file
and load it in the preamble with \ics{loadglsentries} (\emph{after}
\ics{makeglossaries}).

This option uses a~\gls{cli} application called
\gls{xindy} to sort the entries. This application is more flexible than 
\texttt{makeindex} and is able to sort \glspl{exlatinalph} or 
\glspl{nonlatinalph}, however it does still have some limitations.

The \gls{xindy} application comes with both \TeX~Live and
MiK\TeX, but since \gls{xindy} is a Perl script, you will also need
to install Perl, if you don't already have it.  In a~similar way to
\opt2, this option involves making \LaTeX\ write the glossary
information to a~temporary file which \gls{xindy} reads. Then
\gls{xindy} writes a~new file containing the code to typeset the
glossary. Then \cs{printglossary} reads this file in on the next run.

This is the best option with just the base \styfmt{glossaries}
package if you want to sort according to a~language other than 
English or if you want non-standard location lists, but it can 
require some setting up (see \sectionref{sec:xindy}). There are
some problems with certain sort values:
\begin{itemize}
   \item entries with the same sort value are merged by \gls*{xindy}
   into a single glossary line so you must make sure that each entry
   has a unique sort value;
   \item \gls*{xindy} forbids empty sort values;
   \item \gls*{xindy} automatically strips control sequences, the math-shift
   character \verb|$| and braces \verb|{}| from the sort value,
   which is usually desired but this can cause the sort value to
   collapse to an empty string which \gls*{xindy} forbids.
\end{itemize}
In these problematic cases, you must set the \gloskey{sort} field
explicitly. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{alpha}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{alpha}}},
 \strong{sort=\mgroup{alpha},}description=\mgroup{...}}
\end{alltt}
\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package has a modified \pkgopt{symbols}
package option that provides \ics*{glsxtrnewsymbol}, which automatically sets the
\gloskey{sort} key to the entry label (instead of the \gloskey{name}).
\end{xtr}

All glossaries must be sorted according to the same method 
(word/letter ordering, order of use, or order of definition).

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package allows a hybrid mix of
\optsand13 to provide word\slash letter ordering with \opt3 and order
of use\slash definition with \opt1. See the \gls{glossaries-extra}
documentation for further details.
\end{xtr}

Summary:
\begin{enumerate}
     \item Add the \pkgopt{xindy} option to the \styfmt{glossaries}
package option list:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[xindy]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
     If you are using a non-Latin script you'll also need to either
     switch off the creation of the number group:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[xindy={glsnumbers=false}]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
      or use either \cs{GlsSetXdyFirstLetterAfterDigits}\marg{letter} (to indicate the
first letter group to follow the digits) or
     \cs{GlsSetXdyNumberGroupOrder}\marg{spec} to indicate where the number
     group should be placed (see \sectionref{sec:xindy}).

     \item Add \cs{makeglossaries} to your preamble (before you start
     defining your entries, as described in \sectionref{sec:newglosentry}).

    \item Run \LaTeX\ on your document. This creates files with the
    extensions \filetype{glo} and \filetype{xdy} (for example, if your 
    \LaTeX\ document is called \texttt{myDoc.tex}, then you'll have 
    two extra files called \texttt{myDoc.glo} and \texttt{myDoc.xdy}).
    If you look at your document at this point, you won't see the 
    glossary as it hasn't been created yet. (If you're using the
    \gls{glossaries-extra} extension package, you'll see the section
    header and some boilerplate text.)

    If you have used package options such as \pkgopt{symbols} there
    will also be other sets of files corresponding to the extra
    glossaries that were created by those options.

    \item Run \gls{xindy} with the \texttt{.glo} file as the
    input file and the \texttt{.xdy} file as a~module so that
    it creates an output file with the extension \texttt{.gls}. You 
    also need to set the language name and input encoding. If
    you have access to a terminal or a command prompt (for example, the
    MSDOS command prompt for Windows users or the bash console for
    Unix-like users) then you need to run the command (all on one
    line):
\begin{prompt}
xindy -L english -C utf8 -I xindy -M myDoc -t myDoc.glg -o myDoc.gls myDoc.glo
\end{prompt}
    (Replace \texttt{myDoc} with the base name of your \LaTeX\
    document file. Avoid spaces in the file name. If necessary, also replace
    \texttt{english} with the name of your language and \texttt{utf8}
    with your input encoding, for example, 
    \xdyopt{L}\texttt{ german }\xdyopt{C}\texttt{ din5007-utf8}.)

\begin{important}
The file extensions vary according to the glossary \gloskey{type}.
See \sectionref{sec:xindyapp} for further details.
\gls{xindy} must be called for each set of files.
\end{important}

    It's much simpler to use \gls{makeglossaries} instead:
\begin{prompt}
makeglossaries myDoc
\end{prompt}
    Note that the file extension isn't supplied in this case.
    This will pick up all the file extensions from the
    \filetype{aux} file and run \gls{xindy} the appropriate number
    of times with all the necessary switches.

    There's no benefit in using \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua} with \gls{xindy}.
    (Remember that \gls{xindy} is a Perl script so if you can use
    \gls{xindy} then you can also use \gls{makeglossaries}, and if
    you don't want to use \gls{makeglossaries} because you don't
    want to install Perl, then you can't use \gls{xindy} either.)
   
    If you don't know how to use the command prompt, then you can 
    probably access \gls{xindy} or \gls{makeglossaries} via your text editor,
    but each editor has a different method of doing this. See \href{https://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/buildglossaries/}{Incorporating
makeglossaries or makeglossaries-lite or bib2gls into the document
build} for some examples.

    Again, a convenient method is to use \appfmt{arara} and add the follow comment
    lines to the start of your document:
\begin{alltt}
\% arara: pdflatex
\% arara: makeglossaries
\% arara: pdflatex
\end{alltt}

    The default sort is word order (\qt{sea lion} comes before \qt{seal}). 
    If you want letter ordering you need to add the
    \pkgopt[letter]{order} package option:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[xindy,order=letter]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
    (and return to the previous step). This option is picked up
    by \gls{makeglossaries}. If you are explicitly using \gls{xindy}
    then you'll need to add \texttt{-M ord/letorder} to the options list.
    See \sectionref{sec:xindyapp} for further details on using 
    \gls*{xindy} explicitly.

    \item Once you have successfully completed the previous step,
    you can now run \LaTeX\ on your document again. As with
    \gls{makeindex} (\opt2), you may need to repeat the previous
    step and this step to ensure the table of contents and cross-references are resolved.

\end{enumerate}

\optionsec{bib2gls}

\glsxtrnote
This option is only available with the \gls{glossaries-extra} extension package. 
This method uses \gls{bib2gls} to both fetch entry definitions from
\filetype{bib} files and to hierarchically sort and collate.

Example document:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{documentclass}\mgroup{article}
\cs{usepackage}[\xtrfont{record=nameref}]\mgroup{glossaries-extra}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=\mgroup{entries}]
\cs{begin}\mgroup{document}
\cs{gls}\mgroup{sample}, \cs{gls}\mgroup{alpha}, \cs{gls}\mgroup{html}.
\ics*{printunsrtglossary}
\cs{end}\mgroup{document}
\end{alltt}
where the file \texttt{entries.bib} contains:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{sample,
  name=\mgroup{sample},
  description=\mgroup{an example}
}
\atentry{symbol}\mgroup{alpha,
  name=\mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{alpha}}},
  description=\mgroup{...}
}
\atentry{abbreviation}\mgroup{html,
  short=\mgroup{HTML},
  long=\mgroup{hypertext markup language}
}
\end{alltt}

All entries must be provided in one or more \filetype{bib} files.
See the \gls{bib2gls} user manual for the required format.

\begin{important}
Note that the \gloskey{sort} key should not be used. Each entry type
(\atentry{entry}, \atentry{symbol}, \atentry{abbreviation}) has a
particular field that's used for the sort value by default
(\gloskey{name}, the label, \gloskey{short}). You will break this
mechanism if you explicitly use the \gloskey{sort} key. See
\bibglsgallery{sorting} for examples.
\end{important}

The \gls{glossaries-extra} package needs to be loaded with the
\pkgopt*{record} package option:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\xtrfont{record}]\mgroup{glossaries-extra}
\end{alltt}
or (equivalently)
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\xtrfont{record=only}]\mgroup{glossaries-extra}
\end{alltt}
or (with at least \gls{glossaries-extra} v1.37 and \gls{bib2gls} v1.8):
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\xtrfont{record=nameref}]\mgroup{glossaries-extra}
\end{alltt}
The \pkgopt+{nameref}{record} option is the best method.

(It's possible to use a hybrid of this method and \optsor23 with
\pkgopt+{hybrid}{record} but in general there is little need
for this and it complicates the build process.)

Each resource set is loaded with \ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}\oarg{options}.
For example:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}
[\% definitions in entries1.bib and entries2.bib:
 \resourceopt{src}=\mgroup{entries1,entries2},
 \resourceopt{sort}=\mgroup{de-CH-1996}\% sort according to this locale
]
\end{alltt}
The \filetype{bib} files are identified as a comma-separated list in the
value of the \resourceopt{src} key. The \resourceopt{sort} option
identifies the sorting method. This may be a locale identifier for
alphabetic sorting, but there are other sort methods available, such
as character code or numeric. One resource set may cover multiple
glossaries or one glossary may be split across multiple resource
sets, forming logical sub-blocks.

If you want to ensure that all entries are selected, even if
they haven't been referenced in the document, then add the option
\resourceopt[all]{selection}. (There are also ways of filtering the
selection or you can even have a random selection by shuffling and
truncating the list. See the \gls{bib2gls} user manual for further details.)

The glossary is displayed using:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{printunsrtglossary}
\end{alltt}
Alternatively all glossaries can be displayed using the iterative
command:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{printunsrtglossaries}
\end{alltt}
The document is built using:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex myDoc
bib2gls myDoc
pdflatex myDoc
\end{prompt}
If letter groups are required, you need the \bibglslongopt{group} switch:
\begin{prompt}
bib2gls -{}-group myDoc
\end{prompt}
or with \app{arara}:
\begin{alltt}
\% arara: bib2gls: \mgroup{ group: on }
\end{alltt}
(You will also need an appropriate glossary style.)

Unlike \optsand23, this method doesn't create a file containing
the typeset glossary but simply determines which entries are
needed for the document, their associated locations and (if
required) their associated letter group. This option allows
a mixture of sort methods. For example, sorting by word order
for one glossary and order of use for another or even sorting
one block of the glossary differently to another block in the
same glossary. See \bibglsgallery{sorting}.

This method supports Unicode and uses the Common Locale Data
Repository, which provides more extensive language support than
\gls{xindy}.\footnote{Except for Klingon, which is supported by
\gls{xindy}, but not by the CLDR.}\ The locations in the
\gls{numberlist} may be in any format. If \gls{bib2gls} can deduce a
numerical value it will attempt to form ranges otherwise it will
simply list the locations.

Summary:
\begin{enumerate}
  \item Use \gls{glossaries-extra} with the \pkgopt+{record} package
option:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[record]{glossaries-extra}
\end{verbatim}

  \item Use \cs*{GlsXtrLoadResources} to identify the \filetype{bib}
file(s) and \gls{bib2gls} options:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsXtrLoadResources[src={terms.bib,abbreviations.bib},sort=en]
\end{verbatim}

 \item Put
\begin{alltt}
\cs*{printunsrtglossary}
\end{alltt}
where you want your list of entries to appear. Alternatively to
display all glossaries use the iterative command:
\begin{alltt}
\cs*{printunsrtglossaries}
\end{alltt}

\item Run \LaTeX\ on your document.

\item Run \gls{bib2gls} with just the document base name.

\item Run \LaTeX\ on your document.

\end{enumerate}

See \bibglsbegin\ or the \gls{bib2gls} user manual for further
details of this method, and
also \href{https://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/buildglossaries/}{Incorporating
makeglossaries or makeglossaries-lite or bib2gls into the document
build}.

\optionsec[no sorting]{no sorting}

\glsxtrnote
This option is only available with the extension package
\gls{glossaries-extra}. No \gls{indexingapp} is required. 

Example document:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage[sort=none]{glossaries-extra}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{name={sample},
 description={an example}}
\newglossaryentry{alpha}{name={\ensuremath{\alpha}},
 description={...}}
\begin{document}
\gls{sample}.
\end{verbatim}
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{printunsrtglossary}
\cs{end}\mgroup{document}
\end{alltt}

This method is best used with the package option \pkgopt[none]{sort}
(as shown above). There's no \qt{activation} command (such as \cs{makeglossaries}
for \optsand23). In general it's best to use a style that doesn't
show letter group headings. If you do want letter headings then you
must ensure that you have defined your entries in alphabetical
order, and use \XeLaTeX\ or \LuaLaTeX\ if you require \gls{UTF-8} letter
groups.

All entries must be defined before the glossary is displayed
(preferably in the preamble) in the required order, and child 
entries must be defined immediately after their parent entry 
if they must be kept together in the glossary. (Some glossary styles
indent entries that have a parent but it's the \gls{indexingapp}
that ensures the child entries are listed immediately after the
parent. If you're opting to use this manual approach then it's your
responsibility to define the entries in the correct order.) You can 
place all your entry definitions in a separate file
and load it in the preamble with \ics{loadglsentries}.

The glossary is displayed using:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{printunsrtglossary}
\end{alltt}
Alternatively all glossaries can be displayed using the iterative
command:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{printunsrtglossaries}
\end{alltt}
This will display \emph{all} defined entries, regardless of
whether or not they have been used in the document. The
\glspl{numberlist} have to be set explicitly otherwise they won't
appear. Note that this uses the same command for displaying the
glossary as \opt4. This is because \gls{bib2gls} takes advantage
of this method by defining the wanted entries in the required order and
setting the locations (and letter group information, if required).

Therefore, the above example document has a glossary containing the
entries: sample and $\alpha$ (in that order). Note that
the \texttt{alpha} entry has been included even though it wasn't
referenced in the document.

This just requires a single \LaTeX\ call:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex myDoc
\end{prompt}
unless the glossary needs to appear in the table of contents, in which case
a second run is required:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex myDoc
pdflatex myDoc
\end{prompt}
(Naturally if the document also contains citations, and so on, 
then additional steps are required. Similarly for all the other
options above.)

See the \gls{glossaries-extra} documentation for further details of this method.

\optionsec[standalone]{standalone}

\glsxtrnote
This option is only available with the \gls{glossaries-extra}
extension package.\footnote{You can just use the base
\styfmt{glossaries} package for the first case, but it's less
convenient. You'd have to manually insert the entry target before
the sectioning command and use \ics{glsentryname}\marg{label} or
\ics{Glsentryname}\marg{label} to display the entry name.} Instead
of creating a list, this has standalone definitions throughout the
document. The entry name may or may not be in a section heading.

You can either define entries in the document preamble (or in an external file loaded with
\ics{loadglsentries}), as with \opt5, for example:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}

\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}
\usepackage[sort=none,
   nostyles% <- no glossary styles are required
 ]{glossaries-extra}

\newglossaryentry{set}{name={set},
  description={a collection of any kind of objects},
  symbol={\ensuremath{\mathcal{S}}}
}

\newglossaryentry{function}{name={function},
  description={a rule that assigns every element in the 
  domain \gls{set} to an element in the range \gls{set}},
  symbol={\ensuremath{f(x)}}
}
\end{verbatim}
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}*\mgroup{\cs{termdef}}[1]\mgroup{\%
  \cs{section}\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrglossentry}\mgroup{\#1} \ics{glsentrysymbol}\mgroup{\#1}}\%
  \cs{begin}\mgroup{quote}\cs{em}\ics{Glsentrydesc}\mgroup{\#1}.\cs{end}\mgroup{quote}\%
}
\end{alltt}
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{document}
\tableofcontents

\section{Introduction}
Sample document about \glspl{function} and \glspl{set}.

\termdef{set}

More detailed information about \glspl{set} with examples.

\termdef{function}

More detailed information about \glspl{function} with examples.

\end{document}
\end{verbatim}
Or you can use \gls{bib2gls} if you want to manage a large 
database of terms.  For example (requires \gls{glossaries-extra} v1.42, see below):
\begin{alltt}
\cs{documentclass}\mgroup{article}

\cs{usepackage}[colorlinks]\mgroup{hyperref}
\cs{usepackage}[\xtrfont{record},
   nostyles\% <- no glossary styles are required
  ]\mgroup{glossaries-extra}

\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=terms,\resourceopt{sort}=none,\resourceopt{save-locations}=false]

\cs{newcommand}*\mgroup{\cs{termdef}}[1]\mgroup{\%
  \cs{section}\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrglossentry}\mgroup{\#1} \strong{\ics{glossentrysymbol}}\mgroup{\#1}}\%
  \ics{glsadd}\mgroup{\#1}\% <- index this entry
  \cs{begin}\mgroup{quote}\cs{em}\ics{Glsentrydesc}\mgroup{\#1}.\cs{end}\mgroup{quote}\%
}
\end{alltt}
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{document}
\tableofcontents

\section{Introduction}
Sample document about \glspl{function} and \glspl{set}.

\termdef{set}

More detailed information about \glspl{set} with examples.

\termdef{function}

More detailed information about \glspl{function} with examples.

\end{document}
\end{verbatim}
Where the file \texttt{terms.bib} contains:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{set,
  name=\mgroup{set},
  description=\mgroup{a collection of any kind of objects},
  symbol=\mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{mathcal}\mgroup{S}}}
}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{function,
  name=\mgroup{function},
  description=\mgroup{a rule that assigns every element in the domain
  \cs{gls}\mgroup{set} to an element in the range \cs{gls}\mgroup{set}},
  symbol=\mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{f(x)}}
}
\end{alltt}
The advantage in this approach (with \ics{loadglsentries} or 
\gls{bib2gls}) is that you can use an existing database of
entries shared across multiple documents, ensuring consistent
notation for all of them.

In both cases, there's no need to load all the glossary styles
packages, as they're not required, so I've used the
\pkgopt{nostyles} package option to prevent them from being loaded.

In the first case, you need the \pkgopt[none]{sort} package option
(as in \opt5) and then define the terms in the preamble. No external tool is
required. Just run \LaTeX\ as normal. (Twice to ensure that the
table of contents is up to date.)
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex myDoc
pdflatex myDoc
\end{prompt}

In the second case, you need the \pkgopt*{record} package
option (as in \opt4) since \gls{bib2gls} is needed to select the
required entries, but you don't need a sorted list:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=\mgroup{terms},\strong{\xtrfont{sort}=none}]
\end{alltt}
This will ensure that any entries indexed in the document (through
commands like \ics{gls} or \ics{glsadd}) will be selected by 
\gls{bib2gls}, but it will skip the sorting step. 
(The chances are you probably also won't need location lists either.
If so, you can add the option \resourceopt[false]{save-locations}.)

Remember that for this second case you need to run \gls{bib2gls} as per \opt4:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex myDoc
bib2gls myDoc
pdflatex myDoc
pdflatex myDoc
\end{prompt}

For both cases (with or without \gls{bib2gls}), instead of listing
all the entries using \xtrcs{printunsrtglossary}, you use
\ics*{glsxtrglossentry}\marg{label} where you want the name (and
anchor with \sty{hyperref}) to appear in the document.  This will
allow the \gls{linktext} created by commands like \cs{gls} to link
to that point in the document. The description can simply be
displayed with \ics{glsentrydesc}\marg{label} or
\ics{Glsentrydesc}\marg{label}, as in the above examples. In both
examples, I've defined a custom command \cs{termdef} to simplify the
code and ensure consistency.  Extra styling, such as placing the
description in a coloured frame, can be added to this custom
definition as required.

(Instead of using \cs{glsentrydesc} or \cs{Glsentrydesc}, you can use 
\ics{glossentrydesc}\marg{label}, which will obey attributes such as
\attr{glossdesc} and \attr{glossdescfont}. See the \gls{glossaries-extra} 
manual for further details.)

The symbol (if required) can be displayed with either
\ics{glsentrysymbol}\marg{label} or \ics{glossentrysymbol}\marg{label}.
In the first example, I've used \cs{glsentrysymbol}. In the
second I've used \ics{glossentrysymbol}. The latter is
necessary with \gls{bib2gls} if the symbol needs to go in a
section title as the entries aren't defined on the first \LaTeX\ run.

In normal document text, \cs{glsentrysymbol} will silently do nothing
if the entry hasn't been defined, but when used in a section heading
it will expand to an undefined internal command when written to the
\filetype{aux} file, which triggers an error. 

The \ics{glossentrysymbol} command performs an existence check,
which triggers a warning if the entry is undefined. (All entries
will be undefined before the first \gls{bib2gls} call.) You need at
least \gls{glossaries-extra} v1.42 to use this command in a section
title.\footnote{\cs{glossentrysymbol} is defined by the base
\styfmt{glossaries} package but is redefined by
\gls{glossaries-extra}.} If \sty{hyperref} has been loaded, this
will use \ics{texorpdfstring} to allow a simple expansion for the
PDF bookmarks (see the \gls{glossaries-extra} user manual for
further details).

If you want to test if the \gloskey{symbol} field has been set, you
need to use \ics{ifglshassymbol} outside of the section title. For
example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{ifglshassymbol}\mgroup{\#1}\%
\mgroup{\cs{section}\mgroup{\xtrcs{glsxtrglossentry}\mgroup{\#1} \cs{glossentrysymbol}\mgroup{\#1}}}
\mgroup{\cs{section}\mgroup{\xtrcs{glsxtrglossentry}\mgroup{\#1}}}
\end{alltt}

In both of the above examples, the section titles start with a lowercase
character (because the \gloskey{name} value is all lowercase in
entry definitions). You can apply automatic case-change with the
\attr{glossname} attribute. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{general}\mgroup{glossname}\mgroup{firstuc}
\end{alltt}
or (for title-case)
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{general}\mgroup{glossname}\mgroup{title}
\end{alltt}
However, this won't apply the case-change in the table of contents
or bookmarks.

In the second example, you can instead use \gls{bib2gls} to apply a
case-change:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=terms,
 \resourceopt{sort}=none,\resourceopt{save-locations}=false\strong{,
 \resourceopt{replicate-fields}=\mgroup{name=text},
 \xtrfont{name-case-change}=firstuc}
]
\end{alltt}
(Or \resourceopt[title]{name-case-change} for title-case.)
This copies the \gloskey{name} value to the \gloskey{text} field and
then applies a case-change to the \gloskey{name} field (leaving the
\gloskey{text} field unchanged). The name in the section titles now
starts with a capital but the \gls{linktext} produced by commands like
\ics{gls} is still lowercase.

In the first example (without \gls{bib2gls}) you need to do this
manually. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{set}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{\strong{S}et},\strong{text=\mgroup{set}},
  description=\mgroup{a collection of any kind of objects},
  symbol=\mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{mathcal}\mgroup{S}}}
}
\end{alltt}

Note that if you use the default \resourceopt[true]{save-locations}
with \gls{bib2gls}, it's possible to combine \optsand46 to have both standalone
definitions and an index. Now I do need a glossary style. In this
case I'm going to use \xtrglostyle{bookindex}, which is provided in
the \sty{glossary-bookindex} package (bundled with
\gls{glossaries-extra}). I don't need any of the other style
packages, so I can still keep the \pkgopt{nostyles} option and just
load \sty{glossary-bookindex}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\xtrfont{record=nameref},\% <- using bib2gls
 nostyles,\% <- don't load default style packages
 \xtrfont{stylemods=bookindex},\% <- load glossary-bookindex.sty
 style=\xtrfont{bookindex}\% <- set the default style to 'bookindex'
]\mgroup{glossaries-extra}
\end{alltt}
I also need to sort the entries, so the resource command is now:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=terms,\% definitions in terms.bib
 \resourceopt{sort}=en-GB,\% sort by this locale
 \resourceopt{replicate-fields}=\mgroup{name=text},
 \xtrfont{name-case-change}=\mgroup{firstuc}
]
\end{alltt}
At the end of the document, I can add the glossary:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{printunsrtglossary}[title=Index,target=false]
\end{alltt}
Note that I've had to switch off the hypertargets with
\xtrprintglosskey[false]{target} (otherwise there would be duplicate
targets). If you want letter group headings you need to use the
\bibglslongopt{group} switch:
\begin{prompt}
bib2gls -{}-group myDoc
\end{prompt}
or if you are using \app{arara}:
\begin{alltt}
\% arara: bib2gls: \mgroup{ group: on }
\end{alltt}

The \xtrglostyle{bookindex} style doesn't show the
description, so only the name and location is displayed. Remember
that the name has had a case-conversion so it now starts with an
initial capital. If you feel this is inappropriate for the index,
you can adjust the \xtrglostyle{bookindex} style so that it uses
the \gloskey{text} field instead. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrbookindexname}}[1]\mgroup{\%
  \ics*{glossentrynameother}\mgroup{\#1}\mgroup{text}}
\end{alltt}
See the \gls{glossaries-extra} user manual for further details about
this style.

Note that on the first \LaTeX\ run none of the entries will be
defined. Once they are defined, the page numbers may shift due to
the increased amount of document text. You may therefore need to
repeat the document build to ensure the page numbers are correct.

If there are extra terms that need to be included in the index that
don't have a description, you can define them with \atentry{index}
in the \filetype{bib} file.  For example:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{index}\mgroup{element}
\atentry{index}\mgroup{member,\xtrgloskey{alias}=\mgroup{element}}
\end{alltt}
They can be used in the document as usual:
\begin{verbatim}
The objects that make up a set are the \glspl{element}
or \glspl{member}.
\end{verbatim}
See \bibglsbegin\ or the \gls{bib2gls} user manual for further
details.

The \styfmt{glossaries} package comes with a number of sample
documents that illustrate the various functions. These are listed in
\sectionref{sec:samples}.

\section{Dummy Entries for Testing}
\label{sec:lipsum}

In addition to the sample files described above, \sty{glossaries}
also provides some files containing lorum ipsum dummy entries. These
are provided for testing purposes and are on \TeX's path (in
\texttt{tex\slash latex\slash glossaries\slash test-entries}) so
they can be included via \ics{input} or \ics{loadglsentries}. The
\gls{glossaries-extra} package provides \filetype{bib} versions of
all these files for use with \gls{bib2gls}. The files are as
follows:

\begin{description}
\item[example-glossaries-brief.tex] These entries all have brief
descriptions. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{lorem}{name={lorem},description={ipsum}}
\end{verbatim}

\item[example-glossaries-long.tex] These entries all have long
descriptions. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{loremipsum}{name={lorem ipsum},
description={dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit. Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, 
adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur dictum gravida 
mauris.}}
\end{verbatim}

\item[example-glossaries-multipar.tex] These entries all have
multi-paragraph descriptions. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\longnewglossaryentry{loremi-ii}{name={lorem 1--2}}%
{%
Lorem ipsum ...

Nam dui ligula...
}
\end{verbatim}

\item[example-glossaries-symbols.tex] These entries all use the
\gloskey{symbol} key. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{alpha}{name={alpha},
symbol={\ensuremath{\alpha}},
description={Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum.}}
\end{verbatim}

\item[example-glossaries-symbolnames.tex] Similar to the previous
file but the \gloskey{symbol} key isn't used. Instead the symbol
is stored in the \gloskey{name} key. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sym.alpha}{sort={alpha},
name={\ensuremath{\alpha}},
description={Quisque ullamcorper placerat ipsum.}}
\end{verbatim}

\item[example-glossaries-images.tex] These entries use the
\gloskey{user1} key to store the name of an image file. (The images
are provided by the \sty{mwe} package and should be on \TeX's path.) 
One entry doesn't have an associated image to help test for a~missing key.
The descriptions are long to allow for tests with the text wrapping
around the image. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\longnewglossaryentry{sedfeugiat}{name={sed feugiat},
user1={example-image}}%
{%
Cum sociis natoque...

Etiam...
}
\end{verbatim}

\item[example-glossaries-acronym.tex] These entries are all
abbreviations.  For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym[type=\glsdefaulttype]{lid}{LID}{lorem ipsum 
dolor}
\end{verbatim}
\begin{xtr}
If you use the \gls{glossaries-extra} extension package, then
\ics{newacronym} is redefined to use \ics*{newabbreviation}
with the \xtrgloskey{category} key set to \texttt{acronym} (rather
than the default \texttt{abbreviation}). This means that you need to
set the abbreviation style for the \texttt{acronym} category. For
example:
\begin{verbatim}
\setabbreviationstyle[acronym]{long-short}
\end{verbatim}
\end{xtr}

\item[example-glossaries-acronym-desc.tex] This file contains
entries that are all
abbreviations that use the \gloskey{description} key.
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym[type=\glsdefaulttype,
  description={fringilla a, euismod sodales,
  sollicitudin vel, wisi}]{ndl}{NDL}{nam dui ligula}
\end{verbatim}
\begin{xtr}
If you use the \gls{glossaries-extra} extension package, then
\ics{newacronym} is redefined to use \ics*{newabbreviation}
with the \xtrgloskey{category} key set to \texttt{acronym} (rather
than the default \texttt{abbreviation}). This means that you need to
set the abbreviation style for the \texttt{acronym} category. For
example:
\begin{verbatim}
\setabbreviationstyle[acronym]{long-short-desc}
\end{verbatim}
\end{xtr}

\item[example-glossaries-acronyms-lang.tex] These entries are all
abbreviations, where some of them have a~translation supplied in the
\gloskey{user1} key.
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym[type=\glsdefaulttype,user1={love itself}]
 {li}{LI}{lorem ipsum}
\end{verbatim}
\begin{xtr}
If you use the \gls{glossaries-extra} extension package, then
\ics{newacronym} is redefined to use \ics*{newabbreviation}
with the \xtrgloskey{category} key set to \texttt{acronym} (rather
than the default \texttt{abbreviation}). This means that you need to
set the abbreviation style for the \texttt{acronym} category. For
example:
\begin{verbatim}
\setabbreviationstyle[acronym]{long-short-user}
\end{verbatim}
\end{xtr}

\item[example-glossaries-parent.tex] These are hierarchical entries
where the child entries use the \gloskey{name} key.
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sedmattis}{name={sed mattis},
description={erat sit amet}

\newglossaryentry{gravida}{parent={sedmattis},
  name={gravida},description={malesuada}}
\end{verbatim}

\item[example-glossaries-childnoname.tex] These are hierarchical entries
where the child entries don't use the \gloskey{name} key.
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{scelerisque}{name={scelerisque},
  description={at}}

\newglossaryentry{vestibulum}{parent={scelerisque},
  description={eu, nulla}}
\end{verbatim}

\item[example-glossaries-longchild.tex] (New to v4.47.) These entries all 
have long descriptions and there are some child entries. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{longsedmattis}{name={sed mattis},
 description={erat sit amet dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. 
 Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. 
 Curabitur dictum gravida mauris.}}

\newglossaryentry{longgravida}{parent={longsedmattis},name={gravida},
 description={malesuada libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer id, vulputate a, 
 magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique
senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas. Mauris ut
leo.}}
\end{verbatim}

\item[example-glossaries-childmultipar.tex] (New to v4.47.) This
consists of parent entries with single paragraph descriptions and
child entries with multi-paragraph descriptions. Some entries have
the \gloskey{user1} key set to the name of an image file provided by
the \sty{mwe} package. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{hiersedmattis}{name={sed mattis},user1={example-image},
 description={Erat sit amet dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. 
 Ut purus elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur
dictum gravida mauris. Ut pellentesque augue sed urna. Vestibulum
diam eros, fringilla et, consectetuer eu, nonummy id, sapien. Nullam
at lectus. In sagittis ultrices mauris. Curabitur malesuada erat sit
amet massa. Fusce blandit. Aliquam erat volutpat.}}

\longnewglossaryentry{hierloremi-ii}
{name={lorem 1--2},parent={hiersedmattis}}%
{%
Lorem ipsum ...

Nam dui ligula...
}
\end{verbatim}

\item[example-glossaries-cite.tex] These entries use the
\gloskey{user1} key to store a citation key (or comma-separated list
of citation keys). The citations are defined in \texttt{xampl.bib},
which should be available on all modern \TeX\ distributions.
One entry doesn't have an associated citation to help test for a~missing
key. 
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{fusce}{name={fusce},
description={suscipit cursus sem},user1={article-minimal}}
\end{verbatim}

\item[example-glossaries-url.tex] These entries use the
\gloskey{user1} key to store an URL associated with the entry.
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{aenean-url}{name={aenean},
 description={adipiscing auctor est},
 user1={http://uk.tug.org/}}
\end{verbatim}
\end{description}

The sample file \mirrorsamplefile{glossary-lipsum-examples.tex} in the 
\texttt{doc\slash latex\slash glossaries\slash samples} directory
uses all these files. See also \gallerytopic{glossaries}.

\glsxtrnote
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides the additional test
file:
\begin{description}
\item[example-glossaries-xr.tex] These entries use the \gloskey{see}
key provided by the base \styfmt{glossaries} package and also the
\xtrgloskey{alias} and \xtrgloskey{seealso} keys that require
\gls{glossaries-extra}. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{alias-lorem}{name={alias-lorem},
 description={ipsum},alias={lorem}}

\newglossaryentry{amet}{name={amet},description={consectetuer},
 see={dolor}}

\newglossaryentry{arcu}{name={arcu},description={libero},
 seealso={placerat,vitae,curabitur}}
\end{verbatim}
\end{description}

\section{Multi-Lingual Support}
\label{sec:languages}

\begin{important}
The \styfmt{glossaries} package uses the \styfmt{tracklang} package
to determine the document languages. Unfortunately, because there
isn't a standard language identification framework provided with
\LaTeX, \styfmt{tracklang} isn't always able to detect the selected
languages either as a result of using an unknown interface or where
the interface doesn't provide a way of detecting the language.
See
\href{https://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/tracklang/}{Localisation
with \texttt{tracklang.tex}} for further details.
\end{important}

As from version 1.17, the \styfmt{glossaries} package can be
used with \gls{xindy} as well as \gls{makeindex}. If you
are writing in a language that uses an \gls{exlatinalph} or
\gls{nonlatinalph} it's best to use \opt3 (\gls*{xindy}) 
or \opt4 (\gls{bib2gls})
as \gls*{makeindex} (\opt2) is hard-coded for the non-extended
\gls{latinalph} and \opt1 can only perform limited ASCII comparisons.

This means that with \optsor34 you are not restricted to the A,
\ldots, Z letter groups.  If you want to use \gls*{xindy}, remember
to use the \pkgopt{xindy} package option. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass[french]{article}
\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage{babel}
\usepackage[xindy]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
If you want to use \gls*{bib2gls}, you need to use the
\pkgopt*{record} option with \gls{glossaries-extra} and supply the
definitions in \filetype{bib} files. (See the \gls{bib2gls} user
manual for further details.)

\begin{important}
Note that although a~\gls{nonlatinchar}, such as \'e, looks like a plain
character in your \filetype{tex} file, with standard \LaTeX\ it's actually a~macro and can therefore
cause expansion problems. You may need to switch off the field
expansions with \cs{glsnoexpandfields}. This issue doesn't occur
with \XeLaTeX\ or Lua\LaTeX.
\end{important}

With \sty{inputenc}, if you use a~\gls{nonlatinchar} (or other expandable) 
character at the start of an entry name, you must place it in a group, 
or it will cause a problem for commands that convert the first letter 
to upper case (e.g.\ \ics{Gls}). For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{elite}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{\mgroup{\'e}lite},
description=\mgroup{select group or class}}
\end{alltt}
For further details, see the \qt{UTF-8} section in the
\sty{mfirstuc} user manual.

If you are using \gls{xindy} or \gls{bib2gls}, the application needs
to know the encoding of the \filetype{tex} file. This information
is added to the \filetype{aux} file and can be picked up by
\gls{makeglossaries} and \gls{bib2gls}. If you use
\gls{xindy} explicitly instead of via \gls*{makeglossaries},
you may need to specify the encoding using the \xdyopt{C} 
option. Read the \gls*{xindy} manual for further details of this
option.

As from v4.24, if you are writing in German (for example, using the \sty{ngerman}
package\footnote{deprecated, use \styfmt{babel} instead} or
\sty{babel} with the \pkgoptfmt{ngerman} package option),
and you want to use \gls{makeindex}['s] \mkidxopt{g} option, you'll
need to change \gls{makeindex}['s] quote character using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\GlsSetQuote]
\cs{GlsSetQuote}\marg{character}
\end{definition}
Note that \meta{character} may not be one of \verb"?" (question
mark), \verb"|" (pipe) or \verb"!" (exclamation mark).
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsSetQuote{+}
\end{verbatim}
This must be done before \ics{makeglossaries} and any entry
definitions. It's only applicable for \app{makeindex}. This option
in conjunction with \sty{ngerman} will also cause
\app{makeglossaries} to use the \mkidxopt{g} switch when invoking
\app{makeindex}.

\begin{important}
Be careful of \sty{babel}'s shorthands. These aren't switched
on until the start of the document, so any entries defined
in the preamble won't be able to use those shorthands.
However, if you define the entries in the document and any
of those shorthands happen to be special characters for
\gls{makeindex} or \gls{xindy} (such as the double-quote)
then this will interfere with code that tries to escape
any of those characters that occur in the \gloskey{sort} key.
\end{important}

In general, it's best not to use \sty{babel}'s shorthands
in entry definitions. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}

\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
\usepackage{glossaries}

\GlsSetQuote{+}

\makeglossaries

\newglossaryentry{rna}{name={ribonukleins\"aure},
  sort={ribonukleins"aure},
  description={eine Nukleins\"aure}}

\begin{document}
\gls{rna}

\printglossaries
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}

The \sty{ngerman} package has the shorthands on in the preamble, so
they can be used in definitions if \cs{GlsSetQuote} has been used to 
change the \gls{makeindex} quote character.  Example:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}

\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
\usepackage{glossaries}

\GlsSetQuote{+}

\makeglossaries

\newglossaryentry{rna}{name={ribonukleins"aure},
  description={eine Nukleins"aure}}

\begin{document}
\gls{rna}

\printglossaries
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}

\subsection{Changing the Fixed Names}
\label{sec:fixednames}

The fixed names are produced using the commands listed in 
\tableref{tab:predefinednames}. If you aren't using a language
package such as \sty{babel} or \sty{polyglossia} that uses caption
hooks, you can just redefine these commands as appropriate. If you
are using \sty{babel} or \sty{polyglossia}, you need to use their
caption hooks to change the defaults. See \href{https://texfaq.org/FAQ-latexwords}{changing
the words babel uses} or read the \sty{babel} or \sty{polyglossia}
documentation. If you have loaded \sty{babel}, then \sty{glossaries}
will attempt to load \sty{translator}, unless you have used the
\pkgopt{notranslate}, \pkgopt[false]{translate} or  \pkgopt[babel]{translate}
package options. If the \sty{translator} package is loaded, the
translations are provided by dictionary files (for example, 
\texttt{glossaries-dictionary-English.dict}). See the
\sty{translator} package for advice on changing translations provided by
\sty{translator} dictionaries. If you can't work out how to modify
these dictionary definitions, try switching to \sty{babel}'s
interface using \pkgopt[babel]{translate}:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass[english,french]{article}
\usepackage{babel}
\usepackage[translate=babel]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
and then use \sty{babel}'s caption hook mechanism. Note that if you
pass the language options directly to \sty{babel} rather that using
the document class options or otherwise passing the same options to
\sty{translator}, then \sty{translator} won't pick up the
language and no dictionaries will be loaded and \sty{babel}'s
caption hooks will be used instead.

\begin{table}[htbp]
\caption{Customised Text}
\label{tab:predefinednames}
\centering
\setlength{\tabcolsep}{3pt}
\begin{tabular}{@{}l>{\raggedright}p{0.3\linewidth}>{\raggedright}p{0.4\linewidth}@{}}
\bfseries Command Name & \bfseries Translator Key Word &
\bfseries Purpose\cr
\ics{glossaryname} & \texttt{Glossary} & Title of the main glossary.\cr
\ics{acronymname} & \texttt{Acronyms} & Title of the list of acronyms
(when used with package option \pkgopt{acronym}).\cr
\ics{entryname} & \texttt{Notation (glossaries)} & 
Header for first column in the glossary (for 2, 3 or 4 column glossaries 
that support headers).\cr
\ics{descriptionname} & \texttt{Description (glossaries)} &
Header for second column in the glossary (for 2, 3 or 4 column glossaries
that support headers).\cr
\ics{symbolname} & \texttt{Symbol (glossaries)} & Header for symbol
column in the glossary for glossary styles that support this option.\cr
\ics{pagelistname} & \texttt{Page List (glossaries)} & 
Header for page list column in the glossary for glossaries that support 
this option.\cr
\ics{glssymbolsgroupname} & \texttt{Symbols (glossaries)} & 
Header for symbols section of the glossary for glossary styles that 
support this option.\cr
\ics{glsnumbersgroupname} & \texttt{Numbers (glossaries)} & Header for
numbers section of the glossary for glossary styles that support
this option.
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

As from version 4.12, multilingual support is provided by separate
language modules that need to be installed in addition to installing
the \styfmt{glossaries} package. You only need to install the
modules for the languages that you require. If the language module
has an unmaintained status, you can volunteer to take over the
maintenance by contacting me at
\url{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/contact.html}. The
\sty{translator} dictionary files for \styfmt{glossaries} are now
provided by the appropriate language module. For further details
about information specific to a given language, please see the
documentation for that language module.

Examples of use:
\begin{itemize}
\item Using \sty{babel} and \sty{translator}:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass[english,french]{article}
\usepackage{babel}
\usepackage{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
(\sty{translator} is automatically loaded).

\item Using \sty{babel}:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass[english,french]{article}
\usepackage{babel}
\usepackage[translate=babel]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
(\sty{translator} isn't loaded). The \gls{glossaries-extra} package
has \pkgopt[babel]{translate} as the default if \sty{babel} has been
loaded.

\item Using \sty{polyglossia}:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{polyglossia}
\setmainlanguage{english}
\usepackage{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}

\end{itemize}

Due to the varied nature of glossaries, it's likely that the
predefined translations may not be appropriate. If you are using the
\sty{babel} package and the \styfmt{glossaries} package option \pkgopt[babel]{translate}, you need to be familiar with the advice given in
\href{https://texfaq.org/FAQ-latexwords}{changing
the words babel uses}. If you are using the \sty{translator}
package, then you can provide your own dictionary with the necessary
modifications (using \cs{deftranslation}) and load it using
\cs{usedictionary}. If you simply want to change the title of a
glossary, you can use the \gloskey[printglossary]{title} key in
commands like \cs{printglossary} (but not the iterative commands
like \cs{printglossaries}).

\begin{important}
Note that the \sty{translator} dictionaries are loaded at the beginning of the
document, so it won't have any effect if you put \cs{deftranslation}
in the preamble. It should be put in your personal dictionary
instead (as in the example below). See the \sty{translator}
documentation for further details. (Now with \sty{beamer}
documentation.)
\end{important}

Your custom dictionary doesn't have to be just a translation from
English to another language. You may prefer to have a dictionary for
a particular type of document. For example, suppose your
institution's in-house reports have to have the glossary labelled as
\qt{Nomenclature} and the page list should be labelled
\qt{Location}, then you can create a file called, say,
\begin{verbatim}
myinstitute-glossaries-dictionary-English.dict
\end{verbatim}
that contains the following:
\begin{verbatim}
\ProvidesDictionary{myinstitute-glossaries-dictionary}{English}
\deftranslation{Glossary}{Nomenclature}
\deftranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Location}
\end{verbatim}
You can now load it using:
\begin{verbatim}
\usedictionary{myinstitute-glossaries-dictionary}
\end{verbatim}
(Make sure that \texttt{myinstitute-glossaries-dictionary-English.dict}
can be found by \TeX.) If you want to share your custom dictionary,
you can upload it to \href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}.

If you are using \sty{babel} and don't want to use the
\sty{translator} interface, you can use the package
option \pkgopt[babel]{translate}. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass[british]{article}

\usepackage{babel}
\usepackage[translate=babel]{glossaries}

\addto\captionsbritish{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{List of Terms}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{List of Acronyms}%
}
\end{verbatim}

Note that \gls{xindy} and \gls{bib2gls} provide much better multi-lingual support
than \gls{makeindex}, so I~recommend that you use \optsor34
if you have glossary entries that contain 
\glspl{nonlatinchar}. See \sectionref{sec:xindy} for further
details on \gls{xindy}, and see the \gls{bib2gls} user manual for
further details of that application.

\subsection{Creating a New Language Module}
\label{sec:newlang}

The \styfmt{glossaries} package now uses the \sty{tracklang} package
to determine which language modules need to be loaded. If you want
to create a new language module, you should first read the 
\sty{tracklang} documentation.

To create a new language module, you need to at least create two
files called: \texttt{glossaries\dhyphen}\meta{lang}\texttt{.}\filetype{ldf} and
\texttt{glossaries-dictionary-}\meta{Lang}\texttt{.}\filetype{dict} where
\meta{lang} is the root language name (for example,
\texttt{english}) and \meta{Lang} is the language name used by
\sty{translator} (for example, \texttt{English}).

Here's an example of \texttt{glossaries-dictionary-English.dict}:
\begin{verbatim}
\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{English}

\providetranslation{Glossary}{Glossary}
\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Acronyms}
\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Notation}
\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Description}
\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbol}
\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Page List}
\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symbols}
\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Numbers}
\end{verbatim}
You can use this as a template for your dictionary file. Change
\texttt{English} to the \sty{translator} name for your language
(so that it matches the file name
\texttt{glossaries\dhyphen dictionary\dhyphen }\meta{Lang}\texttt{.dict})
and, for each \cs{providetranslation}, change the second argument to
the appropriate translation.

Here's an example of \texttt{glossaries-english.ldf}:
\begin{verbatim}
\ProvidesGlossariesLang{english}

\glsifusedtranslatordict{English}
{%
  \addglossarytocaptions{\CurrentTrackedLanguage}%
  \addglossarytocaptions{\CurrentTrackedDialect}%
}
{%
  \@ifpackageloaded{polyglossia}%
  {%
    \newcommand*{\glossariescaptionsenglish}{%
      \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\textenglish{Glossary}}%
      \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\textenglish{Acronyms}}%
      \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\textenglish{Notation}}%
      \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\textenglish{Description}}%
      \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\textenglish{Symbol}}%
      \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\textenglish{Page List}}%
      \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\textenglish{Symbols}}%
      \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\textenglish{Numbers}}%
    }%
  }%
  {%
    \newcommand*{\glossariescaptionsenglish}{%
      \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}%
      \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}%
      \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notation}%
      \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}%
      \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
      \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}%
      \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}%
      \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}%
    }%
  }%
  \ifcsdef{captions\CurrentTrackedDialect}
  {%
    \csappto{captions\CurrentTrackedDialect}%
    {%
      \glossariescaptionsenglish
    }%
  }%
  {%
    \ifcsdef{captions\CurrentTrackedLanguage}
    {
      \csappto{captions\CurrentTrackedLanguage}%
      {%
        \glossariescaptionsenglish
      }%
    }%
    {%
    }%
  }%
  \glossariescaptionsenglish
}
\renewcommand*{\glspluralsuffix}{s}
\renewcommand*{\glsacrpluralsuffix}{\glspluralsuffix}
\renewcommand*{\glsupacrpluralsuffix}{\glstextup{\glspluralsuffix}}
\end{verbatim}
This is a somewhat longer file, but again you can use it as a
template. Replace \texttt{English} with the \sty{translator}
language label \meta{Lang} used for the dictionary file and
replace \texttt{english} with the root language name \meta{lang}. Within the
definition of \cs{glossariescaptions}\meta{lang}, replace the
English text (such as \qt{Glossaries}) with the appropriate
translation.

\importantpar
\label{pluralsuffix}%
The suffixes used to generate the plural forms when the plural
hasn't been specified are given by \cs{glspluralsuffix} (for general
entries). For abbreviations defined with \cs{newacronym},
\cs{glsupacrpluralsuffix} is used for acronyms where the suffix
needs to be set using \cs{glstextup} to counteract the effects of
\cs{textsc} and \cs{glsacrpluralsuffix} for other acronym styles.
There's no guarantee when these commands will be expanded. They may
be expanded on definition or they may be expanded on use, depending
on the \styfmt{glossaries} configuration.

\begin{important}
Therefore these plural suffix command definitions
aren't included in the caption mechanism as that's typically not switched on
until the start of the document. \strong{This means that the suffix in
effect will be for the last loaded language that redefined these
commands.} It's best to initialise these commands to the most common
suffix required in your document and use the \gloskey{plural},
\gloskey{longplural}, \gloskey{shortplural} etc keys to override
exceptions.
\end{important}

If you want to add a regional variation, create a file called 
\texttt{glossaries-}\meta{iso lang}\texttt{-}\meta{iso
country}\texttt{.ldf}, where \meta{iso lang} is the ISO language
code and \meta{iso country} is the ISO country code. For example,
\texttt{glossaries-en-GB.ldf}. This file can load the root
language file and make the appropriate changes, for example:
\begin{verbatim}
 \ProvidesGlossariesLang{en-GB}
 \RequireGlossariesLang{english}
 \glsifusedtranslatordict{British}
 {%
   \addglossarytocaptions{\CurrentTrackedLanguage}%
   \addglossarytocaptions{\CurrentTrackedDialect}%
 }
 {%
   \@ifpackageloaded{polyglossia}%
   {%
     % Modify \glossariescaptionsenglish as appropriate for
     % polyglossia
   }%
   {%
     % Modify \glossariescaptionsenglish as appropriate for
     % non-polyglossia
   }%
 }
\end{verbatim}

If the translations includes \glspl{nonlatinchar}, it's necessary to
provide code that's independent of the input encoding. Remember that
while some users may use \gls{UTF-8}, others may use Latin-1 or any other
supported encoding, but while users won't appreciate you enforcing
your preference on them, it's useful to provide a \gls{UTF-8} version for
\XeLaTeX\ and \LuaLaTeX\ users.

The \texttt{glossaries-irish.ldf} file provides this as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\ProvidesGlossariesLang{irish}

\glsifusedtranslatordict{Irish}
{%
  \addglossarytocaptions{\CurrentTrackedLanguage}%
  \addglossarytocaptions{\CurrentTrackedDialect}%
}
{%
  \ifdefstring{\inputencodingname}{utf8}
  {\input{glossaries-irish-utf8.ldf}}%
  {%
    \ifdef{\XeTeXinputencoding}% XeTeX defaults to UTF-8
    {\input{glossaries-irish-utf8.ldf}}%
    {\input{glossaries-irish-noenc.ldf}}
  }
  \ifcsdef{captions\CurrentTrackedDialect}
  {%
    \csappto{captions\CurrentTrackedDialect}%
    {%
      \glossariescaptionsirish
    }%
  }%
  {%
    \ifcsdef{captions\CurrentTrackedLanguage}
    {
      \csappto{captions\CurrentTrackedLanguage}%
      {%
        \glossariescaptionsirish
      }%
    }%
    {%
    }%
  }%
  \glossariescaptionsirish
}
\end{verbatim}
(Again you can use this as a template. Replace \texttt{irish} with
your root language label and \texttt{Irish} with the
\sty{translator} dictionary label.)

There are now two extra files: \nolinkurl{glossaries-irish-noenc.ldf}
(no encoding information)
and \nolinkurl{glossaries-irish-utf8.ldf} (\gls{UTF-8}).

These both define \cs{glossariescaptionsirish} but the \texttt{*-noenc.ldf} uses
\LaTeX\ accent commands:
\begin{verbatim}
\@ifpackageloaded{polyglossia}%
{%
  \newcommand*{\glossariescaptionsirish}{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\textirish{Gluais}}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\textirish{Acrainmneacha}}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\textirish{Ciall}}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\textirish{Tuairisc}}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\textirish{Comhartha}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\textirish{Comhartha\'{\i}}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\textirish{Leathanaigh}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\textirish{Uimhreacha}}%
  }%
}%
{%
  \newcommand*{\glossariescaptionsirish}{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Gluais}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acrainmneacha}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Ciall}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Tuairisc}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Comhartha}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Comhartha\'{\i}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Leathanaigh}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Uimhreacha}%
  }%
}
\end{verbatim}
whereas the \texttt{*-utf8.ldf} replaces the accent commands with
the appropriate \gls{UTF-8} characters.


\section{Generating the Associated Glossary Files}
\label{sec:makeglossaries}

\begin{important}
This section is only applicable if you have chosen \optsor23. You can
ignore this section if you have chosen any of the other options. If you want to
alphabetically sort your entries always remember to use the
\gloskey{sort} key if the \gloskey{name} contains any \LaTeX\
commands (except if you're using \gls{bib2gls}).
\end{important}

If this section seriously confuses you, and you can't work out how
to run external tools like \gls{makeglossaries} or \gls{makeindex}, you can try using
the \pkgopt{automake} package option, described in 
\sectionref{sec:pkgopts-sort}, but you will need \TeX's shell escape
enabled. See also
\href{https://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/buildglossaries/}{Incorporating
makeglossaries or makeglossaries-lite or bib2gls into the document
build}.

In order to generate a sorted glossary with compact
\glspl{numberlist}, it is necessary to use an external
\gls{indexingapp} as an intermediate step (unless you have chosen
\opt1, which uses \TeX\ to do the sorting or \opt5, which doesn't
perform any sorting). It is this application
that creates the file containing the code required to typeset the
glossary. \strong{If this step is omitted, the glossaries will not
appear in your document.} The two \glspl*{indexingapp} that are most
commonly used with \LaTeX\ are \gls{makeindex} and \gls{xindy}. As
from version 1.17, the \styfmt{glossaries} package can be used with
either of these applications. Previous versions were designed to be
used with \gls*{makeindex} only. With the \gls{glossaries-extra} package, you
can also use \gls{bib2gls} as the indexing application. (See
the \gls{glossaries-extra} and \gls{bib2gls} user manuals for
further details.) Note that \gls*{xindy} and \gls*{bib2gls} have much
better multi-lingual support than \gls*{makeindex}, so \gls*{xindy}
or \gls*{bib2gls} are recommended if you're not writing in English. 
Commands that only have an effect when \gls*{xindy} is used are
described in \sectionref{sec:xindy}.

\begin{important}
This is a multi-stage process, but there are methods of automating
document compilation using applications such as \app{latexmk} and
\app{arara}. With \app{arara} you can just add special comments to
your document source:
\begin{alltt}
\% arara: pdflatex
\% arara: makeglossaries
\% arara: pdflatex
\end{alltt}
With \app{latexmk} you need to set up the required dependencies.
\end{important}

The \styfmt{glossaries} package comes with the Perl script
\gls{makeglossaries} which will run \gls{makeindex} or \gls{xindy}
on all the glossary files using a customized style file (which is
created by \ics{makeglossaries}). See
\sectionref{sec:makeglossariesapp} for further
details. Perl is stable, cross-platform, open source software that
is used by a number of \TeX-related applications (including
\gls*{xindy} and \app{latexmk}). Most Unix-like
operating systems come with a~Perl interpreter. \TeX~Live also comes
with a~Perl interpreter. MiK\TeX\ doesn't come with a~Perl
interpreter so if you are a~Windows MiK\TeX\ user you will need to
install Perl if you want to use \gls{makeglossaries} or \gls{xindy}.
Further information is available at \url{http://www.perl.org/about.html}
and
\href{http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/158796/miktex-and-perl-scripts-and-one-python-script}{MiKTeX and Perl scripts (and one Python script)}.

The advantages of using \gls*{makeglossaries}:
\begin{itemize}
\item It automatically detects whether to use \gls*{makeindex} or
\gls*{xindy} and sets the relevant application switches.

\item One call of \gls*{makeglossaries} will run 
\gls*{makeindex}\slash\gls*{xindy} for each glossary type.

\item If things go wrong, \gls{makeglossaries} will scan the
messages from \gls{makeindex} or \gls{xindy} and attempt to diagnose
the problem in relation to the \styfmt{glossaries} package. This
will hopefully provide more helpful messages in some cases. If it
can't diagnose the problem, you will have to read the relevant transcript
file and see if you can work it out from the \gls*{makeindex} or
\gls*{xindy} messages.

\item If \gls{makeindex} warns about multiple encap values,
\gls{makeglossaries} will detect this and attempt to correct the
problem.\footnote{Added to version \gls{makeglossaries} 2.18.} This
correction is only provided by \gls{makeglossaries} when
\gls{makeindex} is used since \gls{xindy} uses the order of the
\ixindyattrs attributes list to determine which format should take precedence.
(see \sectionref{sec:xindyloc}.)

\end{itemize}

As from version 4.16, the \styfmt{glossaries} package also comes
with a~Lua script called \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua}. This is a
\emph{trimmed-down} alternative to the \gls{makeglossaries} Perl
script. It doesn't have some of the options that the Perl version
has and it doesn't attempt to diagnose any problems, but since
modern \TeX\ distributions come with Lua\TeX\ (and therefore have
a~Lua interpreter) you don't need to install anything else in order
to use \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua} so it's an alternative to
\gls{makeglossaries} if you want to use \opt2 (\gls{makeindex}).

If things go wrong and you can't work out why your glossaries
aren't being generated correctly, you can use
\gls{makeglossariesgui} as a diagnostic tool. Once you've
fixed the problem, you can then go back to using
\gls{makeglossaries} or \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua}.

Whilst I strongly recommended that you use the \gls{makeglossaries}
Perl script or the \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua} Lua script, it is
possible to use the \styfmt{glossaries} package without using those
applications. However, note that some commands and package options
have no effect if you explicitly run \gls{makeindex}\slash\gls{xindy}.  
These are listed in \tableref{tab:makeglossariesCmds}.

\begin{important}
If you are choosing not to use \gls*{makeglossaries} because you
don't want to install Perl, you will only be able to use
\gls*{makeindex} as \gls*{xindy} also requires Perl. (Other useful
Perl scripts include \appfmt{epstopdf} and \appfmt{latexmk}, so it's
well-worth the effort to install Perl.)
\end{important}

Note that if any of your entries use an entry
that is not referenced outside the glossary, you will need to
do an additional \gls{makeglossaries}, \gls{makeindex}
or \gls{xindy} run, as appropriate. For example,
suppose you have defined the following entries:\footnote{As from
v3.01 \ics{gls} is no longer fragile and doesn't need protecting.}
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{citrusfruit}{name={citrus fruit},
description={fruit of any citrus tree. (See also 
\gls{orange})}}

\newglossaryentry{orange}{name={orange},
description={an orange coloured fruit.}}
\end{verbatim}
and suppose you have \verb|\gls{citrusfruit}| in your document
but don't reference the \texttt{orange} entry, then the
\texttt{orange} entry won't appear in your glossary until
you first create the glossary and then do another run
of \gls{makeglossaries}, \gls{makeindex} or \gls{xindy}.
For example, if the document is called \texttt{myDoc.tex}, then
you must do:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex myDoc
makeglossaries myDoc
pdflatex myDoc
makeglossaries myDoc
pdflatex myDoc
\end{prompt}
(In the case of \opt4, \gls{bib2gls} will scan the description for
instances of commands like \cs{gls} to ensure they are selected but
an extra \gls{bib2gls} call is required to ensure the locations are
included, if locations lists are required. See the
and \gls{bib2gls} manual for further details.)

Likewise, an additional \gls{makeglossaries} and \LaTeX\ run
may be required if the document pages shift with re-runs. For
example, if the page numbering is not reset after the table of
contents, the insertion of the table of contents on the second
\LaTeX\ run may push glossary entries across page boundaries, which
means that the \glspl{numberlist} in the glossary may 
need updating.

The examples in this document assume that you are accessing
\gls{makeglossaries}, \gls{xindy} or \gls{makeindex} via a terminal.
Windows users can use the MSDOS Prompt which is usually accessed via
the \menu{Start}\submenu{All Programs} menu or
\menu{Start}\submenu{All Programs}\submenu{Accessories} menu.

Alternatively, your text editor may have the facility to create a
function that will call the required application. See
\href{https://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/buildglossaries/}{Incorporating
makeglossaries or makeglossaries-lite or bib2gls into the document
build}.

If any problems occur, remember to check the transcript files 
(e.g.\ \filetype{glg} or \filetype{alg}) for messages.

\begin{table}[htbp]
\caption[Commands and package options that have no effect when
using xindy or makeindex explicitly]{Commands and package options that have no effect when
using \gls{xindy} or \gls{makeindex} explicitly}
\label{tab:makeglossariesCmds}
\vskip\baselineskip
\begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
\bfseries Command or Package Option & \gls{makeindex} & 
\gls{xindy}\\
\pkgopt[letter]{order} & use \mkidxopt{l} &
 use \xdyopt{M}\texttt{ ord/letorder}\\
\pkgopt[word]{order} & default & default\\
\pkgopt{xindy}=\{\pkgoptfmt{language=}\meta{lang}\pkgoptfmt{,codename=}\meta{code}\} &
N/A & use \xdyopt{L} \meta{lang} \xdyopt{C} \meta{code}\\
\ics{GlsSetXdyLanguage}\marg{lang} & N/A &
use \xdyopt{L} \meta{lang}\\
\ics{GlsSetXdyCodePage}\marg{code} & N/A &
use \xdyopt{C} \meta{code}
\end{tabular}
\par
\end{table}


\subsection{Using the makeglossaries Perl Script}
\label{sec:makeglossariesapp}

The \gls{makeglossaries} script picks up the relevant information
from the auxiliary (\filetype{aux}) file and will either call
\gls{xindy} or \gls{makeindex}, depending on the supplied
information. Therefore, you only need to pass the document's name
without the extension to \gls*{makeglossaries}. For example, if your
document is called \texttt{myDoc.tex}, type the following in your
terminal:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex myDoc
makeglossaries myDoc
pdflatex myDoc
\end{prompt}
You may need to explicitly load \gls{makeglossaries} into Perl:
\begin{prompt}
perl makeglossaries myDoc
\end{prompt}

Windows users: \TeX~Live on Windows has its own internal Perl
interpreter and provides \texttt{makeglossaries.exe} as a~convenient
wrapper for the \gls{makeglossaries} Perl script. MiKTeX also
provides a~wrapper \texttt{makeglossaries.exe} but doesn't provide
a~Perl interpreter, which is still required even if you run MiKTeX's
\texttt{makeglossaries.exe}, so with MiKTeX you'll need to install
Perl.\footnote{The batch file \texttt{makeglossaries.bat} has been
removed since the \TeX\ distributions for Windows provide
\texttt{makeglossaries.exe}.} There's more information about this at
\url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/q/158796/19862} on the TeX.SX
site. 

The \gls{makeglossaries} script attempts to fork the
\gls{makeindex}\slash\gls{xindy} process using \texttt{open()} on the
piped redirection \verb"2>&1 |" and parses the processor output to
help diagnose problems.  If this method fails \gls{makeglossaries}
will print an \qt{Unable to fork} warning and will retry without
redirection. If you run \gls{makeglossaries} on an operating system
that doesn't support this form of redirection, then you can use the
\mkglsopt{Q} switch to suppress this warning or you can use the
\mkglsopt{k} switch to make \gls{makeglossaries} automatically use
the fallback method without attempting the redirection. Without this
redirection, the \mkglsopt{q} (quiet) switch doesn't work as well.

You can specify in which directory the \filetype{aux}, 
\filetype{glo} etc files are located using the \texttt{-d} switch.
For example:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex -output-directory myTmpDir myDoc
makeglossaries -d myTmpDir myDoc
\end{prompt}
Note that \gls*{makeglossaries} assumes by default that
\gls*{makeindex}\slash\gls*{xindy} is on your operating system's
path. If this isn't the case, you can specify the full pathname
using \mkglsopt{m} \meta{path/to/makeindex} for \gls*{makeindex}
or \mkglsopt{x} \meta{path/to/xindy} for \gls*{xindy}.

As from \gls{makeglossaries} v2.18, if you are using
\gls{makeindex}, there's a check for \gls*{makeindex}['s] multiple
encap warning. This is where different encap values (location formats) are 
used on the same location for the same entry. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}

\usepackage{glossaries}
\makeglossaries

\newglossaryentry{sample}{name={sample},description={an example}}

\begin{document}
\gls{sample}, \gls[format=textbf]{sample}.
\printglossaries
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}
If you explicitly use \gls{makeindex}, this will cause a warning and
the location list will be \qt{1, \textbf{1}}. That is, the page
number will be repeated with each format. As from v2.18,
\gls{makeglossaries} will check for this warning and, if found, will
attempt to correct the problem by removing duplicate locations and
retrying. There's no similar check for \gls{xindy} as \gls*{xindy}
won't produce any warning and will simply discard duplicates.

For a complete list of options do \texttt{makeglossaries -{}-help}.

\begin{important}
When upgrading the \styfmt{glossaries} package, make sure you also
upgrade your version of \gls{makeglossaries}. The current version is
4.49.
\end{important}

\subsection{Using the makeglossaries-lite Lua Script}
\label{sec:makeglossarieslua}

The Lua alternative to the \gls{makeglossaries} Perl script requires
a~Lua interpreter, which should already be available if you have
a~modern \TeX\ distribution that includes Lua\TeX. Lua is 
a~light-weight, cross-platform scripting language, but because it's
light-weight it doesn't have the full-functionality of heavy-weight
scripting languages, such as Perl. The \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua}
script is therefore limited by this and some of the options
available to the \gls{makeglossaries} Perl script aren't available
here. (In particular the \mkglsopt{d} option.)

\begin{important}
Note that \TeX~Live on Unix-like systems creates a
symbolic link called \texttt{makeglossaries-lite} (without the
\filetype{lua} extension) to the actual
\texttt{makeglossaries-lite.lua} script, so you may not need to
supply the extension.
\end{important}

The \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua} script can be invoked in the same way
as \gls{makeglossaries}. For example, if your document is called
\texttt{myDoc.tex}, then do
\begin{prompt}
makeglossaries-lite.lua myDoc
\end{prompt}
or
\begin{prompt}
makeglossaries-lite myDoc
\end{prompt}

\emph{Some} of the options available with the Perl
\gls{makeglossaries} script are also available with the Lua \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua}
script. For a complete list of available options, do
\begin{prompt}
makeglossaries-lite.lua -{}-help
\end{prompt}


\subsection[Using xindy explicitly (Option~3)]{Using
\gls{xindy} explicitly (\ifpdf \opt3\else Option 3\fi)}
\label{sec:xindyapp}

\Gls{xindy} comes with \TeX~Live. It has also been added
to Mik\TeX, but if you don't have it installed, see
\href{http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/71167/how-to-use-xindy-with-miktex}{How
to use Xindy with MikTeX} on
\urlfootref{http://www.stackexchange.com/}{\TeX\ on StackExchange}.

If you want to use \gls{xindy} to process the glossary
files, you must make sure you have used the 
\pkgopt{xindy} package option:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[xindy]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
This is required regardless of whether you use \gls{xindy}
explicitly or whether it's called implicitly via applications such
as \gls{makeglossaries}. This causes the glossary 
entries to be written in raw \gls*{xindy} format, so you need to
use \xdyopt{I}\texttt{ xindy} \emph{not} \xdyopt{I}\texttt{ tex}.

To run \gls{xindy} type the following in your terminal 
(all on one line):
\begin{prompt}
xindy -L \meta{language} -C \meta{encoding} -I xindy -M \meta{style} -t \meta{base}.glg -o \meta{base}.gls \meta{base}.glo
\end{prompt}
where \meta{language} is the required language name, \meta{encoding}
is the encoding, \meta{base} is the name of the document without the
\filetype{tex} extension and \meta{style} is the name of the
\gls{xindy} style file without the \filetype{xdy} extension.
The default name for this style file is \meta{base}\filetype{xdy}
but can be changed via \ics{setStyleFile}\marg{style}. You may need
to specify the full path name depending on the current working
directory. If any of the file names contain spaces, you must delimit
them using double-quotes.

For example, if your document is called \texttt{myDoc.tex} and
you are using UTF8 encoding in English, then type the
following in your terminal:
\begin{prompt}
xindy -L english -C utf8 -I xindy -M myDoc -t myDoc.glg -o myDoc.gls myDoc.glo
\end{prompt}

Note that this just creates the main glossary. You need to do
the same for each of the other glossaries (including the
list of acronyms if you have used the \pkgopt{acronym}
package option), substituting \filetype{glg}, \filetype{gls}
and \filetype{glo} with the relevant extensions. For example,
if you have used the \pkgopt{acronym} package option, then 
you would need to do:
\begin{prompt}
xindy -L english -C utf8 -I xindy -M myDoc -t myDoc.alg -o myDoc.acr myDoc.acn
\end{prompt}
For additional glossaries, the extensions are those supplied
when you created the glossary with \ics{newglossary}.

Note that if you use \gls{makeglossaries} instead, you can
replace all those calls to \gls{xindy} with just one call
to \gls*{makeglossaries}:
\begin{prompt}
makeglossaries myDoc
\end{prompt}
Note also that some commands and package options have no effect if 
you use \gls{xindy} explicitly instead of using 
\gls*{makeglossaries}. These are listed in 
\tableref{tab:makeglossariesCmds}.


\subsection[Using makeindex explicitly (Option~2)]{Using
\gls{makeindex} explicitly (\ifpdf \opt2\else Option 2\fi)}
\label{sec:makeindexapp}

If you want to use \gls{makeindex} explicitly, you must
make sure that you haven't used the \pkgopt{xindy} package
option or the glossary entries will be written in the wrong
format. To run \gls*{makeindex}, type the following in
your terminal:
\begin{prompt}
makeindex -s \meta{style}.ist -t \meta{base}.glg -o \meta{base}.gls \meta{base}.glo
\end{prompt}
where \meta{base} is the name of your document without the
\filetype{tex} extension and \meta{style}\filetype{ist} is the 
name of the \gls{makeindex} style file. By default, this is
\meta{base}\filetype{ist}, but may be changed via
\ics{setStyleFile}\marg{style}. Note that there are other options, 
such as \mkidxopt{l} (letter ordering). See the \gls*{makeindex}
manual for further details.

For example, if your document is called \texttt{myDoc.tex}, then
type the following at the terminal:
\begin{prompt}
makeindex -s myDoc.ist -t myDoc.glg -o myDoc.gls myDoc.glo
\end{prompt}
Note that this only creates the main glossary. If you have
additional glossaries (for example, if you have used the
\pkgopt{acronym} package option) then you must call 
\gls{makeindex} for each glossary, substituting 
\filetype{glg}, \filetype{gls} and \filetype{glo} with the
relevant extensions. For example, if you have used the
\pkgopt{acronym} package option, then you need to type the
following in your terminal:
\begin{prompt}
makeindex -s myDoc.ist -t myDoc.alg -o myDoc.acr myDoc.acn
\end{prompt}
For additional glossaries, the extensions are those supplied
when you created the glossary with \ics{newglossary}.

Note that if you use \gls{makeglossaries} instead, you can
replace all those calls to \gls{makeindex} with just one call
to \gls*{makeglossaries}:
\begin{prompt}
makeglossaries myDoc
\end{prompt}
Note also that some commands and package options have no effect if 
you use \gls*{makeindex} explicitly instead of using 
\gls{makeglossaries}. These are listed in 
\tableref{tab:makeglossariesCmds}.

\section{Note to Front-End and Script Developers}
\label{sec:notedev}

The information needed to determine whether to use \gls{xindy},
\gls{makeindex} or \gls{bib2gls} is stored in the \filetype{aux}
file. This information can be gathered by a front-end, editor or
script to make the glossaries where appropriate. This section
describes how the information is stored in the auxiliary file.

\subsection{MakeIndex and Xindy}
\label{sec:notedev.makeindex.xindy}

The file extensions used by each defined (but not ignored) glossary are given by
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\@newglossary}]
\cs{@newglossary}\marg{label}\marg{log}\marg{out-ext}\marg{in-ext}
\end{definition}
where \meta{in-ext} is the extension of the
\emph{\gls{indexingapp}['s]} input file (the output file from the
\styfmt{glossaries} package's point of view), \meta{out-ext} is the
extension of the \emph{\gls*{indexingapp}['s]} output file (the
input file from the \styfmt{glossaries} package's point of view) and
\meta{log} is the extension of the \gls*{indexingapp}['s] transcript
file. The label for the glossary is also given. This isn't required
with \gls{makeindex}, but with \gls{xindy} it's needed to pick up
the associated language and encoding (see below). For
example, the information for the default main glossary is written
as:
\begin{verbatim}
\@newglossary{main}{glg}{gls}{glo}
\end{verbatim}
If \gls{glossaries-extra}['s] hybrid method has been used (with 
\cs{makeglossaries}\oarg{sub-list}), then the sub-list
of glossaries that need to be processed will be identified with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsxtr@makeglossaries}\marg{list}
\end{alltt}

The \gls{indexingapp}['s] style file is specified by
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\@istfilename}]
\cs{@istfilename}\marg{filename}
\end{definition}
The file extension indicates whether to use \gls{makeindex}
(\filetype{ist}) or \gls{xindy} (\filetype{xdy}). Note that
the glossary information is formatted differently depending on
which \gls*{indexingapp} is supposed to be used, so it's 
important to call the correct one.

For example, with \app{arara} you can easily determine whether to run \gls{makeglossaries}:
\begin{alltt}
\% arara: makeglossaries if found("aux", "@istfilename")
\end{alltt}
It's more complicated if you want to explicitly run \gls{makeindex}
or \gls{xindy}

\begin{important}
Note that if you choose to explicitly call \gls{makeindex} or
\gls{xindy} then the user will miss out on the diagnostic
information and the encap-clash fix that \gls{makeglossaries} also
provides.
\end{important}

Word or letter ordering is specified by:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\@glsorder}]
\cs{@glsorder}\marg{order}
\end{definition}
where \meta{order} can be either \texttt{word} or \texttt{letter}.

If \gls{xindy} should be used, the language and code page
for each glossary is specified by
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\@xdylanguage}\DescribeMacro{\@gls@codepage}]
\cs{@xdylanguage}\marg{label}\marg{language}\\
\cs{@gls@codepage}\marg{label}\marg{code}
\end{definition}
where \meta{label} identifies the glossary, \meta{language} is
the root language (e.g.\ \texttt{english}) and \meta{code}
is the encoding (e.g.\ \texttt{utf8}). These commands are omitted
if \gls{makeindex} should be used.

If \opt1 has been used, the \filetype{aux} file will contain
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\@gls@reference]
\cs{@gls@reference}\marg{type}\marg{label}\marg{location}
\end{definition}
for every time an entry has been referenced. 

\subsection{Entry Labels}
\label{sec:notedev.labels}

If you need to gather labels for auto-completion, the
\pkgopt{writeglslabels} package option will create a file containing
the labels of all defined entries (regardless of whether or not the
entry has been used in the document). As from v4.47, there is a
similar option \pkgopt{writeglslabelnames} that writes both the
label and name (separated by a tab).

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra}
package also provides \pkgopt+{atom}{docdef}, which will create the
\filetype{glsdefs} file but will act like \pkgopt+{restricted}{docdef}.
\end{xtr}

\subsection{Bib2Gls}
\label{sec:notedev.bib2gls}

\bibglsnote
If \opt4 has been used, the \filetype{aux} file will contain one or more instances of
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsxtr@resource}\marg{options}\marg{basename}
\end{alltt}
where \meta{basename} is the basename of the \filetype{glstex} file
that needs to be created by \gls{bib2gls}. If \texttt{src\dequals\marg{bib
list}} isn't present in \meta{options} then \meta{basename} also
indicates the name of the associated \filetype{bib} file.

For example, with \app{arara} you can easily determine whether or
not to run \gls{bib2gls}:
\begin{alltt}
\% arara: bib2gls if found("aux", "glsxtr@resource")
\end{alltt}
(It gets more complicated if both \ics*{glsxtr@resource} and
\cs{@istfilename} are present as that indicates the hybrid
\pkgopt+{hybrid}{record} option.)

Remember that with \gls{bib2gls}, the entries will never be defined
on the first \LaTeX\ call (because their definitions are contained
in the \filetype{glstex} file created by \gls{bib2gls}). You can
also pick up labels from the records in \filetype{aux} file, which
will be in the form:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsxtr@record}\marg{label}\marg{h-prefix}\marg{counter}\marg{format}\marg{loc}
\end{alltt} 
or (with \pkgopt+{nameref}{record})
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsxtr@record@nameref}\marg{label}\marg{href prefix}\marg{counter}\marg{format}\marg{location}\marg{title}\marg{href anchor}\marg{href value}
\end{alltt}
or (with \cs{glssee})
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsxtr@recordsee}\marg{label}\marg{xr list}
\end{alltt}
You can also pick up the commands defined with
\ics*{glsxtrnewglslike}, which are added to the \filetype{aux} file
for \gls{bib2gls}['s] benefit:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{@glsxtr@newglslike}\marg{label-prefix}\marg{cs}
\end{alltt}
If \ics*{GlsXtrSetAltModifier} is used, then the modifier is
identified with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{@glsxtr@altmodifier}\marg{character}
\end{alltt}
Label prefixes (for the \ics*{dgls} set of commands) are identified
with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{@glsxtr@prefixlabellist}\marg{list}
\end{alltt}

\chapter{Package Options}
\label{sec:pkgopts}

This section describes the available \styfmt{glossaries} package
options. You may omit the \texttt{=true} for boolean options. (For
example, \pkgopt{acronym} is equivalent to \pkgopt[true]{acronym}).

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package has additional options described
in the \gls*{glossaries-extra} manual. The extension package also
has some different default settings to the base package. Those that
are available at the time of writing are included here. Future
versions of \gls{glossaries-extra} may have additional package
options or new values for existing settings that aren't listed here. 
\end{xtr}

\begin{important}
Note that \meta{key}=\meta{value} package options can't be passed via the
document class options. (This includes options where the
\meta{value} part may be omitted, such as \pkgopt{acronym}.) This is
a general limitation not restricted to the \styfmt{glossaries}
package. Options that aren't \meta{key}=\meta{value} (such as
\pkgopt{makeindex}) may be passed via the document class options.
\end{important}

\section{General Options}
\label{sec:pkgopts-general}

\pkgoptsec{nowarn} This suppresses all warnings generated by
the \styfmt{glossaries} package. Don't use this option if you're new to using
\styfmt{glossaries} as the warnings are designed to help detect
common mistakes (such as forgetting to use \ics{makeglossaries}).
Note that if you use \pkgopt{debug} with any value other than
\pkgoptfmt{false} it will override this option.

\pkgoptsec{nolangwarn} This suppresses the warning generated by
a missing language module.

\pkgoptsec{noredefwarn} If you load \styfmt{glossaries} with
a~class or another package that already defines glossary related
commands, by default \styfmt{glossaries} will warn you that it's
redefining those commands. If you are aware of the consequences of
using \styfmt{glossaries} with that class or package and you don't
want to be warned about it, use this option to suppress those
warnings. Other warnings will still be issued unless you use the
\pkgopt{nowarn} option described above. (This option is
automatically switched on by \gls{glossaries-extra}.)

\pkgoptsec[value]{debug} Introduced in version 4.24.  The default
setting is \pkgopt[false]{debug}.  The following values are
available: \pkgoptfmt{false}, \pkgoptfmt{true},
\pkgoptfmt{showtargets} (v4.32+) and \pkgoptfmt{showaccsupp}
(v4.45+). If no value is given, \pkgopt[true]{debug} is assumed.

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides extra values
\pkgoptval*{showwrgloss}{debug}, that may be used to show where
the indexing is occurring, and \pkgoptval*{all}{debug}, which
switches on all debugging options. See the \gls{glossaries-extra}
manual for further details.
\end{xtr}

All values other than \pkgopt[false]{debug} switch on the debug mode
(and will automatically cancel the \pkgopt{nowarn} option).  The
\pkgopt[showtargets]{debug} option will additionally use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsshowtarget]
\cs{glsshowtarget}\marg{target name}
\end{definition}
to show the hypertarget or hyperlink name when 
\cs{glsdohypertarget} is used by commands like \cs{glstarget}
and when \cs{glsdohyperlink} is used by commands like \cs{gls}.
In math mode or inner mode, this puts the target name in square
brackets just before the link or anchor. In outer mode it uses:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsshowtargetouter]
\cs{glsshowtargetouter}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
which by default places the target name in the margin. The font is
given by:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsshowtargetfont]
\cs{glsshowtargetfont}
\end{definition}
The default definition is \verb|\ttfamily\small|. This command is
included in the definition of \cs{glsshowtargetouter}, so if you
want to redefine that command remember to include the font. For
example:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glsshowtargetouter}[1]{%
 {\glsshowtargetfont [#1]}}
\end{verbatim}

Similarly, the \pkgopt[showaccsupp]{debug} will add the
accessibility support information using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsshowaccsupp]
\cs{glsshowaccsupp}\marg{options}\marg{tag}\marg{replacement text}
\end{definition}
This internally uses \ics{glsshowtarget}. This option is provided
for use with \sty{glossaries-accsupp}.

The purpose of the debug mode can be demonstrated with
the following example document:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{documentclass}\mgroup{article}
\cs{usepackage}\mgroup{glossaries}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{sample1}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{sample1},description=\mgroup{example}}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{sample2}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{sample2},description=\mgroup{example}}
\strong{\ics{glsadd}}\mgroup{sample2}\% <- does nothing here
\strong{\ics{makeglossaries}}
\cs{begin}\mgroup{document}
\cs{gls}\mgroup{sample1}.
\cs{printglossaries}
\cs{end}\mgroup{document}
\end{alltt}
In this case, only the \texttt{sample1} entry has been indexed, even
though \verb|\glsadd{sample2}| appears in the source code.
This is because \verb|\glsadd{sample2}| has been used before the
associated file is opened by \ics{makeglossaries}. Since the file
isn't open yet, the information can't be written to it, which is why
the \texttt{sample2} entry doesn't appear in the glossary.

Without \cs{makeglossaries} the indexing is suppressed with \optsand23 but, other
than that, commands like \cs{gls} behave as usual.

This situation doesn't cause any errors or warnings as it's
perfectly legitimate for a user to want to use \styfmt{glossaries}
to format the entries (e.g.\ abbreviation expansion) but not display
any lists of terms, abbreviations, symbols etc (or the user may
prefer to use the unsorted \optsor56).
It's also possible that the user may want to temporarily comment out
\cs{makeglossaries} in order to suppress the indexing while working
on a draft version to speed compilation, or the user may
prefer to use \optsor14 for indexing, which don't use \cs{makeglossaries}.

Therefore \cs{makeglossaries} can't be used to enable
\cs{newglossaryentry} and commands like \cs{gls} and \cs{glsadd}.
These commands must be enabled by default. (It does, however, enable
the \gloskey{see} key as that's a more common problem. See below.)

The debug mode, enabled with the \pkgopt{debug} option,
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[debug]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
will write information to the log file when the indexing
can't occur because the associated file isn't open.
The message is written in the form
\begin{quote}
Package glossaries Info: wrglossary(\meta{type})(\meta{text}) on
input line \meta{line number}.
\end{quote}
where \meta{type} is the glossary label and \meta{text} is the line
of text that would've been written to the associated file if
it had been open. So if any entries haven't appeared in the
glossary but you're sure you used commands like \cs{glsadd}
or \cs{glsaddall}, try switching on the \pkgopt{debug} option
and see if any information has been written to the log file.

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{savewrites} This is a boolean option to minimise the
number of write registers used by the \styfmt{glossaries} package.
The default is \pkgopt[false]{savewrites}. With \optsand23, one
write register is required per (non-ignored) glossary and one for
the style file.

With all options except \optsand14, another write register is
required if the \filetype{docdefs} file is needed to save document
definitions. With both \optsand14, no write registers are required
(document definitions aren't permitted and indexing information is
written to the \filetype{aux} file). If you really need document
definitions but you want to minimise the number of write registers
then consider using \pkgopt+{restricted}{docdef} with
\gls{glossaries-extra}.

There are only a limited number of write registers, and if you have
a large number of glossaries or if you are using a class or other
packages that create a lot of external files, you may exceed the
maximum number of available registers. If \pkgopt{savewrites} is
set, the glossary information will be stored in token registers
until the end of the document when they will be written to the
external files.

\begin{important}
This option can significantly slow document compilation and may
cause the indexing to fail.  Page numbers in the \gls{numberlist}
will be incorrect on page boundaries due to \TeX's asynchronous
output routine.  As an alternative, you can use the \sty{scrwfile}
package (part of the KOMA-Script bundle) and not use this option.
\end{important}

By way of comparison, \nolinkurl{sample-multi2.tex}
provided with \gls{bib2gls} has a total of 15 glossaries. With
\optsor23, this would require 46 associated files and 16
write registers.\footnote{These figures don't include standard files
and registers provided by the kernel or \sty{hyperref}, such as
\filetypefmt{aux} and \filetypefmt{out}.} With
\gls{bib2gls}, no write registers are required and there are only 10
associated files for that particular document (9 resource files and
1 transcript file).

\importantpar[-2][-1ex]
If you want to use \TeX's \ics{write18} mechanism to call
\gls{makeindex} or \gls{xindy} from your document and use
\pkgopt{savewrites}, you must create the external files with 
\cs{glswritefiles} before you call \gls*{makeindex}/\gls*{xindy}. Also set
\cs{glswritefiles} to nothing or \cs{relax} before the end of the
document to avoid rewriting the files. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\glswritefiles
\write18{makeindex -s \istfilename\space 
-t \jobname.glg -o \jobname.gls \jobname}
\let\glswritefiles\relax
\end{verbatim}

\noindent
In general, this package option is best avoided.

\pkgoptsec[value]{translate} This can take the following values:

  \begin{description}
  \item[{\pkgoptval{true}{translate}}] If \sty{babel} has been loaded
  and the \sty{translator} package is installed, \sty{translator}
  will be loaded and the translations will be provided by the
  \sty{translator} package interface. You can modify the 
  translations by providing your own dictionary. If the 
  \sty{translator} package isn't installed and \sty{babel} is
  loaded, the \sty{glossaries-babel} package will 
  be loaded and the translations will be provided using \styfmt{babel}'s
  \cs{addto}\cs{caption}\meta{language} mechanism. If 
  \sty{polyglossia} has been loaded, \sty{glossaries-polyglossia}
  will be loaded.

  \item[{\pkgoptval{false}{translate}}] Don't provide translations, even
  if \sty{babel} or \sty{polyglossia} has been loaded.
  (Note that \sty{babel} provides the command \ics{glossaryname}
  so that will still be translated if you have loaded \sty{babel}.)

  \item[{\pkgoptval{babel}{translate}}] Don't load the \sty{translator}
package. Instead load \sty{glossaries-babel}.

\begin{important}
I recommend you use \pkgopt[babel]{translate} if you have any
problems with the translations or with PDF bookmarks, but to maintain backward
compatibility, if \sty{babel} has been loaded the default is
\pkgopt[true]{translate}.
\end{important}

  \end{description}

  If \pkgopt{translate} is specified without a value,
  \pkgopt[true]{translate} is assumed. If \pkgopt{translate} isn't
specified, \pkgopt[true]{translate} is assumed if \sty{babel}, 
\sty{polyglossia} or \sty{translator} have been loaded. Otherwise
\pkgopt[false]{translate} is assumed.

\begin{xtr}
With \gls{glossaries-extra}, if \sty{babel} is detected then
\pkgopt[babel]{translate} is automatically passed to the base
\sty{glossaries} package.
\end{xtr}

See \sectionref{sec:fixednames} for further details.

\pkgoptsec{notranslate} This is equivalent to
\pkgopt[false]{translate} and may be passed via the document class
options.

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{hyperfirst} This is a boolean option that specifies
whether each term has a hyperlink on \firstuse. The default is 
\pkgopt[true]{hyperfirst} (terms on \gls{firstuse} have a hyperlink, 
unless explicitly suppressed using starred versions of commands
such as \ics{gls*} or by identifying the glossary with 
\pkgopt{nohypertypes}, described above). Note that
\pkgopt{nohypertypes} overrides \pkgopt[true]{hyperfirst}.
This option only affects commands that check the \firstuseflag, such
as the \glslike\ commands (for example, \ics{gls} or
\ics{glsdisp}), but not the \glstextlike\ commands
(for example, \ics{glslink} or \ics{glstext}). 

The \pkgopt{hyperfirst} setting applies to
all glossary types (unless identified by \pkgopt{nohypertypes} or
defined with \ics{newignoredglossary}). It can be overridden on an
individual basis by explicitly setting the \gloskey[glslink]{hyper} key
when referencing an entry (or by using the plus or starred
version of the referencing command).

It may be that you only want to apply this to just the acronyms
(where the first use explains the meaning of the acronym) but not
for ordinary glossary entries (where the first use is identical to
subsequent uses). In this case, you can use \pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst} and
apply \cs{glsunsetall} to all the regular (non-acronym) glossaries.
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
 \usepackage[acronym,hyperfirst=false]{glossaries}
 % acronym and glossary entry definitions

 % at the end of the preamble
 \glsunsetall[main]
\end{verbatim}

Alternatively you can redefine the hook
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glslinkcheckfirsthyperhook]
\cs{glslinkcheckfirsthyperhook}
\end{definition}
which is used by the commands that check the \firstuseflag, such
as \ics{gls}. Within the definition of this command, you can use
\ics{glslabel} to reference the entry label and \ics{glstype} to
reference the glossary type. You can also use \ics{ifglsused}
to determine if the entry has been used. You can test if an entry is
an acronym by checking if it has the \gloskey{long} key set using
\ics{ifglshaslong}. For example, to switch off the hyperlink on
first use just for acronyms:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glslinkcheckfirsthyperhook}{%
 \ifglsused{\glslabel}{}%
 {%
   \ifglshaslong{\glslabel}{\setkeys{glslink}{hyper=false}}{}%
 }%
}
\end{verbatim}

Note that this hook isn't used by the commands that don't check the
\firstuseflag, such as \ics{glstext}. (You can, instead, redefine
\ics{glslinkpostsetkeys}, which is used by both the \glslike\ and
\glstextlike\ commands.)

The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides a method of disabling
the \gls{firstuse} hyperlink according to the entry's associated
category. For example, if you only to switch off the \gls{firstuse}
hyperlink for abbreviations and acronyms then you simply need to set
the \attr{nohyperfirst} attribute for the \texttt{abbreviation}
and \texttt{acronym} categories. (Instead of using the
\pkgopt{nohyperfirst} package option.) See the
\gls{glossaries-extra} manual for further details.

\pkgoptsec{writeglslabels} This is a valueless option that
will create a file called \cs{jobname}\texttt{.}\filetype{glslabels} at the end
of the document. This file simply contains a list of all defined
entry labels (including those in any ignored glossaries). It's
provided for the benefit of text editors that need to know labels
for \Index{auto-completion}. If you also want the name, use
\pkgopt{writeglslabelnames}. (See also \gls{glossaries-extra}['s]
\pkgopt+{atom}{docdef} package option.)

\begin{bib2gls}
Note that with \gls{bib2gls} the file will only contain the entries
that \gls{bib2gls} has selected from the \filetype{bib} files.
\end{bib2gls}

\pkgoptsec{writeglslabelnames} Similar to the above but writes both
the label and name (separated by a tab).

\xtrpkgoptsec[value]{undefaction}

The value may be one of:
\begin{description}
 \item[\pkgoptfmt{error}] generate an error if a referenced entry is
  undefined (default, and the only available setting with just
  \styfmt{glossaries});
 \item[\pkgoptfmt{warn}] only warn if a referenced entry is
  undefined (automatically activated with \opt4).
\end{description}

\xtrpkgoptsec[value]{docdef}

This option governs the use of \cs{newglossaryentry}. Available
values:
\begin{description}
\item[\pkgoptfmt{false}] \cs{newglossaryentry} is not permitted in
the \env{document} environment (default with \gls{glossaries-extra}
and for \opt1 with just the base \styfmt{glossaries} package);

\item[\pkgoptfmt{restricted}] \cs{newglossaryentry} is only permitted in
the \env{document} environment if it occurs before
\cs{printglossary} (not available for some indexing options);

\item[\pkgoptfmt{atom}] as \pkgoptfmt{restricted} but creates the
\filetype{docdefs} file for use by \app{atom} (without the
limitations of \pkgopt+{true}{docdef});

\item[\pkgoptfmt{true}] \cs{newglossaryentry} is permitted in the
\env{document} environment where it would normally be permitted by
the base \styfmt{glossaries} package. This will create the
\filetype{docdefs} file if \cs{newglossaryentry} is found in the
\env{document} environment.
\end{description}

\section{Sectioning, Headings and TOC Options}
\label{sec:pkgopts-sec}

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{toc} Add the glossaries to the table of contents.
Note that an extra \LaTeX\ run is required with this option.
Alternatively, you can switch this function on and off using
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glstoctrue}]
\cs{glstoctrue}
\end{definition}
and
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glstocfalse}]
\cs{glstocfalse}
\end{definition}
The default value is \pkgopt[false]{toc} for the base
\styfmt{glossaries} package and \pkgopt[true]{toc} for
\gls{glossaries-extra}.

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{numberline} When used with the above
\pkgopt[true]{toc} option, this will
add \ics{numberline}\verb|{}| in the final argument of 
\ics{addcontentsline}. This will align the table of contents entry 
with the numbered section titles. Note that this option has no
effect if the \pkgopt{toc} option is omitted. If \pkgopt{toc} is
used without \pkgopt{numberline}, the title will be aligned with
the section numbers rather than the section titles.

\pkgoptsec[value]{section} 

This option indicates the sectional unit to use for the glossary.
The value should be the control sequence \emph{name} without the
leading backslash or following star (e.g.\ just \texttt{chapter}
not \cs{chapter} or \texttt{chapter*}).

The default behaviour is for the glossary heading to use
\cs{chapter}, if that command exists, or \cs{section} otherwise. The
starred or unstarred form is determined by the \pkgopt{numberedsection} option.

Example:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[section=subsection]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
You can omit the value if you want to use \cs{section}, i.e.\
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[section]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
is equivalent to
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[section=section]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
You can change this value later in the document using
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\setglossarysection}]
\cs{setglossarysection}\marg{name}
\end{definition}
where \meta{name} is the sectional unit.

The start of each glossary adds information to the page header via
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsglossarymark}]
\cs{glsglossarymark}\marg{glossary title}
\end{definition}
By default this uses \cs{@mkboth}\footnote{unless \cls{memoir} is
loaded, which case it uses \ics{markboth}} but you may 
need to redefine it.
For example, to only change the right header:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glsglossarymark}[1]{\markright{#1}}
\end{verbatim}
or to prevent it from changing the headers:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glsglossarymark}[1]{}
\end{verbatim}
If you want \cs{glsglossarymark} to use \cs{MakeUppercase} in the header, use the
\pkgopt{ucmark} option described below.

Occasionally you may find that another package defines 
\cs{cleardoublepage} when it is not required. This may cause an 
unwanted blank page to appear before each glossary. This can
be fixed by redefining \DescribeMacro\glsclearpage\cs{glsclearpage}:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glsclearpage}{\clearpage}
\end{verbatim}

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{ucmark} This is a boolean option. The default is
\pkgopt[false]{ucmark}, unless \cls{memoir} has been loaded, in
which case the default is \pkgopt[true]{ucmark}.

If set, \ics{glsglossarymark} uses
\ics{MakeTextUppercase}\footnote{Actually it uses
\ics{mfirstucMakeUppercase} which is set to \sty{textcase}'s \cs{MakeTextUppercase}
by the
\styfmt{glossaries} package. This makes it consistent with
\ics{makefirstuc}. (The \sty{textcase} package is automatically
loaded by \styfmt{glossaries}.)}.
You can test whether this option has been set or not using
\begin{definition}
\ics{ifglsucmark} \meta{true part}\cs{else} \meta{false part}\cs{fi}
\end{definition}
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glsglossarymark}[1]{%
  \ifglsucmark
    \markright{\MakeTextUppercase{#1}}%
  \else
    \markright{#1}%
  \fi}
\end{verbatim}
If \cls{memoir} has been loaded and \pkgopt{ucmark} is set, then
\cls{memoir}'s \ics{memUChead} is used.

\pkgoptsec[value]{numberedsection}
The glossaries are placed in unnumbered sectional units by default,
but this can be changed using \pkgopt{numberedsection}. This option can take
one of the following values:
\begin{itemize}
\item \pkgoptval{false}{numberedsection}: no number, i.e.\ use starred form
of sectioning command (e.g.\ \cs{chapter*} or \cs{section*});

\item \pkgoptval{nolabel}{numberedsection}:
use a numbered section, i.e.\ the unstarred form of sectioning
command (e.g.\ \cs{chapter} or \cs{section}), but 
the section not labelled;

\item \pkgoptval{autolabel}{numberedsection}: numbered with automatic
labelling. Each glossary uses the unstarred form of a sectioning
command (e.g.\ \cs{chapter} or \cs{section}) and is assigned a label
(via \ics{label}). The label is formed from 
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsautoprefix}]
\cs{glsautoprefix} \meta{type}
\end{definition}
where 
\meta{type} is the label identifying that glossary. The default
value of \cs{glsautoprefix} is empty.  For example, if you load \styfmt{glossaries}
using:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[section,numberedsection=autolabel]
  {glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
then each glossary will appear in a numbered section, and can
be referenced using something like:
\begin{verbatim}
The main glossary is in section~\ref{main} and 
the list of acronyms is in section~\ref{acronym}.
\end{verbatim}
If you can't decide whether to have the acronyms in the main
glossary or a separate list of acronyms, you can use
\ics{acronymtype} which is set to \texttt{main} if the
\pkgopt{acronym} option is not used and is set to \texttt{acronym}
if the \pkgopt{acronym} option is used. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{\acronymtype}.
\end{verbatim}
You can redefine the prefix if the default label clashes with
another label in your document.
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glsautoprefix}{glo:}
\end{verbatim}
will add \texttt{glo:} to the automatically generated label, so
you can then, for example, refer to the list of acronyms as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
The list of acronyms is in 
section~\ref{glo:\acronymtype}.
\end{verbatim}
Or, if you are undecided on a prefix:
\begin{verbatim}
The list of acronyms is in 
section~\ref{\glsautoprefix\acronymtype}.
\end{verbatim}

\item \pkgoptval{nameref}{numberedsection}: this is like
\pkgoptval{autolabel}{numberedsection} but uses an unnumbered
sectioning command (e.g.\ \ics{chapter*} or \ics{section*}). It's
designed for use with the \sty{nameref} package. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage{nameref}
\usepackage[numberedsection=nameref]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
Now \verb|\nameref{main}| will display the (TOC) section title
associated with the \texttt{main} glossary. As above, you can
redefine \cs{glsautoprefix} to provide a prefix for the label.
\end{itemize}

\section{Glossary Appearance Options}
\label{sec:pkgopts-printglos}

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{savenumberlist} This is a boolean option that
specifies whether or not to gather and store the \gls{numberlist}
for each entry. The default is \pkgopt[false]{savenumberlist}. (See
\ics{glsentrynumberlist} and \ics{glsdisplaynumberlist} in
\sectionref{sec:glsnolink}.) This is always true if you
use \opt1.

\begin{bib2gls}
If you use the \pkgopt*{record} option (with either no value or
\pkgopt+{only}{record} or \pkgopt+{nameref}{record}) then this
package option has no effect. With \gls{bib2gls}, the
\glspl{numberlist} are automatically saved with the default
\resourceopt[true]{save-locations} and
\resourceopt[true]{save-loclist} resource settings.
\end{bib2gls}

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{entrycounter} This is a boolean option. (Default
is \pkgopt[false]{entrycounter}.) If set, each main (level~0)
glossary entry will be numbered when using the standard glossary
styles. This option creates the counter
\DescribeCounter{glossaryentry}\ctrfmt{glossaryentry}.

If you use this option, you can reference the entry number
within the document using
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsrefentry}]
\cs{glsrefentry}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
where \meta{label} is the label associated with that glossary entry.
The labelling systems uses \meta{prefix}\meta{label}, where
\meta{label} is the entry's label and \meta{prefix} is given by
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\GlsEntryCounterLabelPrefix]
\cs{GlsEntryCounterLabelPrefix}
\end{definition}
(which defaults to \texttt{glsentry-}).

\begin{important}
If you use \cs{glsrefentry}, you must run \LaTeX\ twice after
creating the glossary files using \gls{makeglossaries},
\gls{makeindex} or \gls{xindy} to ensure the cross-references are
up-to-date.
\end{important}

\pkgoptsec[value]{counterwithin} This is a \meta{key}=\meta{value}
option where \meta{value} is the name of a counter. If used, this
option will automatically set \pkgopt[true]{entrycounter} and the
\ctr{glossaryentry} counter will be reset every time \meta{value} is
incremented.


\begin{important}
The \ctr{glossaryentry} counter isn't automatically reset at the
start of each glossary, except when glossary section numbering is on
and the counter used by \pkgopt{counterwithin} is the same as the
counter used in the glossary's sectioning command.
\end{important}

If you want the counter reset at the start of each glossary, you can
modify the glossary preamble (\ics{glossarypreamble}) to use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsresetentrycounter}]
\cs{glsresetentrycounter}
\end{definition}
which sets \ctr{glossaryentry} to zero:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{%
  \glsresetentrycounter
}
\end{verbatim}
or if you are using \ics{setglossarypreamble}, add it to each
glossary preamble, as required. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\setglossarypreamble[acronym]{%
  \glsresetentrycounter
  The preamble text here for the list of acronyms.
}
\setglossarypreamble{%
  \glsresetentrycounter
  The preamble text here for the main glossary.
}
\end{verbatim}

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{subentrycounter} This is a boolean option. (Default
is \pkgopt[false]{subentrycounter}.) If set, each level~1
glossary entry will be numbered when using the standard glossary
styles. This option creates the counter
\DescribeCounter{glossarysubentry}\ctrfmt{glossarysubentry}.
The counter is reset with each main (level~0) entry. Note that this
package option is independent of \pkgopt{entrycounter}. You can
reference the number within the document using
\ics{glsrefentry}\marg{label} where \meta{label} is the label
associated with the sub-entry.

\pkgoptsec[value]{style} This is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} option.
(Default is \pkgopt[list]{style}, unless \sty{classicthesis}
has been loaded, in which case the default is \pkgopt[index]{style}.) Its value should be the name of
the glossary style to use. This key may only be used for styles
defined in \sty{glossary-list}, \sty{glossary-long},
\sty{glossary-super} or \sty{glossary-tree}. Alternatively, you can
set the style using
\begin{definition}
\cs{setglossarystyle}\marg{style name}
\end{definition}
(See \sectionref{sec:styles} for further details.)

\pkgoptsec{nolong} This prevents the \styfmt{glossaries} package
from automatically loading \sty{glossary-long} (which means that
the \sty{longtable} package also won't be loaded). This reduces
overhead by not defining unwanted styles and commands. Note that if
you use this option, you won't be able to use any of the
glossary styles defined in the \styfmt{glossary-long} package (unless
you explicitly load \sty{glossary-long}).

\pkgoptsec{nosuper} This prevents the \styfmt{glossaries} package
from automatically loading \sty{glossary-super} (which means that
the \sty{supertabular} package also won't be loaded). This reduces
overhead by not defining unwanted styles and commands. Note that if
you use this option, you won't be able to use any of the
glossary styles defined in the \styfmt{glossary-super} package
(unless you explicitly load \sty{glossary-super}).

\pkgoptsec{nolist} This prevents the \styfmt{glossaries} package
from automatically loading \sty{glossary-list}. This reduces
overhead by not defining unwanted styles. Note that if
you use this option, you won't be able to use any of the
glossary styles defined in the \styfmt{glossary-list} package
(unless you explicitly load \sty{glossary-list}).
Note that since the default style is \glostyle{list} (unless
\sty{classicthesis} has been loaded), you will 
also need to use the \pkgopt{style} option to set the style to
something else.

\pkgoptsec{notree} This prevents the \styfmt{glossaries} package
from automatically loading \sty{glossary-tree}. This reduces
overhead by not defining unwanted styles. Note that if
you use this option, you won't be able to use any of the
glossary styles defined in the \styfmt{glossary-tree} package
(unless you explicitly load \sty{glossary-tree}). Note that if
\sty{classicthesis} has been loaded, the default style is
\glostyle{index}, which is provided by \sty{glossary-tree}.

\pkgoptsec{nostyles} This prevents all the predefined styles
from being loaded. If you use this option, you need to load a
glossary style package (such as \sty{glossary-mcols}). Also if you
use this option, you can't use the \pkgopt{style} package option.
Instead you must either use \ics{setglossarystyle}\marg{style} or the
\gloskey[printglossary]{style} key in the optional argument to
\ics{printglossary}. Example:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[nostyles]{glossaries}
\usepackage{glossary-mcols}
\setglossarystyle{mcoltree}
\end{verbatim}

\pkgoptsec{nonumberlist} This option will suppress the 
associated \glspl{numberlist} in the glossaries (see also 
\sectionref{sec:numberlists}). Note that if you use \optsor23
(\gls{makeindex} or \gls{xindy}) then the locations must still be
valid. This package option merely prevents the \gls{numberlist}
from being displayed, but both \gls{makeindex} and \gls{xindy}
still require a location or cross-reference for each term that's
indexed. Remember that \gls{numberlist} includes any
cross-references, so suppressing the \gls{numberlist} will also hide
the cross-references (see below).

\pkgoptsec{seeautonumberlist} If you suppress the
\glspl{numberlist} with \pkgopt{nonumberlist}, described above, this
will also suppress any cross-referencing information supplied by the
\gloskey{see} key in \ics{newglossaryentry} or \ics{glssee}. If you
use \pkgopt{seeautonumberlist}, the \gloskey{see} key will
automatically implement \gloskey{nonumberlist=false} for that entry.
(Note this doesn't affect \cs{glssee}.) For further details see
\sectionref{sec:crossref}.

\pkgoptsec[value]{counter} This is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} option.
(Default is \pkgopt[page]{counter}.) The value should be the name of
the default counter to use in the \glspl{numberlist}
(see \sectionref{sec:numberlists}).

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{nopostdot} This is a boolean option. If no value is
specified, \pkgoptval{true}{nopostdot} is assumed. When set to
\pkgoptval{true}{nopostdot}, this option suppresses the default post
description dot used by some of the predefined styles.

The default setting is \pkgopt[false]{nopostdot} for the base
\styfmt{glossaries} package and \pkgopt[true]{nopostdot} for
\gls{glossaries-extra}.

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides \pkgopt*{postdot}, which
is equivalent to \pkgopt[false]{nopostdot}, and also
\pkgopt*{postpunc}, which allows you to choose a different
punctuation character.
\end{xtr}

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{nogroupskip} This is a boolean option. If no value is
specified, \pkgoptfmt{true} is assumed. When set to \pkgoptfmt{true}, this
option suppresses the default vertical gap between letter groups used by
some of the predefined styles. The default setting is
\pkgopt[false]{nogroupskip}.

\begin{bib2gls}
If you are using \gls{bib2gls} without the \texttt{-{}-group} (or
\texttt{-g}) switch then you don't need to use 
\pkgoptfmt{nogroupskip\dequals true} as there won't be any letter
groups.
\end{bib2gls}

\xtrpkgoptsec[list]{stylemods}

Load the \sty{glossaries-extra-stylemods} package, which patches the
predefined styles. The \meta{list} argument is optional. If present,
this will also load \styfmt{glossary-\meta{element}.sty} for each
\meta{element} in the comma-separated \meta{list}.

\section{Indexing Options}
\label{sec:pkgopts-indexing}

\pkgoptsec[value]{seenoindex} Introduced in version 4.24, this option
may take one of three values: \pkgoptfmt{error}, \pkgoptfmt{warn} or
\pkgoptfmt{ignore}. The \gloskey{see} key automatically indexes the
cross-referenced entry using \ics{glssee}. This means that if this
key is used in an entry definition before the relevant
glossary file has been opened, the indexing can't be performed.
Since this is easy to miss, the \styfmt{glossaries} package by
default issues an error message if the \gloskey{see} key is used
before \ics{makeglossaries}. This option allows you to change the
error into just a warning (\pkgopt[warn]{seenoindex}) or 
ignore it (\pkgopt[ignore]{seenoindex}) if, for example, you want
to temporarily comment out \cs{makeglossaries} to speed up the
compilation of a draft document by omitting the indexing.

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{esclocations} This is a boolean option. The
default is \pkgopt[true]{esclocations}, which is needed for
\optsand23. With \opt1 \ics{makenoidxglossaries} changes it to
\pkgopt[false]{esclocations}. With \opt4 (\gls{bib2gls}), this
setting is ignored.

Both \gls{makeindex} and \gls{xindy} are fussy about the location
formats (\gls{makeindex} more so than \gls{xindy}) so the
\styfmt{glossaries} package tries to ensure that special characters
are escaped and allows for the location to be substituted for a
format that's more acceptable to the indexing application. This
requires a bit of trickery to circumvent the problem posed by \TeX's
asynchronous output routine, which can go wrong and also adds to the
complexity of the document build.

If you're sure that your locations will always expand to an
acceptable format (or you're prepared to post-process the glossary
file before passing it to the relevant indexing application) then
use \pkgopt[false]{esclocations} to avoid the complex escaping of
location values. (See \ifpdf section~\ref*{sec:wrgloss} \fi
\qt{Writing information to associated files} in the documented code
for further details.)

This isn't an issue for \optsor14 as the locations are written to
the \filetype{aux} file so no syntax conversion is required.

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{indexonlyfirst} This is a boolean option that specifies
whether to only add information to the external glossary file on
\gls{firstuse}. The default is \pkgopt[false]{indexonlyfirst}, 
which will add a line to the file every time one of the 
\glslike\ or \glstextlike\ commands are used. Note that \ics{glsadd}
will always add information to the external glossary
file\footnote{bug fix in v4.16 has corrected the code to ensure
this.}\ (since that's the purpose of that command).

\begin{important}
Resetting the \gls{firstuseflag} with commands like
\ics{glsreset} after an entry has been indexed will cause that entry to be 
indexed multiple times if it's used again after the reset.
Likewise unsetting the \gls{firstuseflag} before an entry has been
indexed will prevent it from being indexed (unless specifically
indexed with \cs{glsadd}).
\end{important}

You can customise this by redefining
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glswriteentry]
\cs{glswriteentry}\marg{label}\marg{wr-code}
\end{definition}
where \meta{label} is the entry's label and \meta{wr-code} is the
code that writes the entry's information to the external file.
The default definition of \cs{glswriteentry} is:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand*{\glswriteentry}[2]{%
  \ifglsindexonlyfirst
    \ifglsused{#1}{}{#2}%
  \else
    #2%
  \fi
}
\end{verbatim}
This checks the \pkgopt{indexonlyfirst} package option (using
\cs{ifglsindexonlyfirst}) and does \meta{wr-code} if this is
\pkgoptfmt{false} otherwise it only does \meta{wr-code} of the entry
hasn't been used.

For example, suppose you only want to index the first use for
entries in the \texttt{acronym} glossary and not in the
\texttt{main} (or any other) glossary:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glswriteentry}[2]{%
 \ifthenelse{\equal{\glsentrytype{#1}}{acronym}}
 {\ifglsused{#1}{}{#2}}%
 {#2}%
}
\end{verbatim}
Here I've used \cs{ifthenelse} to ensure the arguments of
\cs{equal} are fully expanded before the comparison is made.

With the \gls{glossaries-extra} package it's possible to only index
\gls{firstuse} for particular categories. For example, if you only
want this enabled for abbreviations and acronyms then you can set
the \attr{indexonlyfirst} attribute for the \texttt{abbreviation}
and \texttt{acronym} categories. (Instead of using the
\pkgopt{indexonlyfirst} package option.) See the
\gls{glossaries-extra} manual for further details.

\xtrpkgoptsec[boolean]{indexcrossrefs}

If \pkgoptfmt{true}, this will automatically index (\ics{glsadd}) any
cross-referenced entries that haven't been marked as used at the end
of the document. Increases document build time. See
\gls{glossaries-extra} manual for further details.

\begin{bib2gls}
Note that \gls{bib2gls} can automatically find dependent entries
when it parses the \filetype{bib} file. Use the \xtrfont{selection} option to
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources} to determine the selection of
dependencies.
\end{bib2gls}

\xtrpkgoptsec[boolean]{autoseeindex}

If \pkgoptfmt{true}, makes the \gloskey{see} and
\xtrgloskey{seealso} keys automatically index the cross-reference
(with \ics{glssee}) when the entry is defined (default, and the only
option with just the base \styfmt{glossaries} package).

\begin{bib2gls}
With \gls{bib2gls}, use the \xtrfont{selection} option to
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources} to determine the selection of
dependencies.
\end{bib2gls}

\xtrpkgoptsec[value]{record}

If not \pkgoptfmt{off}, this option indicates that \gls{bib2gls}
is required. If the value is omitted, \pkgoptfmt{only} is assumed. Permitted values:
\begin{description}
\item[\pkgoptfmt{off}] \gls{bib2gls} isn't being used;

\item[\pkgoptfmt{only}] \gls{bib2gls} is being used to fetch entries
from a \filetype{bib} file, to sort the entries and collate the
\glspl{numberlist}, where the location information is the same as
for \optsto13;

\item[\pkgoptfmt{nameref}] like \pkgoptfmt{only} but provides extra
information that allows the associated title to be used instead of
the location number and provides better support for hyperlinked
locations;

\item[\pkgoptfmt{hybrid}] a hybrid approach where \gls{bib2gls}
is used to fetch entries from a \filetype{bib} file but
\gls{makeindex} or \gls{xindy} are used for the indexing. This
requires a more complicated document build and isn't recommended.
\end{description}
See \gls{glossaries-extra} manual for further details.

\xtrpkgoptsec[boolean]{equations}

If \pkgoptfmt{true}, this option will cause the default location
counter to automatically switch to \texttt{equation} when inside a
numbered equation environment.

\xtrpkgoptsec[boolean]{floats}

If \pkgoptfmt{true}, this option will cause the default location
counter to automatically switch to the corresponding counter when inside a
float. (Remember that with floats it's the \cs{caption} command that
increments the counter so the location will be incorrect if an entry
is indexed within the float before the caption.)

\xtrpkgoptsec{indexcounter}

This valueless option is primarily intended for use with
\gls{bib2gls} and \sty{hyperref} allowing the page location
hyperlink target to be set to the relevant point within the page
(rather than the top of the page). Unexpected results will occur
with other indexing methods. See \gls{glossaries-extra} manual for
further details.

\section{Sorting Options}
\label{sec:pkgopts-sort}

This section is mostly for \optsand23. Only the \pkgopt{sort} and
\pkgopt{order} options are applicable for \opt1.

\begin{xtr}
With \optsto46, only \pkgopt[none]{sort} is applicable (and this is
automatically implemented by \pkgopt+{only}{record} and
\pkgopt+{nameref}{record}). With \gls{bib2gls}, the sort method 
is provided in the optional argument of \ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources} 
not with the \pkgoptfmt{sort} package option. There's no sorting
with \optsand56.
\end{xtr}

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{sanitizesort} This is a boolean option that
determines whether or not to \gls{sanitize} the sort value when
writing to the external glossary file. For example, suppose you
define an entry as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{hash}{name={\#},sort={#},
 description={hash symbol}}
\end{verbatim}
The sort value (\verb|#|) must be sanitized before writing it to the
glossary file, otherwise \LaTeX\ will try to interpret it as a
parameter reference. If, on the other hand, you want the sort value
expanded, you need to switch off the sanitization. For example,
suppose you do:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\mysortvalue}{AAA}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{%
  name={sample},
  sort={\mysortvalue},
  description={an example}}
\end{verbatim}
and you actually want \cs{mysortvalue} expanded, so that the entry
is sorted according to \texttt{AAA}, then use the package option
\pkgopt[false]{sanitizesort}.

The default for \optsand23 is \pkgopt[true]{sanitizesort}, and the
default for \opt1 is \pkgopt[false]{sanitizesort}.

\pkgoptsec[value]{sort} If you use \optsor23, this package option is
the only way of specifying how to sort the glossaries. Only \opt1 
allows you to specify sort methods for individual glossaries
via the \gloskey[printnoidxglossary]{sort} key in the optional
argument of \ics{printnoidxglossary}. If you have multiple
glossaries in your document and you are using \opt1, only use
the package options
\pkgopt[def]{sort} or \pkgopt[use]{sort} if you want to set this
sort method for \emph{all} your glossaries.

This is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} option where
\meta{value} may be one of the following:
\begin{itemize}
\item \pkgoptval{standard}{sort} : entries are sorted according to
the value of the \gloskey{sort} key used in \ics{newglossaryentry}
(if present) or the \gloskey{name} key (if \gloskey{sort} key is
missing);

\item \pkgoptval{def}{sort} : entries are sorted in the order in
which they were defined (the \gloskey{sort} key in
\cs{newglossaryentry} is ignored);

\item \pkgoptval{use}{sort} : entries are sorted according to the
order in which they are used in the document (the \gloskey{sort} key
in \cs{newglossaryentry} is ignored).

Both \pkgopt[def]{sort} and \pkgopt[use]{sort} set the sort key to a
six digit number via
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glssortnumberfmt]
\cs{glssortnumberfmt}\marg{number}
\end{definition}
(padded with leading zeros, where necessary). This can be 
redefined, if required, before the entries are defined (in the
case of \pkgopt[def]{sort}) or before the entries are used
(in the case of \pkgopt[use]{sort}).

\item \pkgoptval{none}{sort} : this setting is new to version 4.30
and is only for documents that don't use \cs{makeglossaries} (\optsor23)
or \cs{makenoidxglossaries} (\opt1). It omits the code used to sanitize
or escape the sort value, since it's not required. This can help to
improve the document build speed, especially if there are a large
number of entries. 

This option
can't be used with \cs{printglossary} or \cs{printnoidxglossary}
(or the iterative versions \cs{printglossaries} or
\cs{printnoidxglossaries}). It may be used with
\gls{glossaries-extra}'s \cs{printunsrtglossary} (\opt5).
\end{itemize}
Note that the group styles (such as \glostyle{listgroup}) are
incompatible with the \pkgopt[use]{sort} and \pkgopt[def]{sort}
options.

The default is \pkgopt[standard]{sort}. When the standard sort
option is in use, you can hook into the sort mechanism by
redefining:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsprestandardsort}]
\cs{glsprestandardsort}\marg{sort cs}\marg{type}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
where \meta{sort cs} is a temporary control sequence that stores the
sort value (which was either explicitly set via the \gloskey{sort}
key or implicitly set via the \gloskey{name} key) before any escaping of the
\gls{makeindex}\slash\gls{xindy} special characters is performed.
By default \cs{glsprestandardsort} just does:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsdosanitizesort}]
\cs{glsdosanitizesort}
\end{definition}
which \gls{sanitize}[s] \meta{sort cs} if the \pkgopt{sanitizesort} package 
option is set (or does nothing if the package option 
\pkgopt[false]{sanitizesort} is used).

The other arguments, \meta{type} and \meta{label}, are the 
glossary type and the entry label for the current entry. Note that
\meta{type} will always be a control sequence, but \meta{label} will
be in the form used in the first argument of \ics{newglossaryentry}.

\begin{important}
Redefining \cs{glsprestandardsort} won't affect any entries that 
have already been defined and will have no effect at all if you 
are using \pkgopt[def]{sort} or \pkgopt[use]{sort}.
\end{important}

\begin{example}{Mixing Alphabetical and Order of Definition Sorting}{ex:diffsorts}
Suppose I have three glossaries: \texttt{main},
\texttt{acronym} and \texttt{notation}, and let's suppose
I want the \texttt{main} and \texttt{acronym} glossaries to be
sorted alphabetically, but the \texttt{notation} type should be
sorted in order of definition. 

For \opt1, the \gloskey[printnoidxglossary]{sort} option can be
used in \ics{printnoidxglossary}:
\begin{verbatim}
\printnoidxglossary[sort=word]
\printnoidxglossary[type=acronym,sort=word]
\printnoidxglossary[type=notation,sort=def]
\end{verbatim}

For \optsor23, I can set the sort to \texttt{standard}
(which is the default, but can be explicitly set via the
package option \pkgopt[standard]{sort}), and I can either define
all my \texttt{main} and \texttt{acronym} entries, then
redefine \cs{glsprestandardsort} to set \meta{sort cs} to
an incremented integer, and then define all my
\texttt{notation} entries. Alternatively, I can redefine
\cs{glsprestandardsort} to check for the glossary type and only
modify \meta{sort cs} if \meta{type} is \texttt{notation}.

The first option can be achieved as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcounter{sortcount}

\renewcommand{\glsprestandardsort}[3]{%
  \stepcounter{sortcount}%
  \edef#1{\glssortnumberfmt{\arabic{sortcount}}}%
}
\end{verbatim}
The second option can be achieved as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcounter{sortcount}

\renewcommand{\glsprestandardsort}[3]{%
  \ifdefstring{#2}{notation}%
  {%
     \stepcounter{sortcount}%
     \edef#1{\glssortnumberfmt{\arabic{sortcount}}}%
  }%
  {%
     \glsdosanitizesort
  }%
}
\end{verbatim}
(\cs{ifdefstring} is defined by the \sty{etoolbox} package.)
For a complete document, see the sample file \samplefile{Sort}.
\end{example}

\begin{example}{Customizing Standard Sort (Options 2 or 3)}{ex:customsort}
Suppose you want a glossary of people and you want the names listed
as \meta{first-name} \meta{surname} in the glossary, but you want the names
sorted by \meta{surname}, \meta{first-name}. You can do this by
defining a command called, say,
\cs{name}\marg{first-name}\marg{surname} that you can use in the
\gloskey{name} key when you define the entry, but hook into the
standard sort mechanism to temporarily redefine \cs{name} while the
sort value is being set.

First, define two commands to set the person's name:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\sortname}[2]{#2, #1}
\newcommand{\textname}[2]{#1 #2}
\end{verbatim}
and \cs{name} needs to be initialised to \cs{textname}:
\begin{verbatim}
\let\name\textname
\end{verbatim}
Now redefine \cs{glsprestandardsort} so that it temporarily sets
\cs{name} to \cs{sortname} and expands the sort value, then sets
\cs{name} to \cs{textname} so that the person's name appears as
\meta{first-name} \meta{surname} in the text:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glsprestandardsort}[3]{%
 \let\name\sortname
 \edef#1{\expandafter\expandonce\expandafter{#1}}%
 \let\name\textname
 \glsdosanitizesort
}
\end{verbatim}
(The somewhat complicate use of \cs{expandafter} etc helps to
protect fragile commands, but care is still needed.)

Now the entries can be defined:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{joebloggs}{name={\name{Joe}{Bloggs}},
  description={some information about Joe Bloggs}}

\newglossaryentry{johnsmith}{name={\name{John}{Smith}},
  description={some information about John Smith}}
\end{verbatim}
For a complete document, see the sample file \samplefile{People}.
\end{example}

\pkgoptsec[value]{order} This may take two values: 
\pkgoptval{word}{order} or \pkgoptval{letter}{order}. The default
is word ordering.

\begin{important}
Note that with \optsand23, the \pkgopt{order} option has no effect if you don't use 
\gls{makeglossaries}.
\end{important}

If you use \opt1, this setting will be used if you use 
\gloskey[printnoidxglossary]{sort}\texttt{=standard} in 
the optional argument of \ics{printnoidxglossary}:
\begin{verbatim}
\printnoidxglossary[sort=standard]
\end{verbatim}
Alternatively, you can specify the order for individual glossaries:
\begin{verbatim}
\printnoidxglossary[sort=word]
\printnoidxglossary[type=acronym,sort=letter]
\end{verbatim}

\begin{bib2gls}
With \gls{bib2gls}, use the \resourceopt{break-at} option
in \ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources} instead of \pkgoptfmt{order}.
\end{bib2gls}

\pkgoptsec{makeindex} (\opt2) The glossary information and
indexing style file will be written in \gls{makeindex} format. If
you use \gls{makeglossaries}, it will automatically detect that it
needs to call \gls*{makeindex}. If you don't use
\gls*{makeglossaries}, you need to remember to use \gls*{makeindex}
not \gls{xindy}. The indexing style file will been given 
a~\filetype{ist} extension.

You may omit this package option if you are using \opt2 as this is the
default. It's available in case you need to override the effect of an earlier
occurrence of \pkgopt{xindy} in the package option list.

\pkgoptsec{xindy} (\opt3) The glossary information and indexing style
file will be written in \gls{xindy} format. If you use
\gls{makeglossaries}, it will automatically detect that it needs to
call \gls*{xindy}. If you don't use \gls*{makeglossaries}, you need to
remember to use \gls*{xindy} not \gls{makeindex}. The indexing style
file will been given a \filetype{xdy} extension.

This package option may additionally have a value that
is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} comma-separated list to override the
language and codepage. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[xindy={language=english,codepage=utf8}]
  {glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
You can also specify whether you want a number group in the
glossary. This defaults to true, but can be suppressed. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[xindy={glsnumbers=false}]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
If no value is supplied to this package option (either simply
writing \texttt{xindy} or writing \verb|xindy={}|) then the
language, codepage and number group settings are unchanged.  See
\sectionref{sec:xindy} for further details on using \gls{xindy} with
the \styfmt{glossaries} package.

\pkgoptsec{xindygloss}  (\opt3) This is equivalent to
\verb|xindy={}| (that is, the \pkgopt{xindy} option without any value
supplied) and may be used as a document class option. The language
and code page can be set via \ics{GlsSetXdyLanguage} and
\ics{GlsSetXdyCodePage} (see \sectionref{sec:langenc}.)

\pkgoptsec{xindynoglsnumbers} (\opt3) This is equivalent to
\verb|xindy={glsnumbers=false}| and may be used as a document class
option.

\pkgoptsec[value]{automake} This is option was introduced to
version 4.08 as a boolean option. As from version 4.42 it may now
take three values: \texttt{false} (default), \texttt{true}
or \texttt{immediate}. If no option is supplied, \texttt{immediate}
is assumed.
The option \pkgopt[true]{automake} will attempt to run \gls{makeindex} or \gls{xindy} using
\TeX's \ics{write18} mechanism at the end of the document.
The option \pkgopt[immediate]{automake} will attempt to 
run \gls{makeindex} or \gls{xindy} at the start of
\ics{makeglossaries} using \cs{immediate} (before the glossary files have been opened).

In the case of \pkgopt[true]{automake}, the associated files
are created at the end of the document ready for the next \LaTeX\
run. Since there is a possibility of commands such as \cs{gls}
occurring on the last page of the document, it's not possible
to use \cs{immediate} to close the associated file or with
\cs{write18} since the writing of the final indexing lines may
have been delayed. In certain situations this can mean that
the \cs{write18} fails. In such cases, you will need to use
\pkgopt[immediate]{automake} instead.

With \pkgopt[immediate]{automake}, you will get a warning on
the first \LaTeX\ run as the associated glossary files don't exist
yet.

Since this mechanism can be a security risk, some \TeX\
distributions disable it completely, in which case this option won't
have an effect. (If this option doesn't appear to work, search the
log file for \qt{runsystem} and see if it is followed by
\qt{enabled} or \qt{disabled}.)

Some distributions allow \cs{write18} in a restricted mode.
This mode has a~limited number of trusted applications, which
usually includes \gls{makeindex} but may not include \gls{xindy}. So
if you have the restricted mode on, \pkgopt{automake} should work
with \gls*{makeindex} but may not work with \gls{xindy}.

However even in unrestricted mode this option may not work with
\gls*{xindy} as \gls*{xindy} uses language names that don't always
correspond with \sty{babel}'s language names. (The
\gls{makeglossaries} script applies mappings to assist you.)
Note that you still need at least two \LaTeX\ runs to ensure the document
is up-to-date with this setting.

Since this package option attempts to run the \gls{indexingapp} on
every \LaTeX\ run, its use should be considered a last resort for
those who can't work out how to incorporate the \gls*{indexingapp}
into their document build. The default value for this option is
\pkgopt[false]{automake}.

\pkgoptsec{disablemakegloss} This valueless option 
indicates that \ics{makeglossaries} and \ics{makenoidxglossaries}
should be disabled. This option is provided in the event that you
have to use a class or package that disregards the advice in
\sectionref{sec:indexingoptions} and automatically performs
\ics{makeglossaries} or \ics{makenoidxglossaries} but you don't want
this.  (For example, you want to use a different indexing method or 
you want to disable indexing while working on a draft
document.)

This option may be passed in the standard document class option list
or passed using \cs{PassOptionsToPackage} before \sty{glossaries} is
loaded. Note that this does nothing if
\ics{makeglossaries} or \ics{makenoidxglossaries} has already 
been used whilst enabled.

\pkgoptsec{restoremakegloss} Cancels the effect of
\pkgopt{disablemakegloss}. This option may be used in
\cs{setupglossaries}. It issues a warning if \ics{makeglossaries} or
\ics{makenoidxglossaries} has already been used whilst enabled. 
For example, suppose the class \clsfmt{customclass.cls}
automatically loads \styfmt{glossaries} and does \cs{makeglossaries}
but you need an extra glossary, which has to be defined before
\cs{makeglossaries}, then you can do:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass[disablemakegloss]{customclass}
\newglossary*{functions}{Functions}
\setupglossaries{restoremakegloss}
\makeglossaries
\end{verbatim}
or
\begin{verbatim}
\PassOptionsToPackage{disablemakegloss}{glossaries}
\documentclass{customclass}
\newglossary*{functions}{Functions}
\setupglossaries{restoremakegloss}
\makeglossaries
\end{verbatim}

Note that restoring these commands doesn't necessarily mean that they can be
used. It just means that their normal behaviour given the current
settings will apply. For example, if you use the \pkgopt+{only}{record}
or \pkgopt+{nameref}{record} options with \gls{glossaries-extra}
then you can't use \cs{makeglossaries} or \cs{makenoidxglossaries}
regardless of \pkgopt{restoremakegloss}.

\section{Glossary Type Options}
\label{sec:pkgopts-type}

\pkgoptsec[list]{nohypertypes} Use this option if you have multiple
glossaries and you want to suppress the entry hyperlinks for a
particular glossary or glossaries. The value of this option should
be a comma-separated list of glossary types where \ics{gls} etc
shouldn't have hyperlinks by default. Make sure you enclose the
value in braces if it contains any commas. Example:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[acronym,nohypertypes={acronym,notation}]
  {glossaries}
\newglossary[nlg]{notation}{not}{ntn}{Notation}
\end{verbatim}
The values must be fully expanded, so \strong{don't} try
\texttt{nohypertypes\discretionary{}{}{}=\ics{acronymtype}}. You may also use
\begin{definition}
\ics{GlsDeclareNoHyperList}\marg{list}
\end{definition}
instead or additionally.
See \sectionref{sec:glslink} for further details.

\pkgoptsec{nomain} This suppresses the creation of the main
glossary and associated \filetype{glo} file, if unrequired. Note that
if you use this option, you must create another glossary in which to
put all your entries (either via the \pkgopt{acronym} (or
\pkgopt{acronyms}) package option described in
\sectionref{sec:pkgopts-acronym} or via the \pkgopt{symbols},
\pkgopt{numbers} or \pkgopt{index} options described in
\sectionref{sec:pkgopts-other} or via \ics{newglossary} described in
\sectionref{sec:newglossary}).

\begin{important}
If you don't use the main glossary and you don't use this option,
\gls{makeglossaries} will produce a warning.
\end{important}
\begin{alltt}
Warning: File '\emph{filename}.glo' is empty.
Have you used any entries defined in glossary 
'main'?
Remember to use package option 'nomain' if 
you don't want to use the main glossary.
\end{alltt}
If you did actually want to use the main glossary and you see this
warning, check that you have referenced the entries in that glossary
via commands such as \ics{gls}.

\pkgoptsec{symbols} This valueless option defines a new glossary type with
the label \texttt{symbols} via
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossary[slg]{symbols}{sls}{slo}{\glssymbolsgroupname}
\end{verbatim}
It also defines
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\printsymbols]
\cs{printsymbols}\oarg{options}
\end{definition}
which is a synonym for
\begin{alltt}
\ics{printglossary}[type=symbols,\meta{options}]
\end{alltt}

If you use \opt1, you need to use:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{printnoidxglossary}[type=symbols,\meta{options}]
\end{alltt}
to display the list of symbols.

\begin{important}
Remember to use the \pkgopt{nomain} package option if you're only
interested in using this \texttt{symbols} glossary and don't intend
to use the \texttt{main} glossary.
\end{important}

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package has a slightly modified
version of this option which additionally provides \ics*{glsxtrnewsymbol}
as a convenient shortcut method for defining symbols. See the
\gls{glossaries-extra} manual for further details.
\end{xtr}

\pkgoptsec{numbers} This valueless option defines a new glossary type with
the label \texttt{numbers} via
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossary[nlg]{numbers}{nls}{nlo}{\glsnumbersgroupname}
\end{verbatim}
It also defines
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\printnumbers]
\cs{printnumbers}\oarg{options}
\end{definition}
which is a synonym for
\begin{alltt}
\ics{printglossary}[type=numbers,\meta{options}]
\end{alltt}

If you use \opt1, you need to use:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{printnoidxglossary}[type=numbers,\meta{options}]
\end{alltt}
to display the list of numbers.

\begin{important}
Remember to use the \pkgopt{nomain} package option if you're only
interested in using this \texttt{numbers} glossary and don't intend
to use the \texttt{main} glossary.
\end{important}

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package has a slightly modified
version of this option which additionally provides \ics*{glsxtrnewnumber}
as a convenient shortcut method for defining numbers. See the
\gls{glossaries-extra} manual for further details.
\end{xtr}

\pkgoptsec{index} This valueless option defines a new glossary type with
the label \texttt{index} via
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossary[ilg]{index}{ind}{idx}{\indexname}%
\end{verbatim}
It also defines
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\newterm]
\cs{newterm}\oarg{options}\marg{term}
\end{definition}
which is a synonym for
\begin{alltt}
\ics{newglossaryentry}\marg{term}[type=index,name=\marg{term},%
description=\ics{nopostdesc},\meta{options}]
\end{alltt}
and
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\printindex]
\cs{printindex}\oarg{options}
\end{definition}
which is a synonym for
\begin{alltt}
\ics{printglossary}[type=index,\meta{options}]
\end{alltt}

If you use \opt1, you need to use:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{printnoidxglossary}[type=index,\meta{options}]
\end{alltt}
to display this glossary.

\begin{important}
Remember to use the \pkgopt{nomain} package option if you're only
interested in using this \texttt{index} glossary and don't intend to
use the \texttt{main} glossary. Note that you
can't mix this option with \ics{index}. Either use
\styfmt{glossaries} for the indexing or use a~custom indexing
package, such as \sty{makeidx}, \sty{index} or \sty{imakeidx}.
(You can, of course, load one of those packages and 
load \styfmt{glossaries} without the \pkgopt{index} package option.)
\end{important}

Since the index isn't designed for terms with descriptions, you
might also want to disable the hyperlinks for this glossary using
the package option \pkgopt[index]{nohypertypes} or the command
\begin{display}
\ics{GlsDeclareNoHyperList}\verb|{index}|
\end{display}

The example file \samplefile{-index} illustrates the use of the
\pkgopt{index} package option.

\pkgoptsec{noglossaryindex} This valueless option switches off \pkgopt{index}
if \pkgopt{index} has been passed implicitly (for example,
through global document options). This option can't be used
in \cs{setupglossaries}.


\section{Acronym and Abbreviation Options}
\label{sec:pkgopts-acronym}

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{acronym} If true, this creates a new glossary with the
label \texttt{acronym}. This is equivalent to:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname}
\end{verbatim}
It will also define
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\printacronyms]
\cs{printacronyms}\oarg{options}
\end{definition}
that's equivalent to
\begin{alltt}
\ics{printglossary}[type=acronym,\meta{options}]
\end{alltt}
(unless that command is already defined before the beginning of the
document or the package option \pkgopt{compatible-3.07} is used).

If you are using \opt1, you need to use
\begin{alltt}
\ics{printnoidxglossary}[type=acronym,\meta{options}]
\end{alltt}
to display the list of acronyms.

If the \pkgopt{acronym} package option is used, \ics{acronymtype}
is set to \texttt{acronym} otherwise it is set to 
\texttt{main}.\footnote{Actually it sets \ics{acronymtype} to
\ics{glsdefaulttype} if the \pkgopt{acronym} package option is
not used, but \ics{glsdefaulttype} usually has the value
\texttt{main} unless the \pkgopt{nomain} option has been used.} 
Entries that are defined using \ics{newacronym} are placed in
the glossary whose label is given by \ics{acronymtype}, unless
another glossary is explicitly specified.

\begin{important}
Remember to use the \pkgopt{nomain} package option if you're only
interested in using this \texttt{acronym} glossary. (That is, you
don't intend to use the \texttt{main} glossary.)
\end{important}

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} extension package comes with an analogous
\pkgopt*{abbreviations} option, which creates a new glossary with
the label \texttt{abbreviations} and sets the command
\ics*{glsxtrabbrvtype} to this. If the \pkgopt{acronym} option hasn't
also been used, then \ics{acronymtype} will be set to
\ics*{glsxtrabbrvtype}. This enables both \ics{newacronym} and
\ics*{newabbreviation} to use the same glossary.

Make sure you have at least v1.42 of \gls{glossaries-extra} if you
use the \pkgopt{acronym} (or \pkgopt{acronyms}) package option with
the extension package to avoid a bug that interferes with the
abbreviation style.
\end{xtr}

\pkgoptsec{acronyms} This is equivalent to
\pkgopt[true]{acronym} and may be used in the document class option
list.

\xtrpkgoptsec{abbreviations}

This valueless option creates a new glossary type using:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossary[glg-abr]{abbreviations}{gls-abr}{glo-abr}{\abbreviationsname}
\end{verbatim}
The label can be accessed with \ics*{glsxtrabbrvtype}, which is
analogous to \cs{acronymtype}. See \gls{glossaries-extra} manual for
further details.

\pkgoptsec[value]{acronymlists} By default, only the \cs{acronymtype}
glossary is considered to be a list of acronyms. If you have other
lists of acronyms, you can specify them as a comma-separated list
in the value of \pkgopt{acronymlists}. For example, if you use the
\pkgopt{acronym} package option but you also want the \texttt{main} 
glossary to also contain a list of acronyms, you can do:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[acronym,acronymlists={main}]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
No check is performed to determine if the listed glossaries exist,
so you can add glossaries you haven't defined yet. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[acronym,acronymlists={main,acronym2}]
  {glossaries}
\newglossary[alg2]{acronym2}{acr2}{acn2}%
  {Statistical Acronyms}
\end{verbatim}
You can use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\DeclareAcronymList]
\cs{DeclareAcronymList}\marg{list}
\end{definition}
instead of or in addition to the \pkgopt{acronymlists} option.
This will add the glossaries given in \meta{list} to the list of glossaries
that are identified as lists of acronyms. To replace the list of acronym lists
with a new list use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\SetAcronymLists]
\cs{SetAcronymLists}\marg{list}
\end{definition}

You can determine if a glossary has been identified as being a list
of acronyms using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsIfListOfAcronyms]
\cs{glsIfListOfAcronyms}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
\end{definition}

\begin{xtr}
This option and associated commands are incompatible with \gls{glossaries-extra}['s]
abbreviation mechanism.
\end{xtr}

\pkgoptsec{shortcuts} This option provides shortcut commands
for acronyms.  See \sectionref{sec:acronyms} for further details.
Alternatively you can use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\DefineAcronymSynonyms]
\cs{DefineAcronymSynonyms}
\end{definition}

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides additional shortcuts.
\end{xtr}

\section{Deprecated Acronym Style Options}
\label{sec:pkgopts-old-acronym}

The package options listed in this section are now deprecated but
are kept for backward-compatibility. Use \ics{setacronymstyle}
instead. See \sectionref{sec:acronyms} for further details.

\deppkgoptsec{description} This option changes the definition of
\ics{newacronym} to allow a description.
This option may be replaced by
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{long-short-desc}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{smallcaps})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{long-sc-short-desc}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{smaller})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{long-sm-short-desc}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{footnote})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{footnote-desc}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{footnote} and \deprecatedpkgopt{smallcaps})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{footnote-sc-desc}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{footnote} and \deprecatedpkgopt{smaller})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{footnote-sm-desc}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{dua})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{dua-desc}
\end{verbatim}

\deppkgoptsec{smallcaps} This option changes the definition of
\ics{newacronym} and the way that acronyms are displayed. 
This option may be replaced by:
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{long-sc-short}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{description})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{long-sc-short-desc}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{description} and \deprecatedpkgopt{footnote})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{footnote-sc-desc}
\end{verbatim}

\deppkgoptsec{smaller} This option changes the definition of
\ics{newacronym} and the way that acronyms are displayed.
\begin{important}
If you use this option, you will need to include the \sty{relsize}
package or otherwise define \ics{textsmaller} or redefine
\ics{acronymfont}.
\end{important}
This option may be replaced by:
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{long-sm-short}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{description})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{long-sm-short-desc}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{description} and \deprecatedpkgopt{footnote})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{footnote-sm-desc}
\end{verbatim}

\deppkgoptsec{footnote} This option changes the definition of
\ics{newacronym} and the way that acronyms are displayed.
This option may be replaced by:
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{footnote}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{smallcaps})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{footnote-sc}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{smaller})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{footnote-sm}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{description})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{footnote-desc}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{smallcaps} and \deprecatedpkgopt{description})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{footnote-sc-desc}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{smaller} and \deprecatedpkgopt{description})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{footnote-sm-desc}
\end{verbatim}

\deppkgoptsec{dua} This option changes the definition of
\ics{newacronym} so that acronyms are always expanded. 
This option may be replaced by:
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{dua}
\end{verbatim}
or (with \deprecatedpkgopt{description})
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{dua-desc}
\end{verbatim}

\section{Other Options}
\label{sec:pkgopts-other}

Other available options that don't fit any of the above categories
are described below.

\xtrpkgoptsec{accsupp}

Load the \sty{glossaries-accsupp} package.

\xtrpkgoptsec{prefix}

Load the \sty{glossaries-prefix} package.

\xtrpkgoptsec[boolean]{nomissingglstext}

This option may be used to suppress the boilerplate text generated
by \cs{printglossary} if the glossary file is missing.

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{compatible-2.07} Compatibility mode for old documents
created using version 2.07 or below.

\pkgoptsec[boolean]{compatible-3.07} Compatibility mode for old documents
created using version 3.07 or below.

\pkgoptsec[value]{kernelglossredefs} As a legacy from the precursor
\sty{glossary} package, the standard glossary commands provided
by the \LaTeX\ kernel (\cs{makeglossary} and \cs{glossary}) are
redefined in terms of the \styfmt{glossaries} package's commands.
However, they were never documented in this user manual, and the
conversion guide (\htmldoc{Upgrading from the glossary package to the
glossaries package}{glossary2glossaries}) explicitly discourages
their use.

The use of those kernel commands (instead of the appropriate
commands documented in this user guide) are deprecated, and you will
now get a warning if you try using them.

In the event that you require the original form of these kernel
commands, for example, if you need to use the \styfmt{glossaries}
package with another class or package that also performs 
glossary-style indexing, then you can restore these commands to
their previous definition (that is, their definitions prior to
loading the \styfmt{glossaries} package) with the package option
\pkgopt[false]{kernelglossredefs}. You may also need to use the 
\pkgopt{nomain} option in the event of file extension conflicts.
(In which case, you must provide a new default glossary for use with
the \sty{glossaries} package.)

This option may take one of three values: \pkgoptfmt{true}
(redefine with warnings, default), \pkgoptfmt{false} (restore
previous definitions) or \pkgoptfmt{nowarn} (redefine without
warnings, not recommended).

The only glossary-related commands provided by the \LaTeX\
kernel are \cs{makeglossary} and \cs{glossary}. Other packages
or classes may provide additional glossary-related commands or
environments that conflict with \styfmt{glossaries} (such as
\cs{printglossary} and \env{theglossary}). These non-kernel commands
aren't affected by this package option, and you will have to find
some way to resolve the conflict if you require both glossary
mechanisms. (The \sty{glossaries} package will override the existing
definitions of \cs{printglossary} and \env{theglossary}.)

In general, if possible, it's best to stick with just one package that
provides a glossary mechanism. (The \styfmt{glossaries} package does
check for the \sty{doc} package and patches \cs{PrintChanges}.)

\section{Setting Options After the Package is Loaded}
\label{sec:setupglossaries}

Some of the options described above may also be set after the
\styfmt{glossaries} package has been loaded using
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\setupglossaries}]
\cs{setupglossaries}\marg{key-val list}
\end{definition}
The following package options \strong{can't} be used in
\cs{setupglossaries}: \pkgopt{xindy}, \pkgopt{xindygloss},
\pkgopt{xindynoglsnumbers}, \pkgopt{makeindex},
\pkgopt{nolong}, \pkgopt{nosuper}, \pkgopt{nolist},
\pkgopt{notree}, \pkgopt{nostyles}, \pkgopt{nomain},
\pkgopt{compatible-2.07}, \pkgopt{translate}, \pkgopt{notranslate}, 
\pkgopt{acronym}. These options have to be set while the package is
loading, except for the \pkgopt{xindy} sub-options which can be set
using commands like \ics{GlsSetXdyLanguage} (see
\sectionref{sec:xindy} for further details).

\begin{important}
If you need to use this command, use it as soon as
possible after loading \styfmt{glossaries} otherwise you might 
end up using it too late for the change to take effect. For example, 
if you try changing the acronym styles (such as \deprecatedpkgopt{smallcaps}) 
after you have started defining your acronyms, you are likely to get 
unexpected results. If you try changing the sort option after you have 
started to define entries, you may get unexpected results.
\end{important}

\begin{xtr}
With \gls{glossaries-extra}, use \ics*{glossariesextrasetup}
instead.
\end{xtr}

\chapter{Setting Up}
\label{sec:setup}

In the preamble you need to indicate which method you want to use to
generate the glossary (or glossaries). The available options with
both \styfmt{glossaries} and \gls{glossaries-extra} are
summarized in \sectionref{sec:indexingoptions}. This chapter
documents \optsto13, which are provided by the base package. See the
\gls{glossaries-extra} and \gls{bib2gls} manuals for the full
documentation of the other options.

If you don't need to display any glossaries, for example, if you are
just using the \styfmt{glossaries} package to enable consistent
formatting, then skip ahead to \sectionref{sec:newglosentry}.

\section[Option 1]{\ifpdf\opt1\else Option 1\fi}
\label{sec:setupopt1}

The command
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\makenoidxglossaries}]
\cs{makenoidxglossaries}
\end{definition}
must be placed in the preamble. This sets up the internal commands
required to make \opt1 work.
\strong{If you omit \cs{makenoidxglossaries} none of
the glossaries will be displayed.}

\section[Options 2 and 3]{\ifpdf\optsand23\else Options 2 and 3\fi}
\label{sec:setupopt23}

The command
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\makeglossaries}]
\cs{makeglossaries}
\end{definition}
must be placed in the preamble in order to create the customised
\gls{makeindex} (\filetype{ist}) or \gls{xindy} (\filetype{xdy})
style file (for \optsor23, respectively) and to ensure that glossary 
entries are written to the appropriate output files. 
\strong{If you omit \cs{makeglossaries} none of
the glossary files will be created.}

\begin{xtr}
If you are using \gls{glossaries-extra}, \cs{makeglossaries} has an
optional argument that allows you to have a hybrid of \optsor12 or
\optsor13. See \gls{glossaries-extra} manual for further details.
\end{xtr}

\importantpar
Note that some of the commands provided by the \styfmt{glossaries}
package must not be used after \cs{makeglossaries} as they are
required when creating the customised style file. If you attempt
to use those commands after \cs{makeglossaries} you will generate
an error.
Similarly, there are some commands that must not be used before
\cs{makeglossaries}.

You can suppress the creation of the customised \gls{xindy}
or \gls{makeindex} style file using
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\noist}]
\cs{noist}
\end{definition}
That this command must not be used after \cs{makeglossaries}.
\begin{important}
Note that if you have a custom \filetype{xdy} file created when using 
\styfmt{glossaries} version 2.07 or below, you will need to use the
\pkgopt{compatible-2.07} package option with it.
\end{important}

The default name for the customised style file is given by
\ics{jobname}\texttt{.}\filetype{ist} (\opt2) or 
\ics{jobname}\texttt{.}\filetype{xdy} (\opt3). This name may be
changed using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\setStyleFile}]
\cs{setStyleFile}\marg{name}
\end{definition}
where \meta{name} is the name of the style file without the 
extension. Note that this command must not be used after
\cs{makeglossaries}.

Each glossary entry is assigned a \gls{numberlist} that lists all 
the locations in the document where that entry was used. By default,
the location refers to the page number but this may be overridden
using the \pkgopt{counter} package option. The default form of
the location number assumes a full stop compositor (e.g.\ 1.2),
but if your location numbers use a different compositor (e.g. 1-2)
you need to set this using
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsSetCompositor}]
\cs{glsSetCompositor}\marg{symbol}
\end{definition}
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsSetCompositor{-}
\end{verbatim}
This command must not be used after \cs{makeglossaries}.

If you use \opt3, you can have a different compositor for page
numbers starting with an upper case alphabetical character using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsSetAlphaCompositor}]
\cs{glsSetAlphaCompositor}\marg{symbol}
\end{definition}
This command has no effect if you use \opt2. For example, if you want 
\glspl{numberlist} containing a mixture of A-1 and 2.3 style
formats, then do:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsSetCompositor{.}\glsSetAlphaCompositor{-}
\end{verbatim}
See \sectionref{sec:numberlists} for further information about
\glspl{numberlist}.

\chapter{Defining Glossary Entries}
\label{sec:newglosentry}

\begin{bib2gls}
If you want to use \gls{bib2gls}, entries must be defined in
\filetype{bib} files using the syntax described in the \gls{bib2gls}
user manual.
\end{bib2gls}

Acronyms are covered in \sectionref{sec:acronyms} but they use the
same underlying mechanism as all the other entries, so it's a good
idea to read this chapter first. The keys provided for
\cs{newglossaryentry} can also be used in the optional argument of
\cs{newacronym}, although some of them, such as \gloskey{first} and
\gloskey{plural}, interfere with the acronym styles.

All glossary entries must be defined before they are used, so it is
better to define them in the preamble to ensure this. In fact, some
commands such as \cs{longnewglossaryentry}
may only be used in the preamble. See \sectionref{sec:docdefs} for
a discussion of the problems with defining entries within the
document instead of in the preamble. (The \gls{glossaries-extra}
package has an option that provides a restricted form of document 
definitions that avoids some of the issues discussed in 
\sectionref{sec:docdefs}.)
\begin{important}
\opt1 enforces the preamble-only restriction on
\ics{newglossaryentry}. \opt4 requires that definitions are provided
in \filetype{bib} format. \opt5 requires either preamble-only
definitions or the use of the \gls{glossaries-extra} package option
\optfmt{docdef=restricted}.
\end{important}

Only those entries that are indexed in the document 
(using any of the commands described in
\sectionref{sec:glslink}, \sectionref{sec:glsadd} or
\sectionref{sec:crossref}) will appear in the glossary. See
\sectionref{sec:printglossary} to find out how to display the
glossary.


New glossary entries are defined using the command:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\newglossaryentry}]
\cs{newglossaryentry}\marg{label}\marg{key=value list}
\end{definition}
This is a short command, so values in \meta{key-val list} can't
contain any paragraph breaks. Take care to enclose values containing
any commas (\texttt{,}) or equal signs (\texttt{=}) with braces to hide them
from the key=value list parser.

If you have a long description that
needs to span multiple paragraphs, use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\longnewglossaryentry}]
\cs{longnewglossaryentry}\marg{label}\marg{key=value
list}\marg{long description}
\end{definition}
instead. Note that this command may only be used in the preamble.
Be careful of unwanted spaces. \cs{longnewglossaryentry} 
will remove trailing spaces in the description (via \cs{unskip})
but won't remove leading spaces. This command also appends
\cs{nopostdesc} to the end of the description, which suppresses the
post-description hook. The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides
a starred version of \cs{longnewglossaryentry} that doesn't append
either \cs{unskip} or \cs{nopostdesc}.

There are also commands that will only define the entry if it
hasn't already been defined:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\provideglossaryentry]
\cs{provideglossaryentry}\marg{label}\marg{key=value list}
\end{definition}
and
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\longprovideglossaryentry]
\cs{longprovideglossaryentry}\marg{label}\marg{key=value
list}\marg{long description}
\end{definition}
(These are both preamble-only commands.)

For all the above commands, the first argument, \meta{label}, must be 
a~unique label with which to identify this entry. \strong{This can't contain
any non-expandable commands or active characters.} The reason for
this restriction is that the label is used to construct internal commands
that store the associated information (similarly to commands
like \cs{label}) and therefore must be able to expand to a valid
control sequence name.

\begin{important}
Note that although an \gls{exlatinchar} or other \gls{nonlatinchar}, 
such as \'e or \ss, looks like a plain character in your
\texttt{.tex} file, it's actually a~macro (an active character) and
therefore can't be used in the label. (This applies to \LaTeX\
rather than \XeLaTeX.) Also be careful of
\sty{babel}'s options that change certain punctuation characters
(such as \texttt{:} or \texttt{-}) to active characters.
\end{important}

The second argument, \meta{key=value list}, is
a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list that supplies the relevant
information about this entry. There are two required fields:
\gloskey{description} and either \gloskey{name} or \gloskey{parent}.
The description is set in the third argument of
\cs{longnewglossaryentry} and \cs{longprovideglossaryentry}. With
the other commands it's set via the \gloskey{description} key.
As is typical with \meta{key}=\meta{value} lists, values that contain 
a comma or equal sign must be enclosed in braces. Available fields
are listed below. Additional fields are provided by the
supplementary packages \sty{glossaries-prefix}
(\sectionref{sec:prefix}) and \sty{glossaries-accsupp}
(\sectionref{sec:accsupp}) and also by \gls{glossaries-extra}.
You can also define your own custom keys (see
\sectionref{sec:addkey}).

\begin{description}
\item[{\gloskey{name}}] The name of the entry (as it will appear in 
the glossary). If this key is omitted and the \gloskey{parent}
key is supplied, this value will be the same as the parent's name.

\begin{important}
If the \gloskey{name} key contains any commands, you must also
use the \gloskey{sort} key (described below) if you intend sorting the entries
alphabetically, otherwise the entries can't be sorted correctly.
\end{important}

\item[{\gloskey{description}}] A brief description of this term (to
appear in the glossary). Within this value, you can use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\nopostdesc}]
\cs{nopostdesc}
\end{definition}
to suppress the
description terminator for this entry. For example, if this
entry is a parent entry that doesn't require a description, you
can do \texttt{description\dequals\mgroup{\cs{nopostdesc}}}. If you want a paragraph
break in the description use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glspar}]
\cs{glspar}
\end{definition}
or, better, use \cs{longnewglossaryentry}.
However, note that not all glossary styles support multi-line
descriptions. If you are using one of the tabular-like glossary
styles that permit multi-line descriptions, use \ics{newline}
not \verb"\\" if you want to force a line break.

\begin{xtr}
With \gls{glossaries-extra}, use \ics*{glsxtrnopostpunc} instead of
\cs{nopostdesc} to suppress the post-description punctuation.
\end{xtr}

\item[{\gloskey{parent}}] The label of the parent entry. Note that
the parent entry must be defined before its sub-entries.
See \sectionref{sec:subentries} for further details.

\item[{\gloskey{descriptionplural}}] The plural form of the
description, if required. If omitted, the value
is set to the same as the \gloskey{description} key.

\item[{\gloskey{text}}] How this entry will appear in the document text
when using \ics{gls} (or one of its upper case variants). If this
field is omitted, the value of the \gloskey{name} key is used.

This key is automatically set by \cs{newacronym}. Although it is
possible to override it by using \gloskey{text} in the optional
argument of \cs{newacronym}, it will interfere with the acronym
style and cause unexpected results.

\item[{\gloskey{first}}] How the entry will appear in the document text
on \firstuse\ with \ics{gls} (or one of its upper case
variants). If this field is omitted, the value of the \gloskey{text}
key is used. Note that if you use \ics{glspl}, \ics{Glspl},
\ics{GLSpl}, \ics{glsdisp} before using \ics{gls}, the
\gloskey{first} value won't be used with \ics{gls}.

You may prefer to use abbreviations (\sectionref{sec:acronyms})
or the category post-link hook (\ics*{glsdefpostlink}) provided by
\gls{glossaries-extra} if you would like to automatically append
content on \firstuse\ in a consistent manner. See, for example,
\gallery{index.php?label=sample-units}{Gallery: Units
(\styfmt{glossaries-extra.sty})}.

Although it is possible to use \gloskey{first} in the optional
argument of \cs{newacronym}, it can interfere with the acronym
style and cause unexpected results.

\item[{\gloskey{plural}}] How the entry will appear in the document text
when using \ics{glspl} (or one of its upper case variants).  If this
field is omitted, the value is obtained by appending
\ics{glspluralsuffix} to the value of the \gloskey{text} field.  The
default value of \ics{glspluralsuffix} is the letter \qt{s}.

Although it is possible to use \gloskey{plural} in the optional
argument of \cs{newacronym}, it can interfere with the acronym
style and cause unexpected results. Use \gloskey{shortplural}
instead, if the default value is inappropriate.

\item[{\gloskey{firstplural}}] How the entry will appear in the
document text on \firstuse\ with \ics{glspl} (or one of its
upper case variants). If this field is omitted, the value is obtained
from the \gloskey{plural} key, if the \gloskey{first} key is omitted,
or by appending \ics{glspluralsuffix} to the value of the
\gloskey{first} field, if the \gloskey{first} field is present. Note
that if you use \ics{gls}, \ics{Gls}, \ics{GLS}, \cs{glsdisp} before
using \ics{glspl}, the \gloskey{firstplural} value won't be used
with \ics{glspl}.

Although it is possible to use \gloskey{firstplural} in the optional
argument of \cs{newacronym}, it can interfere with the acronym
style and cause unexpected results. Use \gloskey{shortplural}
and \gloskey{longplural} instead, if the default value is inappropriate.

\importantpar
Note: prior to version 1.13, the default value of 
\gloskey{firstplural} was always taken by appending \qt{s} to the
\gloskey{first} key, which meant that you had to specify both
\gloskey{plural} and \gloskey{firstplural}, even if you hadn't
used the \gloskey{first} key.

\item[{\gloskey{symbol}}] This field is provided to allow the user
to specify an associated symbol. If omitted, the value is set to
\cs{relax}. Note that not all glossary styles display the symbol.

\item[{\gloskey{symbolplural}}] This is the plural form of the
symbol (as passed to \ics{glsdisplay} and \ics{glsdisplayfirst}
by \ics{glspl}, \ics{Glspl} and \ics{GLSpl}). If omitted, the value
is set to the same as the \gloskey{symbol} key.

\item[{\gloskey{sort}}] This value indicates the text to be used by
the sort comparator when ordering all the entries.  If omitted, the value is given
by the \gloskey{name} field unless one of the package options
\pkgopt[def]{sort} and \pkgopt[use]{sort} have been used. 
With \opt2 it's best to use the \gloskey{sort} key if the
\gloskey{name} contains commands (e.g.\ \verb|\ensuremath{\alpha}|)
and with \optsand13, it's strongly recommended as the indexing may
fail if you don't (see below).

You can also override the \gloskey{sort} key by redefining
\ics{glsprestandardsort} (see \sectionref{sec:pkgopts-sort}).

\begin{bib2gls}
The \gloskey{sort} key shouldn't be used with \gls{bib2gls}. It has
a system of fallbacks that allow different types of entries to
obtain the sort value from the most relevant field. See the
\gls{bib2gls} manual for further details and see also
\bibglsgallery{sorting}.
\end{bib2gls}

\opt1 by default strips the \glslink{latexexlatinchar}{standard
\LaTeX\ accents} (that is, accents generated by core \LaTeX\ commands) from the
\gloskey{name} key when it sets the \gloskey{sort} key. So with
\opt1:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{elite}{%
  name={{\'e}lite},
  description={select group of people}
}
\end{verbatim}
This is equivalent to:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{elite}{%
  name={{\'e}lite},
  description={select group of people},
  sort={elite}
}
\end{verbatim}
Unless you use the package option \pkgopt[true]{sanitizesort}, in
which case it's equivalent to:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{elite}{%
  name={{\'e}lite},
  description={select group of people},
  sort={\'elite}
}
\end{verbatim}
This will place the entry before the \qt{A} letter group since the
sort value starts with a symbol.

Similarly if you use the \sty{inputenc} package:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{elite}\mgroup{\%
  name=\mgroup{\mgroup{\'e}lite},
  description=\mgroup{select group of people}
}
\end{alltt}
This is equivalent to
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{elite}\mgroup{\%
  name=\mgroup{\mgroup{\'e}lite},
  description=\mgroup{select group of people},
  sort=elite
}
\end{alltt}
Unless you use the package option \pkgopt[true]{sanitizesort}, in
which case it's equivalent to:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{elite}\mgroup{\%
  name=\mgroup{\mgroup{\'e}lite},
  description=\mgroup{select group of people},
  sort=\'elite
}
\end{alltt}
Again, this will place the entry before the \qt{A} group.

With \optsand23, the default value of \gloskey{sort} will either be
set to the \gloskey{name} key (if \pkgopt[true]{sanitizesort}) or it
will set it to the expansion of the \gloskey{name} key (if
\pkgopt[false]{sanitizesort}).

\begin{important}
Take care with \gls{xindy} (\opt3): if you have entries with the same
\gloskey{sort} value they will be treated as the
same entry. If you use \gls{xindy} and aren't using the \texttt{def}
or \texttt{use} sort methods, \strong{always} use the \gloskey{sort}
key for entries where the name just consists of a control sequence
(for example \texttt{name=\{\cs{alpha}\}}).

Take care if you use \opt1 and the \gloskey{name} contains fragile
commands. You will either need to explicitly set the \gloskey{sort}
key or use the \pkgopt[true]{sanitizesort} package option (unless
you use the \texttt{def} or \texttt{use} sort methods).
\end{important}

\item[{\gloskey{type}}] This specifies the label of the glossary in 
which this entry belongs. If omitted, the default glossary is 
assumed unless \ics{newacronym} is used (see
\sectionref{sec:acronyms}).

\item[{\gloskey{user1}, \ldots, \gloskey{user6}%
\igloskey{user2}\igloskey{user3}\igloskey{user4}\igloskey{user5}}]
Six keys provided for any additional information the user may want
to specify.  (For example, an associated dimension or an alternative
plural or some other grammatical construct.) Alternatively, you can
add new keys using \ics{glsaddkey} or \ics{glsaddstoragekey} (see \sectionref{sec:addkey}).

\item[{\gloskey{nonumberlist}}] A boolean key. If the value is
missing or is \texttt{true}, this will suppress the \gls{numberlist} just for
this entry. Conversely, if you have used the package option
\pkgopt{nonumberlist}, you can activate the \gls*{numberlist} just
for this entry with \gloskey{nonumberlist=false}.
(See \sectionref{sec:numberlists}.)

\item[{\gloskey{see}}]
This key essentially provides a convenient shortcut that performs
\begin{alltt}
\cs{glssee}\oarg{tag}\marg{label}\marg{xr-label list}
\end{alltt}
after the entry has been defined. (See \sectionref{sec:crossref}.) 
It was originally designed for synonyms that may not occur in the
document text but needed to be included in the glossary in order to
redirect the reader. Note that it doesn't index the cross-referenced
entry (or entries) as that would interfere with their \glspl{numberlist}.

\begin{important}
Using the \gloskey{see} key will \emph{automatically add this entry
to the glossary}, but will not automatically add the
cross-referenced entry.
\end{important}

For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{courgette}{name={courgette},
  description={variety of small marrow}}
\newglossaryentry{zucchini}{name={zucchini},
  description={(North American)},
  see={courgette}}
\end{verbatim}
This defines two entries (courgette and zucchini) and automatically
adds a cross-reference from zucchini to courgette. (That is, it adds
\qt{\emph{see} courgette} to zucchini's \gls{numberlist}.) This
doesn't automatically index courgette since this would create an
unwanted location in courgette's \gls{numberlist}. (Page~1, if the
definitions occur in the preamble.)

Note that while it's possible to put the cross-reference in the
description instead, for example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{zucchini}{name={zucchini},
  description={(North American) see \gls{courgette}}}
\end{verbatim}
this won't index the zucchini entry, so if zucchini isn't indexed
elsewhere (with commands like \cs{gls} or \cs{glsadd}) then it won't
appear in the glossary even if courgette does.

The referenced entry should be supplied as the value to this key.
If you want to override the \qt{see} tag, you can supply the new
tag in square brackets before the label. For example
\verb|see=[see also]{anotherlabel}|. \strong{Note that if you have
suppressed the \gls{numberlist}, the cross-referencing information
won't appear in the glossary, as it forms part of the
\gls*{numberlist}.} You can override this for individual
glossary entries using \gloskey{nonumberlist=false} (see above).
Alternatively, you can use the \pkgopt{seeautonumberlist} package
option.  For further details, see \sectionref{sec:crossref}.

\begin{important}
For \optsand23, \ics{makeglossaries} must be used before any occurrence of
\ics{newglossaryentry} that contains the \gloskey{see} key. This key
should not be used with entries defined in the \env{document} environment.
\end{important}
Since it's useful to suppress the indexing while working on a draft
document, consider using the \pkgopt{seenoindex} package option to
warn or ignore the \gloskey{see} key while \cs{makeglossaries} is
commented out.

If you use the \gloskey{see} key, you may want to consider using the
\gls{glossaries-extra} package which additionally
provides a \texttt{seealso} and \texttt{alias} key. If you want to
avoid the automatic indexing triggered by the \gloskey{see} key,
consider using \opt4. See also the FAQ item 
\href{https://www.dickimaw-books.com/faq.php?action=view&category=glossaries&itemlabel=whyseekeyautoindex}{Why does the see key automatically index the entry?}

\begin{bib2gls}
The analogous \gls{bib2gls} \gloskey{see} field (and \xtrgloskey{seealso}) have a
slightly different meaning. The \resourceopt{selection} resource option 
determines the behaviour.
\end{bib2gls}

\item[{\xtrgloskey{seealso}}]
This key is only available with \gls{glossaries-extra} and is
similar to \gloskey{see} but it doesn't allow for the optional tag.
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides \ics*{seealsoname} and
\texttt{seealso=\marg{list}} is essentially like
\texttt{see=[\ics*{seealsoname}]\meta{list}} (\optsand34 may treat
these differently).

\item[{\xtrgloskey{alias}}]
This key is only available with \gls{glossaries-extra} and is
another form of cross-referencing.  An entry can be aliased to
another entry with \texttt{alias=\marg{label}}. This behaves like
\texttt{see=\marg{label}} but also alters the behaviour of commands
like \cs{gls} so that they index the entry given by \meta{label}
instead of the original entry. (See, for example,
\gallery{index.php?label=aliases}{Gallery: Aliases}.)

\begin{bib2gls}
More variations with the key are available with \gls{bib2gls}.
\end{bib2gls}

\item[\xtrgloskey{category}]
This key is only available with \gls{glossaries-extra} and is used
to assign a category to the entry. The value should be a label that
can be used to identify the category. See
\gls{glossaries-extra} manual for further details.

\end{description}

The following keys are reserved for \ics{newacronym} (see
\sectionref{sec:acronyms}) and also for \ics*{newabbreviation} (see the
\gls{glossaries-extra} manual): \gloskey{long}, \gloskey{longplural},
\gloskey{short} and \gloskey{shortplural}.

\begin{bib2gls}
There are also special internal field names used by \gls{bib2gls}.
See the \gls{bib2gls} manual for further details.
\end{bib2gls}

The supplementary packages \styfmt{glossaries-prefix} (\sectionref{sec:prefix}) and
\styfmt{glossaries-accsupp} (\sectionref{sec:accsupp}) provide additional keys.

\begin{important}
Avoid using any of the \glslike\ or \glstextlike\ commands within
the \gloskey{text}, \gloskey{first}, \gloskey{short} or
\gloskey{long} keys (or their plural equivalent) or any
other key that you plan to access through those commands.
(For example, the \gloskey{symbol} key if you intend to use
\cs{glssymbol}.) Otherwise you end up with nested links, which
can cause complications and they won't work with the case-changing
commands. You can use them within the value of keys 
that won't be accessed through those commands. For example,
the \gloskey{description} key if you don't use \cs{glsdesc}.
Additionally, they'll confuse the entry formatting commands, such as
\cs{glslabel}.
\end{important}

Note that if the name starts with 
\gls{nonlatinchar}, you must group the character, otherwise it will 
cause a problem for commands like \ics{Gls} and \ics{Glspl}. 
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{\'e}lite},
description={select group or class}}
\end{verbatim}
Note that the same applies if you are using the \sty{inputenc}
package:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{elite}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{\mgroup{\'e}lite},
description=\mgroup{select group or class}}
\end{alltt}
(This doesn't apply for \XeLaTeX\ or \LuaLaTeX\ documents. 
For further details, see the \qt{UTF-8} section in the
\sty{mfirstuc} user manual.)

Note that in both of the above examples, you will also need to
supply the \gloskey{sort} key if you are using \opt2
whereas \gls{xindy} (\opt3) is usually able to sort
\glspl{nonlatinchar}
correctly. \opt1 discards accents from 
\glspl{latexexlatinchar} unless you use the \pkgopt[true]{sanitizesort}.


\section{Plurals}
\label{sec:plurals}

You may have noticed from above that you can specify the plural form
when you define a term. If you omit this, the plural will be 
obtained by appending 
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glspluralsuffix}]
\cs{glspluralsuffix}
\end{definition}
to the singular form. This command defaults to the letter \qt{s}. 
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{cow}{name=cow,description={a fully grown
female of any bovine animal}}
\end{verbatim}
defines a new entry whose singular form is \qt{cow} and plural form
is \qt{cows}. However, if you are writing in archaic English, you
may want to use \qt{kine} as the plural form, in which case you
would have to do:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{cow}{name=cow,plural=kine,
description={a fully grown female of any bovine animal}}
\end{verbatim}

If you are writing in a language that supports
multiple plurals (for a given term) then use the \gloskey{plural} key
for one of them and one of the user keys to specify the
other plural form. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{cow}{%
  name=cow,%
  description={a fully grown female of any bovine animal 
               (plural cows, archaic plural kine)},%
  user1={kine}}
\end{verbatim}
You can then use \verb|\glspl{cow}| to produce \qt{cows} and 
\verb|\glsuseri{cow}| to produce \qt{kine}. You can, of course,
define an easy to remember synonym. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\let\glsaltpl\glsuseri
\end{verbatim}
Then you don't have to remember which key you used to store the
second plural. Alternatively, you can define your own keys using
\ics{glsaddkey}, described in \sectionref{sec:addkey}.

If you are using a language that usually forms plurals
by appending a different letter, or sequence of letters, you can
redefine \cs{glspluralsuffix} as required. However, this must be
done \emph{before} the entries are defined. For languages that don't
form plurals by simply appending a suffix, all the plural forms must be 
specified using the \gloskey{plural} key (and the \gloskey{firstplural}
key where necessary). 

\section{Other Grammatical Constructs}
\label{sec:grammar}

You can use the six user keys to provide alternatives, such as
participles. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\let\glsing\glsuseri
\let\glsd\glsuserii

\newcommand*{\ingkey}{user1}
\newcommand*{\edkey}{user2}

\newcommand*{\newword}[3][]{%
  \newglossaryentry{#2}{%
   name={#2},%
   description={#3},%
   \edkey={#2ed},%
   \ingkey={#2ing},#1%
  }%
}
\end{verbatim}
With the above definitions, I can now define terms like this:
\begin{verbatim}
\newword{play}{to take part in activities for enjoyment}
\newword[\edkey={ran},\ingkey={running}]{run}{to move fast using 
the legs}
\end{verbatim}
and use them in the text:
\begin{verbatim}
Peter is \glsing{play} in the park today.

Jane \glsd{play} in the park yesterday.

Peter and Jane \glsd{run} in the park last week.
\end{verbatim}

Alternatively, you can define your own keys using
\ics{glsaddkey}, described below in \sectionref{sec:addkey}.

\section{Additional Keys}
\label{sec:addkey}

You can now also define your own custom keys using the
commands described in this section. There are two types of keys:
those for use within the document and those to store information
used behind the scenes by other commands.

For example, if you want to add a key that indicates the associated
unit for a~term, you might want to reference this unit in your
document. In this case use \cs{glsaddkey} described in 
\sectionref{sec:glsaddkey}. If, on the other hand, you want to add a
key to indicate to a glossary style or acronym style that this entry
should be formatted differently to other entries, then you can use
\cs{glsaddstoragekey} described in \sectionref{sec:glsaddstoragekey}.

In both cases, a new command \meta{no link cs} will be defined that
can be used to access the value of this key (analogous to commands
such as \cs{glsentrytext}). This can be used in an expandable
context (provided any fragile commands stored in the key have been
protected). The new keys must be added using \cs{glsaddkey} or
\cs{glsaddstoragekey} before glossary entries are defined.

\subsection{Document Keys}
\label{sec:glsaddkey}

A custom key that can be used in the document is defined using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsaddkey]
\cs{glsaddkey}\marg{key}%
\marg{default value}%
\marg{no link cs}%
\marg{no link ucfirst cs}%
\marg{link cs}%
\marg{link ucfirst cs}%
\marg{link allcaps cs}
\end{definition}
where:
\begin{description}
\item[\meta{key}] is the new key to use in \ics{newglossaryentry}
(or similar commands such as \ics{longnewglossaryentry});
\item[\meta{default value}] is the default value to use if this key
isn't used in an entry definition (this may reference the current
entry label via \cs{glslabel}, but you will have to switch on
expansion via the starred version of \cs{glsaddkey} and protect
fragile commands);
\item[\meta{no link cs}] is the control sequence to use analogous
to commands like \ics{glsentrytext};
\item[\meta{no link ucfirst cs}] is the control sequence to use analogous
to commands like \ics{Glsentrytext};
\item[\meta{link cs}] is the control sequence to use analogous
to commands like \ics{glstext};
\item[\meta{link ucfirst cs}] is the control sequence to use analogous
to commands like \ics{Glstext};
\item[\meta{link allcaps cs}] is the control sequence to use analogous
to commands like \ics{GLStext}.
\end{description}
The starred version of \cs{glsaddkey} switches on expansion for this
key. The unstarred version doesn't override the current expansion
setting.

\begin{example}{Defining Custom Keys}{ex:addkey}
Suppose I want to define two new keys, \texttt{ed} and \texttt{ing},
that default to the entry text followed by \qt{ed} and \qt{ing},
respectively. The default value will need expanding in both cases, so 
I need to use the starred form:
\begin{verbatim}
 % Define "ed" key:
 \glsaddkey*
  {ed}% key
  {\glsentrytext{\glslabel}ed}% default value
  {\glsentryed}% command analogous to \glsentrytext
  {\Glsentryed}% command analogous to \Glsentrytext
  {\glsed}% command analogous to \glstext
  {\Glsed}% command analogous to \Glstext
  {\GLSed}% command analogous to \GLStext

 % Define "ing" key:
 \glsaddkey*
  {ing}% key
  {\glsentrytext{\glslabel}ing}% default value
  {\glsentrying}% command analogous to \glsentrytext
  {\Glsentrying}% command analogous to \Glsentrytext
  {\glsing}% command analogous to \glstext
  {\Glsing}% command analogous to \Glstext
  {\GLSing}% command analogous to \GLStext
\end{verbatim}
Now I can define some entries:
\begin{verbatim}
 % No need to override defaults for this entry:

 \newglossaryentry{jump}{name={jump},description={}}

 % Need to override defaults on these entries:

 \newglossaryentry{run}{name={run},%
   ed={ran},%
   ing={running},%
   description={}}

 \newglossaryentry{waddle}{name={waddle},%
   ed={waddled},%
   ing={waddling},%
   description={}}
\end{verbatim}

These entries can later be used in the document:
\begin{verbatim}
The dog \glsed{jump} over the duck.

The duck was \glsing{waddle} round the dog.

The dog \glsed{run} away from the duck.
\end{verbatim}
For a complete document, see the sample file \samplefile{-newkeys}.
\end{example}

\subsection{Storage Keys}
\label{sec:glsaddstoragekey}

A custom key that can be used for simply storing information is 
defined using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsaddstoragekey]
\cs{glsaddstoragekey}\marg{key}\marg{default value}\marg{no link cs}
\end{definition}
where the arguments are as the first three arguments of
\cs{glsaddkey}, described above in \sectionref{sec:glsaddkey}.

This is essentially the same as \cs{glsaddkey} except that it
doesn't define the additional commands. You can access or update
the value of your new field using the commands described in 
\sectionref{sec:fetchset}.

\begin{example}{Defining Custom Storage Key (Acronyms and Initialisms)}{ex:addstoragekey}
Suppose I want to define acronyms and other forms of abbreviations,
such as initialisms, but I want them all in the same glossary and I
want the acronyms on first use to be displayed with the short form followed by
the long form in parentheses, but the opposite way round for other
forms of abbreviations. (The \gls{glossaries-extra} package
provides a simpler way of achieving this.)

Here I can define a new key that determines whether the term is
actually an acronym rather than some other form of abbreviation. I'm
going to call this key \texttt{abbrtype} (since \texttt{type}
already exists):
\begin{verbatim}
\glsaddstoragekey
 {abbrtype}% key/field name
 {word}% default value if not explicitly set
 {\abbrtype}% custom command to access the value if required
\end{verbatim}

Now I can define a style that looks up the value of this new key to
determine how to display the full form:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronymstyle
 {mystyle}% style name
 {% Use the generic display
   \ifglshaslong{\glslabel}{\glsgenacfmt}{\glsgenentryfmt}%
 }
 {% Put the long form in the description
   \renewcommand*{\GenericAcronymFields}{%
       description={\the\glslongtok}}%
   % For the full format, test the value of the "abbrtype" key.
   % If it's set to "word" put the short form first with
   % the long form in brackets.
   \renewcommand*{\genacrfullformat}[2]{%
    \ifglsfieldeq{##1}{abbrtype}{word}
    {% is a proper acronym
      \protect\firstacronymfont{\glsentryshort{##1}}##2\space
       (\glsentrylong{##1})%
    }
    {% is another form of abbreviation
     \glsentrylong{##1}##2\space
      (\protect\firstacronymfont{\glsentryshort{##1}})%
    }%
  }%
  % first letter upper case version:
   \renewcommand*{\Genacrfullformat}[2]{%
    \ifglsfieldeq{##1}{abbrtype}{word}
    {% is a proper acronym
      \protect\firstacronymfont{\Glsentryshort{##1}}##2\space
       (\glsentrylong{##1})%
    }
    {% is another form of abbreviation
     \Glsentrylong{##1}##2\space
      (\protect\firstacronymfont{\glsentryshort{##1}})%
    }%
  }%
  % plural
   \renewcommand*{\genplacrfullformat}[2]{%
    \ifglsfieldeq{##1}{abbrtype}{word}
    {% is a proper acronym
      \protect\firstacronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##1}}##2\space
       (\glsentrylong{##1})%
    }
    {% is another form of abbreviation
     \glsentrylongpl{##1}##2\space
      (\protect\firstacronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##1}})%
    }%
  }%
  % plural and first letter upper case
  \renewcommand*{\Genplacrfullformat}[2]{%
    \ifglsfieldeq{##1}{abbrtype}{word}
    {% is a proper acronym
      \protect\firstacronymfont{\Glsentryshortpl{##1}}##2\space
       (\glsentrylong{##1})%
    }
    {% is another form of abbreviation
     \Glsentrylongpl{##1}##2\space
      (\protect\firstacronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##1}})%
    }%
  }%
  % Just use the short form as the name part in the glossary:
  \renewcommand*{\acronymentry}[1]{%
     \acronymfont{\glsentryshort{##1}}}%
  % Sort by the short form:
  \renewcommand*{\acronymsort}[2]{##1}%
  % Just use the surrounding font for the short form:
  \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{##1}%
  % Same for first use:
  \renewcommand*{\firstacronymfont}[1]{\acronymfont{##1}}%
  % Default plural suffix if the plural isn't explicitly set
  \renewcommand*{\acrpluralsuffix}{\glspluralsuffix}%
 }
\end{verbatim}
Remember that the new style needs to be set before defining any
terms:
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{mystyle}
\end{verbatim}

Since it's a bit confusing to use \ics{newacronym} for something
that's not technically an acronym, let's define a new command for
initialisms:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand*{\newinitialism}[4][]{%
  \newacronym[abbrtype=initialism,#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}%
}
\end{verbatim}
Now the entries can all be defined:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym{radar}{radar}{radio detecting and ranging}
\newacronym{laser}{laser}{light amplification by stimulated
emission of radiation}
\newacronym{scuba}{scuba}{self-contained underwater breathing
apparatus}
\newinitialism{dsp}{DSP}{digital signal processing}
\newinitialism{atm}{ATM}{automated teller machine}
\end{verbatim}
On \gls{firstuse}, \verb|\gls{radar}| will produce \qt{radar (radio
detecting and ranging)} but \verb|\gls{dsp}| will produce \qt{DSP
(digital signal processing)}.

For a complete document, see the sample file
\samplefile{-storage-abbr}.
\end{example}

In the above example, if \cs{newglossaryentry} is explicitly used
(instead of through \cs{newacronym}) the \texttt{abbrtype} key will
be set to its default value of \qt{word} but the \cs{ifglshaslong}
test in the custom acronym style will be false (since the
\gloskey{long} key hasn't been set) so the display style will switch
to that given by \cs{glsgenentryfmt} and they'll be no test
performed on the \texttt{abbrtype} field.

\begin{example}{Defining Custom Storage Key (Acronyms and
Non-Acronyms with Descriptions)}{ex:addstoragekey2}
The previous example can be modified if the \gloskey{description}
also needs to be provided. Here I've changed \qt{word} to
\qt{acronym}:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsaddstoragekey
 {abbrtype}% key/field name
 {acronym}% default value if not explicitly set
 {\abbrtype}% custom command to access the value if required
\end{verbatim}
This may seem a little odd for non-abbreviated entries defined using
\cs{newglossaryentry} directly, but \ics{ifglshaslong} can be used
to determine whether or not to reference the value of this new
\texttt{abbrtype} field.

The new acronym style has a~minor modification that forces the user
to specify a description. In the previous example, the line:
\begin{verbatim}
   \renewcommand*{\GenericAcronymFields}{%
     description={\the\glslongtok}}%
\end{verbatim}
needs to be changed to:
\begin{verbatim}
   \renewcommand*{\GenericAcronymFields}{}%
\end{verbatim}
Additionally, to accommodate the change in the default value of the
\texttt{abbrtype} key, all instances of 
\begin{verbatim}
    \ifglsfieldeq{##1}{abbrtype}{word}
\end{verbatim}
need to be changed to:
\begin{verbatim}
    \ifglsfieldeq{##1}{abbrtype}{acronym}
\end{verbatim}

Once this new style has been set, the new acronyms can be defined
using the optional argument to set the description:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym[description={system for detecting the position and
speed of aircraft, ships, etc}]{radar}{radar}{radio detecting
and ranging}
\end{verbatim}

No change is required for the definition of \cs{newinitialism} but
again the optional argument is required to set the description:
\begin{verbatim}
\newinitialism[description={mathematical manipulation of an
information signal}]{dsp}{DSP}{digital signal processing}
\end{verbatim}

We can also accommodate contractions in a similar manner to the
initialisms:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand*{\newcontraction}[4][]{%
  \newacronym[abbrtype=contraction,#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}%
}
\end{verbatim}
The contractions can similarly been defined using this new command:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcontraction[description={front part of a ship below the
deck}]{focsle}{fo'c's'le}{forecastle}
\end{verbatim}

Since the custom acronym style just checks if \texttt{abbrtype} is
\texttt{acronym}, the contractions will be treated the same as the
initialisms, but the style could be modified by a further test of
the \texttt{abbrtype} value if required.

To test regular non-abbreviated entries, I've also defined a simple
word:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{apple}{name={apple},description={a fruit}}
\end{verbatim}

Now for a new glossary style that provides information about the
abbreviation (in addition to the description):
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossarystyle
 {mystyle}% style name
 {% base it on the "list" style
   \setglossarystyle{list}%
   \renewcommand*{\glossentry}[2]{%
     \item[\glsentryitem{##1}%
          \glstarget{##1}{\glossentryname{##1}}]
       \ifglshaslong{##1}%
       { (\abbrtype{##1}: \glsentrylong{##1})\space}{}%
       \glossentrydesc{##1}\glspostdescription\space ##2}%
 }
\end{verbatim}
This uses \ics{ifglshaslong} to determine whether or not the term is
an abbreviation. If it has an abbreviation, the full form is
supplied in parentheses and \cs{abbrtype} (defined by
\cs{glsaddstoragekey} earlier) is used to indicate the type of
abbreviation.

With this style set, the \texttt{apple} entry is simply displayed in
the glossary as
\begin{description}
\item[apple] a fruit.
\end{description}
but the abbreviations are displayed in the form
\begin{description}
\item[laser] (acronym: light amplification by
stimulated emission of radiation) device that creates a narrow beam
of intense light.
\end{description}
(for acronyms) or
\begin{description}
\item[DSP] (initialism: digital signal processing) mathematical
manipulation of an information signal.
\end{description}
(for initalisms) or
\begin{description}
\item[fo'c's'le] (contraction: forecastle) front part of a ship
below the deck.
\end{description}
(for contractions).

For a complete document, see \samplefile{-storage-abbr-desc}.
\end{example}

\section{Expansion}
\label{sec:expansion}

When you define new glossary entries expansion is performed by
default, except for the \gloskey{name}, \gloskey{description},
\gloskey{descriptionplural}, \gloskey{symbol}, \gloskey{symbolplural}
and \gloskey{sort} keys (these keys all have expansion suppressed via
\cs{glssetnoexpandfield}).

You can switch expansion on or off for individual keys using
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glssetexpandfield]
\cs{glssetexpandfield}\marg{field}
\end{definition}
or
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glssetnoexpandfield]
\cs{glssetnoexpandfield}\marg{field}
\end{definition}
respectively, where \meta{field} is the field tag corresponding to
the key. In most cases, this is the same as the name of the key
except for those listed in \tableref{tab:fieldmap}.

\begin{table}[htbp]
\caption{Key to Field Mappings}
\label{tab:fieldmap}
\centering
\begin{tabular}{ll}
\bfseries Key & \bfseries Field\\
\gloskey{sort} & \ttfamily sortvalue\\
\gloskey{firstplural} & \ttfamily firstpl\\
\gloskey{description} & \ttfamily desc\\
\gloskey{descriptionplural} & \ttfamily descplural\\
\gloskey{user1} & \ttfamily useri\\
\gloskey{user2} & \ttfamily userii\\
\gloskey{user3} & \ttfamily useriii\\
\gloskey{user4} & \ttfamily useriv\\
\gloskey{user5} & \ttfamily userv\\
\gloskey{user6} & \ttfamily uservi\\
\gloskey{longplural} & \ttfamily longpl\\
\gloskey{shortplural} & \ttfamily shortpl
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

Any keys that haven't had the expansion explicitly set using
\cs{glssetexpandfield} or \cs{glssetnoexpandfield} are governed by
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsexpandfields]
\cs{glsexpandfields}
\end{definition}
and
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsnoexpandfields]
\cs{glsnoexpandfields}
\end{definition}

If your entries contain any fragile commands, I recommend you switch
off expansion via \cs{glsnoexpandfields}. (This should be used
before you define the entries.)

\section{Sub-Entries}
\label{sec:subentries}

As from version 1.17, it is possible to specify sub-entries. These
may be used to order the glossary into categories, in which case the
sub-entry will have a different name to its parent entry, or it may
be used to distinguish different definitions for the same word, in
which case the sub-entries will have the same name as the parent
entry. Note that not all glossary styles support hierarchical
entries and may display all the entries in a flat format. Of the
styles that support sub-entries, some display the sub-entry's name
whilst others don't. Therefore you need to ensure that you use a
suitable style. (See \sectionref{sec:styles} for a list of predefined
styles.) As from version 3.0, level~1 sub-entries are automatically
numbered in the predefined styles if you use the
\pkgopt{subentrycounter} package option (see
\sectionref{sec:pkgopts-printglos} for further details).

Note that the parent entry will automatically be added to the
glossary if any of its child entries are used in the document.
If the parent entry is not referenced in the document, it will not
have a \gls{numberlist}. Note also that \gls{makeindex} has a
restriction on the maximum sub-entry depth.

\subsection{Hierarchical Categories}
\label{sec:hierarchical}

To arrange a glossary with hierarchical categories, you need to
first define the category and then define the sub-entries using the
relevant category entry as the value of the \gloskey{parent} key.

\begin{example}{Hierarchical Categories---Greek and Roman 
Mathematical Symbols}{ex:hierarchical}

Suppose I want a glossary of mathematical symbols that
are divided into Greek letters and Roman letters. Then I can define
the categories as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{greekletter}{name={Greek letters},
description={\nopostdesc}}

\newglossaryentry{romanletter}{name={Roman letters},
description={\nopostdesc}}
\end{verbatim}

Note that in this example, the category entries don't need a
description so I have set the descriptions to \ics{nopostdesc}.
This gives a blank description and suppresses the
description terminator.

I can now define my sub-entries as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{pi}{name={\ensuremath{\pi}},sort={pi},
description={ratio of the circumference of a circle to 
the diameter},
parent=greekletter}

\newglossaryentry{C}{name={\ensuremath{C}},sort={C},
description={Euler's constant},
parent=romanletter}
\end{verbatim}
For a complete document, see the sample file \samplefile{tree}.
\end{example}

\subsection{Homographs}
\label{sec:homographs}

Sub-entries that have the same name as the parent entry, don't need
to have the \gloskey{name} key. For example, the word \qt{glossary}
can mean a list of technical words or a collection of glosses. In
both cases the plural is \qt{glossaries}. So first define the parent
entry:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{glossary}{name=glossary,
description={\nopostdesc},
plural={glossaries}}
\end{verbatim}
Again, the parent entry has no description, so the description
terminator needs to be suppressed using \ics{nopostdesc}.

Now define the two different meanings of the word:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{glossarylist}{
description={list of technical words},
sort={1},
parent={glossary}}

\newglossaryentry{glossarycol}{
description={collection of glosses},
sort={2},
parent={glossary}}
\end{verbatim}
Note that if I reference the parent entry, the location will be
added to the parent's \gls{numberlist}, whereas if I reference any
of the child entries, the location will be added to the child
entry's number list. Note also that since the sub-entries have the
same name, the \gloskey{sort} key is required unless you are using
the \pkgopt[use]{sort} or \pkgopt[def]{sort} package options (see
\sectionref{sec:pkgopts-sort}). You
can use the \pkgopt{subentrycounter} package option to automatically
number the first-level child entries. See
\sectionref{sec:pkgopts-printglos} for further details.

In the above example, the plural form for both of the child entries
is the same as the parent entry, so the \gloskey{plural} key was
not required for the child entries. However, if the sub-entries
have different plurals, they will need to be specified. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{bravo}{name={bravo},
description={\nopostdesc}}

\newglossaryentry{bravocry}{description={cry of approval 
(pl.\ bravos)},
sort={1},
plural={bravos},
parent=bravo}

\newglossaryentry{bravoruffian}{description={hired 
ruffian or killer (pl.\ bravoes)},
sort={2},
plural={bravoes},
parent=bravo}
\end{verbatim}


\section{Loading Entries From a File}
\label{sec:loadglsentries}

You can store all your glossary entry definitions in another
file and use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\loadglsentries}]
\cs{loadglsentries}\oarg{type}\marg{filename}
\end{definition}
where \meta{filename} is the name of the file containing all the
\ics{newglossaryentry} or \ics{longnewglossaryentry} commands. 
The optional argument
\meta{type} is the name of the glossary to which those entries
should belong, for those entries where the \gloskey{type} key has 
been omitted (or, more specifically, for those entries whose
type has been specified by \ics{glsdefaulttype}, which is what
\ics{newglossaryentry} uses by default).

This is a~preamble-only command. You may also use \ics{input} to load
the file but don't use \ics{include}. If you find that your file is
becoming unmanageably large, you may want to consider switching to
\gls{bib2gls} and use an application such as JabRef to manage the
entry definitions.

\begin{important}
If you want to use \ics{AtBeginDocument} to \cs{input} all your entries
automatically at the start of the document, add the
\cs{AtBeginDocument} command \emph{before} you load the
\sty{glossaries} package (and \sty{babel}, if you are also loading
that) to avoid the creation of the
\filetype{glsdefs} file and any associated problems that are caused
by defining commands in the \env{document} environment.
(See \sectionref{sec:docdefs}.)
\end{important}

\begin{example}{Loading Entries from Another File}{ex:loadgls}
Suppose I have a file called \texttt{myentries.tex} which contains:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{perl}{type=main,
name={Perl},
description={A scripting language}}

\newglossaryentry{tex}{name={\TeX},
description={A typesetting language},sort={TeX}}

\newglossaryentry{html}{type=\glsdefaulttype,
name={html},
description={A mark up language}}
\end{verbatim}
and suppose in my document preamble I use the command:
\begin{verbatim}
\loadglsentries[languages]{myentries}
\end{verbatim}
then this will add the entries \texttt{tex} and \texttt{html}
to the glossary whose type is given by \texttt{languages}, but
the entry \texttt{perl} will be added to the main glossary, since
it explicitly sets the type to \texttt{main}.
\end{example}

\importantpar
Note: if you use \ics{newacronym} (see \sectionref{sec:acronyms}) the type is set as
\verb|type=\acronymtype| unless you explicitly override it. For
example, if my file \texttt{myacronyms.tex} contains:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym{aca}{aca}{a contrived acronym}
\end{verbatim}
then (supposing I have defined a new glossary type called
\texttt{altacronym})
\begin{verbatim}
\loadglsentries[altacronym]{myacronyms}
\end{verbatim}
will add \texttt{aca} to the glossary type \texttt{acronym}, if the
package option \pkgopt{acronym} has been specified, or will add
\texttt{aca} to the glossary type \texttt{altacronym}, if the
package option \pkgopt{acronym} is not specified.\footnote{This is
because \ics{acronymtype} is set to \ics{glsdefaulttype} if the
\pkgopt{acronym} package option is not used.}

If you have used the \pkgopt{acronym} package option,
there are two possible solutions to this problem:
\begin{enumerate}
\item Change \texttt{myacronyms.tex} so that entries are defined in
the form:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym[type=\glsdefaulttype]{aca}{aca}{a 
contrived acronym}
\end{verbatim}
and do:
\begin{verbatim}
\loadglsentries[altacronym]{myacronyms}
\end{verbatim}

\item Temporarily change \cs{acronymtype} to the target glossary:
\begin{verbatim}
\let\orgacronymtype\acronymtype
\renewcommand{\acronymtype}{altacronym}
\loadglsentries{myacronyms}
\let\acronymtype\orgacronymtype
\end{verbatim}
\end{enumerate}

Note that only those entries that have been used
in the text will appear in the relevant glossaries.
Note also that \cs{loadglsentries} may only be used in the 
preamble.

Remember that you can use \ics{provideglossaryentry} rather than
\ics{newglossaryentry}. Suppose you want to maintain a large database
of acronyms or terms that you're likely to use in your documents,
but you may want to use a modified version of some of those entries.
(Suppose, for example, one document may require a more detailed
description.) Then if you define the entries using
\cs{provideglossaryentry} in your database file, you can override
the definition by simply using \cs{newglossaryentry} before loading
the file. For example, suppose your file (called, say,
\texttt{terms.tex}) contains:
\begin{verbatim}
\provideglossaryentry{mallard}{name=mallard,
 description={a type of duck}}
\end{verbatim}
but suppose your document requires a more detailed description, you
can do:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage{glossaries}
\makeglossaries

\newglossaryentry{mallard}{name=mallard,
 description={a dabbling duck where the male has a green head}}

\loadglsentries{terms}
\end{verbatim}
Now the \texttt{mallard} definition in the \texttt{terms.tex} file
will be ignored.

\section{Moving Entries to Another Glossary}
\label{sec:moveentry}

As from version~3.02, you can move an entry from one glossary to
another using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsmoveentry}]
\cs{glsmoveentry}\marg{label}\marg{target glossary label}
\end{definition}
where \meta{label} is the unique label identifying the required
entry and \meta{target glossary label} is the unique label
identifying the glossary in which to put the entry.

Note that no check is performed to determine the existence of
the target glossary. If you want to move an entry to a glossary
that's skipped by \ics{printglossaries}, then define an ignored
glossary with \ics{newignoredglossary}. (See
\sectionref{sec:newglossary}.)

\begin{important}
Unpredictable results may occur if you move an entry to a different
glossary from its parent or children.
\end{important}

\section{Drawbacks With Defining Entries in the Document Environment}
\label{sec:docdefs}

Originally, \ics{newglossaryentry} (and \ics{newacronym}) could only be 
used in the preamble. I reluctantly removed this restriction in version 1.13,
but there are issues with defining commands in the \env{document}
environment instead of the preamble, which is why the restriction is
maintained for newer commands. This restriction is also reimposed
for \cs{newglossaryentry} by the new \opt1. (The
\gls{glossaries-extra} package automatically reimposes this restriction for
\optsand23 but provides a package option to allow document
definitions if necessary.)

\subsection{Technical Issues}
\label{sec:techissues}

\begin{enumerate}
 \item If you define an entry mid-way through your document, but
subsequently shuffle sections around, you could end up using an
entry before it has been defined.

 \item Entry information is required when displaying the glossary.
If this occurs at the start of the document, but the entries aren't
defined until later, then the entry details are
being looked up before the entry has been defined. This means that
it's not possible to display the content of the glossary unless the
entry definitions are saved on the previous \LaTeX\ run and can be
picked up at the start of the \env{document} environment on the next run
(in a similar way that \cs{label} and \cs{ref} work).

 \item If you use a package, such as \sty{babel}, that makes
certain characters active at the start of the \env{document}
environment, there will be a~problem if those characters have
a~special significance when defining glossary entries.
These characters include the double-quote \verb|"| character, the
exclamation mark \texttt{!} character, the question mark \verb|?|
character, and the pipe \verb"|" character. They
must not be active when defining a~glossary entry where they occur
in the \gloskey{sort} key (and they should be avoided in the label
if they may be active at any point in the document). Additionally, 
the comma \texttt{,} character and the equals \texttt{=} character
should not be active when using commands that have
\meta{key}=\meta{value} arguments.

\end{enumerate}

To overcome the first two problems, as from version 4.0 the
\styfmt{glossaries} package modifies the definition of
\cs{newglossaryentry} at the beginning of the \env{document}
environment so that the definitions are written to an external file
(\cs{jobname}\texttt{.}\filetype{glsdefs}) which is then read in at the start
of the document on the next run. This means that the entry can now
be looked up in the glossary, even if the glossary occurs at the
beginning of the document.

There are drawbacks to this mechanism: if you modify an entry
definition, you need a second run to see the effect of your
modification in \cs{printglossary} (if it occurs at the start of the
document); this method requires an extra \cs{newwrite}, which may
exceed \TeX's maximum allocation; unexpected expansion issues could
occur.

Version 4.47 has introduced changes that have removed some of
the issues involved, and there are now warning messages if there is an
attempt to multiple define the same entry label.

The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides a setting (but only for
\optsand23) that allows \cs{newglossaryentry} to occur in the
document environment but doesn't create the \filetype{glsdefs}
file. This circumvents some problems but it means that you can't
display any of the glossaries before all the entries have been
defined (so it's all right if all the glossaries are at the end of
the document but not if any occur in the front matter).

\subsection{Good Practice Issues}
\label{sec:goodpractice}

The above section covers technical issues that can cause your document to have
compilation errors or produce incorrect output. This section
focuses on good writing practice. The main reason cited by users
wanting to define entries within the \env{document} environment rather
than in the preamble is that they want to write the definition as
they type in their document text. This suggests a \qt{stream of
consciousness} style of writing that may be acceptable in certain
literary genres but is inappropriate for factual documents.

When you write technical documents, regardless of whether it's a PhD
thesis or an article for a~journal or proceedings, you must plan what you write
in advance. If you plan in advance, you should have a fairly good
idea of the type of terminology that your document will contain,
so while you are planning, create a new file with all your entry
definitions. If, while you're writing your document, you remember
another term you need, then you can switch over to your definition file and
add it. Most text editors have the ability to have more than one
file open at a time. The other advantage to this approach is that if
you forget the label, you can look it up in the definition file
rather than searching through your document text to find the
definition.

\chapter{Referencing Entries in the Document}
\label{sec:usingentries}

Once you have defined a glossary entry using a command like
\ics{newglossaryentry} (\sectionref{sec:newglosentry}) or
\ics{newacronym} (\sectionref{sec:acronyms}), you can refer to that
entry in the document with one of the provided commands that are
describe in this manual. (There are some additional commands
provided by \gls{glossaries-extra}.) The text produced at that point
in the document is determined by the command and can also be
governed by whether or not the entry has been
\glsdisp{firstuseflag}{marked as used}.

Some of these commands are more complicated than others. Many of
them are robust and can't be used in fully expandable contexts, such
as in PDF bookmarks.

The commands are broadly divided into:
\begin{enumerate}
\item Those that display text in the document (where the formatting
can be adjusted by a style or hook) and also index the
entry (so that it's added to the document) are described in
\sectionref{sec:glslink}. This set of commands can
be further sub-divided into those that mark the entry as having been
used (the \cs{gls}-like commands, \sectionref{sec:gls-like}) and those that don't
(the \cs{glstext}-like commands, \sectionref{sec:glstext-like}).

\item Those that display text in the document without indexing or applying any
additional formatting (\sectionref{sec:glsnolink}).
\end{enumerate}
There are additional commands specific to entries defined with
\cs{newacronym} that are described in \sectionref{sec:longshortfull}.

\section{Links to Glossary Entries}
\label{sec:glslink}

The text which appears at the point in the document when using any
of the commands described in \sectionref{sec:gls-like} or
\sectionref{sec:glstext-like} is referred to as the \gls{linktext}
(even if there are no hyperlinks). These commands also add a line to
an external file that is used to generate the relevant entry in the
glossary. This information includes an associated location that is
added to the \gls{numberlist} for that entry. By default, the
location refers to the page number. For further information on
number lists, see \sectionref{sec:numberlists}.  These external
files need to be post-processed by \gls{makeindex} or \gls{xindy}
unless you have chosen \optsor14. If you don't use
\ics{makeglossaries} these external files won't be created.
(\optsand14 write the information to the \filetype{aux} file.)

Note that repeated use of these commands for the same entry can
cause the \gls{numberlist} to become quite long, which may not be
particular helpful to the reader. In this case, you can use the
non-indexing commands described in \sectionref{sec:glsnolink} or
you can use the supplemental \gls{glossaries-extra} package, which
provides a means to suppress the automated indexing of the commands listed
in this chapter.

\begin{important}
I strongly recommend that you don't use the commands
defined in this chapter in the arguments of sectioning or caption
commands or any other command that has a moving argument.

Aside from problems with expansion issues, PDF bookmarks and
possible nested hyperlinks in the table of contents (or list of
whatever) any use of the commands described in \sectionref{sec:gls-like}
will have their \firstuseflag\ unset when they appear in the table
of contents (or list of whatever).
\end{important}

The above warning is particularly important if you are using the
\styfmt{glossaries} package in conjunction with the \sty{hyperref}
package. Instead, use one of the \emph{expandable} commands listed in
\sectionref{sec:glsnolink} (such as \ics{glsentrytext} \emph{but
not} the non-expandable
case changing versions like \ics{Glsentrytext}). Alternatively, provide an
alternative via the optional argument to the sectioning\slash caption
command or use \sty{hyperref}'s \ics{texorpdfstring}. Examples:
\begin{verbatim}
\chapter{An overview of \glsentrytext{perl}}
\chapter[An overview of Perl]{An overview of \gls{perl}}
\chapter{An overview of \texorpdfstring{\gls{perl}}{Perl}}
\end{verbatim}
\begin{xtr}
If you want to retain the formatting that's available through
commands like \cs{acrshort} (for example, if you are using one of
the small caps styles), then you might want to consider the
\gls{glossaries-extra} package which provides commands
for this purpose.
\end{xtr}

If you want the \gls{linktext} to produce a hyperlink to the
corresponding entry details in the glossary, you should load the
\sty{hyperref} package \emph{before} the \styfmt{glossaries}
package. That's what I've done in this document, so if you see a
hyperlinked term, such as \gls{linktext}, you can click on the word
or phrase and it will take you to a brief description in this
document's glossary.

\begin{important}
If you use the \sty{hyperref} package, I strongly recommend you use
\app{pdflatex} rather than \app{latex} to compile your document, if
possible. The DVI format of \LaTeX\ has limitations with the
hyperlinks that can cause a problem when used with the
\styfmt{glossaries} package. Firstly, the DVI format can't break a
hyperlink across a line whereas PDF\LaTeX\ can. This means that long
glossary entries (for example, the full form of an acronym) won't be
able to break across a line with the DVI format. Secondly, the DVI
format doesn't correctly size hyperlinks in subscripts or
superscripts. This means that if you define a term that may be used
as a subscript or superscript, if you use the DVI format, it won't
come out the correct size.

These are limitations of the DVI format not of the \sty{glossaries}
package.
\end{important}

It may be that you only want terms in certain glossaries to have
hyperlinks, but not for other glossaries. In this case, you can use the
package option \pkgopt{nohypertypes} to identify the glossary lists
that shouldn't have hyperlinked \gls{linktext}. See 
\sectionref{sec:pkgopts-general} for further details.

The way the \gls{linktext} is displayed depends on 
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glstextformat}]
\cs{glstextformat}\marg{text}
\end{definition}
For example, to make all \gls{linktext} appear in a sans-serif
font, do:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glstextformat}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
\end{verbatim}
Further customisation can be done via \ics{defglsentryfmt} or by
redefining \ics{glsentryfmt}. See \sectionref{sec:glsdisplay} for
further details.

Each entry has an associated conditional referred to as the
\firstuseflag. Some of the commands described in this chapter
automatically unset this flag and can also use it
to determine what text should be displayed. These types of commands
are the \glslike\ commands and are described in
\sectionref{sec:gls-like}. The commands that don't reference or change
the \firstuseflag\ are \glstextlike\ commands and are described
in \sectionref{sec:glstext-like}.  See \sectionref{sec:glsunset} for 
commands that unset (mark the entry as having been used) or reset
(mark the entry as not used) the \firstuseflag\ without referencing
the entries.

The \glslike\ and \glstextlike\ commands all take a first
optional argument that is a comma-separated list of
\meta{key}=\meta{value} options, described below. They also have a
star-variant, which inserts \texttt{hyper=false} at the start of the
list of options and a plus-variant, which inserts
\texttt{hyper=true} at the start of the list of options. For example
\verb|\gls*{sample}| is the same as \verb|\gls[hyper=false]{sample}|
and \verb|\gls+{sample}| is the same as
\verb|\gls[hyper=true]{sample}|, whereas just \verb|\gls{sample}|
will use the default hyperlink setting which depends on a number of
factors (such as whether the entry is in a glossary that has been
identified in the \pkgopt{nohypertypes} list).  You can override the
\gloskey[glslink]{hyper} key in the variant's optional argument, for
example, \verb|\gls*[hyper=true]{sample}| but this creates
redundancy and is best avoided. The \gls{glossaries-extra} package
provides the option to add a third custom variant.

\begin{important}
Avoid nesting these commands. For example don't do
\cs{glslink}\marg{label}\texttt{\{\cs{gls}\marg{label2}\}}
as this is likely to cause problems. By implication, this
means that you should avoid using any of these commands within
the \gloskey{text}, \gloskey{first}, \gloskey{short} or
\gloskey{long} keys (or their plural equivalent) or any
other key that you plan to access through these commands.
(For example, the \gloskey{symbol} key if you intend to use
\cs{glssymbol}.)
\end{important}

The keys listed below are available for the optional first argument.
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides additional keys.
(See the \gls*{glossaries-extra} manual for further details.)
\begin{description}
\item[{\gloskey[glslink]{hyper}}] This is a boolean key which can
be used to enable\slash disable the hyperlink to the relevant entry
in the glossary. If this key is omitted, the value is determined by current
settings, as indicated above. For example, when used with a \glslike\ command, if this is the first
use and the \pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst} package option has been used,
then the default value is \texttt{hyper=false}. The hyperlink can be
forced on using \texttt{hyper=true} unless the hyperlinks have been
suppressed using \ics{glsdisablehyper}. You must load the
\sty{hyperref} package before the \sty{glossaries} package to
ensure the hyperlinks work.

\item[{\gloskey[glslink]{format}}] This specifies how to format the
associated location number for this entry in the glossary. This 
value is equivalent to the \gls{makeindex} encap value, and (as
with \ics{index}) the value needs to be the name of a command
\emph{without} the initial backslash. As with \ics{index}, the
characters \verb"(" and \verb")" can also be used to specify the
beginning and ending of a number range and they must be in matching
pairs. (For example, \verb|\gls[format={(}]{sample}| on one page
to start the range and later \verb|\gls[format={)}]{sample}| to close 
the range.)  Again as with \ics{index}, the command should be the
name of a command which takes an argument (which will be the
associated location).  Be careful not to use a declaration (such as
\texttt{bfseries}) instead of a text block command (such as
\texttt{textbf}) as the effect is not guaranteed to be localised. If
you want to apply more than one style to a given entry (e.g.\
\textbf{bold} and \emph{italic}) you will need to create a command
that applies both formats, e.g.\ 
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand*{\textbfem}[1]{\textbf{\emph{#1}}}
\end{verbatim}
and use that command.

In this document, the standard formats refer to the standard text
block commands such as \ics{textbf} or \ics{emph} or any of the
commands listed in \tableref{tab:hyperxx}. You can combine a range
and format using \verb|(|\meta{format}  to start the range and
\verb|)|\meta{format} to end the range.  The \meta{format} part must
match. For example, \verb|format={(emph}| and \verb|format={)emph}|.

\begin{important}
If you use \gls{xindy} instead of \gls{makeindex}, you
must specify any non-standard formats that you want to use
with the \gloskey[glslink]{format} key using
\ics{GlsAddXdyAttribute}\marg{name}. So if you use
\gls*{xindy} with the above example, you would need to add:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyAttribute{textbfem}
\end{verbatim}
See \sectionref{sec:xindy} for further details.
\end{important}

If you are using hyperlinks and you want to change the font of the
hyperlinked location, don't use \ics{hyperpage} (provided by the
\sty{hyperref} package) as the locations may not refer to a page
number.  Instead, the \styfmt{glossaries} package provides number
formats listed in \tableref{tab:hyperxx}. These commands are
designed to work with the particular location formats created by
\gls{makeindex} and \gls{xindy} and shouldn't be used in other
contexts.

\begin{table}[htbp]
\caption{Predefined Hyperlinked Location Formats}
\label{tab:hyperxx}
\centering
\vskip\baselineskip
\begin{tabular}{ll}
\locfmt{hyperrm} & serif hyperlink\\
\locfmt{hypersf} & sans-serif hyperlink\\
\locfmt{hypertt} & monospaced hyperlink\\
\locfmt{hyperbf} & bold hyperlink\\
\locfmt{hypermd} & medium weight hyperlink\\
\locfmt{hyperit} & italic hyperlink\\
\locfmt{hypersl} & slanted hyperlink\\
\locfmt{hyperup} & upright hyperlink\\
\locfmt{hypersc} & small caps hyperlink\\
\locfmt{hyperemph} & emphasized hyperlink
\end{tabular}
\par
\end{table}

Note that if the \ics{hyperlink} command hasn't been defined, the
\texttt{hyper}\meta{xx} formats are equivalent to the analogous
\texttt{text}\meta{xx} font commands (and \texttt{hyperemph} is
equivalent to \texttt{emph}). If you want to make a new format, you
will need to define a command which takes one argument and use that.
For example, if you want the location number to be in a bold
sans-serif font, you can define a command called, say,
\ics{hyperbsf}:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\hyperbsf}[1]{\textbf{\hypersf{#1}}}
\end{verbatim}
and then use \texttt{hyperbsf} as the value for the \gloskey[glslink]{format}
key.\footnote{See also \ifpdf section~\ref*{sec:code:printglos} \fi
\qt{Displaying the glossary} in the documented code,
\texttt{glossaries-code.pdf}.} 

\begin{important}
When defining a custom location format command that uses one of the
\csmeta{hyper}{xx}{} commands, make sure that the argument of
\csmeta{hyper}{xx}{} is just the location. Any formatting must be
outside of \csmeta{hyper}{xx}{} (as in the above \cs{hyperbfsf}
example).
\end{important}

Remember that if you use \gls{xindy}, you
will need to add this to the list of location \ixindyattrs attributes:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperbsf}
\end{verbatim}

\item[{\gloskey[glslink]{counter}}] This specifies which counter
to use for this location. This overrides the default counter
used by this entry. (See also \sectionref{sec:numberlists}.)

\item[{\gloskey[glslink]{local}}] This is a boolean key that only
makes a difference when used with \glslike\ commands that change the
entry's \gls{firstuseflag}. If \texttt{local=true}, the change to
the \gls*{firstuseflag} will be localised to the current scope. The
default is \texttt{local=false}.

\item[{\xtrgloskey[glslink]{noindex}}] This is a boolean key that
suppresses the indexing. Only available with \gls{glossaries-extra}.

\item[{\xtrgloskey[glslink]{hyperoutside}}] This is a boolean key that
determines whether to put the hyperlink outside of \ics{glstextformat}. 
Only available with \gls{glossaries-extra}.

\item[{\xtrgloskey[glslink]{wrgloss}}] This key determines
whether to index before (\texttt{wrgloss\dequals before}) or after
(\texttt{wrgloss\dequals after}) the \gls{linktext}.
Only available with \gls{glossaries-extra}.

\item[{\xtrgloskey[glslink]{textformat}}] This key identifies the
name of the control sequence to encapsulate the \gls{linktext}
instead of the default \ics{glstextformat}.
Only available with \gls{glossaries-extra}.

\item[{\xtrgloskey[glslink]{prefix}}] This key locally redefines
\ics{glolinkprefix} to the given value.
Only available with \gls{glossaries-extra}.

\item[{\xtrgloskey[glslink]{thevalue}}] This key explicitly sets the
location.
Only available with \gls{glossaries-extra}.

\item[{\xtrgloskey[glslink]{theHvalue}}] This key explicitly sets the
hyperlink location.
Only available with \gls{glossaries-extra}.

\end{description}

\begin{important}
The \gls{linktext} isn't scoped by default with just the base
\styfmt{glossaries} package. Any unscoped
declarations in the \gls{linktext} may affect subsequent text.
\end{important}

\subsection{The \cs{gls}-Like Commands (First Use Flag Queried)}
\label{sec:gls-like}

This section describes the commands that unset (mark as used) the \firstuseflag\ on
completion, and in most cases they use the current state of the flag
to determine the text to be displayed. As described above, these
commands all have a star-variant (\texttt{hyper=false}) and 
a plus-variant (\texttt{hyper=true}) and have an
optional first argument that is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list.
These commands use \ics{glsentryfmt} or the equivalent definition provided by
\ics{defglsentryfmt} to determine the automatically generated text
and its format (see \sectionref{sec:glsdisplay}).

Apart from \ics{glsdisp}, the commands described in this section
also have a \emph{final} optional argument \meta{insert} which may
be used to insert material into the automatically generated text.

\begin{important}
Since the commands have a final optional argument, take care if
you actually want to display an open square bracket after the command
when the final optional argument is absent. Insert an empty set of
braces \verb|{}| immediately before the opening square bracket to
prevent it from being interpreted as the final argument. For
example:
\begin{verbatim}
\gls{sample} {}[Editor's comment]
\end{verbatim}

Don't use any of the \glslike\ or \glstextlike\ commands in the 
\meta{insert} argument.
\end{important}

Take care using these commands within commands or environments that
are processed multiple times as this can confuse the first use flag
query and state change. This includes frames with overlays in
\cls{beamer} and the \envfmt{tabularx} environment provided by \sty{tabularx}. 
The \styfmt{glossaries} package automatically deals with this issue
in \sty{amsmath}'s \envfmt{align} environment. You can apply a patch
to \sty{tabularx} by placing the following command (new to v4.28) in 
the preamble:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glspatchtabularx]
\cs{glspatchtabularx}
\end{definition}
This does nothing if \sty{tabularx} hasn't been loaded. There's no
patch available for \cls{beamer}. See \sectionref{sec:glsunset} for
more details.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\gls}]
\cs{gls}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command typically determines the \gls{linktext} from the values
of the \gloskey{text} or \gloskey{first} keys supplied when the
entry was defined using \ics{newglossaryentry}. However, if the
entry was defined using \ics{newacronym} and \ics{setacronymstyle} was 
used, then the \gls*{linktext} will usually be determined from the \gloskey{long} or
\gloskey{short} keys.

There are two upper case variants:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Gls}]
\cs{Gls}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
and
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLS}]
\cs{GLS}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
which make the first letter of the link text or all the link text
upper case, respectively. For the former, the uppercasing of the
first letter is performed by \ics{makefirstuc}.

\begin{important}
The first letter uppercasing command \cs{makefirstuc} has
limitations which must be taken into account if you use \cs{Gls} or
any of the other commands that convert the first letter to
uppercase. 
\end{important}
The upper casing is performed as follows:
\begin{itemize}
\item If the first thing in the \gls{linktext} is a command follow
by a group, the upper casing is performed on the first object of the
group. For example, if an entry has been defined as
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{
 name={\emph{sample} phrase},
 sort={sample phrase},
 description={an example}}
\end{verbatim}
Then \cs{Gls}\verb|{sample}| will set the \gls{linktext}
to\footnote{I've used \cs{MakeUppercase} in all the examples for clarity, but it
will actually use \cs{mfirstucMakeUppercase}.}
\begin{verbatim}
\emph{\MakeUppercase sample} phrase
\end{verbatim}
which will appear as \emph{\MakeUppercase sample} phrase.

\item If the first thing in the \gls{linktext} isn't a command or is
a command but isn't followed by a group, then the upper casing will
be performed on that first thing. For example, if an entry has been
defined as:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{
  name={\oe-ligature},
  sort={oe-ligature},
  description={an example}
}
\end{verbatim}
Then \cs{Gls}\verb|{sample}| will set the \gls{linktext} to
\begin{verbatim}
\MakeUppercase \oe-ligature
\end{verbatim}
which will appear as \MakeUppercase \oe-ligature.

\item If you have \sty{mfirstuc} v2.01 or above, an extra case is
added. If the first thing is \cs{protect} it will be discarded and
the above rules will then be tried.

\end{itemize}
(Note the use of the \gloskey{sort} key in the above examples.)

There are hundreds of \LaTeX\ packages that altogether define
thousands of commands with various syntax and it's impossible for
\sty{mfirstuc} to take them all into account. The above rules are quite
simplistic and are designed for \gls{linktext} that starts with
a~text-block command (such as \cs{emph}) or a command that produces 
a character (such as \cs{oe}). This means that if your \gls{linktext}
starts with something that doesn't adhere to \sty{mfirstuc}'s assumptions
then things are likely to go wrong.

For example, starting with a math-shift symbol:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{
  name={$a$},
  sort={a},
  description={an example}
}
\end{verbatim}
This falls into case~2 above, so the \gls{linktext} will be set to
\begin{verbatim}
\MakeUppercase $a$
\end{verbatim}
This attempts to uppercase the math-shift \verb|$|, which will go
wrong. In this case it's not appropriate to perform any
case-changing, but it may be that you want to use \cs{Gls}
programmatically without checking if the text contains any maths.
In this case, the simplest solution is to insert an empty brace at
the start:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{
  name={{}$a$},
  sort={a},
  description={an example}
}
\end{verbatim}
Now the \gls{linktext} will be set to
\begin{verbatim}
\MakeUppercase{}$a$
\end{verbatim}
and the \cs{uppercase} becomes harmless.

Another issue occurs when the \gls{linktext} starts with a command
followed by an argument (case~1) but the argument is a label,
identifier or something else that shouldn't have a case-change.
A common example is when the \gls{linktext} starts with one of the
commands described in this chapter. (But you haven't done that, have
you? What with the warning not to do it at the beginning of the chapter.)
Or when the \gls{linktext} starts with one of the non-linking
commands described in \sectionref{sec:glsnolink}. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{name={sample},description={an example}}
\newglossaryentry{sample2}{
   name={\glsentrytext{sample} two},
   sort={sample two},
   description={another example}
 }
\end{verbatim}
Now the \gls{linktext} will be set to:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsentrytext{\MakeUppercase sample} two
\end{verbatim}
This will generate an error because there's no entry with the label
\qt{\texttt{\cs{MakeUppercase} sample}}. The best solution here is to 
write the term out in the \gloskey{text} field and use the command
in the \gloskey{name} field. If you don't use \cs{glsname} anywhere
in your document, you can use \cs{gls} in the \gloskey{name} field:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{name={sample},description={an example}}
\newglossaryentry{sample2}{
   name={\gls{sample} two},
   sort={sample two},
   text={sample two},
   description={another example}
 }
\end{verbatim}

If the \gls{linktext} starts with a command that has an optional
argument or with multiple arguments where the actual text isn't in
the first argument, then \cs{makefirstuc} will also fail. For
example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{
 name={\textcolor{blue}{sample} phrase},
 sort={sample phrase},
 description={an example}}
\end{verbatim}
Now the \gls{linktext} will be set to:
\begin{verbatim}
\textcolor{\MakeUppercase blue}{sample} phrase
\end{verbatim}
This won't work because \verb|\MakeUppercase blue| isn't a recognised
colour name. In this case you will have to define a helper command where
the first argument is the text. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{
\newcommand*{\blue}[1]{\textcolor{blue}{#1}}
 name={\blue{sample} phrase},
 sort={sample phrase},
 description={an example}}
\end{verbatim}
In fact, since the whole design ethos of \LaTeX\ is the separation
of content and style, it's better to use a semantic command. For
example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{
\newcommand*{\keyword}[1]{\textcolor{blue}{#1}}
 name={\keyword{sample} phrase},
 sort={sample phrase},
 description={an example}}
\end{verbatim}
For further details see the \sty{mfirstuc} user manual.

There are plural forms that are analogous to \cs{gls}:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glspl}]
\cs{glspl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glspl}]
\cs{Glspl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLSpl}]
\cs{GLSpl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
These typically determine the link text from the \gloskey{plural} or
\gloskey{firstplural} keys supplied when the entry was 
defined using \ics{newglossaryentry} or, if the entry is an
abbreviation and \cs{setacronymstyle} was used, from the \gloskey{longplural} or
\gloskey{shortplural} keys.

\begin{important}
Be careful when you use glossary entries in math mode especially if you 
are using \sty{hyperref} as it can affect the spacing of subscripts and
superscripts. For example, suppose you have defined the following
entry:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{Falpha}{name={F_\alpha},
description=sample}
\end{verbatim}
and later you use it in math mode:
\begin{verbatim}
$\gls{Falpha}^2$
\end{verbatim}
This will result in $F_\alpha{}^2$ instead of $F_\alpha^2$. In this
situation it's best to bring the superscript into the hyperlink using
the final \meta{insert} optional argument:
\begin{verbatim}
$\gls{Falpha}[^2]$
\end{verbatim}
\end{important}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsdisp}]
\cs{glsdisp}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{link text}
\end{definition}
This behaves in the same way as the above commands, except
that the \meta{link text} is explicitly set. There's no final
optional argument as any inserted material can be added to the
\meta{link text} argument.

\begin{important}
Don't use any of the \glslike\ or \glstextlike\ commands in the 
\meta{link text} argument of \cs{glsdisp}.
\end{important}

\subsection{The \cs{glstext}-Like Commands (First Use Flag Not Queried)}
\label{sec:glstext-like}

This section describes the commands that don't change or reference
the \firstuseflag. As described above, these commands all have a
star-variant (\texttt{hyper=false}) and a plus-variant
(\texttt{hyper=true}) and have an optional first argument
that is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list. These commands also don't
use \ics{glsentryfmt} or the equivalent definition provided by
\ics{defglsentryfmt} (see \sectionref{sec:glsdisplay}). 
Additional commands for abbreviations are described in
\sectionref{sec:acronyms}.

Apart from \ics{glslink}, the commands described in this section
also have a \emph{final} optional argument \meta{insert} which may
be used to insert material into the automatically generated text.
See the caveat above in \sectionref{sec:gls-like}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glslink}]
\cs{glslink}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{link text}
\end{definition}
This command explicitly sets the \gls{linktext} as given in the
final argument.

\begin{important}
Don't use any of the \glslike\ or \glstextlike\ commands in the 
argument of \cs{glslink}. By extension, this means that you can't
use them in the value of fields that are used to form
\gls{linktext}.
\end{important}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glstext}]
\cs{glstext}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command always uses the value of the \gloskey{text} key as the
\gls{linktext}.

There are also analogous commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glstext}]
\cs{Glstext}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLStext}]
\cs{GLStext}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
These convert the first character or all the characters to
uppercase, respectively. See the note on \cs{Gls} above for details
on the limitations of converting the first letter to upper case.

There's no equivalent command for title-casing, but you
can use the more generic command \ics{glsentrytitlecase}
in combination with \cs{glslink}. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\glslink{sample}{\glsentrytitlecase{sample}{text}}
\end{verbatim}
(See \sectionref{sec:glsnolink}.)

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsfirst}]
\cs{glsfirst}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command always uses the value of the \gloskey{first} key as the
\gls{linktext}.

There are also analogous uppercasing commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsfirst}]
\cs{Glsfirst}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLSfirst}]
\cs{GLSfirst}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}

\begin{important}
The value of the \gloskey{first} key (and \gloskey{firstplural} key)
doesn't necessarily match the text produced by \ics{gls} (or \ics{glspl}) on
\firstuse\ as the \gls{linktext} used by \ics{gls} may be modified
through commands like \ics{defglsentry}. (Similarly, the value of the
\gloskey{text} and \gloskey{plural} keys don't necessarily match
the \gls*{linktext} used by \cs{gls} or \cs{glspl} on subsequent
use.)
\end{important}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsplural}]
\cs{glsplural}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command always uses the value of the \gloskey{plural} key as the
\gls{linktext}.

There are also analogous uppercasing commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsplural}]
\cs{Glsplural}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLSplural}]
\cs{GLSplural}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsfirstplural}]
\cs{glsfirstplural}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command always uses the value of the \gloskey{firstplural} key as the
\gls{linktext}.

There are also analogous uppercasing commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsfirstplural}]
\cs{Glsfirstplural}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLSfirstplural}]
\cs{GLSfirstplural}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsname}]
\cs{glsname}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command always uses the value of the \gloskey{name} key as the
\gls{linktext}. Note that this may be different from the values of
the \gloskey{text} or \gloskey{first} keys. In general it's better
to use \cs{glstext} or \cs{glsfirst} instead of \cs{glsname}.

There are also analogous uppercasing commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsname}]
\cs{Glsname}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLSname}]
\cs{GLSname}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}

\begin{important}
In general it's best to avoid \cs{Glsname} with acronyms. Instead,
consider using \cs{Acrlong}, \cs{Acrshort} or \cs{Acrfull}.
\end{important}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glssymbol}]
\cs{glssymbol}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command always uses the value of the \gloskey{symbol} key as the
\gls{linktext}.

There are also analogous uppercasing commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glssymbol}]
\cs{Glssymbol}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLSsymbol}]
\cs{GLSsymbol}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsdesc}]
\cs{glsdesc}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command always uses the value of the \gloskey{description} key as the
\gls{linktext}.

There are also analogous uppercasing commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsdesc}]
\cs{Glsdesc}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLSdesc}]
\cs{GLSdesc}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}

If you want the title case version you can use
\begin{verbatim}
\glslink{sample}{\glsentrytitlecase{sample}{desc}}
\end{verbatim}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsuseri}]
\cs{glsuseri}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command always uses the value of the 
\gloskey{user1} key as the \gls{linktext}.

There are also analogous uppercasing commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsuseri}]
\cs{Glsuseri}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLSuseri}]
\cs{GLSuseri}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsuserii}]
\cs{glsuserii}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command always uses the value of the 
\gloskey{user2} key as the \gls{linktext}.

There are also analogous uppercasing commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsuserii}]
\cs{Glsuserii}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLSuserii}]
\cs{GLSuserii}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsuseriii}]
\cs{glsuseriii}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command always uses the value of the 
\gloskey{user3} key as the \gls{linktext}.

There are also analogous uppercasing commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsuseriii}]
\cs{Glsuseriii}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLSuseriii}]
\cs{GLSuseriii}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsuseriv}]
\cs{glsuseriv}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command always uses the value of the 
\gloskey{user4} key as the \gls{linktext}.

There are also analogous uppercasing commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsuseriv}]
\cs{Glsuseriv}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLSuseriv}]
\cs{GLSuseriv}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsuserv}]
\cs{glsuserv}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command always uses the value of the 
\gloskey{user5} key as the \gls{linktext}.

There are also analogous uppercasing commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsuserv}]
\cs{Glsuserv}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLSuserv}]
\cs{GLSuserv}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsuservi}]
\cs{glsuservi}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command always uses the value of the 
\gloskey{user6} key as the \gls{linktext}.

There are also analogous uppercasing commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsuservi}]
\cs{Glsuservi}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GLSuservi}]
\cs{GLSuservi}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}

\subsection{Changing the format of the link text}
\label{sec:glsdisplay}

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides ways of altering the
format according to the category. See the \gls{glossaries-extra}
manual for further details.
\end{xtr}

The default format of the \gls{linktext} for the \glslike\ commands 
is governed by\footnote{\ics{glsdisplayfirst} and \ics{glsdisplay} are now
deprecated. Backwards compatibility should be preserved but
you may need to use the \pkgopt{compatible-3.07} option}:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryfmt}]
\cs{glsentryfmt}
\end{definition}
This may be redefined but if you only want the change the display style 
for a given glossary, then you need to use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\defglsentryfmt}]
\cs{defglsentryfmt}\oarg{type}\marg{definition}
\end{definition}
instead of redefining \cs{glsentryfmt}. The optional first argument 
\meta{type} is the glossary type. This defaults to
\ics{glsdefaulttype} if omitted. The second argument is the
entry format definition.

\begin{important}
Note that \cs{glsentryfmt} is the default display format for
entries. Once the display format has been changed for an individual
glossary using \ics{defglsentryfmt}, redefining \cs{glsentryfmt}
won't have an effect on that glossary, you must instead use
\cs{defglsentryfmt} again. Note that glossaries that have
been identified as lists of acronyms (via the package option
\pkgopt{acronymlists} or the command \ics{DeclareAcronymList}, 
see \sectionref{sec:pkgopts-acronym}) use 
\cs{defglsentryfmt} to set their display style.
\end{important}

Within the \meta{definition} argument of \cs{defglsentryfmt}, or if you
want to redefine \cs{glsentryfmt}, you may use the following
commands:

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glslabel}]
\cs{glslabel}
\end{definition}
This is the label of the entry being referenced. As from version
4.08, you can also access the glossary entry type using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glstype}]
\cs{glstype}
\end{definition}
This is defined using \ics{edef} so the replacement text is the
actual glossary type rather than \verb|\glsentrytype{\glslabel}|.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glscustomtext}]
\cs{glscustomtext}
\end{definition}
This is the custom text supplied in \cs{glsdisp}. It's always empty
for \ics{gls}, \ics{glspl} and their upper case variants. (You can 
use \sty{etoolbox}'s \cs{ifdefempty} to determine if
\cs{glscustomtext} is empty.) 

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsinsert}]
\cs{glsinsert}
\end{definition}
The custom text supplied in the final optional argument to \cs{gls},
\cs{glspl} and their upper case variants.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsifplural}]
\cs{glsifplural}\marg{true text}\marg{false text}
\end{definition}
If \cs{glspl}, \cs{Glspl} or \cs{GLSpl} was used, this command does 
\meta{true text} otherwise it does \meta{false text}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glscapscase}]
\cs{glscapscase}\marg{no case}\marg{first uc}\marg{all caps}
\end{definition}
If \cs{gls}, \cs{glspl} or \cs{glsdisp} were used, this does \meta{no
case}. If \cs{Gls} or \cs{Glspl} were used, this does \meta{first
uc}. If \cs{GLS} or \cs{GLSpl} were used, this does \meta{all caps}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsifhyperon]
\cs{glsifhyperon}\marg{hyper true}\marg{hyper false}
\end{definition}
This will do \meta{hyper true} if the hyperlinks are on for the
current reference, otherwise it will do \meta{hyper false}. The
hyperlink may be off even if it wasn't explicitly switched off with
the \gloskey[glslink]{hyper} key or the use of a starred command.
It may be off because the \sty{hyperref} package hasn't been loaded
or because \ics{glsdisablehyper} has been used or because the entry
is in a glossary type that's had the hyperlinks switched off (using
\pkgopt{nohypertypes}) or because it's the \firstuse\ and the
hyperlinks have been suppressed on first use.

\begin{important}
The \cs{glsifhyperon} command should be used instead of 
\ics{glsifhyper}, which is now deprecated (and no longer documented). 
\end{important}

If you want to know if the command used to reference
this entry was used with the star or plus variant, you can use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glslinkvar]
\cs{glslinkvar}\marg{unmodified}\marg{star}\marg{plus}
\end{definition} 
This will do \meta{unmodified} if the unmodified version was used,
or will do \meta{star} if the starred version was used, or
will do \meta{plus} if the plus version was used.
Note that this doesn't take into account if the 
\gloskey[glslink]{hyper} key was used to override the default
setting, so this command shouldn't be used to guess whether or not
the hyperlink is on for this reference.

Note that you can also use commands such as \ics{ifglsused} within
the definition of \cs{glsentryfmt} (see \sectionref{sec:glsunset}).

The commands \ics{glslabel}, \ics{glstype}, \ics{glsifplural},
\ics{glscapscase}, \ics{glsinsert} and \ics{glscustomtext} are
typically updated at the start of the \glslike\ and \glstextlike\
commands so they can usually be accessed in the hook user commands,
such as \ics{glspostlinkhook} and \ics{glslinkpostsetkeys}.

\begin{important}
This means that using commands like \ics{gls} within the fields
that are accessed using the \glslike\ or \glstextlike\ commands
(such as the \gloskey{first}, \gloskey{text}, \gloskey{long}
or \gloskey{short} keys) will cause a problem. The entry formatting
performed by \cs{glsentryfmt} and related commands isn't scoped
(otherwise if would cause problems for \cs{glspostlinkhook} which
may need to look ahead as well as look behind).
This means that any nested commands will, at the very least, change 
the label stored in \cs{glslabel}.
\end{important}

If you only want to make minor modifications to \cs{glsentryfmt},
you can use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsgenentryfmt}]
\cs{glsgenentryfmt}
\end{definition}
This uses the above commands to display just the \gloskey{first}, 
\gloskey{text}, \gloskey{plural} or \gloskey{firstplural} keys 
(or the custom text) with the insert text appended.

Alternatively, if you want to change the entry format for abbreviations
(defined via \ics{newacronym}) you can use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsgenacfmt}]
\cs{glsgenacfmt}
\end{definition}
This uses the values from the \gloskey{long}, \gloskey{short},
\gloskey{longplural} and \gloskey{shortplural} keys, rather than
using the \gloskey{text}, \gloskey{plural}, \gloskey{first} 
and \gloskey{firstplural} keys. The first use singular text is obtained via:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\genacrfullformat}]
\cs{genacrfullformat}\marg{label}\marg{insert}
\end{definition}
instead of from the \gloskey{first} key, and the first use plural
text is obtained via:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\genplacrfullformat}]
\cs{genplacrfullformat}\marg{label}\marg{insert}
\end{definition}
instead of from the \gloskey{firstplural} key.
In both cases, \meta{label} is the entry's label and \meta{insert}
is the insert text provided in the final optional argument of
commands like \ics{gls}. The default behaviour is to do the long
form (or plural long form) followed by \meta{insert} and a~space and the short form (or plural
short form) in parentheses, where the short form is in the argument
of \ics{firstacronymfont}. There are also first letter upper case
versions:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Genacrfullformat}]
\cs{Genacrfullformat}\marg{label}\marg{insert}
\end{definition}
and
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Genplacrfullformat}]
\cs{Genplacrfullformat}\marg{label}\marg{insert}
\end{definition}
By default these perform a protected expansion on their no-case-change
equivalents and then use \ics{makefirstuc} to convert the first
character to upper case. If there are issues caused by this
expansion, you will need to redefine those commands to explicitly
use commands like \ics{Glsentrylong} (which is what the predefined
acronym styles, such as \acrstyle{long-short}, do). Otherwise, you
only need to redefine \ics{genacrfullformat} and
\ics{genplacrfullformat} to change the behaviour of
\ics{glsgenacfmt}. See \sectionref{sec:acronyms} for further details
on changing the style of acronyms.

\begin{important}
Note that \cs{glsentryfmt} (or the formatting given by \cs{defglsentryfmt}) 
is not used by the \glstextlike\ commands.
\end{important}

As from version 4.16, both the \glslike\ and \glstextlike\ commands
use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glslinkpostsetkeys]
\cs{glslinkpostsetkeys}
\end{definition}
after the \meta{options} are set. This macro does nothing by default
but can be redefined. (For example, to switch off the hyperlink
under certain conditions.) This version also introduces
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glspostlinkhook]
\cs{glspostlinkhook}
\end{definition}
which is done after the link text has been displayed and also
\emph{after} the \firstuseflag\ has been unset (see
example~\ref{ex:dotabbr}).

\begin{example}{Custom Entry Display in Text}{ex:customfmt}
Suppose you want a glossary of measurements and
units, you can use the \gloskey{symbol} key to store the unit:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{distance}{name=distance,
description={The length between two points},
symbol={km}}
\end{verbatim}
and now suppose you want \verb|\gls{distance}| to produce
\qt{distance (km)} on \firstuse, then you can redefine
\ics{glsentryfmt} as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glsentryfmt}{%
  \glsgenentryfmt
  \ifglsused{\glslabel}{}{\space (\glsentrysymbol{\glslabel})}%
}
\end{verbatim}

(Note that I've used \ics{glsentrysymbol} rather than \ics{glssymbol}
to avoid nested hyperlinks.)

Note also that all of the \gls{linktext} will be formatted according
to \ics{glstextformat} (described earlier). So if you do, say:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glstextformat}[1]{\textbf{#1}}
\renewcommand*{\glsentryfmt}{%
  \glsgenentryfmt
  \ifglsused{\glslabel}{}{\space(\glsentrysymbol{\glslabel})}%
}
\end{verbatim}
then \verb|\gls{distance}| will produce \qt{\textbf{distance (km)}}.

For a complete document, see the sample file \samplefile{-entryfmt}.
\end{example}

\begin{example}{Custom Format for Particular Glossary}{ex:defglsentryfmt}
Suppose you have created a new glossary called
\texttt{notation} and you want to change the way the entry is
displayed on \firstuse\ so that it includes the symbol, you can do:
\begin{verbatim}
\defglsentryfmt[notation]{\glsgenentryfmt
 \ifglsused{\glslabel}{}{\space
   (denoted \glsentrysymbol{\glslabel})}}
\end{verbatim}
Now suppose you have defined an entry as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{set}{type=notation,
  name=set,
  description={A collection of objects},
  symbol={$S$}
}
\end{verbatim}
The \glslink{firstuse}{first time} you reference this entry it will be displayed as:
\qt{set (denoted $S$)} (assuming \ics{gls} was used).

Alternatively, if you expect all the symbols to be set in math mode,
you can do:
\begin{verbatim}
\defglsentryfmt[notation]{\glsgenentryfmt
 \ifglsused{\glslabel}{}{\space
   (denoted $\glsentrysymbol{\glslabel}$)}}
\end{verbatim}
and define entries like this:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{set}{type=notation,
  name=set,
  description={A collection of objects},
  symbol={S}
}
\end{verbatim}
\end{example}

Remember that if you use the \gloskey{symbol} key, you need to use a
glossary style that displays the symbol, as many of the styles
ignore it.

\subsection{Enabling and disabling hyperlinks to glossary entries}
\label{sec:disablehyperlinks}

If you load the \sty{hyperref} or \sty{html} packages prior to
loading the \styfmt{glossaries} package, the \glslike\ and
\glstextlike\ commands will automatically have hyperlinks
to the relevant glossary entry, unless the \gloskey[glslink]{hyper}
option has been switched off (either explicitly or through 
implicit means, such as via the \pkgopt{nohypertypes} package option).

You can disable or enable links using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsdisablehyper}]
\cs{glsdisablehyper}
\end{definition}
and
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsenablehyper}]
\cs{glsenablehyper}
\end{definition}
respectively. The effect can be localised by placing the commands
within a group. Note that you should only use \cs{glsenablehyper}
if the commands \ics{hyperlink} and \ics{hypertarget} have been
defined (for example, by the \sty{hyperref} package).

You can disable just the \gls{firstuse} links using the package
option \pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst}. Note that this option only
affects the \glslike\ commands that recognise the \firstuseflag.

\begin{example}{First Use With Hyperlinked Footnote Description}{ex:hyperdesc}
Suppose I want the \gls*{firstuse} to have a hyperlink to the
description in a footnote instead of hyperlinking to the relevant
place in the glossary. First I need to disable the hyperlinks on
first use via the package option \pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst}:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[hyperfirst=false]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
Now I need to redefine \ics{glsentryfmt} (see
\sectionref{sec:glsdisplay}):
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glsentryfmt}{%
  \glsgenentryfmt
  \ifglsused{\glslabel}{}{\footnote{\glsentrydesc{\glslabel}}}%
}
\end{verbatim}

Now the first use won't have hyperlinked text, but will be followed
by a footnote.
See the sample file \samplefile{-FnDesc} for a complete document.
\end{example}

Note that the \pkgopt{hyperfirst} option applies to all defined glossaries.  It
may be that you only want to disable the hyperlinks on
\gls{firstuse} for glossaries that have a different form on
\gls*{firstuse}. This can be achieved by noting that since the
entries that require hyperlinking for all instances have identical
first and subsequent text, they can be unset via \ics{glsunsetall}
(see \sectionref{sec:glsunset}) so that the \pkgopt{hyperfirst}
option doesn't get applied.

\begin{example}{Suppressing Hyperlinks on First Use Just For
Acronyms}{ex:hyperfirst}
Suppose I want to suppress the hyperlink on \gls{firstuse} for
acronyms but not for entries in the main glossary.  I~can load
the \styfmt{glossaries} package using:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[hyperfirst=false,acronym]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
Once all glossary entries have been defined I~then do:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsunsetall[main]
\end{verbatim}

\end{example}

For more complex requirements, you might find it easier to switch
off all hyperlinks via \ics{glsdisablehyper} and put the hyperlinks
(where required) within the definition of \ics{glsentryfmt} (see
\sectionref{sec:glsdisplay}) via \ics{glshyperlink} (see
\sectionref{sec:glsnolink}).

\begin{example}{Only Hyperlink in Text Mode Not Math
Mode}{ex:nomathhyper}
This is a bit of a contrived example, but suppose, for some reason,
I only want the \glslike\ commands to have
hyperlinks when used in text mode, but not in math mode. I~can do
this by adding the glossary to the list of nohypertypes and redefining 
\ics{glsentryfmt}:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsDeclareNoHyperList{main}

\renewcommand*{\glsentryfmt}{%
  \ifmmode
    \glsgenentryfmt
  \else
    \glsifhyperon
    {\glsgenentryfmt}% hyperlink already on
    {\glshyperlink[\glsgenentryfmt]{\glslabel}}%
  \fi
}
\end{verbatim}
Note that this doesn't affect the \glstextlike\ commands, which will
have the hyperlinks off unless they're forced on using the plus
variant.

See the sample file \samplefile{-nomathhyper} for a complete
document.
\end{example}

\begin{example}{One Hyper Link Per Entry Per Chapter}{ex:chap-hyperfirst}
Here's a more complicated example that will only have the hyperlink
on the first time an entry is used per chapter. This doesn't involve
resetting the \firstuseflag. Instead it adds a~new key using
\ics{glsaddstoragekey} (see \sectionref{sec:glsaddstoragekey}) that
keeps track of the chapter number that the entry was last used in:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsaddstoragekey{chapter}{0}{\glschapnum}
\end{verbatim}
This creates a new user command called \cs{glschapnum} that's
analogous to \cs{glsentrytext}. The default value for this key is~0.
I~then define my glossary entries as usual.

Next I redefine the hook \ics{glslinkpostsetkeys}
(see \sectionref{sec:glsdisplay}) so that it determines the current
chapter number (which is stored in \cs{currentchap} using
\cs{edef}). This value is then compared with the value of the
entry's \texttt{chapter} key that I defined earlier. If they're the
same, this entry has already been used in this chapter so the
hyperlink is switched off using \sty{xkeyval}'s \cs{setkeys}
command. If the chapter number isn't the same, then this entry
hasn't been used in the current chapter. The \texttt{chapter} field
is updated using \ics{glsfieldxdef} (\sectionref{sec:fetchset})
provided the user hasn't switched off the hyperlink.
(This test is performed using \cs{glsifhyperon}.
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glslinkpostsetkeys}{%
 \edef\currentchap{\arabic{chapter}}%
 \ifnum\currentchap=\glschapnum{\glslabel}\relax
  \setkeys{glslink}{hyper=false}%
 \else
  \glsifhyperon{\glsfieldxdef{\glslabel}{chapter}{\currentchap}}{}%
 \fi
}
\end{verbatim}
Note that this will be confused if you use \cs{gls} etc when the
chapter counter is~0. (That is, before the first \cs{chapter}.)

See the sample file \samplefile{-chap-hyperfirst} for a complete
document.
\end{example}

\section{Using Glossary Terms Without Links}
\label{sec:glsnolink}

The commands described in this section display entry details without
adding any information to the glossary. They don't use
\ics{glstextformat}, they don't have any optional arguments, they
don't affect the \firstuseflag\ and, apart from \ics{glshyperlink},
they don't produce hyperlinks.

\begin{important}
Commands that aren't expandable will be ignored by PDF bookmarks, so
you will need to provide an alternative via \sty{hyperref}'s
\cs{texorpdfstring} if you want to use them in sectioning commands.
(This isn't specific to the \styfmt{glossaries} package.) See the
\sty{hyperref} documentation for further details. All the commands
that convert the first letter to upper case aren't expandable.
The other commands depend on whether their corresponding keys were
assigned non-expandable values.
\end{important}

If you want to title case a field, you can use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsentrytitlecase]
\cs{glsentrytitlecase}\marg{label}\marg{field}
\end{definition}
where \meta{label} is the label identifying the glossary entry,
\meta{field} is the field label (see \tableref{tab:fieldmap}).
This internally uses:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glscapitalisewords]
\cs{glscapitalisewords}\marg{text}
\end{definition}
which defaults to \cs{capitalisewords}\marg{text}. If your field
contains formatting commands, you will need to redefine this to use
\cs{capitalisefmtwords}. See the \sty{mfirstuc} manual for further
details.

For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsentrytitlecase{sample}{desc}
\end{verbatim}
(If you want title-casing in your glossary style, you might want to
investigate the \gls{glossaries-extra} package.) This command will
trigger an error if the entry is undefined.

Note that this command has the same limitations as \cs{makefirstuc} which is
used by commands like \cs{Gls} and \cs{Glsentryname} to upper-case
the first letter (see the notes about \cs{Gls} in \sectionref{sec:gls-like}).

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryname}]
\cs{glsentryname}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryname}]
\cs{Glsentryname}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
These commands display the name of the glossary entry given by
\meta{label}, as specified by the \gloskey{name} key.
\cs{Glsentryname} makes the first letter upper case.
Neither of these commands check for the existence of \meta{label}.
The first form \cs{glsentryname} is expandable (unless the name
contains unexpandable commands). Note that this may be different from the values of
the \gloskey{text} or \gloskey{first} keys. In general it's better
to use \cs{glsentrytext} or \cs{glsentryfirst} instead of
\cs{glsentryname}.

\begin{important}
In general it's best to avoid \cs{Glsentryname} with abbreviations. Instead,
consider using \cs{Glsentrylong}, \cs{Glsentryshort} or \cs{Glsentryfull}.
\end{important}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glossentryname}]
\cs{glossentryname}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This is like \cs{glsnamefont}\{\cs{glsentryname\marg{label}}\}
but also checks for the existence of \meta{label}. This command is
not expandable. It's used in the predefined glossary styles, so if
you want to change the way the name is formatted in the glossary,
you can redefine \cs{glsnamefont} to use the required fonts. For
example:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glsnamefont}[1]{\textmd{\sffamily #1}}
\end{verbatim}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glossentryname}]
\cs{Glossentryname}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This is like \cs{glossentryname} but makes the first letter of the
name upper case.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentrytext}]
\cs{glsentrytext}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentrytext}]
\cs{Glsentrytext}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
These commands display the subsequent use text for the glossary
entry given by \meta{label}, as specified by the \gloskey{text} key.
\cs{Glsentrytext} makes the first letter upper case.
The first form is expandable (unless the text contains unexpandable
commands). The second form is not expandable. Neither checks for the
existence of \meta{label}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryplural}]
\cs{glsentryplural}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryplural}]
\cs{Glsentryplural}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
These commands display the subsequent use plural text for the
glossary entry given by \meta{label}, as specified by the
\gloskey{plural} key. \cs{Glsentryplural} makes the first letter
upper case.
The first form is expandable (unless the value of that key contains unexpandable
commands). The second form is not expandable. Neither checks for the
existence of \meta{label}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryfirst}]
\cs{glsentryfirst}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryfirst}]
\cs{Glsentryfirst}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
These commands display the \firstusetext\ for the glossary entry
given by \meta{label}, as specified by the \gloskey{first} key.
\cs{Glsentryfirst} makes the first letter upper case.
The first form is expandable (unless the value of that key contains unexpandable
commands). The second form is not expandable. Neither checks for the
existence of \meta{label}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryfirstplural}]
\cs{glsentryfirstplural}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryfirstplural}]
\cs{Glsentryfirstplural}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
These commands display the plural form of the \firstusetext\ for the
glossary entry given by \meta{label}, as specified by the
\gloskey{firstplural} key. \cs{Glsentryfirstplural} makes the first
letter upper case.
The first form is expandable (unless the value of that key contains unexpandable
commands). The second form is not expandable. Neither checks for the
existence of \meta{label}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentrydesc}]
\cs{glsentrydesc}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentrydesc}]
\cs{Glsentrydesc}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
These commands display the description for the glossary entry given
by \meta{label}. 

\cs{Glsentrydesc} makes the first letter upper case.
The first form is expandable (unless the value of that key contains unexpandable
commands). The second form is not expandable. Neither checks for the
existence of \meta{label}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glossentrydesc}]
\cs{glossentrydesc}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This is like \cs{glsentrydesc}\marg{label}
but also checks for the existence of \meta{label}. This command is
not expandable. It's used in the predefined glossary styles to
display the description.
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glossentrydesc}]
\cs{Glossentrydesc}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This is like \cs{glossentrydesc} but converts the first letter to
upper case. This command is not expandable.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentrydescplural}]
\cs{glsentrydescplural}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentrydescplural}]
\cs{Glsentrydescplural}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
These commands display the plural description for the glossary entry
given by \meta{label}. \cs{Glsentrydescplural} makes the first
letter upper case.
The first form is expandable (unless the value of that key contains unexpandable
commands). The second form is not expandable. Neither checks for the
existence of \meta{label}.


\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentrysymbol}]
\cs{glsentrysymbol}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentrysymbol}]
\cs{Glsentrysymbol}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
These commands display the symbol for the glossary entry given by
\meta{label}.

\cs{Glsentrysymbol} makes the first letter upper case.
The first form is expandable (unless the value of that key contains unexpandable
commands). The second form is not expandable. Neither checks for the
existence of \meta{label}.


\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsletentryfield]
\cs{glsletentryfield}\marg{cs}\marg{label}\marg{field}
\end{definition}
This command doesn't display anything. It merely fetches the
value associated with the given field (where the available field names 
are listed in \tableref{tab:fieldmap}) and stores the result
in the control sequence \meta{cs}. For example, to store
the description for the entry whose label is \qt{apple} in the
control sequence \verb|\tmp|:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsletentryfield{\tmp}{apple}{desc}
\end{verbatim}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glossentrysymbol}]
\cs{glossentrysymbol}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This is like \cs{glsentrysymbol}\marg{label}
but also checks for the existence of \meta{label}. This command is
not expandable. It's used in some of the predefined glossary styles to
display the symbol.
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glossentrysymbol}]
\cs{Glossentrysymbol}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This is like \cs{glossentrysymbol} but converts the first letter to
upper case. This command is not expandable.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentrysymbolplural}]
\cs{glsentrysymbolplural}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentrysymbolplural}]
\cs{Glsentrysymbolplural}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
These commands display the plural symbol for the glossary entry
given by \meta{label}. \cs{Glsentrysymbolplural} makes the first
letter upper case.
The first form is expandable (unless the value of that key contains unexpandable
commands). The second form is not expandable. Neither checks for the
existence of \meta{label}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryuseri}]
\cs{glsentryuseri}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryuseri}]
\cs{Glsentryuseri}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryuserii}]
\cs{glsentryuserii}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryuserii}]
\cs{Glsentryuserii}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryuseriii}]
\cs{glsentryuseriii}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryuseriii}]
\cs{Glsentryuseriii}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryuseriv}]
\cs{glsentryuseriv}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryuseriv}]
\cs{Glsentryuseriv}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryuserv}]
\cs{glsentryuserv}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryuserv}]
\cs{Glsentryuserv}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryuservi}]
\cs{glsentryuservi}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryuservi}]
\cs{Glsentryuservi}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
These commands display the value of the user keys for the glossary
entry given by \meta{label}.
The lower case forms are expandable (unless the value of the key
contains unexpandable commands). The commands beginning with an
upper case letter convert the first letter of the required value to
upper case and are not expandable. None of these commands check for
the existence of \meta{label}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glshyperlink}]
\cs{glshyperlink}\oarg{link text}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This command provides a hyperlink to the glossary entry given by
\meta{label} \strong{but does not add any information to the
glossary file}. The link text is given by
\ics{glsentrytext}\marg{label} by default\footnote{versions before
3.0 used \ics{glsentryname} as the default, but this could cause
problems when \gloskey{name} had been \glsd{sanitize}.}, but can be
overridden using the optional argument. Note that the hyperlink will
be suppressed if you have used \ics{glsdisablehyper} or if you
haven't loaded the \sty{hyperref} package.

\begin{important}
If you use \cs{glshyperlink}, you need to ensure that the relevant
entry has been added to the glossary using any of the commands
described in \sectionref{sec:glslink} or \sectionref{sec:glsadd}
otherwise you will end up with an undefined link.
\end{important}

The next two commands are only available with \opt1 or with the
\pkgopt{savenumberlist} package option:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentrynumberlist}]
\cs{glsentrynumberlist}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsdisplaynumberlist}]
\cs{glsdisplaynumberlist}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
Both display the \gls{numberlist} for the entry given by
\meta{label}. When used with \opt1 a~rerun is required to ensure
this list is up-to-date, when used with \optsor23
a run of \gls{makeglossaries} (or \gls{makeindex}\slash\gls{xindy})
followed by one or two runs of \LaTeX\ is required.

The first command, \cs{glsentrynumberlist}, simply displays
the number list as is. The second command,
\cs{glsdisplaynumberlist}, formats the list using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsnumlistsep}]
\cs{glsnumlistsep}
\end{definition}
as the separator between all but the last two elements and
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsnumlistlastsep}]
\cs{glsnumlistlastsep}
\end{definition}
between the final two elements. The defaults are
\verb*|, | and \verb*| \& |, respectively.

\begin{important}
\cs{glsdisplaynumberlist} is fairly experimental. It works with
\optsand14, but for \optsor23 it only works when the default counter
format is used (that is, when the \gloskey[glslink]{format} key is
set to \texttt{glsnumberformat}).  This command will only work with
\sty{hyperref} if you choose \optsor14.  If you try using this command
with \optsor23 and \sty{hyperref}, \cs{glsentrynumberlist} will be
used instead.
\end{important}

For further information see \ifpdf section~\ref*{sec:code:glsnolink}
\fi \qt{Displaying entry details without adding information to the
glossary} in the documented code (\texttt{glossaries-code.pdf}).

\chapter{Acronyms and Other Abbreviations}
\label{sec:acronyms}

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides superior
abbreviation handling. You may want to consider using that
package instead of the commands described here.
\end{xtr}

\begin{important}
Note that although this chapter uses the term \qt{acronym}, you can also
use the commands described here for initialisms or contractions
(as in the case of some of the examples given below).
If the glossary title is no longer applicable (for example, it
should be \qt{Abbreviations} rather than \qt{Acronyms}) then
you can change the title either by redefining \ics{acronymname} (see
\sectionref{sec:languages}) or by using the \gloskey[printglossary]{title}
key in the optional argument of \ics{printglossary} (or
\ics{printacronyms}). Alternatively consider using the
\gls{glossaries-extra} package's \pkgopt*{abbreviations}
option instead.
\end{important}

Acronyms use the same underlying mechanism as terms defined with
\cs{newglossaryentry} so you can reference them with \ics{gls} and
\ics{glspl}. The way the acronym is displayed on \gls{firstuse} is
governed by the acronym style, which should be set before you define
your acronyms. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{glossaries}
\setacronymstyle{long-short}
\newacronym{html}{HTML}{hypertext markup language}
\newacronym{xml}{XML}{extensible markup language}
\begin{document}
First use: \gls{html} and \gls{xml}.
Next use: \gls{html} and \gls{xml}.
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}
If you don't specify a style, you will have a less-flexible, but
backward-compatible, \qt{long (short)} style with just the base
\styfmt{glossaries} package or the \abbrstyle{short-nolong} style
(which only displays the short form on \gls{firstuse})
with \gls{glossaries-extra}.

Acronyms are defined using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\newacronym}]
\cs{newacronym}\oarg{key-val list}\marg{label}\marg{abbrv}\marg{long}
\end{definition}

This creates an entry with the given
label in the glossary given by \ics{acronymtype}. You can specify a
different glossary using the \gloskey{type} key within the optional
argument. The \cs{newacronym} command also uses the \gloskey{long},
\gloskey{longplural}, \gloskey{short} and \gloskey{shortplural} keys
in \cs{newglossaryentry} to store the long and abbreviated forms and
their plurals. 

\begin{xtr}
If you use \cs{newacronym} with \gls{glossaries-extra}, you need to
first set the style with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\marg{style-name}
\end{alltt}
\end{xtr}

Note that the same restrictions on the entry \meta{label}
in \ics{newglossaryentry} also apply to \cs{newacronym}
(see \sectionref{sec:newglosentry}).
Since \ics{newacronym} works like \ics{newglossaryentry}, you can use
\ics{glsreset} to reset the \gls{firstuseflag}.

\begin{important}
If you haven't identified the specified glossary type as a list of
acronyms (via the package option
\pkgopt{acronymlists} or the command \ics{DeclareAcronymList}, 
see \sectionref{sec:pkgopts-acronym}) \cs{newacronym} will add it to
the list and \emph{reset the display style} for that glossary via
\ics{defglsentryfmt}. If you have a mixture of acronyms and regular
entries within the same glossary, care is needed if you want to
change the display style: you must first identify that glossary as a
list of acronyms and then use \ics{defglsentryfmt} (not redefine
\ics{glsentryfmt}) before defining your entries. Alternatively, use
\gls{glossaries-extra} to have better support for a mixed glossary.
\end{important}

The optional argument \marg{key-val list} allows you to specify
additional information. Any key that can be used in the second
argument of \ics{newglossaryentry} can also be used here in \meta{key-val
list}.
For example, \gloskey{description} (when used with one of the styles that
require a description, described in
\sectionref{sec:setacronymstyle}) or you can
override plural forms of \meta{abbrv} or \meta{long} using the
\gloskey{shortplural} or \gloskey{longplural} keys.
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym[longplural={diagonal matrices}]%
  {dm}{DM}{diagonal matrix}
\end{verbatim}
If the \firstuse\ uses the plural form, \verb|\glspl{dm}| will
display: diagonal matrices (DMs). If you want to use
the \gloskey{longplural} or \gloskey{shortplural} keys, I recommend
you use \ics{setacronymstyle} to set the display style rather than
using one of the pre-version 4.02 acronym styles (described in
\sectionref{sec:pkgopts-old-acronym}).

As with \gloskey{plural}, if \gloskey{longplural} is missing, it's
obtained by appending \ics{glspluralsuffix} to the singular form. The
short plural \gloskey{shortplural} is obtained (if not explicitly
set) by appending \ics{glsacrpluralsuffix} to the short form. These
commands may be changed by the associated language files, but they
can't be added to the usual caption hooks as there's no guarantee
when they'll be expanded (as \hyperref[pluralsuffix]{discussed
earlier}). 

\begin{xtr}
A different approach is used by
\styfmt{glossaries-extra}, which has \icatattrs category attributes
to determine whether or not to append a suffix when forming the
default value of \gloskey{shortplural}.
\end{xtr}

\begin{important}
Since \cs{newacronym} sets \verb|type=\acronymtype|,
if you want to load a file containing acronym definitions using
\ics{loadglsentries}\oarg{type}\marg{filename}, the optional argument
\meta{type} will not have an effect unless you explicitly set the
type as \verb|type=\glsdefaulttype| in the optional argument to
\ics{newacronym}. See \sectionref{sec:loadglsentries}.
\end{important}

\begin{example}{Defining an Abbreviation}{ex:newacronym}
The following defines the abbreviation IDN:
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{long-short}
\newacronym{idn}{IDN}{identification number}
\end{verbatim}
\verb|\gls{idn}| will produce \qt{identification number (IDN)} on
\firstuse\ and \qt{IDN} on subsequent uses. If you want to use one
of the \gls{smallcaps} acronym styles, described in
\sectionref{sec:setacronymstyle}, you need to use lower case
characters for the shortened form:
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{long-sc-short}
\newacronym{idn}{idn}{identification number}
\end{verbatim}
Now \verb|\gls{idn}| will produce \qt{identification number
(\textsc{idn})} on \firstuse\ and \qt{\textsc{idn}} on subsequent
uses.
\end{example}

\begin{important}
Avoid nested definitions.
\end{important}

Recall from the warning in 
\sectionref{sec:newglosentry} that you should avoid using
the \glslike\ and \glstextlike\ commands within the value of
keys like \gloskey{text} and \gloskey{first} due to complications
arising from nested links. The same applies to abbreviations
defined using \cs{newacronym}.

For example, suppose you have defined:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym{ssi}{SSI}{server side includes}
\newacronym{html}{HTML}{hypertext markup language}
\end{verbatim}
you may be tempted to do:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym{shtml}{S\gls{html}}{\gls{ssi} enabled \gls{html}}
\end{verbatim}
\strong{Don't!} This will break the case-changing commands, such
as \ics{Gls}, it will cause inconsistencies on \firstuse, and,
if hyperlinks are enabled, will cause nested hyperlinks. It will
also confuse the commands used by the entry formatting (such as
\ics{glslabel}).

Instead, consider doing:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym
 [description={\gls{ssi} enabled \gls{html}}]
 {shtml}{SHTML}{SSI enabled HTML}
\end{verbatim}
or
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym
 [description={\gls{ssi} enabled \gls{html}}]
 {shtml}{SHTML}
 {server side includes enabled hypertext markup language}
\end{verbatim}
Similarly for the \glstextlike\ commands.

\begin{xtr}
Other approaches are available with \gls{glossaries-extra}.
See the section \qt{Nested Links} in the \styfmt{glossaries-extra}
user manual.
\end{xtr}

\section{Displaying the Long, Short and Full Forms (Independent of
First Use)}
\label{sec:longshortfull}

It may be that you want the long, short or full form
regardless of whether or not the acronym has already been used in
the document. You can do so with the commands described in this
section.

The \cs{acr\ldots} commands described below are part of the set of
\glstextlike\ commands. That is, they index and can form
hyperlinks, but they don't modify the \firstuseflag.
However, their display is governed by \ics{defentryfmt} with
\ics{glscustomtext} set as appropriate. All caveats that apply to
the \glstextlike\ commands also apply to the following commands.
(Including the above warning about nested links.)

\begin{xtr}
If you are using \gls{glossaries-extra}, don't use the commands
described in this section. The \gls{glossaries-extra} package
provides analogous \cs{glsxtr\ldots} or \cs{glsfmt\ldots}
commands.  For example, \cs{glsxtrshort} instead of \cs{acrshort}
or, if needed in a heading, \cs{glsfmtshort}. (Similarly for the
case-changing variants.)
\end{xtr}

The optional arguments are the same as those for the \glstextlike\
commands, and there are similar star and plus variants that switch
off or on the hyperlinks. As with the \glstextlike\ commands, the
\gls{linktext} is placed in the argument of \ics{glstextformat}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\acrshort}]
\cs{acrshort}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This sets the \gls{linktext} to the short form (within the argument
of \ics{acronymfont}) for the entry given by \meta{label}. The short
form is as supplied by the \gloskey{short} key, which
\ics{newacronym} implicitly sets.

There are also analogous upper case variants:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Acrshort}]
\cs{Acrshort}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ACRshort}]
\cs{ACRshort}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
There are also plural versions:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\acrshortpl]
\cs{acrshortpl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\Acrshortpl]
\cs{Acrshortpl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\ACRshortpl]
\cs{ACRshortpl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
The short plural form is as supplied
by the \gloskey{shortplural} key, which \ics{newacronym} implicitly sets.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\acrlong}]
\cs{acrlong}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This sets the \gls{linktext} to the long form for the entry given by 
\meta{label}. The long form is as supplied
by the \gloskey{long} key, which \ics{newacronym} implicitly sets.

There are also analogous upper case variants:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Acrlong}]
\cs{Acrlong}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ACRlong}]
\cs{ACRlong}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
Again there are also plural versions:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\acrlongpl}]
\cs{acrlongpl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Acrlongpl}]
\cs{Acrlongpl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ACRlongpl}]
\cs{ACRlongpl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
The long plural form is as supplied by the \gloskey{longplural} key,
which \ics{newacronym} implicitly sets.

The commands below display the full form of the acronym, but note
that this isn't necessarily the same as the form used on \firstuse.
These full-form commands are shortcuts that use the above commands,
rather than creating the \gls{linktext} from the complete full form.
These full-form commands have star and plus variants and optional
arguments that are passed to the above commands.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\acrfull}]
\cs{acrfull}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This is a shortcut for
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\acrfullfmt}]
\cs{acrfullfmt}\marg{options}\marg{label}\marg{insert}
\end{definition}
which by default does
\begin{alltt}
\cs{acrfullformat}
 \mgroup{\cs{acrlong}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{insert}}
 \mgroup{\cs{acrshort}\oarg{options}\marg{label}}
\end{alltt}
where
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\acrfullformat]
\cs{acrfullformat}\marg{long}\marg{short}
\end{definition}
by default does \meta{long} (\meta{short}). This command is now
deprecated for new acronym styles but is used by default for
backward compatibility if \cs{setacronymstyle}
(\sectionref{sec:setacronymstyle}) hasn't been used.  (For further
details of these format commands see \ifpdf
section~\ref*{sec:code:acronym} in \fi the documented code,
\texttt{glossaries-code.pdf}.)

There are also analogous upper case variants:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Acrfull}]
\cs{Acrfull}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ACRfull}]
\cs{ACRfull}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
and plural versions:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\acrfullpl]
\cs{acrfullpl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\Acrfullpl]
\cs{Acrfullpl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\ACRfullpl]
\cs{ACRfullpl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}

If you find the above commands too cumbersome to write, you can use
the \pkgopt{shortcuts} package option to activate the shorter
command names listed in \tableref{tab:shortcuts}.

\begin{table}[htbp]
\caption{Synonyms provided by the package option \pkgoptfmt{shortcuts}}
\label{tab:shortcuts}
\vskip\baselineskip
\centering
\begin{tabular}{ll}
\bfseries Shortcut Command & \bfseries Equivalent Command\\
\ics{acs} & \ics{acrshort}\\
\ics{Acs} & \ics{Acrshort}\\
\ics{acsp} & \ics{acrshortpl}\\
\ics{Acsp} & \ics{Acrshortpl}\\
\ics{acl} & \ics{acrlong}\\
\ics{Acl} & \ics{Acrlong}\\
\ics{aclp} & \ics{acrlongpl}\\
\ics{Aclp} & \ics{Acrlongpl}\\
\ics{acf} & \ics{acrfull}\\
\ics{Acf} & \ics{Acrfull}\\
\ics{acfp} & \ics{acrfullpl}\\
\ics{Acfp} & \ics{Acrfullpl}\\
\ics{ac} & \ics{gls}\\
\ics{Ac} & \ics{Gls}\\
\ics{acp} & \ics{glspl}\\
\ics{Acp} & \ics{Glspl}
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

It is also possible to access the long and short forms without
adding information to the glossary using commands analogous to
\ics{glsentrytext} (described in \sectionref{sec:glsnolink}).

\begin{important}
The commands that convert the first letter to upper case come with
the same caveats as those for analogous commands like
\ics{Glsentrytext} (non-expandable, can't be used in PDF bookmarks,
care needs to be taken if the first letter is an accented character
etc). See \sectionref{sec:glsnolink}.
\end{important}

The long form can be accessed using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentrylong}]
\cs{glsentrylong}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
or, with the first letter converted to upper case:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentrylong}]
\cs{Glsentrylong}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
Plural forms:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentrylongpl}]
\cs{glsentrylongpl}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentrylongpl}]
\cs{Glsentrylongpl}\marg{label}
\end{definition}

Similarly, to access the short form:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryshort}]
\cs{glsentryshort}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
or, with the first letter converted to upper case:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryshort}]
\cs{Glsentryshort}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
Plural forms:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryshortpl}]
\cs{glsentryshortpl}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryshortpl}]
\cs{Glsentryshortpl}\marg{label}
\end{definition}

And the full form can be obtained using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryfull}]
\cs{glsentryfull}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryfull}]
\cs{Glsentryfull}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryfullpl}]
\cs{glsentryfullpl}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryfullpl}]
\cs{Glsentryfullpl}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
These again use \ics{acrfullformat} by default, but
the new styles described in the section below use different
formatting commands.

\section{Changing the Acronym Style}
\label{sec:setacronymstyle}

\begin{xtr}
If you are using \gls{glossaries-extra}, don't use the commands
described in this section. Use \ics*{setabbreviationstyle} to set
the style. This uses a different (but more consistent) naming
scheme. For example, \abbrstyle{long-noshort} instead of
\acrstyle{dua}. See the \qt{Acronym Style Modifications} section and 
the \qt{Abbreviations} chapter in the \gls{glossaries-extra} manual 
for further details.
\end{xtr}

The acronym style is set using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\setacronymstyle}]
\cs{setacronymstyle}\marg{style name}
\end{definition}
where \meta{style name} is the name of the required style.

\begin{important}
You must use \cs{setacronymstyle} \emph{before} you define the
acronyms with \cs{newacronym}.
\end{important}

For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[acronym]{glossaries}

\makeglossaries

\setacronymstyle{long-sc-short}

\newacronym{html}{html}{hypertext markup language}
\newacronym{xml}{xml}{extensible markup language}
\end{verbatim}
Unpredictable results can occur if you try to use multiple styles.

\begin{important}
If you need multiple abbreviation styles, then 
use the \gls{glossaries-extra} package, which has better
abbreviation management. See, for example,
\gallery{index.php?label=sample-name-font}{Gallery: Mixing Styles}.
\end{important}

Unlike the backward-compatible default behaviour of \cs{newacronym}, the
styles set via \cs{setacronymstyle} don't use the \gloskey{first}
or \gloskey{text} keys, but instead they use \ics{defglsentryfmt} to
set a~custom format that uses the \gloskey{long} and \gloskey{short}
keys (or their plural equivalents). This means that these styles
cope better with plurals that aren't formed by simply appending the
singular form with the letter \qt{s}. In fact, most of the predefined
styles use \ics{glsgenacfmt} and modify the definitions of commands
like \ics{genacrfullformat}.

Note that when you use \cs{setacronymstyle} the \gloskey{name} key
is set to
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\acronymentry}]
\cs{acronymentry}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
and the \gloskey{sort} key is set to
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\acronymsort}]
\cs{acronymsort}\marg{short}\marg{long}
\end{definition}
These commands are redefined by the acronym styles. However, you can
redefine them again after the style has been set but before you use
\cs{newacronym}. Protected expansion is performed on \cs{acronymsort}
when the entry is defined.

\subsection{Predefined Acronym Styles}
\label{sec:predefinedacrstyles}

The \styfmt{glossaries} package provides a~number of predefined
styles. These styles apply
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\firstacronymfont}]
\cs{firstacronymfont}\marg{text}
\end{definition}
to the short form on first use and
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\acronymfont}]
\cs{acronymfont}\marg{text}
\end{definition}
on subsequent use. The styles modify the definition of
\cs{acronymfont} as required, but \ics{firstacronymfont} is only set
once by the package when it's loaded. By default
\ics{firstacronymfont}\marg{text} is the same as
\ics{acronymfont}\marg{text}.
If you want the short form displayed differently on first use, you
can redefine \ics{firstacronymfont} independently of the acronym
style.

The predefined styles that contain \texttt{sc} in their name (for
example \acrstyle{long-sc-short}) redefine \cs{acronymfont} to use
\ics{textsc}, which means that the short form needs to be specified
in lower case. \ifpdf Remember that \verb|\textsc{abc}| produces
\textsc{abc} but \verb|\textsc{ABC}| produces \textsc{ABC}.\fi

\hypertarget{boldsc}{}%
\begin{important}%
Some fonts don't support bold \gls{smallcaps}, so you may need to redefine 
\ics{glsnamefont} (see \sectionref{sec:printglossary}) to switch to
medium weight if you are using a glossary style that displays entry
names in bold and you have chosen an acronym style that uses
\ics{textsc}.
\end{important}

The predefined styles that contain \texttt{sm} in their name
(for example \acrstyle{long-sm-short}) redefine \cs{acronymfont} to
use \ics{textsmaller}.  

\hypertarget{smaller}{}%
\begin{important}
Note that the \styfmt{glossaries} package doesn't define or load any package that
defines \ics{textsmaller}. If you use one of the acronym styles that
set \ics{acronymfont} to \cs{textsmaller} you must
explicitly load the \sty{relsize} package or otherwise define
\cs{textsmaller}.
\end{important}

The remaining predefined styles redefine \cs{acronymfont}\marg{text}
to simply do its argument \meta{text}. 

\begin{important}
In most cases, the predefined styles adjust \ics{acrfull} and
\ics{glsentryfull} (and their plural and upper case variants) to
reflect the style. The only exceptions to this are the 
\acrstyle{dua} and \acrstyle{footnote} styles (and their variants).
\end{important}

The following styles are supplied by the \styfmt{glossaries}
package:
\begin{itemize}
\item \acrstyle{long-short}, \acrstyle{long-sc-short},
\acrstyle{long-sm-short}, \acrstyle{long-sp-short}:

With these three styles, acronyms are displayed in the form
\begin{definition}
\meta{long} (\ics{firstacronymfont}\marg{short})
\end{definition}
on first use and
\begin{definition}
\ics{acronymfont}\marg{short}
\end{definition}
on subsequent use.
They also set \cs{acronymsort}\marg{short}\marg{long} to just
\meta{short}.  This means that the acronyms are sorted according to
their short form.  In addition, \cs{acronymentry}\marg{label} is set
to just the short form (enclosed in \cs{acronymfont}) and the
\gloskey{description} key is set to the long form.

The \acrstyle{long-sp-short} style was introduced in version~4.16
and uses
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsacspace]
\cs{glsacspace}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
for the space between the long and short forms. This defaults to
a~non-breakable space (\verb|~|) if 
(\cs{acronymfont}\marg{short}) is less than 3em, otherwise it uses
a~normal space. This may be redefined as required. For example, to
always use a~non-breakable space:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glsacspace}[1]{~}
\end{verbatim}

\item \acrstyle{short-long}, \acrstyle{sc-short-long},
\acrstyle{sm-short-long}:

These three styles are analogous to the above three styles, except
the display order is swapped to
\begin{definition}
\ics{firstacronymfont}\marg{short} (\meta{long})
\end{definition}
on first use.

Note, however, that \ics{acronymsort} and \ics{acronymentry} are the
same as for the \meta{long} (\meta{short}) styles above, so the
acronyms are still sorted according to the short form.

\item \acrstyle{long-short-desc}, \acrstyle{long-sc-short-desc},
\acrstyle{long-sm-short-desc}, \acrstyle{long-sp-short-desc}:

These are like the \acrstyle{long-short}, \acrstyle{long-sc-short},
\acrstyle{long-sm-short} and \acrstyle{long-sp-short} styles described above, except that the
\gloskey{description} key must be supplied in the optional argument
of \ics{newacronym}. They also redefine \ics{acronymentry} to
\marg{long} (\cs{acronymfont}\marg{short}) and redefine
\ics{acronymsort}\marg{short}\marg{long} to just \meta{long}.
This means that the acronyms are sorted according to the long form,
and in the list of acronyms the name field has the long form
followed by the short form in parentheses. I~recommend you use
a~glossary style such as \glostyle{altlist} with these acronym
styles to allow for the long name field.

\item \acrstyle{short-long-desc}, \acrstyle{sc-short-long-desc},
\acrstyle{sm-short-long-desc}:

These styles are analogous to the above three styles, but the first
use display style is:
\begin{definition}
\cs{firstacronymfont}\marg{short} (\meta{long})
\end{definition}
The definitions of \cs{acronymsort} and \cs{acronymentry} are the
same as those for \acrstyle{long-short-desc} etc.

\item \acrstyle{dua}, \acrstyle{dua-desc}:

With these styles, the \glslike\ commands always display the long form 
regardless of whether the entry has been used or not. However, \ics{acrfull}
and \ics{glsentryfull} will display \meta{long} (\cs{acronymfont}\marg{short}). In the case
of \acrstyle{dua}, the \gloskey{name} and \gloskey{sort} keys are set to
the short form and the description is set to the long form. In the
case of \acrstyle{dua-desc}, the \gloskey{name} and \gloskey{sort}
keys are set to the long form and the description is supplied in the
optional argument of \ics{newacronym}.

\item \acrstyle{footnote}, \acrstyle{footnote-sc},
\acrstyle{footnote-sm}:

With these three styles, on first use the \glslike\ commands display:
\begin{definition}
\cs{firstacronymfont}\marg{short}\ics{footnote}\marg{long}
\end{definition}
However, \ics{acrfull} and \ics{glsentryfull} are set to 
\cs{acronymfont}\marg{short} (\meta{long}). On subsequent use the display is:
\begin{definition}
\cs{acronymfont}\marg{short}
\end{definition}
The \gloskey{sort} and \gloskey{name} keys are set to
the short form, and the \gloskey{description} is set to the long
form.

\begin{important}
In order to avoid nested hyperlinks on \firstuse\ the footnote
styles automatically implement \pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst} for the
acronym lists.
\end{important}

\item \acrstyle{footnote-desc}, \acrstyle{footnote-sc-desc},
\acrstyle{footnote-sm-desc}:

These three styles are similar to the previous three styles, but the
description has to be supplied in the optional argument of
\ics{newacronym}. The \gloskey{name} key is set to the long form
followed by the short form in parentheses and the \gloskey{sort} key
is set to the long form. This means that the acronyms will be sorted
according to the long form. In addition, since the \gloskey{name}
will typically be quite wide it's best to choose a glossary style
that can accommodate this, such as \glostyle{altlist}.

\end{itemize}

\begin{example}{Adapting a Predefined Acronym Style}{ex:acrstyle}
Suppose I~want to use the \acrstyle{footnote-sc-desc} style, but 
I~want the \gloskey{name} key set to the short form followed by the
long form in parentheses and the \gloskey{sort} key set to the short
form. Then I need to specify the \acrstyle{footnote-sc-desc} style:
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{footnote-sc-desc}
\end{verbatim}
and then redefine \ics{acronymsort} and \ics{acronymentry}:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\acronymsort}[2]{#1}% sort by short form
\renewcommand*{\acronymentry}[1]{%
  \acronymfont{\glsentryshort{#1}}\space (\glsentrylong{#1})}%
\end{verbatim}
(I've used \cs{space} for extra clarity, but you can just use an
actual space instead.)

Note that the default Computer Modern fonts don't support bold
\gls{smallcaps}, so another font is required. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\end{verbatim}
The alternative is to redefine \ics{acronymfont} so that it
always switches to medium weight to ensure the \gls{smallcaps} setting is
used. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textmd{\scshape #1}}
\end{verbatim}

The sample file \samplefile{FnAcrDesc} illustrates this
example.
\end{example}

\subsection{Defining A Custom Acronym Style}
\label{sec:customacronym}

You may find that the predefined acronyms styles that come with the
\styfmt{glossaries} package don't suit your requirements. In this
case you can define your own style using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\newacronymstyle}]
\cs{newacronymstyle}\marg{style name}\marg{display}\marg{definitions}
\end{definition}
where \meta{style name} is the name of the new style (avoid active
characters). The second argument, \meta{display}, is equivalent to
the mandatory argument of \ics{defglsentryfmt}. You can simply use
\ics{glsgenacfmt} or you can customize the display using commands
like \ics{ifglsused}, \ics{glsifplural} and \ics{glscapscase}.
(See \sectionref{sec:glsdisplay} for further details.)
If the style is likely to be used with a mixed glossary (that is entries in
that glossary are defined both with \ics{newacronym} and
\ics{newglossaryentry}) then you can test if the entry is an acronym
and use \ics{glsgenacfmt} if it is or \ics{glsgenentryfmt} if it
isn't. For example, the \acrstyle{long-short} style sets
\meta{display} as
\begin{verbatim}
\ifglshaslong{\glslabel}{\glsgenacfmt}{\glsgenentryfmt}%
\end{verbatim}
(You can use \ics{ifglshasshort} instead of \ics{ifglshaslong} to
test if the entry is an acronym if you prefer.)

The third argument, \meta{definitions}, can be used to redefine the
commands that affect the display style, such as \ics{acronymfont}
or, if \meta{display} uses \cs{glsgenacfmt}, \ics{genacrfullformat}
and its variants.

Note that \ics{setacronymstyle} redefines \ics{glsentryfull} and
\ics{acrfullfmt} to use \ics{genacrfullformat} (and similarly for
the plural and upper case variants). If this isn't appropriate for the
style (as in the case of styles like \acrstyle{footnote} and
\acrstyle{dua}) \cs{newacronymstyle} should redefine these commands
within \meta{definitions}.


Within \cs{newacronymstyle}'s \meta{definitions} argument you 
can also redefine
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GenericAcronymFields}]
\cs{GenericAcronymFields}
\end{definition}
This is a list of additional fields to be set in \ics{newacronym}.
You can use the following token registers to access the entry label,
long form and short form: \DescribeMacro{\glslabeltok}\cs{glslabeltok}, 
\DescribeMacro{\glslongtok}\cs{glslongtok} and 
\DescribeMacro{\glsshorttok}\cs{glsshorttok}. As with all \TeX\
registers, you can access their values by preceding the register
with \ics{the}.  For example, the \acrstyle{long-short} style does:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\GenericAcronymFields}{%
   description={\the\glslongtok}}%
\end{verbatim}
which sets the \gloskey{description} field to the long form of the
acronym whereas the \acrstyle{long-short-desc} style does:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\GenericAcronymFields}{}%
\end{verbatim}
since the description needs to be specified by the user.

It may be that you want to define a new acronym style that's based
on an existing style. Within \meta{display} you can use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\GlsUseAcrEntryDispStyle]
\cs{GlsUseAcrEntryDispStyle}\marg{style name}
\end{definition}
to use the \meta{display} definition from the style given by
\meta{style name}. Within \meta{definitions} you can use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GlsUseAcrStyleDefs}]
\cs{GlsUseAcrStyleDefs}\marg{style name}
\end{definition}
to use the \meta{definitions} from the style given by \meta{style
name}. For example, the \acrstyle{long-sc-short} acronym style is
based on the \acrstyle{long-short} style with minor
modifications (remember to use \verb|##| instead of \verb|#| within
\meta{definitions}):
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronymstyle{long-sc-short}%
{% use the same display as "long-short"
  \GlsUseAcrEntryDispStyle{long-short}%
}%
{% use the same definitions as "long-short"
  \GlsUseAcrStyleDefs{long-short}%
  % Minor modifications:
  \renewcommand{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{##1}}%
  \renewcommand*{\acrpluralsuffix}{\glstextup{\glspluralsuffix}}%
}
\end{verbatim}
(\DescribeMacro{\glstextup}\cs{glstextup} is used to cancel the effect 
of \ics{textsc}. This defaults to \ics{textulc}, if defined,
otherwise \ics{textup}. For example, the plural of \textsc{svm}
should be rendered as \textsc{svm}s rather than \textsc{svms}.)

\begin{example}{Defining a Custom Acronym Style}{ex:customacrstyle}
Suppose I want my acronym on \firstuse\ to have the
short form in the text and the long form with the description in a
footnote. Suppose also that I want the short form to be put in small
caps in the main body of the document, but I want it in normal
capitals in the list of acronyms. In my list of acronyms, I want the
long form as the name with the short form in brackets followed by
the description. That is, in the text I want \ics{gls} on \gls{firstuse}
to display:
\begin{display}
\ics{textsc}\marg{abbrv}\cs{footnote}"{"\meta{long}: \meta{description}"}"
\end{display}
on subsequent use:
\begin{display}
\ics{textsc}\marg{abbrv}
\end{display}
and in the list of acronyms, each entry will be displayed in the
form:
\begin{display}
\meta{long} (\meta{short}) \meta{description}
\end{display}

Let's suppose it's possible that I may have a mixed glossary. I can
check this in the second argument of \ics{newacronymstyle} using:
\begin{verbatim}
\ifglshaslong{\glslabel}{\glsgenacfmt}{\glsgenentryfmt}%
\end{verbatim}
This will use \ics{glsgenentryfmt} if the entry isn't an acronym,
otherwise it will use \ics{glsgenacfmt}. The third argument
(\meta{definitions}) of
\ics{newacronymstyle} needs to redefine \ics{genacrfullformat} etc 
so that the \firstuse\ displays the short form in the text with the 
long form in a footnote followed by the description. This is done as
follows (remember to use \verb|##| instead of \verb|#|):
\begin{verbatim}
 % No case change, singular first use:
  \renewcommand*{\genacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \firstacronymfont{\glsentryshort{##1}}##2%
   \footnote{\glsentrylong{##1}: \glsentrydesc{##1}}%
  }%
 % First letter upper case, singular first use: 
  \renewcommand*{\Genacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \firstacronymfont{\Glsentryshort{##1}}##2%
   \footnote{\glsentrylong{##1}: \glsentrydesc{##1}}%
  }%
 % No case change, plural first use:
  \renewcommand*{\genplacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \firstacronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##1}}##2%
   \footnote{\glsentrylongpl{##1}: \glsentrydesc{##1}}%
  }%
 % First letter upper case, plural first use:
  \renewcommand*{\Genplacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \firstacronymfont{\Glsentryshortpl{##1}}##2%
   \footnote{\glsentrylongpl{##1}: \glsentrydesc{##1}}%
  }%
\end{verbatim}
If you think it inappropriate for the short form to be capitalised
at the start of a sentence you can change the above to:
\begin{verbatim}
 % No case change, singular first use:
  \renewcommand*{\genacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \firstacronymfont{\glsentryshort{##1}}##2%
   \footnote{\glsentrylong{##1}: \glsentrydesc{##1}}%
  }%
 % No case change, plural first use:
  \renewcommand*{\genplacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \firstacronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##1}}##2%
   \footnote{\glsentrylongpl{##1}: \glsentrydesc{##1}}%
  }%
 \let\Genacrfullformat\genacrfullformat
 \let\Genplacrfullformat\genplacrfullformat
\end{verbatim}
Another variation is to use \ics{Glsentrylong} and
\ics{Glsentrylongpl} in the footnote instead of \ics{glsentrylong} and
\ics{glsentrylongpl}.

Now let's suppose that commands such as \ics{glsentryfull} and
\ics{acrfull} shouldn't
use a~footnote, but instead use the format: \meta{long}
(\meta{short}).
This means that the style needs to redefine \cs{glsentryfull},
\ics{acrfullfmt} and their plural and upper case variants.

First, the non-linking commands: 
\begin{verbatim}
  \renewcommand*{\glsentryfull}[1]{%
    \glsentrylong{##1}\space
      (\acronymfont{\glsentryshort{##1}})%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\Glsentryfull}[1]{%
    \Glsentrylong{##1}\space
      (\acronymfont{\glsentryshort{##1}})%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\glsentryfullpl}[1]{%
    \glsentrylongpl{##1}\space
      (\acronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##1}})%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\Glsentryfullpl}[1]{%
    \Glsentrylongpl{##1}\space
      (\acronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##1}})%
  }%
\end{verbatim}
Now for the linking commands:
\begin{verbatim}
  \renewcommand*{\acrfullfmt}[3]{%
    \glslink[##1]{##2}{%
     \glsentrylong{##2}##3\space
      (\acronymfont{\glsentryshort{##2}})%
    }%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\Acrfullfmt}[3]{%
    \glslink[##1]{##2}{%
     \Glsentrylong{##2}##3\space
      (\acronymfont{\glsentryshort{##2}})%
    }%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\ACRfullfmt}[3]{%
    \glslink[##1]{##2}{%
     \MakeTextUppercase{%
       \glsentrylong{##2}##3\space
         (\acronymfont{\glsentryshort{##2}})%
     }%
    }%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\acrfullplfmt}[3]{%
    \glslink[##1]{##2}{%
     \glsentrylongpl{##2}##3\space
       (\acronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##2}})%
    }%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\Acrfullplfmt}[3]{%
    \glslink[##1]{##2}{%
     \Glsentrylongpl{##2}##3\space
       (\acronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##2}})%
    }%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\ACRfullplfmt}[3]{%
    \glslink[##1]{##2}{%
     \MakeTextUppercase{%
       \glsentrylongpl{##2}##3\space
         (\acronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##2}})%
     }%
    }%
  }%
\end{verbatim}
(This may cause problems with long hyperlinks, in which case adjust
the definitions so that, for example, only the short form is inside
the argument of \ics{glslink}.)

The style also needs to redefine \ics{acronymsort} so that the
acronyms are sorted according to the long form:
\begin{verbatim}
  \renewcommand*{\acronymsort}[2]{##2}%
\end{verbatim}
If you prefer them to be sorted according to the short form you can
change the above to:
\begin{verbatim}
  \renewcommand*{\acronymsort}[2]{##1}%
\end{verbatim}
The acronym font needs to be set to \ics{textsc} and the plural
suffix adjusted so that the \qt{s} suffix in the plural short form
doesn't get converted to \gls{smallcaps}:
\begin{verbatim}
  \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{##1}}%
  \renewcommand*{\acrpluralsuffix}{\glstextup{\glspluralsuffix}}%
\end{verbatim}
There are a number of ways of dealing with the format in the list of
acronyms. The simplest way is to redefine \ics{acronymentry} to the
long form followed by the upper case short form in parentheses:
\begin{verbatim}
 \renewcommand*{\acronymentry}[1]{%
   \Glsentrylong{##1}\space
     (\MakeTextUppercase{\glsentryshort{##1}})}%
\end{verbatim}
(I've used \ics{Glsentrylong} instead of \ics{glsentrylong} to
capitalise the name in the glossary.)

An alternative approach is to set \ics{acronymentry} to just the
long form and redefine \ics{GenericAcronymFields} to set the
\gloskey{symbol} key to the short form and use a glossary style that
displays the symbol in parentheses after the \gloskey{name} (such as
the \glostyle{tree} style) like this:
\begin{verbatim}
 \renewcommand*{\acronymentry}[1]{\Glsentrylong{##1}}%
 \renewcommand*{\GenericAcronymFields}{%
    symbol={\protect\MakeTextUppercase{\the\glsshorttok}}}%
\end{verbatim}
I'm going to use the first approach and set
\ics{GenericAcronymFields} to do nothing:
\begin{verbatim}
 \renewcommand*{\GenericAcronymFields}{}%
\end{verbatim}

Finally, this style needs to switch off hyperlinks on first use to
avoid nested links:
\begin{verbatim}
 \glshyperfirstfalse
\end{verbatim}
Putting this all together:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronymstyle{custom-fn}% new style name
{%
  \ifglshaslong{\glslabel}{\glsgenacfmt}{\glsgenentryfmt}%
}%
{%
 \renewcommand*{\GenericAcronymFields}{}%
 \glshyperfirstfalse
  \renewcommand*{\genacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \firstacronymfont{\glsentryshort{##1}}##2%
   \footnote{\glsentrylong{##1}: \glsentrydesc{##1}}%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\Genacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \firstacronymfont{\Glsentryshort{##1}}##2%
   \footnote{\glsentrylong{##1}: \glsentrydesc{##1}}%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\genplacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \firstacronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##1}}##2%
   \footnote{\glsentrylongpl{##1}: \glsentrydesc{##1}}%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\Genplacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \firstacronymfont{\Glsentryshortpl{##1}}##2%
   \footnote{\glsentrylongpl{##1}: \glsentrydesc{##1}}%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\glsentryfull}[1]{%
    \glsentrylong{##1}\space
      (\acronymfont{\glsentryshort{##1}})%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\Glsentryfull}[1]{%
    \Glsentrylong{##1}\space
      (\acronymfont{\glsentryshort{##1}})%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\glsentryfullpl}[1]{%
    \glsentrylongpl{##1}\space
      (\acronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##1}})%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\Glsentryfullpl}[1]{%
    \Glsentrylongpl{##1}\space
      (\acronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##1}})%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\acrfullfmt}[3]{%
    \glslink[##1]{##2}{%
     \glsentrylong{##2}##3\space
      (\acronymfont{\glsentryshort{##2}})%
    }%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\Acrfullfmt}[3]{%
    \glslink[##1]{##2}{%
     \Glsentrylong{##2}##3\space
      (\acronymfont{\glsentryshort{##2}})%
    }%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\ACRfullfmt}[3]{%
    \glslink[##1]{##2}{%
     \MakeTextUppercase{%
       \glsentrylong{##2}##3\space
         (\acronymfont{\glsentryshort{##2}})%
     }%
    }%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\acrfullplfmt}[3]{%
    \glslink[##1]{##2}{%
     \glsentrylongpl{##2}##3\space
       (\acronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##2}})%
    }%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\Acrfullplfmt}[3]{%
    \glslink[##1]{##2}{%
     \Glsentrylongpl{##2}##3\space
       (\acronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##2}})%
    }%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\ACRfullplfmt}[3]{%
    \glslink[##1]{##2}{%
     \MakeTextUppercase{%
       \glsentrylongpl{##2}##3\space
         (\acronymfont{\glsentryshortpl{##2}})%
     }%
    }%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{##1}}%
  \renewcommand*{\acrpluralsuffix}{\glstextup{\glspluralsuffix}}%
  \renewcommand*{\acronymsort}[2]{##2}%
  \renewcommand*{\acronymentry}[1]{%
   \Glsentrylong{##1}\space
     (\MakeTextUppercase{\glsentryshort{##1}})}%
}
\end{verbatim}

Now I need to specify that I want to use this new style:
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{custom-fn}
\end{verbatim}
I also need to use a glossary style that suits this acronym style,
for example \glostyle{altlist}:
\begin{verbatim}
\setglossarystyle{altlist}
\end{verbatim}

Once the acronym style has been set, I can define my acronyms:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym[description={set of tags for use in 
developing hypertext documents}]{html}{html}{Hyper 
Text Markup Language}

\newacronym[description={language used to describe the 
layout of a document written in a markup language}]{css}
{css}{Cascading Style Sheet}
\end{verbatim}

The sample file \samplefile{-custom-acronym} illustrates this
example.
\end{example}

\begin{example}{Italic and Upright Abbreviations}{ex:font-abbr}
Suppose I~want to have some abbreviations in italic and some that
just use the surrounding font. Hard-coding this into the
\meta{short} argument of \cs{newacronym} can cause complications.

This example uses \ics{glsaddstoragekey} to add an extra field that
can be used to store the formatting declaration (such as \cs{em}).
\begin{verbatim}
\glsaddstoragekey{font}{}{\entryfont}
\end{verbatim}
This defines a~new field/key called \texttt{font}, which defaults to
nothing if it's not explicitly set. This also defines a command
called \cs{entryfont} that's analogous to \cs{glsentrytext}. A~new
style is then created to format abbreviations that access this field.

There are two ways to do this. The first is to create a style that
doesn't use \ics{glsgenacfmt} but instead provides a~modified
version that doesn't use \cs{acronymfont}\marg{short}
but instead uses
\verb|{|\cs{entryfont}\verb|{\glslabel}|\meta{short}\verb|}|.
The full format given by commands such as \cs{genacrfullformat}
need to be similarly adjusted. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
  \renewcommand*{\genacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \glsentrylong{##1}##2\space
   ({\entryfont{##1}\glsentryshort{##1}})%
  }%
\end{verbatim}
This will deal with commands like \ics{gls} but not commands like
\ics{acrshort} which still use \ics{acronymfont}. Another approach
is to redefine \cs{acronymfont} to look up the required font
declaration. Since \cs{acronymfont} doesn't take the entry label as
an argument, the following will only work if \cs{acronymfont} is
used in a~context where the label is provided by \ics{glslabel}.
This is true in \cs{gls}, \cs{acrshort} and \cs{acrfull}. The
redefinition is now:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{{\entryfont{\glslabel}#1}}%
\end{verbatim}
So the new style can be defined as:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronymstyle{long-font-short}
{%
  \GlsUseAcrEntryDispStyle{long-short}%
}
{%
  \GlsUseAcrStyleDefs{long-short}%
  \renewcommand*{\genacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \glsentrylong{##1}##2\space
   ({\entryfont{##1}\glsentryshort{##1}})%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\Genacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \Glsentrylong{##1}##2\space
   ({\entryfont{##1}\glsentryshort{##1}})%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\genplacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \glsentrylongpl{##1}##2\space
   ({\entryfont{##1}\glsentryshortpl{##1}})%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\Genplacrfullformat}[2]{%
   \Glsentrylongpl{##1}##2\space
   ({\entryfont{##1}\glsentryshortpl{##1}})%
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{{\entryfont{\glslabel}##1}}%
  \renewcommand*{\acronymentry}[1]{{\entryfont{##1}\glsentryshort{##1}}}%
}
\end{verbatim}
Remember the style needs to be set before defining the entries:
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{long-font-short}
\end{verbatim}

The complete document is contained in the sample file
\samplefile{-font-abbr}.
\end{example}

Some writers and publishing houses have started to drop full stops
(periods) from upper case initials but may still retain them for
lower case abbreviations, while others may still use them for both
upper and lower case. This can cause complications. Chapter~12 of
\emph{The \TeX{}book} discusses the spacing between words but,
briefly, the default behaviour of \TeX\ is to assume that an upper
case character followed by a~full stop and space is an abbreviation,
so the space is the default inter-word space whereas a~lower case
character followed by a~full stop and space is a word occurring at
the end of a~sentence. In the event that this isn't true, you need
to make a~manual adjustment using \verb*| | (back slash space) in
place of just a~space character for an inter-word mid-sentence space
and use \verb|\@| before the full stop to indicate the end of the
sentence.

For example:
\begin{verbatim}
I was awarded a B.Sc. and a Ph.D. (From the same place.)
\end{verbatim}
is typeset as
\begin{display}
I was awarded a B.Sc. and a Ph.D. (From the same place.)
\end{display}
The spacing is more noticeable with the typewriter font:
\begin{verbatim}
\ttfamily
I was awarded a B.Sc. and a Ph.D. (From the same place.)
\end{verbatim}
is typeset as
\begin{display}\ttfamily
I was awarded a B.Sc. and a Ph.D. (From the same place.)
\end{display}
The lower case letter at the end of ``B.Sc.''\ is confusing \TeX\
into thinking that the full stop after it marks the end of the
sentence. Whereas the upper case letter at the end of ``Ph.D.'' has
confused \TeX\ into thinking that the following full stop is just
part of the abbreviation. These can be corrected:
\begin{verbatim}
I was awarded a B.Sc.\ and a Ph.D\@. (From the same place.)
\end{verbatim}

This situation is a bit problematic for \styfmt{glossaries}. The
full stops can form part of the \meta{short} argument of
\cs{newacronym} and the \verb*|B.Sc.\ | part can be dealt with by
remembering to add \verb*|\ | (for example, \verb*|\gls{bsc}\ |)
but the end of sentence case is more troublesome as you need to omit
the sentence terminating full stop (to avoid two dots) which can
make the source code look a little strange but you also need to
adjust the space factor, which is usually done by inserting \cs{@}
before the full stop.

The next example shows one way of achieving this.
(Note that the supplemental \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides a much
simpler way of doing this, which you may prefer to use. See 
\gallery{sample-initialisms.shtml}{Gallery: Initialisms}.)

\begin{example}{Abbreviations with Full Stops (Periods)}{ex:dotabbr}
As from version 4.16, there's now a hook (\ics{glspostlinkhook})
that's called at the very end of the \glslike\ and \glstextlike\
commands. This can be redefined to check if the following character
is a full stop. The \sty{amsgen} package (which is automatically
loaded by \styfmt{glossaries}) provides an internal command
called \cs{new@ifnextchar} that can be used to determine if the
given character appears next. (For more information see the
\sty{amsgen} documentation.)

It's possible that I~may also want acronyms or contractions in my
document, so I~need some way to differentiate between them.
Here I'm going to use the same method as in
example~\ref{ex:addstoragekey} where a~new field is defined
to indicate the type of abbreviation:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsaddstoragekey{abbrtype}{word}{\abbrtype}

\newcommand*{\newabbr}[1][]{\newacronym[abbrtype=initials,#1]}
\end{verbatim}
Now I just use \ics{newacronym} for the acronyms, for example,
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym{laser}{laser}{light amplification by stimulated
emission of radiation}
\end{verbatim}
and my new command \cs{newabbr} for initials, for example,
\begin{verbatim}
\newabbr{eg}{e.g.}{exempli gratia}
\newabbr{ie}{i.e.}{id est}
\newabbr{bsc}{B.Sc.}{Bachelor of Science}
\newabbr{ba}{B.A.}{Bachelor of Arts}
\newabbr{agm}{A.G.M.}{annual general meeting}
\end{verbatim}
Within \cs{glspostlinkhook} the entry's label can be accessed using
\ics{glslabel} and \ics{ifglsfieldeq} can be used to determine if
the current entry has the new \texttt{abbrtype} field set to
\qt{initials}. If it doesn't, then nothing needs to happen, but if
it does, a~check is performed to see if the next character is a~full
stop. If it is, this signals the end of a~sentence otherwise it's
mid-sentence.

Remember that internal commands within the document file (rather
than in a~class or package) need to be placed between
\ics{makeatletter} and \ics{makeatother}:
\begin{verbatim}
\makeatletter
\renewcommand{\glspostlinkhook}{%
 \ifglsfieldeq{\glslabel}{abbrtype}{initials}%
 {\new@ifnextchar.\doendsentence\doendword}
 {}%
}
\makeatother
\end{verbatim}
In the event that a full stop is found \cs{doendsentence} is
performed but it will be followed by the full stop, which needs to
be discarded. Otherwise \cs{doendword} will be done but it won't be
followed by a full stop so there's nothing to discard. The
definitions for these commands are:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\doendsentence}[1]{\spacefactor=10000{}}
\newcommand{\doendword}{\spacefactor=1000{}}
\end{verbatim}
Now, I can just do \verb|\gls{bsc}| mid-sentence and
\verb|\gls{phd}.| at the end of the sentence. The terminating full
stop will be discarded in the latter case, but it won't be discarded
in, say, \verb|\gls{laser}.| as that doesn't have the
\texttt{abbrtype} field set to \qt{initials}.

This also works on first use when the style is set to one of the
\meta{long} (\meta{short}) styles but it will fail with the
\meta{short} (\meta{long}) styles as in this case the terminating
full stop shouldn't be discarded. Since \ics{glspostlinkhook} is
used after the \firstuseflag\ has been unset for the entry, this
can't be fixed by simply checking with \ics{ifglsused}. One possible
solution to this is to redefine \ics{glslinkpostsetkeys} to check
for the \firstuseflag\ and define a macro that can then be used in
\ics{glspostlinkhook}.

The other thing to consider is what to do with plurals. One
possibility is to check for plural use within \cs{doendsentence}
(using \ics{glsifplural}) and put the full stop back if the plural
has been used.

The complete document is contained in the sample file
\samplefile{-dot-abbr}.
\end{example}

\section{Displaying the List of Acronyms}
\label{sec:disploa}

The list of acronyms is just like any other type of glossary and can
be displayed on its own using:
\begin{description}
\itempar{\opt1:}
\begin{alltt}
\ics{printnoidxglossary}[type=\ics{acronymtype}]
\end{alltt}

\itempar{\optsand23:}
\begin{alltt}
\ics{printglossary}[type=\ics{acronymtype}]
\end{alltt}

(If you use the
\pkgopt{acronym} package option you can also use 
\begin{alltt}
\ics{printacronyms}\oarg{options}
\end{alltt}
as a synonym for
\begin{alltt}
\ics{printglossary}[type=\ics{acronymtype},\meta{options}]
\end{alltt}
See \sectionref{sec:pkgopts-acronym}.)

\end{description}
Alternatively the list of acronyms can be displayed with all the other 
glossaries using:
\begin{description}
\item[\opt1:] \ics{printnoidxglossaries}

\item[\optsand23:] \ics{printglossaries}
\end{description}

However, care must be taken to choose a glossary style that's
appropriate to your acronym style.
Alternatively, you can define your own custom style (see 
\sectionref{sec:newglossarystyle} for further details).

\section{Upgrading From the glossary Package}
\label{sec:oldacronym}

Users of the obsolete \sty{glossary} package may recall that
the syntax used to define new acronyms has changed with the
replacement \styfmt{glossaries} package. In addition, the old
\sty{glossary} package created the command 
\cs{}\meta{acr-name} when defining the acronym \meta{acr-name}.

In order to facilitate migrating from the old package to the new
one, the \styfmt{glossaries} package\footnote{as from version 1.18} 
provides the command:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\oldacronym}]
\cs{oldacronym}\oarg{label}\marg{abbrv}\marg{long}\marg{key-val list}
\end{definition}
This uses the same syntax as the \sty{glossary} package's
method of defining acronyms. It is equivalent to:
\begin{display}
\ics{newacronym}\oarg{key-val list}\marg{label}\marg{abbrv}\marg{long}
\end{display}
In addition, \ics{oldacronym} also defines the commands
\cs{}\meta{label}, which is equivalent to \ics{gls}\marg{label},
and \cs{}\meta{label}\texttt{*}, which is equivalent to
\ics{Gls}\marg{label}. If \meta{label} is omitted, \meta{abbrv}
is used. Since commands names must consist only of alphabetical
characters, \meta{label} must also only consist of alphabetical
characters. Note that \cs{}\meta{label} doesn't allow you to use
the first optional argument of \ics{gls} or \ics{Gls} --- you will
need to explicitly use \ics{gls} or \ics{Gls} to change the
settings.

\begin{important}
Recall that, in general, \LaTeX\ ignores spaces following command 
names consisting of alphabetical characters. This is also true for 
\cs{}\meta{label} unless you additionally load the
\sty{xspace} package, but be aware that there are some issues with
using \sty{xspace}.\footnotemark
\end{important}
\footnotetext{See David Carlisle's explanation in
\href{http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/86565/drawbacks-of-xspace}{Drawbacks
of xspace}}

The \styfmt{glossaries} package doesn't load the \sty{xspace} package
since there are both advantages and disadvantages to using
\ics{xspace} in \cs{}\meta{label}. If you don't use the 
\sty{xspace} package you need to explicitly force a space using
\verb*|\ | (backslash space) however you can follow \cs{}\meta{label}
with additional text in square brackets (the final optional
argument to \ics{gls}). If you use the \sty{xspace} package
you don't need to escape the spaces but you can't use
the optional argument to insert text (you will have to explicitly
use \ics{gls}).

To illustrate this, suppose I define the acronym \qt{abc} as
follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\oldacronym{abc}{example acronym}{}
\end{verbatim}
This will create the command \cs{abc} and its starred version
\cs{abc*}. \Tableref{tab:xspace} illustrates the effect of
\cs{abc} (on subsequent use) according to whether or not the
\sty{xspace} package has been loaded. As can be seen from the
final row in the table, the \sty{xspace} package prevents the
optional argument from being recognised.

\begin{table}[htbp]
\caption[The effect of using xspace]{The effect of using 
\styfmt{xspace} with \cs{oldacronym}}
\label{tab:xspace}
\vskip\baselineskip
\centering
\begin{tabular}{lll}
\bfseries Code & \bfseries With \styfmt{xspace} &
\bfseries Without \styfmt{xspace}\\
\verb|\abc.| & abc. & abc.\\
\verb|\abc xyz| & abc xyz & abcxyz\\
\verb|\abc\ xyz| & abc xyz & abc xyz\\
\verb|\abc* xyz| & Abc xyz & Abc xyz\\
\verb|\abc['s] xyz| & abc ['s] xyz & abc's xyz
\end{tabular}
\par
\end{table}

\chapter{Unsetting and Resetting Entry Flags}
\label{sec:glsunset}

When using the \glslike\ commands it is
possible that you may want to use the value given by the
\gloskey{first} key, even though you have already \glslink{firstuse}{used} the glossary
entry. Conversely, you may want to use the value given by the
\gloskey{text} key, even though you haven't used the glossary entry.
The former can be achieved by one of the following commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsreset}]
\cs{glsreset}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glslocalreset}]
\cs{glslocalreset}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
while the latter can be achieved by one of the following commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsunset}]
\cs{glsunset}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glslocalunset}]
\cs{glslocalunset}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
You can also reset or unset all entries for a given glossary or list of
glossaries using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsresetall}]
\cs{glsresetall}\oarg{glossary list}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glslocalresetall}]
\cs{glslocalresetall}\oarg{glossary list}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsunsetall}]
\cs{glsunsetall}\oarg{glossary list}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glslocalunsetall}]
\cs{glslocalunsetall}\oarg{glossary list}
\end{definition}
where \meta{glossary list} is a comma-separated list of 
glossary labels. If omitted, all defined glossaries are assumed
(except for the ignored ones).
For example, to reset all entries in the main glossary and the
list of acronyms:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsresetall[main,acronym]
\end{verbatim}

You can determine whether an entry's \gls{firstuseflag} is set using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ifglsused}]
\cs{ifglsused}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
\end{definition}
where \meta{label} is the label of the required entry. If the
entry has been used, \meta{true part} will be done, otherwise
\meta{false part} will be done.

Note that \cs{ifglsused} is unreliable with \gls{bib2gls} as the
entry isn't defined on the first \LaTeX\ run, which means there's no
way of determining if it has been used, so
\gls{glossaries-extra} provides a similar command:
\begin{definition}
\ics*{GlsXtrIfUnusedOrUndefined}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
\end{definition}

\begin{important}
Be careful when using \glslike\ commands within an
environment or command argument that gets processed multiple times
as it can cause unwanted side-effects when the first use displayed
text is different from subsequent use.
\end{important}

For example, the \env{frame} environment in \cls{beamer} processes
its argument for each overlay. This means that the \firstuseflag\
will be unset on the first overlay and subsequent overlays will use
the non-first use form.

Consider the following example:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{beamer}

\usepackage{glossaries}

\newacronym{svm}{SVM}{support vector machine}

\begin{document}

\begin{frame}
 \frametitle{Frame 1}

 \begin{itemize}
  \item<+-> \gls{svm}
  \item<+-> Stuff.
 \end{itemize}
\end{frame}

\end{document}
\end{verbatim}

On the first overlay, \verb|\gls{svm}| produces \qt{support vector
machine (SVM)} and then unsets the \firstuseflag. When the second
overlay is processed, \verb|\gls{svm}| now produces \qt{SVM}, which
is unlikely to be the desired effect. I~don't know anyway around
this and I can only offer two suggestions.

Firstly, unset all acronyms at the start of the document and
explicitly use \ics{acrfull} when you want the full version to be
displayed:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{beamer}

\usepackage{glossaries}

\newacronym{svm}{SVM}{support vector machine}

\glsunsetall

\begin{document}
\begin{frame}
 \frametitle{Frame 1}

 \begin{itemize}
  \item<+-> \acrfull{svm}
  \item<+-> Stuff.
 \end{itemize}
\end{frame}
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}

Secondly, explicitly reset each acronym on first use:
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{frame}
 \frametitle{Frame 1}

 \begin{itemize}
  \item<+-> \glsreset{svm}\gls{svm}
  \item<+-> Stuff.
 \end{itemize}
\end{frame}
\end{verbatim}
These are non-optimal, but the \cls{beamer} class is too complex for
me to provide a programmatic solution. Other potentially problematic
environments are some \env{tabular}-like environments (but not
\env{tabular} itself) that process the contents in order to work out
the column widths and then reprocess the contents to do the actual
typesetting.

The \sty{amsmath} environments, such as \env{align}, also process
their contents multiple times, but the \styfmt{glossaries} package now
checks for this. For \sty{tabularx}, you need to explicitly patch it
by placing \cs{glspatchtabularx} in the preamble (or anywhere
before the problematic use of \envfmt{tabularx}).

\begin{xtr}
If you need to use commands like \cs{gls} in any problematic context
that interferes with the \gls{firstuseflag}, then you can try using
the buffering system provided with \gls{glossaries-extra}. See the
\qt{First Use Flag} section of the \gls{glossaries-extra} manual.
\end{xtr}

\section{Counting the Number of Times an Entry has been Used (First Use
Flag Unset)}
\label{sec:enableentrycount}

As from version 4.14, it's now possible to keep track of how many
times an entry is used. That is, how many times the \firstuseflag\
is unset. Note that the supplemental \gls{glossaries-extra} package improves
this function and also provides per-unit counting, which isn't
available with the \styfmt{glossaries} package.

\begin{important}
This function is disabled by default as it adds extra
overhead to the document build time and also switches
\ics{newglossaryentry} (and therefore \ics{newacronym}) into
a~preamble-only command.
\end{important}

To enable this function, use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsenableentrycount]
\cs{glsenableentrycount}
\end{definition}
before defining your entries. This adds two extra (internal) fields
to entries: \texttt{currcount} and \texttt{prevcount}.

The \texttt{currcount} field keeps track of how many times
\cs{glsunset} is used within the document. A~local unset (using
\cs{glslocalunset}) performs a~local rather than global increment to
\texttt{currcount}. Remember that not all commands use
\cs{glsunset}. Only the \glslike\ commands do this. The reset
commands \cs{glsreset} and \cs{glslocalreset} reset this field back
to zero (where \cs{glslocalreset} performs a~local change).

The \texttt{prevcount} field stores the final value of the
\texttt{currcount} field \emph{from the previous run}. This value is
read from the \filetype{aux} file at the beginning of the
\env{document} environment.

You can access these fields using
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsentrycurrcount]
\cs{glsentrycurrcount}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
for the \texttt{currcount} field, and
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsentryprevcount]
\cs{glsentryprevcount}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
for the \texttt{prevcount} field. 

\begin{important}
These commands are only defined if you have used \cs{glsenableentrycount}.
\end{important}

For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{glossaries}
\makeglossaries

\glsenableentrycount

\newglossaryentry{apple}{name=apple,description={a fruit}}

\begin{document}
Total usage on previous run: \glsentryprevcount{apple}.

\gls{apple}. \gls{apple}. \glsadd{apple}\glsentrytext{apple}.
\glslink{apple}{apple}. \glsdisp{apple}{apple}. \Gls{apple}.

Number of times apple has been used: \glsentrycurrcount{apple}.
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}
On the first \LaTeX\ run, \verb|\glsentryprevcount{apple}|
produces~0. At the end of the document,
\verb|\glsentrycurrcount{apple}| produces~4. This is because
the only commands that have incremented the entry count are those
that use \cs{glsunset}. That is: \cs{gls}, \cs{glsdisp} and
\cs{Gls}. The other commands used in the above example, \cs{glsadd},
\cs{glsentrytext} and \cs{glslink}, don't use \cs{glsunset} so they
don't increment the entry count. On the \emph{next} \LaTeX\ run,
\verb|\glsentryprevcount{apple}| now produces~4 as that was the
value of the \texttt{currcount} field for the \texttt{apple} entry
at the end of the document on the previous run.

When you enable the entry count using \cs{glsenableentrycount}, you
also enable the following commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\cgls]
\cs{cgls}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
(no case-change, singular)
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\cglspl]
\cs{cglspl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
(no case-change, plural)
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\cGls]
\cs{cGls}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
(first letter uppercase, singular), and
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\cGlspl]
\cs{cGlspl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
(first letter uppercase, plural).
These all have plus and starred variants like the analogous
\cs{gls}, \cs{glspl}, \cs{Gls} and \cs{Glspl} commands.

If you don't use \cs{glsenableentrycount}, these commands behave
like \cs{gls}, \cs{glspl}, \cs{Gls} and \cs{Glspl},
respectively, only there will be a warning that you haven't enabled
entry counting. If you have enabled entry counting with
\cs{glsenableentrycount} then these commands test if
\cs{glsentryprevcount}\marg{label} equals~1. If it doesn't then the
analogous \cs{gls} etc will be used. If it does, then the first optional
argument will be ignored and 
\begin{alltt}
\meta{cs format}\marg{label}\marg{insert}\cs{glsunset}\marg{label}
\end{alltt}
will be performed, where \meta{cs format} is a command that takes
two arguments. The command used depends whether you have used
\cs{cgls}, \cs{cglspl}, \cs{cGls} or \cs{cGlspl}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\cglsformat]
\cs{cglsformat}\marg{label}\marg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command is used by \cs{cgls} and defaults to
\begin{alltt}
\cs{glsentrylong}\marg{label}\meta{insert}
\end{alltt}
if the entry given by
\meta{label} has a~long form or
\begin{alltt}
\cs{glsentryfirst}\marg{label}\meta{insert}
\end{alltt}
otherwise.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\cglsplformat]
\cs{cglsplformat}\marg{label}\marg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command is used by \cs{cglspl} and defaults to
\begin{alltt}
\cs{glsentrylongpl}\marg{label}\meta{insert} 
\end{alltt}
if the entry given by
\meta{label} has a~long form or
\begin{alltt}
\cs{glsentryfirstplural}\marg{label}\meta{insert}
\end{alltt}
otherwise.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\cGlsformat]
\cs{cGlsformat}\marg{label}\marg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command is used by \cs{cGls} and defaults to
\begin{alltt}
\cs{Glsentrylong}\marg{label}\meta{insert}
\end{alltt}
if the entry given by \meta{label} has a~long form or
\begin{alltt}
\cs{Glsentryfirst}\marg{label}\meta{insert}
\end{alltt}
otherwise.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\cGlsplformat]
\cs{cGlsplformat}\marg{label}\marg{insert}
\end{definition}
This command is used by \cs{cGlspl} and defaults to
\begin{alltt}
\cs{Glsentrylongpl}\marg{label}\meta{insert}
\end{alltt}
if the entry given by \meta{label} has a~long form or
\begin{alltt}
\cs{Glsentryfirstplural}\marg{label}\meta{insert}
\end{alltt}
otherwise.

This means that if the previous count for the given entry was~1, the
entry won't be hyperlinked with the \cs{cgls}-like commands and they
won't add a~line to the external glossary file. If you haven't used
any of the other commands that add information to the glossary file
(such as \cs{glsadd} or the \glstextlike\ commands) then the entry
won't appear in the glossary.

Remember that since these commands use \cs{glsentryprevcount} you
need to run \LaTeX\ twice to ensure they work correctly.  The
document build order is now (at least): \texttt{(pdf)latex},
\texttt{(pdf)latex}, \texttt{makeglossaries}, \texttt{(pdf)latex}.

\begin{example}{Don't index entries that are only used once}{sec:entrycount}
In this example, the abbreviations that have only been used once (on the previous run)
only have their long form shown with \cs{cgls}.
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}

\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}
\usepackage[acronym]{glossaries}
\makeglossaries

\glsenableentrycount

\setacronymstyle{long-short}

\newacronym{html}{HTML}{hypertext markup language}
\newacronym{css}{CSS}{cascading style sheets}
\newacronym{xml}{XML}{extensible markup language}
\newacronym{sql}{SQL}{structured query language}
\newacronym{rdbms}{RDBMS}{relational database management system}
\newacronym{rdsms}{RDSMS}{relational data stream management system}

\begin{document}
These entries are only used once: \cgls{sql}, \cgls{rdbms},
\cgls{xml}. These entries are used multiple times:
\cgls{html}, \cgls{html}, \cgls{css}, \cgls{css}, \cgls{css},
\cgls{rdsms}, \cgls{rdsms}.

\printglossaries
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}
After a complete document build (\texttt{latex}, \texttt{latex},
\texttt{makeglossaries}, \texttt{latex}) the list of abbreviations only
includes the entries HTML, CSS and RDSMS. The entries SQL, RDBMS and
XML
only have their long forms displayed and don't have a~hyperlink.
\end{example}

Remember that if you don't like typing \cs{cgls} you can create a
synonym. For example
\begin{verbatim}
\let\ac\cgls
\end{verbatim}

\begin{bib2gls}
With \gls{bib2gls} there's an analogous record counting set of
commands. See \gls{glossaries-extra} and \gls{bib2gls} manuals for further details. 
\end{bib2gls}

\chapter{Displaying a Glossary}
\label{sec:printglossary}

All defined glossaries may be displayed using:
\begin{description}
\item[\opt1:]
(Must be used with \ics{makenoidxglossaries} in the preamble.)
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\printnoidxglossaries]
\cs{printnoidxglossaries}
\end{definition}
which internally uses \cs{printnoidxglossary} for each glossary.

\item[\optsand23:]
(Must be used with \ics{makeglossaries} in the preamble.)
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\printglossaries]
\cs{printglossaries}
\end{definition}
which internally uses \cs{printglossary} for each glossary.

\item[\optsto46:] (\gls{glossaries-extra} only)
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\printunsrtglossaries]
\cs{printunsrtglossaries}
\end{definition}
which internally uses \cs{printunsrtglossary} for each glossary.
\end{description}
These commands will display all the glossaries in the order in which
they were defined. 

Note that, in the case of \optsand23, no glossaries will appear
until you have either used the Perl script \gls{makeglossaries} or
Lua script \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua} or have directly used
\gls{makeindex} or \gls{xindy} (as described in
\sectionref{sec:makeglossaries}). In the case of \opt4, no glossary
will appear until you have used \gls{bib2gls}.

\begin{important}
While the external files are missing, \cs{printglossary} will just do
\ics{null} for each missing glossary to assist dictionary style
documents that just use \cs{glsaddall} without inserting any text.  
This use of \ics{null} ensures that all indexing information is
written before the final page is shipped out. Once the external
files are present \cs{null} will no longer be used. This can cause a
spurious blank page on the first \LaTeX\ run before the glossary
files have been created. Once these files are present, \cs{null}
will no longer be used and so shouldn't cause interference for the
final document.
\end{important}

\begin{xtr}
If you use \gls{glossaries-extra}, it will insert a heading and boilerplate text when the
external files are missing. See the
\gls{glossaries-extra} manual for further details.
\end{xtr}

If the glossary still does not appear after you re-\LaTeX\ your
document, check the \gls*{makeindex}, \gls*{xindy} or \gls*{bib2gls}
log files, as applicable, to see if there is a problem.  With \opt1,
you just need two \LaTeX\ runs to make the glossaries appear, but
you may need further runs to make the \glspl{numberlist} up-to-date.

An individual glossary can be displayed using:
\begin{description}
\itempar{\opt1:}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\printnoidxglossary}]
\cs{printnoidxglossary}\oarg{options}
\end{definition}
(Must be used with \ics{makenoidxglossaries} in the preamble.)

\itempar{\optsand23:}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\printglossary}]
\cs{printglossary}\oarg{options}
\end{definition}
(Must be used with \ics{makeglossaries} in the preamble.)

\itempar{\optsto46:}
\begin{definition}
\ics*{printunsrtglossary}\oarg{options}
\end{definition}
(May be used with or without \gls{bib2gls}.)
\end{description}
where \meta{options} is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of options. 
(Again, when the associated external file is missing, \cs{null} is
inserted into the document.)

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package also provides
\begin{definition}
\ics*{printunsrtinnerglossary}\oarg{options}\marg{pre
code}\marg{post code}
\end{definition}
which is designed for inner or nested glossaries. It allows many, but not all,
of the options listed below.  There's an example available in the gallery: 
\gallery{index.php?label=bib2gls-inner}{Inner or Nested Glossaries}.
See the \gls{glossaries-extra} package for further details.
\end{xtr}

The following keys are available in \marg{options}:
\begin{description}
\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{type}}] The value of this key
specifies which glossary to print. If omitted, the default
glossary is assumed. For example, to print the list of acronyms:
\begin{verbatim}
\printglossary[type=\acronymtype]
\end{verbatim}
Note that you can't display an ignored glossary, so don't try
setting \gloskey[printglossary]{type} to the name of a glossary that
was defined using \ics{newignoredglossary}, described in
\sectionref{sec:newglossary}. (You can display an ignored glossary
with \ics*{printunsrtglossary} provided by \gls{glossaries-extra}.)

\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{title}}] This is the glossary's
title (overriding the title specified when the glossary was 
defined).

\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{toctitle}}] This is the title
to use for the table of contents (if the \pkgopt{toc} package
option has been used). It may also be used for the page header,
depending on the page style. If omitted, the value of 
\gloskey[printglossary]{title} is used.

\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{style}}] This specifies which
glossary style to use for this glossary, overriding the effect
of the \pkgopt{style} package option or \ics{glossarystyle}.

\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{numberedsection}}] This specifies
whether to use a numbered section for this glossary, overriding
the effect of the \pkgopt{numberedsection} package option. This
key has the same syntax as the \pkgopt{numberedsection} package
option, described in \sectionref{sec:pkgopts-sec}.

\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{nonumberlist}}] This is a boolean
key. If true (\verb|nonumberlist=true|) the numberlist is suppressed
for this glossary. If false (\verb|nonumberlist=false|) the
numberlist is displayed for this glossary.

\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{nogroupskip}}] This is a boolean
key. If true the vertical gap between groups 
is suppressed for this glossary.

\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{nopostdot}}] This is a boolean
key. If true the full stop after the description 
is suppressed for this glossary.

\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{entrycounter}}] This is a boolean
key. Behaves similar to the package option of the same name.
The corresponding package option must be used to make \ics{glsrefentry}
work correctly.

\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{subentrycounter}}] This is a boolean
key. Behaves similar to the package option of the same name.  If you
want to set both \gloskey{entrycounter} and
\gloskey{subentrycounter}, make sure you specify
\gloskey{entrycounter} first.  The corresponding package option must
be used to make \ics{glsrefentry} work correctly.

\item[{\gloskey[printnoidxglossary]{sort}}] This key is only
available for \opt1. Possible values are: \texttt{word} (word
order), \texttt{letter} (letter order), \texttt{standard} (word or
letter ordering taken from the \pkgopt{order} package option),
\texttt{use} (order of use), \texttt{def} (order of definition)
\texttt{nocase} (case-insensitive) or \texttt{case} (case-sensitive).
Note that the word and letter comparisons (that is, everything other
than \texttt{sort=use} and \texttt{sort=def}) just use a simple
character code comparison. For a locale-sensitive sort, you must use
either \gls{xindy} (\opt3) or \gls{bib2gls} (\opt4). Note that \gls{bib2gls}
provides many other sort options.

\begin{important}
If you use the \texttt{use} or \texttt{def} values make sure
that you select a glossary style that doesn't have a visual
indicator between groups, as the grouping no longer makes sense.
Consider using the \pkgopt{nogroupskip} option.
\end{important}

{\raggedright
The word and letter order sort methods use
\sty{datatool}'s
\ics{dtlwordindexcompare} and \ics{dtlletterindexcompare} handlers.
The case-insensitive sort method uses \sty{datatool}'s
\ics{dtlicompare} handler.  The case-sensitive sort method uses 
\sty{datatool}'s \ics{dtlcompare} handler. See the \sty{datatool}
documentation for further details.
\par}

If you don't get an error with \texttt{sort=use} and
\texttt{sort=def} but you do get an error with one of the other sort
options, then you probably need to use the
\pkgopt[true]{sanitizesort} package option or make sure none of the
entries have fragile commands in their \gloskey{sort} field.

\item[{\xtrprintglosskey[\marg{label}]{label}}]
This key is only available with \gls{glossaries-extra} and labels
the glossary with \cs{label}\marg{label}. This is an alternative to
the package option \pkgopt[autolabel]{numberedsection}

\item[{\xtrprintglosskey[\marg{boolean}]{target}}] This boolean key is only
available with \gls{glossaries-extra} and can be used to switch
off the automatic hypertarget for each entry. (This refers to the
target used by commands like \cs{gls} and \cs{glslink}.)

This option is useful with \ics*{printunsrtglossary} as it allows
the same list (or sub-list) of entries to be displayed multiple
times without causing duplicate hypertarget names.

\item[{\xtrprintglosskey[\marg{prefix}]{prefix}}]
This key is only available with \gls{glossaries-extra} and provides
another way of avoiding duplicate hypertarget names. In this case it uses a
different prefix for those names. This locally redefines
\ics{glolinkprefix} but note this will also affect the target for any entry
referenced within the glossary with commands like \cs{gls},
\cs{glslink} or \cs{glshypertarget}.

\item[{\xtrprintglosskey[\marg{prefix}]{targetnameprefix}}]
This key is only available with \gls{glossaries-extra}.
This is similar to the \pkgoptfmt{prefix} option, but it alters the prefix of
the hypertarget anchors without changing \ics{glslinkprefix} (so it
won't change the hyperlinks for any entries referenced in the
glossary).

\item[{\xtrprintglosskey[\marg{boolean}]{groups}}]
This boolean key is only available with \gls{glossaries-extra} and,
if true, will attempt to perform group formation. See the
\gls{glossaries-extra} manual for further details.

\item[{\xtrprintglosskey[\marg{n}]{leveloffset}}]
This key is only available with \ics*{printunsrtglossary}. 
It can be used to locally adjust the
hierarchical level used by the glossary style. See the
\gls{glossaries-extra} manual for further details.
\end{description}

By default, the glossary is started either by \ics{chapter*} or by
\ics{section*}, depending on whether or not \ics{chapter} is defined.
This can be overridden by the \pkgopt{section} package option or the
\ics{setglossarysection} command. Numbered sectional units can be
obtained using the \pkgopt{numberedsection} package option. Each
glossary sets the page header via the command
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsglossarymark]
\ics{glsglossarymark}\marg{title}
\end{definition}
If this mechanism is unsuitable for your chosen class file or page
style package, you will need to redefine \ics{glsglossarymark}. Further
information about these options and commands is given in
\sectionref{sec:pkgopts-sec}.

Information can be added to the start of the glossary (after the
title and before the main body of the glossary) by redefining
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glossarypreamble}]
\cs{glossarypreamble}
\end{definition}
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic 
indicate primary definitions.}
\end{verbatim}
This needs to be done before the glossary is displayed.

If you want a different preamble per glossary you can use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\setglossarypreamble}]
\cs{setglossarypreamble}\oarg{type}\marg{preamble text}
\end{definition}
If \meta{type} is omitted, \cs{glsdefaulttype} is used.

For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\setglossarypreamble{Numbers in italic 
indicate primary definitions.}
\end{verbatim}
This will print the given preamble text for the main glossary,
but not have any preamble text for any other glossaries.

There is an analogous command to \cs{glossarypreamble} called
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glossarypostamble}]
\cs{glossarypostamble}
\end{definition}
which is placed at the end of each glossary.

\begin{example}{Switch to Two Column Mode for Glossary}{ex:twocolumn}
Suppose you are using the \glostyle{superheaderborder}
style\footnote{you can't use the \glostyle{longheaderborder} style
for this example as you can't use the \env{longtable} environment in
two column mode.}, and you want the glossary to be in two columns,
but after the glossary you want to switch back to one column mode,
you could do:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glossarysection}[2][]{%
  \twocolumn[{\chapter*{#2}}]%
  \setlength\glsdescwidth{0.6\linewidth}%
  \glsglossarymark{\glossarytoctitle}%
}

\renewcommand*{\glossarypostamble}{\onecolumn}
\end{verbatim}

\end{example}

Within each glossary, each entry name is formatted according to
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsnamefont}]
\cs{glsnamefont}\marg{name}
\end{definition}
which takes one argument: the entry name. This command is always
used regardless of the glossary style. By default, \cs{glsnamefont}
simply displays its argument in whatever the surrounding font
happens to be. This means that in the list-like glossary styles
(defined in the \sty{glossary-list} style file) the name will appear
in bold, since the name is placed in the optional argument of
\cs{item}, whereas in the tabular styles (defined in the
\sty{glossary-long} and \sty{glossary-super} style files) the name
will appear in the normal font. The hierarchical glossary styles
(defined in the \sty{glossary-tree} style file) also set the name in
bold.

If you want to change the font for the description, or if you
only want to change the name font for some types of entries
but not others, you might want to consider using the
\gls{glossaries-extra} package.

\begin{example}{Changing the Font Used to Display Entry Names in the
Glossary}{ex:glsnamefont}
Suppose you want all the entry names to appear in 
medium weight small caps in your glossaries, then you can do:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glsnamefont}[1]{\textsc{\mdseries #1}}
\end{verbatim}
\end{example}

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides additional hooks that
can be used to make other minor adjustments.
\end{xtr}

The letter group titles (which are displayed for styles like
\glostyle{indexgroup}) can be changed either by redefining the
corresponding \cs{\meta{group-label}groupname} commands, such as
\ics{glssymbolsgroupname}, (see \sectionref{sec:fixednames}) or by
using the \gls{glossaries-extra} commands \ics*{glsxtrsetgrouptitle}
and \ics*{glsxtrlocalsetgrouptitle}. The \meta{group-label} is
typically obtained by the \gls{indexingapp}.

\chapter{Defining New Glossaries}
\label{sec:newglossary}

A new glossary can be defined using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\newglossary}]
\cs{newglossary}\oarg{log-ext}\marg{name}\marg{in-ext}\marg{out-ext}\linebreak\marg{title}\oarg{counter}
\end{definition}
where \meta{name} is the label to assign to this glossary.
The arguments \meta{in-ext} and \meta{out-ext} specify the extensions to
give to the input and output files for that glossary, \meta{title}
is the default title for this new glossary and the final optional
argument \meta{counter} specifies which counter to use for the
associated \glspl{numberlist} (see also
\sectionref{sec:numberlists}). The first optional argument specifies
the extension for the \gls{makeindex} (\opt2) or \gls{xindy} (\opt3)
transcript file (this information is only used by
\gls{makeglossaries} which picks up the information from the
auxiliary file).  If you use \opt1, the \meta{log-ext},
\meta{in-ext} and \meta{out-ext} arguments are ignored.

\begin{important}
The glossary label \meta{name} must not contain any active
characters. It's generally best to stick with just characters that
have category code~11 (typically the non-extended \glspl{latinchar}
for standard \LaTeX).
\end{important}

There is also a starred version (new to v4.08):
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\newglossary*}]
\cs{newglossary*}\marg{name}\marg{title}\oarg{counter}
\end{definition}
which is equivalent to
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossary}[\meta{name}-glg]\marg{name}\{\meta{name}-gls\}\{\meta{name}-glo\}\ifpdf\linebreak\fi\marg{title}\oarg{counter}
\end{alltt}
or you can also use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\altnewglossary}]
\cs{altnewglossary}\marg{name}\marg{tag}\marg{title}\oarg{counter}
\end{definition}
which is equivalent to
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossary}[\meta{tag}-glg]\marg{name}\{\meta{tag}-gls\}\{\meta{tag}-glo\}\marg{title}\oarg{counter}
\end{alltt}

It may be that you have some terms that are so common
that they don't need to be listed. In this case, you can define 
a~special type of glossary that doesn't create any associated files.
This is referred to as an \qt{ignored glossary} and it's ignored by
commands that iterate over all the glossaries, such as
\ics{printglossaries}. To define an ignored glossary, use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\newignoredglossary]
\cs{newignoredglossary}\marg{name}
\end{definition}
where \meta{name} is the name of the glossary (as above). This
glossary type will automatically be added to the
\pkgopt{nohypertypes} list, since there are no hypertargets for
the entries in an ignored glossary.
(The sample file \samplefile{-entryfmt} defines an ignored glossary.)

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides a starred version of
this command that allows hyperlinks (since ignored glossaries can be
useful with \gls{bib2gls}). There is also an analogous 
\ics*{provideignoredglossary} command.
\end{xtr}

You can test if a glossary is an ignored one using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\ifignoredglossary]
\cs{ifignoredglossary}\marg{name}\marg{true}\marg{false}
\end{definition}
This does \meta{true} if \meta{name} was defined as an ignored
glossary, otherwise it does \meta{false}.

Note that the main (default) glossary is automatically created as:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossary{main}{gls}{glo}{\glossaryname}
\end{verbatim}
so it can be identified by the label \texttt{main} (unless the
\pkgopt{nomain} package option is used). Using the
\pkgopt{acronym} package option is equivalent to:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname}
\end{verbatim}
so it can be identified by the label \texttt{acronym}. If you are
not sure whether the \pkgopt{acronym} option has been used, you
can identify the list of acronyms by the command 
\DescribeMacro{\acronymtype}\cs{acronymtype} which is set to
\texttt{acronym}, if the \pkgopt{acronym} option has been used,
otherwise it is set to \texttt{main}. Note that if you are using
the main glossary as your list of acronyms, you need to declare
it as a list of acronyms using the package option 
\pkgopt{acronymlists}.

The \pkgopt{symbols} package option creates a new glossary with the
label \texttt{symbols} using:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossary[slg]{symbols}{sls}{slo}{\glssymbolsgroupname}
\end{verbatim}
The \pkgopt{numbers} package option creates a new glossary with
the label \texttt{numbers} using:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossary[nlg]{numbers}{nls}{nlo}{\glsnumbersgroupname}
\end{verbatim}
The \pkgopt{index} package option creates a new glossary with
the label \texttt{index} using:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossary[ilg]{index}{ind}{idx}{\indexname}
\end{verbatim}

\begin{important}
\optsand23: all glossaries must be defined before \ics{makeglossaries} to 
ensure that the relevant output files are opened.

See \sectionref{sec:fixednames} if you want to redefine \cs{glossaryname}, 
especially if you are using \sty{babel} or \sty{translator}.
(Similarly for \cs{glssymbolsgroupname} and
\cs{glsnumbersgroupname}.) If you want to redefine \ics{indexname},
just follow the advice in
\href{https://texfaq.org/FAQ-fixnam}{How to
change LaTeX’s \qt{fixed names}}.
\end{important}

\chapter{Adding an Entry to the Glossary Without Generating Text}
\label{sec:glsadd}

It is possible to add a line to the glossary file without
generating any text at that point in the document using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsadd}]
\cs{glsadd}\oarg{options}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This is similar to the \glstextlike\ commands, only it doesn't produce
any text (so therefore, there is no \gloskey[glslink]{hyper} key
available in \meta{options} but all the other options that can
be used with \glstextlike\ commands can be passed to \cs{glsadd}).

This command essentially works like \cs{index} (provided by the
\LaTeX\ kernel) in that it doesn't produce text but it does add a
line with an associated location to the glossary file. In this case,
the \qt{encap} (the page encapsulator information) is specified with
the \gloskey{format} key. (See \sectionref{sec:encap}.)

For example, to add a page range to the glossary number list for the
entry whose label is given by \texttt{set}:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsadd[format=(]{set}
Lots of text about sets spanning many pages.
\glsadd[format=)]{set}
\end{verbatim}

To add all entries that have been defined, use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsaddall}]
\cs{glsaddall}\oarg{options}
\end{definition}
The optional argument is the same as for \cs{glsadd}, except
there is also a key \gloskey[glsaddall]{types} which can be
used to specify which glossaries to use. This should be a
comma-separated list. For example, if you only want to add
all the entries belonging to the list of acronyms (specified by
the glossary type \ics{acronymtype}) and a list of
notation (specified by the glossary type \texttt{notation}) then you can
do:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsaddall[types={\acronymtype,notation}]
\end{verbatim}

\begin{bib2gls}
If you are using \gls{bib2gls} with \gls{glossaries-extra}, you
can't use \cs{glsaddall}. Instead use the \optfmt{selection=all}
resource option to select all entries in the given \filetype{bib} files.
\end{bib2gls}

\begin{important}
Note that \cs{glsadd} and \cs{glsaddall} add the current location to
the \gls{numberlist}. In the case of \cs{glsaddall}, all entries in the
glossary will have the same location in the number list. If you want
to use \cs{glsaddall}, it's best to suppress the number list with
the \pkgopt{nonumberlist} package option. (See
sections~\ref{sec:pkgopts-printglos} and~\ref{sec:numberlists}.)
\end{important}

There is now a variation of \cs{glsaddall} that skips any entries
that have been \glsdisp{firstuseflag}{marked as used}:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsaddallunused]
\cs{glsaddallunused}\oarg{list}
\end{definition}
This command uses \cs{glsadd}\texttt{[format=glsignore]} which will
ignore this location in the number list. (See \sectionref{sec:encap}.) 
The optional argument \meta{list} is a comma-separated list of
glossary types. If omitted, it defaults to the list of all defined
glossaries.

\begin{important}
If you want to use \cs{glsaddallunused}, it's best to place the
command at the end of the document to ensure that all the commands
you intend to use have already been used. Otherwise you could end up
with a spurious comma or dash in the location list.
\end{important}

\begin{bib2gls}
With \gls{glossaries-extra} and \gls{bib2gls}, \texttt{glsignore}
indicates an \qt{ignored location} which influences selection but
isn't added to the location list. In this case, if you use
\optfmt{selection=all} then only those entries that have been
explicitly indexed in the document will have location lists. The
other entries that were selected as a result of
\optfmt{selection=all} won't have location lists.
\end{bib2gls}

Base \sty{glossaries} package only:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{glossaries}
\makeglossaries
\newglossaryentry{cat}{name={cat},description={feline}}
\newglossaryentry{dog}{name={dog},description={canine}}
\begin{document}
\gls{cat}.
\printglossaries
\glsaddallunused % <- make sure dog is also listed
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}
Corresponding \gls{glossaries-extra} and \gls{bib2gls} document code:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage[record]{glossaries-extra}
\GlsXtrLoadResources[src={entries},selection=all]
\begin{document}
\gls{cat}.
\printunsrtglossaries
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}
With the file \texttt{entries.bib}:
\begin{verbatim}
@entry{cat,name={cat},description={feline}}
@entry{dog,name={dog},description={canine}}
\end{verbatim}

\begin{example}{Dual Entries}{ex:dual}
The example file \samplefile{-dual} makes use of \cs{glsadd} to
allow for an entry that should appear both in the main glossary and
in the list of acronyms. This example sets up the list of acronyms
using the \pkgopt{acronym} package option:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[acronym]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
A new command is then defined to make it easier to define dual
entries:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand*{\newdualentry}[5][]{%
  \newglossaryentry{main-#2}{name={#4},%
  text={#3\glsadd{#2}},%
  description={#5},%
  #1
  }%
  \newacronym{#2}{#3\glsadd{main-#2}}{#4}%
}
\end{verbatim}
This has the following syntax:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{newdualentry}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{abbrv}\marg{long}\marg{description}
\end{alltt}
You can then define a new dual entry:
\begin{verbatim}
\newdualentry{svm}% label
  {SVM}% abbreviation
  {support vector machine}% long form
  {Statistical pattern recognition technique}% description
\end{verbatim}
Now you can reference the acronym with \verb|\gls{svm}| or you can
reference the entry in the main glossary with \verb|\gls{main-svm}|.

This is just an example.
In general, think twice before you add this kind of duplication.
If all information (short, long and description) can be provided in
a single list, it's redundant to provide a second list unless any
of the short forms start with a different letter to the associated
long form, which may make it harder to lookup.

\begin{bib2gls}
Note that with \gls{bib2gls}, there are special dual entry types
that implement this behaviour. That is, if an entry is referenced
then its corresponding dual entry will automatically be selected as
well. So there is less need for \cs{glsadd} with \gls{bib2gls}.
(Although it can still be useful, as shown in \opt6.)
\end{bib2gls}
\end{example}

\chapter{Cross-Referencing Entries}
\label{sec:crossref}

\begin{important}
You must use \ics{makeglossaries} (\optsor23) or
\ics{makenoidxglossaries} (\opt1) \emph{before} defining any
terms that cross-reference entries. If any of the terms that you have
cross-referenced don't appear in the glossary, check that you have
put \cs{makeglossaries}\slash\cs{makenoidxglossaries} before all 
entry definitions. The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides
better cross-reference handling.
\end{important}

There are several ways of cross-referencing entries in the 
glossary: 

\begin{enumerate}
\item You can use commands such as \ics{gls} in the
entries description. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{apple}{name=apple,
description={firm, round fruit. See also \gls{pear}}}
\end{verbatim}
Note that with this method, if you don't use the cross-referenced term 
in the main part of the document, you will need two runs of
\gls{makeglossaries}:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex filename
makeglossaries filename
pdflatex filename
makeglossaries filename
pdflatex filename
\end{prompt}
This is because the \cs{gls} in the description won't be detected
until the glossary has been created (unless the description is used
elsewhere in the document with \ics{glsentrydesc}). Take care not to
use \ics{glsdesc} (or \ics{Glsdesc}) in this case as it will cause a
nested link.

\item As described in \sectionref{sec:newglosentry}, you can use the
\gloskey{see} key when you define the entry. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{MaclaurinSeries}{name={Maclaurin 
series},
description={Series expansion},
see={TaylorsTheorem}}
\end{verbatim}
Note that in this case, the entry with the \gloskey{see} key will
automatically be added to the glossary, but the cross-referenced
entry won't. You therefore need to ensure that you use the
cross-referenced term with the commands described in
\sectionref{sec:glslink} or \sectionref{sec:glsadd}.

The \qt{see} tag is produce using \ics{seename}, but can be
overridden in specific instances using square brackets
at the start of the \gloskey{see} value. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{MaclaurinSeries}{name={Maclaurin 
series},
description={Series expansion},
see=[see also]{TaylorsTheorem}}
\end{verbatim}
Take care if you want to use the optional argument of commands such
as \ics{newacronym} or \ics{newterm} as the value will need to be
grouped. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newterm{seal}
\newterm[see={[see also]seal}]{sea lion}
\end{verbatim}
Similarly if the value contains a list. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\glossaryentry{lemon}{
  name={lemon},
  description={Yellow citrus fruit}
}
\glossaryentry{lime}
{
  name={lime},
  description={Green citrus fruit}
}
\glossaryentry{citrus}
{
  name={citrus},
  description={Plant in the Rutaceae family},
  see={lemon,lime}
}
\end{verbatim}

\item After you have defined the entry, use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glssee}]
\cs{glssee}\oarg{tag}\marg{label}\marg{xr label list}
\end{definition}
where \meta{xr label list} is a comma-separated list of entry 
labels to be cross-referenced, \meta{label} is the label of the
entry doing the cross-referencing and \meta{tag} is the \qt{see} tag.
(The default value of \meta{tag} is \ics{seename}.)
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\glssee[see also]{series}{FourierSeries,TaylorsTheorem}
\end{verbatim}
Note that this automatically adds the entry given by \meta{label} to
the glossary but doesn't add the cross-referenced entries (specified
by \meta{xr label list}) to the glossary.
\end{enumerate}

In both cases~2 and 3 above, the cross-referenced information
appears in the \gls{numberlist}, whereas in case~1, the
cross-referenced information appears in the description. (See the
\samplefile{-crossref} example file that comes with this package.)
This means that in cases~2 and~3, the cross-referencing information
won't appear if you have suppressed the \gls*{numberlist}. In this
case, you will need to activate the \gls*{numberlist} for the given
entries using \gloskey{nonumberlist=false}. Alternatively, if you
just use the \gloskey{see} key instead of \ics{glssee}, you can
automatically activate the \gls*{numberlist} using the
\pkgopt{seeautonumberlist} package option.

\begin{bib2gls}
\gls{bib2gls} provides much better support for cross-references.
See, for example, 
\gallery{index.php?label=bib2gls-xr}{Gallery: Cross-References (bib2gls)}.
\end{bib2gls}

\section{Customising Cross-reference Text}
\label{sec:customxr}

When you use either the \gloskey{see} key or the command
\cs{glssee}, the cross-referencing information will be typeset in the 
glossary according to:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsseeformat}]
\cs{glsseeformat}\oarg{tag}\marg{label-list}\marg{location}
\end{definition}
The default definition of \cs{glsseeformat} is:
\begin{display}
\cs{emph}\marg{tag} \cs{glsseelist}\marg{label-list}
\end{display}
Note that the location is always ignored.\footnote{\gls{makeindex}
will always assign a location number, even if it's not needed, so it
needs to be discarded.} For example, if you want the tag to appear
in bold, you can do:\footnote{If you redefine \cs{glsseeformat},
keep the default value of the optional argument as \ics{seename} as
both \gloskey{see} and \cs{glssee} explicitly write
\texttt[\cs{seename}\texttt] in the output file if no optional
argument is given.}
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glsseeformat}[3][\seename]{\textbf{#1} 
 \glsseelist{#2}}
\end{verbatim}


The list of labels is dealt with by \cs{glsseelist}, which iterates
through the list and typesets each entry in the label. The entries
are separated by
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsseesep}]
\cs{glsseesep}
\end{definition}
or (for the last pair)
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsseelastsep}]
\cs{glsseelastsep}
\end{definition}
These default to ``",\space"'' and
\qt{\cs{space}\ics{andname}\cs{space}} respectively. The list entry text
is displayed using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsseeitemformat}]
\cs{glsseeitemformat}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This defaults to \ics{glsentrytext}\marg{label}.\footnote{In
versions before 3.0, \cs{glsentryname} was used, but this could cause
problems when the \gloskey{name} key was \glsd{sanitize}.} For example, to
make the cross-referenced list use small caps:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glsseeitemformat}[1]{%
  \textsc{\glsentrytext{#1}}}
\end{verbatim}
\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package redefines \cs{glsseeitemformat}
and additionally provides \ics*{glsxtrhiername} which can be used
as an alternative to \cs{glsentrytext}. See the
\gls{glossaries-extra} manual for further details.
\end{xtr}

\begin{important}
You can use \ics{glsseeformat} and \ics{glsseelist} in the main body
of the text, but they won't automatically add the cross-referenced
entries to the glossary. If you want them added with that location,
you can do:
\begin{verbatim}
Some information (see also 
\glsseelist{FourierSeries,TaylorsTheorem}%
\glsadd{FourierSeries}\glsadd{TaylorsTheorem}).
\end{verbatim}
\end{important}

\chapter{Number Lists}
\label{sec:numberlists}

Each entry in the glossary has an associated \gls{numberlist}.
By default, these numbers refer to the pages on which that entry has
been indexed (using any of the commands described in
\sectionref{sec:glslink} and \sectionref{sec:glsadd}). The number
list can be suppressed using the \pkgopt{nonumberlist} package
option, or an alternative counter can be set as the default using
the \pkgopt{counter} package option. The number list is also
referred to as the location list\index{location list|see{number list}}.

\Glspl{numberlist} are more common with indexes rather than
glossaries (although you can use the \styfmt{glossaries} package for
indexes as well). However, the \styfmt{glossaries} package makes use
of \gls{makeindex} or \gls{xindy} to hierarchically sort and collate the
entries since they are readily available with most modern \TeX\
distributions. Since these are both designed as \glspl{indexingapp}
they both require that terms either have a valid location or a
cross-reference. Even if you use \pkgopt{nonumberlist}, the
locations must still be provided and acceptable to the
\gls{indexingapp} or they will cause an error during the indexing
stage, which will interrupt the document build. However, if you're
not interested in the locations, each entry only needs to be indexed
once, so consider using \pkgopt{indexonlyfirst}, which can improve the
document build time by only indexing the \gls{firstuse} of each term.

The \ics{glsaddall} command (see \sectionref{sec:glsadd}), which is used to
automatically index all entries, iterates over all defined entries
and does \cs{glsadd}\marg{label} for each entry (where \meta{label}
is that entry's label). This means that \cs{glsaddall} automatically
adds the same location to every entry's \gls{numberlist}, which
looks weird if the \gls*{numberlist} hasn't been suppressed.

With \opt4, the indexing is performed by \gls{bib2gls}, which was
specifically designed for the \gls{glossaries-extra} package. So it
will allow any location format, and its \texttt{selection=all}
option will select all entries without adding an unwanted location to the
\gls{numberlist}. If \gls{bib2gls} can deduce a numerical value for
a location, it will attempt to form a range over consecutive
locations, otherwise it won't try to form a range and the
location will just form an individual item in the list.
\opt1 also allows any location but it doesn't form ranges.

\section{Encap Values (Location Formats)}
\label{sec:encap}

Each location in the \gls{numberlist} is encapsulated with a
command formed from the \termdef{encap} value.  By
default this is the \ics{glsnumberformat} command, which corresponds
to the encap \texttt{glsnumberformat}, but this may be
overridden using the \gloskey[glslink]{format} key in the optional
argument to commands like \cs{gls}. (See \sectionref{sec:glslink}.)
For example, you may want the location to appear in bold to indicate
the principle use of a term or symbol. If the encap starts with an
open parenthesis~\verb|(| this signifies the start of a range and if
the encap starts with close parenthesis~\verb|)| this signifies the
end of a range. These must always occur in matching pairs.

The \styfmt{glossaries} package provides the command:
\begin{definition}[\glsignore]
\cs{glsignore}\marg{text}
\end{definition}
which ignores its argument. This is the format used by
\cs{glsaddallunused} to suppress the location, which works fine as
long as no other locations are added to the \gls{numberlist}. For
example, if you use \verb|\gls{sample}| on page~2 then reset the
\gls{firstuseflag} and then use \cs{glsaddallunused} on page~10, the
\gls{numberlist} for \texttt{sample} will be \verb|2, \glsignore{10}| 
which will result in \qt{2,~} which has a spurious comma.

This isn't a problem with \gls{bib2gls} because you would need to use
\texttt{selection=all} instead of \cs{glsaddallunused}, but even if
you explicitly had used \texttt{glsignore}, for example, 
\cs{gls}\texttt{[format=glsignore]}\marg{label}, then \gls{bib2gls} 
will recognise \texttt{glsignore} as
a special encap indicating an ignored location, so it will select
the entry but not add that location to the \gls{numberlist}. It's a
problem for all the other indexing options.

Complications can arise if you use different encap values for the
same location. For example, suppose on page~10 you have both the
default \texttt{glsnumberformat} and \texttt{textbf} encaps.  While it may
seem apparent that \texttt{textbf} should override \texttt{glsnumberformat}
in this situation, the \gls{indexingapp} may not know it.
This is therefore something you need to be careful about if you use the
\gloskey[glslink]{format} key or if you use a command that
implicitly sets it.

In the case of \gls{xindy}, it only accepts one encap (according to
the order of precedence given in the \gls{xindy} module) and discards the
others for identical locations (for the same entry). This can cause
a problem if a discarded location forms the start or end of a range. 

In the case of \gls{makeindex}, it accepts different encaps for the
same location, but warns about it.  This leads to a \gls{numberlist}
with the same location repeated in different formats.  If you use
the \gls{makeglossaries} Perl script with \opt2 it will detect
\gls{makeindex}'s warning and attempt to fix the problem, ensuring
that the \texttt{glsnumberformat} encap always has the least precedence
unless it includes a range identifier. Other conflicting encaps will
have the last one override earlier ones for the same location with
range identifiers taking priority.

No discard occurs with \opt1 so again you get the same location
repeated in different formats. With \opt4, \gls{bib2gls} will discard
according to order of precedence, giving priority to start and end
range encaps.  (See the \gls{bib2gls} manual for further details.)

\section{Locations}
\label{sec:locationsyntax}

Neither \opt1 nor \opt4 care about the location syntax as long as
it's valid \LaTeX\ code (and doesn't contain fragile commands). In
both cases, the indexing is performed by writing a line to the
\filetype{aux} file. The write operation is deferred to avoid the
problems associated with \TeX's asynchronous output routine.
(See, for example,
\href{https://texfaq.org/FAQ-oddpage}{Finding
if you're on an odd or an even page} for more details on this issue.)
Unfortunately \optsand23 are far more problematic and need some
complex code to deal with awkward locations.

If you know that your locations will always expand to a format
acceptable to your chosen \gls{indexingapp} then use the package
option \pkgopt[false]{esclocations} to bypass this operation. This setting
only affects \optsand23 as the problem doesn't arise with the other
indexing options.

Both \gls{makeindex} and \gls{xindy} are fussy about the syntax of
the locations. In the case of \gls{makeindex}, only the numbering
system obtained with \cs{arabic}, \cs{roman}, \cs{Roman}, \cs{alph}
and \cs{Alph} or composites formed from them with the same separator
(set with \cs{glsSetCompositor}\marg{char}) are accepted.
(\gls{makeindex} won't accept an empty location.) In the case of
\gls{xindy}, you can define your own location classes, but if the
location contains a robust command then the leading backslash must
be escaped. The \sty{glossaries} package tries to do this, but it's
caught between two conflicting requirements:
\begin{enumerate}
\item The location must be fully expanded before \verb|\| can be
converted to \verb|\\| (there's no point converting \verb|\thepage|
to \verb|\\thepage|);
\item The page number can't be expanded until the deferred write
operation (so \verb|\c@page| mustn't expand in the previous step
but \verb|\the\c@page| mustn't be converted to \verb|\\the\\c@page| 
and \verb|\number\c@page| mustn't be converted to
\verb|\\number\\c@page| etc).
\end{enumerate}
There's a certain amount of trickery needed to deal with this
conflict and the code requires the location to be in a form that
doesn't embed the counter's internal register in commands like
\cs{value}.  For example, suppose you have a robust command called
\cs{tallynum} that takes a number as the argument and an expandable
command called \cs{tally} that converts a counter name into the
associated register or number to pass to \cs{tallynum}. Let's
suppose that this command is used to represent the page number:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\thepage}{\tally{page}}
\end{verbatim}
Now let's suppose that a term is indexed at the beginning of page~2
at the end of a paragraph that started on page~1. With \gls{xindy},
the location \verb|\tally{page}| needs to be written to the file
as \verb|\\tallynum{2}|. If it's written as \verb|\tallynum{2}| then
\gls{xindy} will interpret \verb|\t| as the character \qt{t}
(which means the location would appear as \qt{tallynum2}). So
\sty{glossaries} tries to expand \cs{thepage} without expanding
\cs{c@page} and then escapes all the backslashes, except for the
page counter's internal command. The following definitions of
\cs{tally} will work:
\begin{itemize}
\item In the following, \cs{arabic} works as its internal command \cs{c@arabic} is
temporarily redefined to check for \cs{c@page}:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\tally}[1]{\tallynum{\arabic{#1}}}
\end{verbatim}

\item The form \verb|\expandafter\the\csname c@|\meta{counter}\verb|\endcsname|
also works (provided \cs{the} is allowed to be temporarily redefined, 
see below):
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\tally}[1]{%
 \tallynum{\expandafter\the\csname c@#1\endcsname}}
\end{verbatim}

\item \verb|\expandafter\the\value|\marg{counter} now also works
(with the same condition as above):
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\tally}[1]{\tallynum{\expandafter\the\value{#1}}}
\end{verbatim}

\item Another variation that will work:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\tally}[1]{%
  \expandafter\tallynum\expandafter{\the\csname c@#1\endcsname}}
\end{verbatim}

\item and also:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\tally}[1]{\tallynum{\the\csname c@#1\endcsname}}
\end{verbatim}
\end{itemize}
The following \emph{don't work}:
\begin{itemize}
\item This definition leads to the premature expansion of \cs{c@page}
to \qt{1} when, in this case, it should be \qt{2}:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\tally}[1]{\tallynum{\the\value{#1}}}
\end{verbatim}
\item This definition leads to \verb|\\c@page| in the glossary file:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\tally}[1]{\tallynum{\csname c@#1\endcsname}}
\end{verbatim}
\end{itemize}
If you have a numbering system where 
\verb|\|\meta{cs name}\verb|{page}| expands to
\verb|\|\meta{internal cs name}\cs{c@page} (for example, if
\verb|\tally{page}| expands to \verb|\tallynum\c@page|) then you
need to use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsaddprotectedpagefmt]
\cs{glsaddprotectedpagefmt}\marg{internal cs name}
\end{definition}
Note that the backslash must be omitted from \meta{internal cs name}
and the corresponding command must be able to process a count
register as the (sole) argument.

For example, suppose you have a style \texttt{samplenum} that is
implemented as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
 \newcommand*{\samplenum}[1]{%
   \expandafter\@samplenum\csname c@#1\endcsname}
 \newcommand*{\@samplenum}[1]{\two@digits{#1}}

\end{verbatim}
(That is, it displays the value of the counter as a two-digit
number.) Then to ensure the location is correct for entries in 
page-spanning paragraphs, you need to do:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsaddprotectedpagefmt{@samplenum}
\end{verbatim}
(If you are using a different counter for the location, such as
\texttt{section} or \texttt{equation}, you don't need to worry about
this provided the inner command is expandable.)

If the inner macro (as given by \verb|\|\meta{internal cs name}) contains
non-expandable commands then you may need to redefine
\cs{gls}\meta{internal cs name}\texttt{page} after using
\begin{alltt}
\cs{glsaddprotectedpagefmt}\marg{internal cs name}
\end{alltt}
This command doesn't take any arguments
as \emph{the location is assumed to be given by \cs{c@page}} because
that's the only occasion this command should be used. For example, 
suppose now my page counter format uses small caps Roman numerals:
\begin{verbatim}
 \newcommand*{\samplenum}[1]{%
  \expandafter\@samplenum\csname c@#1\endcsname}
 \newcommand*{\@samplenum}[1]{\textsc{\romannumeral#1}}
\end{verbatim}
Again, the inner macro needs to be identified using:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsaddprotectedpagefmt{@samplenum}
\end{verbatim}
However, since \cs{textsc} isn't fully expandable, the location
is written to the file as \verb|\textsc  {i}| (for page~1), 
\verb|\textsc  {ii}| (for page~2), etc. This format may cause a problem for
the \gls{indexingapp} (particularly for \gls{makeindex}).
To compensate for this, the \cs{gls}\meta{internal cs
name}\texttt{page} command may be redefined so that it expands to a
format that's acceptable to the \gls*{indexingapp}. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\gls@samplenumpage}{\romannumeral\c@page}
\end{verbatim}
While this modification means that the \gls{numberlist} in the glossary
won't exactly match the format of the page numbers (displaying
lower case Roman numbers instead of small cap Roman numerals)
this method will at least work correctly for both \gls{makeindex}
and \gls{xindy}. If you are using \gls{xindy}, the following
definition:
\begin{verbatim}
 \renewcommand*{\gls@samplenumpage}{%
   \glsbackslash\string\textsc{\romannumeral\c@page}}
\end{verbatim}
combined with
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyLocation{romansc}{:sep "\string\textsc\glsopenbrace"
 "roman-numbers-lowercase" :sep "\glsclosebrace"}
\end{verbatim}
will now have lowercase Roman numerals in the location list
(see \sectionref{sec:xindyloc} for further details on that command).
Take care of the backslashes. The location (which ends up in 
the \xindyattr{:locref} attribute) needs \verb|\\| but the location class
(identified with \cs{GlsAddXdyLocation}) just has a single
backslash.  Note that this example will cause problems if your
locations should be hyperlinks.

Another possibility that may work with both \gls{makeindex} and
\gls{xindy} is to redefine \cs{gls}\meta{internal cs
name}\texttt{page} (\cs{gls@samplenumpage} in this example)
to just expand to the decimal page number (\verb|\number\c@page|) and redefine
\ics{glsnumberformat} to change the displayed format:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\gls@samplenumpage}{\number\c@page}
\renewcommand*{\glsnumberformat}[1]{\textsc{\romannumeral#1}}
\end{verbatim}

\begin{important}
If you redefine \cs{gls}\meta{internal cs name}\texttt{page},
you must make sure that \cs{c@page} is expanded when it's written to
the file. (So don't, for example, hide \cs{c@page} inside a robust
command.)
\end{important}

The mechanism that allows this to work temporarily redefines
\ics{the} and \ics{number} while it processes the location. If this
causes a problem you can disallow it using
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glswrallowprimitivemodsfalse]
\cs{glswrallowprimitivemodsfalse}
\end{definition}
but you will need to find some other way to ensure the location expands
correctly.

\section{Range Formations}
\label{sec:ranges}

Both \gls{makeindex} and \gls{xindy} (\optsand23) concatenate a
sequence of~3 or more consecutive pages into~a range. With 
\gls*{xindy} (\opt3) you can vary the minimum sequence length using
\ics{GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength}\marg{n} where \meta{n} is either
an integer or the keyword \texttt{none} which indicates that there
should be no range formation (see \sectionref{sec:xindyloc} for
further details).

\begin{important}
Note that \cs{GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength} must be used before
\ics{makeglossaries} and has no effect if \ics{noist} is used.
\end{important}

With both \gls{makeindex} and \gls{xindy} (\optsand23), you can replace
the separator and the closing number in the range using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsSetSuffixF}]
\cs{glsSetSuffixF}\marg{suffix}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsSetSuffixFF}]
\cs{glsSetSuffixFF}\marg{suffix}
\end{definition}
where the former command specifies the suffix to use for a 2 page
list and the latter specifies the suffix to use for longer lists.
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsSetSuffixF{f.}
\glsSetSuffixFF{ff.}
\end{verbatim}
Note that if you use \gls{xindy} (\opt3), you will also need to
set the minimum range length to 1 if you want to change these
suffixes:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength{1}
\end{verbatim}
Note that if you use the \sty{hyperref} package, you will need
to use \ics{nohyperpage} in the suffix to ensure that the hyperlinks
work correctly. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsSetSuffixF{\nohyperpage{f.}}
\glsSetSuffixFF{\nohyperpage{ff.}}
\end{verbatim}

\begin{important}
Note that \cs{glsSetSuffixF} and \cs{glsSetSuffixFF} must be used 
before \ics{makeglossaries} and have no effect if \ics{noist} is 
used.
\end{important}

It's also possible to concatenate a sequence of consecutive
locations into a range or have suffixes with \opt4, but with
\gls{bib2gls} these implicit ranges can't be merged with explicit
ranges (created with the \verb|(| and \verb|)| encaps). See
the \gls{bib2gls} manual for further details.

\opt1 doesn't form ranges. However, with this option you
can iterate over an entry's \gls{numberlist} using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsnumberlistloop]
\cs{glsnumberlistloop}\marg{label}\marg{handler cs}\marg{xr handler
cs}
\end{definition}
where \meta{label} is the entry's label and \meta{handler cs} is a
handler control sequence of the form:
\begin{definition}
\meta{handler cs}\marg{prefix}\marg{counter}\marg{format}\marg{location}
\end{definition}
where \meta{prefix} is the \sty{hyperref} prefix, \meta{counter} is
the name of the counter used for the location, \meta{format} is the
format used to display the location (e.g.\ \texttt{textbf})
and \meta{location} is the location. The third argument is the
control sequence to use for any cross-references in the list. This
handler should have the syntax:
\begin{definition}
\meta{xr handler cs}\oarg{tag}\marg{xr list}
\end{definition}
where \meta{tag} is the cross-referenced text (e.g.\ \qt{see}) and
\meta{xr list} is a~comma-separated list of labels. (This actually
has a third argument but it's always empty when used with \opt1.)

For example, if on page~12
I~have used
\begin{verbatim}
\gls[format=textbf]{apple}
\end{verbatim}
and on page~18 I~have used
\begin{verbatim}
\gls[format=emph]{apple}
\end{verbatim}
then
\begin{verbatim}
\glsnumberlistloop{apple}{\myhandler}
\end{verbatim}
will be equivalent to:
\begin{verbatim}
\myhandler{}{page}{textbf}{12}%
\myhandler{}{page}{emph}{18}%
\end{verbatim}
There is a predefined handler that's used to display the
\gls{numberlist} in the glossary:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsnoidxdisplayloc]
\cs{glsnoidxdisplayloc}\marg{prefix}\marg{counter}\marg{format}\marg{location}
\end{definition}
The predefined handler used for the cross-references in the glossary is:
\begin{definition}
\cs{glsseeformat}\oarg{tag}\marg{xr list}\marg{location}
\end{definition}
which is described in \sectionref{sec:customxr}.

\begin{important}
\cs{glsnumberlistloop} is not available for \optsand23.
\end{important}

\section{Style Hook}
\label{sec:isthook}

As from version 4.24, there's a hook that's used near the end of
\ics{writeist} before the file is closed. You can set the code 
to be performed then using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\GlsSetWriteIstHook]
\cs{GlsSetWriteIstHook}\marg{code}
\end{definition}
If you want the \meta{code} to write any information to the 
file, you need to use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glswrite]
\cs{write}\cs{glswrite}\marg{style information}
\end{definition}
Make sure you use the correct format within \meta{style
information}. For example, if you are using \app{makeindex}:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsSetWriteIstHook{%
 \write\glswrite{page_precedence "arnAR"}%
 \write\glswrite{line_max 80}%
}
\end{verbatim}
This changes the page type precedence\index{page type precedence|main} and the maximum line length
used by \app{makeindex}.

Remember that if you switch to \app{xindy}, this will no longer be
valid code.

\chapter{Glossary Styles}
\label{sec:styles}

Glossaries vary from lists that simply contain a symbol with a terse
description to lists of terms or phrases with lengthy descriptions.
Some glossaries may have terms with associated symbols. Some may
have hierarchical entries.  There is therefore no single style that
fits every type of glossary. The \styfmt{glossaries} package comes
with a number of pre-defined glossary styles, described in
\sectionref{sec:predefinedstyles}. You can choose one of these that
best suits your type of glossary or, if none of them suit your
document, you can defined your own style (see
\sectionref{sec:newglossarystyle}). There are some examples
of glossary styles available at the \gallerytopic{glossaries}.

The glossary style can be set using the \gloskey[printglossary]{style} key in the optional
argument to \ics{printnoidxglossary} (\opt1) or \ics{printglossary}
(\optsand23) or using the command:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\setglossarystyle}]
\cs{setglossarystyle}\marg{style-name}
\end{definition}
(before the glossary is displayed).

Some of the predefined glossary styles may also be set using the \pkgopt{style} 
package option, it depends if the package in which they are defined
is automatically loaded by the \styfmt{glossaries} package.

You can use the lorum ipsum dummy entries provided in the
accompanying
\texttt{example\dhyphen glossaries\dhyphen *.tex} files (described in
\sectionref{sec:lipsum}) to test the different styles.

\begin{xtr}
The \sty{glossaries-extra-stylemods} package provided with
\gls{glossaries-extra} patches the predefined styles. There also
more styles available with \gls{glossaries-extra}.
\end{xtr}

\section{Predefined Styles}
\label{sec:predefinedstyles}

The predefined styles can
accommodate numbered level~0 (main) and level~1 entries. See the
package options \pkgopt{entrycounter}, \pkgopt{counterwithin} and
\pkgopt{subentrycounter} described in
\sectionref{sec:pkgopts-printglos}. There is a summary
of available styles in \tableref{tab:styles}. 
You can view samples of all the predefined styles at
\galleryurl{glossaries-styles/}.
Note that \gls{glossaries-extra} provides additional styles
in the supplementary packages \sty{glossary-bookindex},
\sty{glossary-topic} and \sty{glossary-longextra}. See the
\gls{glossaries-extra} manual for further details.

\begin{important}
Note that the group styles (such as \glostyle{listgroup}) will
have unexpected results if used with the \pkgopt[def]{sort}
or \pkgopt[use]{sort} options. If you don't sort your entries
alphabetically, it's best to set the \pkgopt{nogroupskip}
package option to prevent odd vertical gaps appearing.
\end{important}

The group title is obtained using \cs{glsgetgrouptitle}\marg{label},
which is described in \sectionref{sec:newglossarystyle}.

\begin{table}[htbp]
\caption[Glossary Styles]{Glossary Styles. An asterisk in the style 
name indicates anything that matches that doesn't match any
previously listed style (e.g.\ \texttt{long3col*}
matches \glostyle{long3col}, \glostyle{long3colheader}, 
\glostyle{long3colborder} and \glostyle{long3colheaderborder}).
A maximum level of 0 indicates a flat glossary (sub-entries
are displayed in the same way as main entries). Where the maximum
level is given as --- there is no limit, but note that 
\gls{makeindex} (\opt2) imposes a limit of 2 sub-levels. If the
homograph column is checked, then the name is not displayed for
sub-entries. If the symbol column is checked, then the symbol will
be displayed.}
\label{tab:styles}
\vskip\baselineskip
\centering
\begin{tabular}{lccc}
\bfseries Style & \bfseries Maximum Level &
\bfseries Homograph & \bfseries Symbol\\
\ttfamily listdotted & 0 & & \\
\ttfamily sublistdotted & 1 & & \\
\ttfamily list* & 1 & \tick & \\
\ttfamily altlist* & 1 & \tick & \\
\ttfamily long*3col* & 1 & \tick & \\
\ttfamily long4col* & 1 & \tick & \tick \\
\ttfamily altlong*4col* & 1 & \tick & \tick \\
\ttfamily long* & 1 & \tick & \\
\ttfamily super*3col* & 1 & \tick & \\
\ttfamily super4col* & 1 & \tick & \tick \\
\ttfamily altsuper*4col* & 1 & \tick & \tick \\
\ttfamily super* & 1 & \tick & \\
\ttfamily *index* & 2 & & \tick\\
\ttfamily treenoname* & --- & \tick & \tick\\
\ttfamily *alttree* & --- & & \tick\\
\ttfamily *tree* & --- & & \tick\\
\ttfamily inline & 1 & \tick &  
\end{tabular}
\par
\end{table}

The tabular-like styles that allow multi-line descriptions and page
lists use the length 
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsdescwidth}]
\cs{glsdescwidth}
\end{definition}
to set the width of the description column and the length
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glspagelistwidth}]
\cs{glspagelistwidth} 
\end{definition}
to set the width of the page list column.\footnote{These lengths will not be
available if you use both the \pkgopt{nolong} and \pkgopt{nosuper}
package options or if you use the \pkgopt{nostyles} package option
unless you explicitly load the relevant package.}
These will need to be changed using \cs{setlength} if the glossary
is too wide. Note that the \glostyle{long4col} and
\glostyle{super4col} styles (and their header and border variations)
don't use these lengths as they are designed for single line
entries. Instead you should use the analogous \glostyle{altlong4col}
and \glostyle{altsuper4col} styles.  If you want to
explicitly create a line-break within a multi-line description in
a tabular-like style it's better to use \ics{newline} instead of
\verb|\\|.

\begin{important}
Remember that a cell within a tabular-like environment can't
be broken across a page, so even if a tabular-like style, such as
\glostyle{long}, allows multilined descriptions, you'll probably encounter
page-breaking problems if you have entries with long descriptions.
You may want to consider using the \glostyle{alttree} style instead.
\end{important}

Note that if you use the \gloskey[printglossary]{style} key in the
optional argument to \ics{printnoidxglossary} (\opt1) or
\ics{printglossary} (\optsand23), it will override any 
previous style settings for the given glossary, so if, for example,
you do
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}
\printglossary[style=long]
\end{verbatim}
then the new definition of \ics{glsgroupskip} will not have an affect
for this glossary, as \cs{glsgroupskip} is redefined by 
\verb|style=long|. Likewise, \ics{setglossarystyle} will also
override any previous style definitions, so, again
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}
\setglossarystyle{long}
\end{verbatim}
will reset \cs{glsgroupskip} back to its default definition for the
named glossary style (\glostyle{long} in this case). If you want to 
modify the styles, either use \ics{newglossarystyle} (described
in the next section) or make the modifications after 
\ics{setglossarystyle}, e.g.:
\begin{verbatim}
\setglossarystyle{long}
\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}
\end{verbatim}
As from version 3.03, you can now use the package option
\pkgopt{nogroupskip} to suppress the gap between groups for the
default styles instead of redefining \cs{glsgroupskip}.

All the styles except for the three- and four-column styles and the
\glostyle{listdotted} style use the command
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glspostdescription}]
\cs{glspostdescription}
\end{definition}
after the description. This simply displays a full stop by default.
To eliminate this full stop (or replace it with something else, say,
a comma) you will need to redefine \cs{glspostdescription} before
the glossary is displayed. Alternatively, you can suppress it for a
given entry by placing \ics{nopostdesc} in the entry's description.
Note that \ics{longnewglossaryentry} puts \cs{nopostdesc} at the end
of the description. The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides a
starred version that doesn't.

As from version 3.03 you can now use the package option
\pkgopt{nopostdot} to suppress this full stop. This is the better
option if you want to use the \gls{glossaries-extra} package.
The \sty{glossaries-extra-stylemods} package provides some
adjustments some of to the predefined styles listed here, allowing
for greater flexibility. See the \gls{glossaries-extra}
documentation for further details.

\subsection{List Styles}
\label{sec:liststyles}

The styles described in this section are all defined in the package
\sty{glossary-list}. Since they all use the \env{description}
environment, they are governed by the same parameters as that
environment. These styles all ignore the entry's symbol.  Note that
these styles will automatically be available unless you use the
\pkgopt{nolist} or \pkgopt{nostyles} package options.

\begin{important}
Note that, except for the \glostyle{listdotted} style, these 
list styles are incompatible with \sty{classicthesis}. They
may also be incompatible with other classes or packages that
modify the \env{description} environment.
\end{important}

As from v4.48, there is an initialisation hook that provides a patch
if the \sty{gettitlestring} package is loaded, since this is used by
\sty{hyperref}.
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glslistinit]
\cs{glslistinit}
\end{definition}
This patch should ensure that the combination of \sty{hyperref} and
\pkgopt{entercounter} should correctly expand the entry name to the
\filetype{aux} file. The name is expanded using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glslistexpandedname]
\cs{glslistexpandedname}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This uses \ics{glsunexpandedfieldvalue}. If you need the name to
fully expand, you can redefine this. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\glslistexpandedname}[1]{\glsentryname{#1}}
\end{verbatim}

\begin{description}
\item[list] The \glostyle{list} style uses the \env{description}
environment. The entry name is placed in the optional argument of
the \ics{item} command (so it will usually appear in bold by default). The
description follows, and then the associated \gls{numberlist} for 
that entry. The symbol is ignored.  If the entry has child entries,
the description and number list follows (but not the name) for each
child entry.  Groups are separated using \ics{indexspace}.

The closest matching non-list style is the \glostyle{index} style.

\item[listgroup] The \glostyle{listgroup} style is like 
\glostyle{list} but the glossary groups have headings
obtained using \cs{glsgetgrouptitle}\marg{label},
which is described in \sectionref{sec:newglossarystyle}.

\item[listhypergroup] The \glostyle{listhypergroup} style is like
\glostyle{listgroup} but has a navigation line at the start of the
glossary with links to each group that is present in the glossary.
This requires an additional run through \LaTeX\ to ensure the group
information is up to date. In the navigation line, each group is
separated by
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glshypernavsep}]
\cs{glshypernavsep}
\end{definition}
which defaults to a vertical bar with a space on either side. For
example, to simply have a space separating each group, do:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glshypernavsep}{\space}
\end{verbatim}

Note that the hyper-navigation line is now (as from version 1.14) 
set inside the optional argument to \ics{item} instead of after it
to prevent a spurious space at the start. This can cause a problem
if the navigation line is too long.
As from v4.22, if you need to adjust this, you can redefine
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glslistnavigationitem]
\cs{glslistnavigationitem}\marg{navigation line}
\end{definition}
The default definition is \cs{item}\oarg{navigation line} but may
be redefined independently of setting the style. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glslistnavigationitem}[1]{\item \textbf{#1}}
\end{verbatim}

You may prefer to use the tree-like styles, such as
\glostyle{treehypergroup} instead.

\item[altlist] The \glostyle{altlist} style is like \glostyle{list}
but the description starts on the line following the name. (As
with the \glostyle{list} style, the symbol is ignored.) Each child
entry starts a new line, but as with the \glostyle{list} style,
the name associated with each child entry is ignored.

The closest matching non-list style is the \glostyle{index}
style with the following adjustment:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glstreepredesc}{%
 \glstreeitem\parindent\hangindent}
\end{verbatim}


\item[altlistgroup] The \glostyle{altlistgroup} style is like 
\glostyle{altlist} but the glossary groups have headings.

\item[altlisthypergroup] The \glostyle{altlisthypergroup} style is like 
\glostyle{altlistgroup} but has a set of links to the glossary 
groups. The navigation line is the same as that for 
\glostyle{listhypergroup}, described above.

\item[listdotted] This style uses the \env{description}
environment.\footnote{This style was supplied by Axel~Menzel.} Each
entry starts with \verb|\item[]|, followed by the name followed by a
dotted line, followed by the description. Note that this style
ignores both the \gls{numberlist} and the symbol. The length
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glslistdottedwidth}]
\cs{glslistdottedwidth}
\end{definition}
governs where the description should start. This is a flat style, so
child entries are formatted in the same way as the parent entries.

A non-list alternative is to use the \glostyle{index} style
with
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glstreepredesc}{\dotfill}
\renewcommand{\glstreechildpredesc}{\dotfill}
\end{verbatim}
Note that this doesn't use \cs{glslistdottedwidth} and causes
the description to be flush-right and will display the
symbol, if provided. (It also doesn't suppress
the \gls*{numberlist}, but that can be achieved with the
\pkgopt{nonumberlist} option.)

\item[sublistdotted] This is a variation on the \glostyle{listdotted}
style designed for hierarchical glossaries. The main entries
have just the name displayed. The sub entries are displayed in
the same manner as \glostyle{listdotted}. Unlike the
\glostyle{listdotted} style, this style is incompatible with
\sty{classicthesis}.
\end{description}


\subsection{Longtable Styles}
\label{sec:longstyles}

The styles described in this section are all defined in the package
\sty{glossary-long}. Since they all use the \env{longtable}
environment, they are governed by the same parameters as that
environment.  Note that these styles will automatically be available
unless you use the \pkgopt{nolong} or \pkgopt{nostyles} package
options.  These styles fully justify the description and page list
columns.  If you want ragged right formatting instead, use the
analogous styles described in \sectionref{sec:longraggedstyles}.
If you want to incorporate rules from the \sty{booktabs} package,
try the styles described in \sectionref{sec:longbooktabsstyles}.

\begin{description}
\item[long] The \glostyle{long} style uses the \env{longtable}
environment (defined by the \sty{longtable} package). It has two
columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second
column contains the description followed by the \gls{numberlist}.
The entry's symbol is ignored.
Sub groups are separated with a blank row. The width of the
first column is governed by the widest entry in that column. The
width of the second column is governed by the length
\ics{glsdescwidth}. Child entries have a similar format to the
parent entries except that their name is suppressed.

\item[longborder] The \glostyle{longborder} style is like
\glostyle{long} but has horizontal and vertical lines around it.

\item[longheader] The \glostyle{longheader} style is like
\glostyle{long} but has a header row.

\item[longheaderborder] The \glostyle{longheaderborder} style is
like \glostyle{longheader} but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.

\item[long3col] The \glostyle{long3col} style is like
\glostyle{long} but has three columns. The first column contains
the entry's name, the second column contains the description
and the third column contains the \gls{numberlist}.
The entry's symbol is ignored. The width of the
first column is governed by the widest entry in that column, the
width of the second column is governed by the length
\ics{glsdescwidth}, and the width of the third column is governed by the
length \ics{glspagelistwidth}.

\item[long3colborder] The \glostyle{long3colborder} style is like
the \glostyle{long3col} style but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.

\item[long3colheader] The \glostyle{long3colheader} style is like
\glostyle{long3col} but has a header row.

\item[long3colheaderborder] The \glostyle{long3colheaderborder} style is
like \glostyle{long3colheader} but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.

\item[long4col] The \glostyle{long4col} style is like 
\glostyle{long3col} but has an additional column in which the
entry's associated symbol appears. This style is used for brief
single line descriptions. The column widths are governed by the
widest entry in the given column. Use \glostyle{altlong4col} for 
multi-line descriptions.

\item[long4colborder] The \glostyle{long4colborder} style is like
the \glostyle{long4col} style but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.

\item[long4colheader] The \glostyle{long4colheader} style is like
\glostyle{long4col} but has a header row.

\item[long4colheaderborder] The \glostyle{long4colheaderborder} style is
like \glostyle{long4colheader} but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.

\item[altlong4col] The \glostyle{altlong4col} style is like
\glostyle{long4col} but allows multi-line descriptions and page
lists.  The width of the description column is governed by the
length \ics{glsdescwidth} and the width of the page list column is
governed by the length \ics{glspagelistwidth}. The widths of the
name and symbol columns are governed by the widest entry in the
given column.

\item[altlong4colborder] The \glostyle{altlong4colborder} style is like
the \glostyle{long4colborder} but allows multi-line descriptions and
page lists.

\item[altlong4colheader] The \glostyle{altlong4colheader} style is like
\glostyle{long4colheader} but allows multi-line descriptions and
page lists.

\item[altlong4colheaderborder] The \glostyle{altlong4colheaderborder} 
style is like \glostyle{long4colheaderborder} but allows multi-line
descriptions and page lists.
\end{description}


\subsection{Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)}
\label{sec:longraggedstyles}

The styles described in this section are all defined in the package
\sty{glossary-longragged}. These styles are analogous to those
defined in \sty{glossary-long} but the multiline columns are left
justified instead of fully justified. Since these styles all use the
\env{longtable} environment, they are governed by the same
parameters as that environment. The \sty{glossary-longragged}
package additionally requires the \sty{array} package.  Note that
these styles will only be available if you explicitly load
\sty{glossary-longragged}:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage{glossaries}
\usepackage{glossary-longragged}
\end{verbatim}
Note that you can't set these styles using the \pkgopt{style}
package option since the styles aren't defined until after
the \styfmt{glossaries} package has been loaded.
If you want to incorporate rules from the \sty{booktabs} package,
try the styles described in \sectionref{sec:longbooktabsstyles}.

\begin{description}
\item[longragged] The \glostyle{longragged} style has two
columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second
column contains the (left-justified) description followed by the 
\gls{numberlist}.  The entry's symbol is ignored.
Sub groups are separated with a blank row. The width of the
first column is governed by the widest entry in that column. The
width of the second column is governed by the length
\ics{glsdescwidth}. Child entries have a similar format to the
parent entries except that their name is suppressed.

\item[longraggedborder] The \glostyle{longraggedborder} style is like
\glostyle{longragged} but has horizontal and vertical lines around it.

\item[longraggedheader] The \glostyle{longraggedheader} style is like
\glostyle{longragged} but has a header row.

\item[longraggedheaderborder] The \glostyle{longraggedheaderborder} 
style is like \glostyle{longraggedheader} but has horizontal and 
vertical lines around it.

\item[longragged3col] The \glostyle{longragged3col} style is like
\glostyle{longragged} but has three columns. The first column
contains the entry's name, the second column contains the (left
justified) description and the third column contains the (left
justified) \gls{numberlist}.  The entry's symbol is ignored. The
width of the first column is governed by the widest entry in that
column, the width of the second column is governed by the length
\ics{glsdescwidth}, and the width of the third column is governed by
the length \ics{glspagelistwidth}.

\item[longragged3colborder] The \glostyle{longragged3colborder}
style is like the \glostyle{longragged3col} style but has horizontal
and vertical lines around it.

\item[longragged3colheader] The \glostyle{longragged3colheader} style is like
\glostyle{longragged3col} but has a header row.

\item[longragged3colheaderborder] The \glostyle{longragged3colheaderborder} style is
like \glostyle{longragged3colheader} but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.

\item[altlongragged4col] The \glostyle{altlongragged4col} style is
like \glostyle{longragged3col} but has an additional column in which
the entry's associated symbol appears. The width of the description
column is governed by the length \ics{glsdescwidth} and the width of
the page list column is governed by the length
\ics{glspagelistwidth}. The widths of the name and symbol columns
are governed by the widest entry in the given column.

\item[altlongragged4colborder] The
\glostyle{altlongragged4colborder} style is like the
\glostyle{altlongragged4col} but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.

\item[altlongragged4colheader] The
\glostyle{altlongragged4colheader} style is like
\glostyle{altlongragged4col} but has a header row.

\item[altlongragged4colheaderborder] The
\glostyle{altlongragged4colheaderborder} style is like
\glostyle{altlongragged4colheader} but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.

\end{description}

\subsection{Longtable Styles (\styfmt{booktabs})}
\label{sec:longbooktabsstyles}

The styles described in this section are all defined in the package
\sty{glossary-longbooktabs}.

Since these styles all use the
\env{longtable} environment, they are governed by the same
parameters as that environment. The \sty{glossary-longbooktabs}
package automatically loads the \sty{glossary-long}
(\sectionref{sec:longstyles})
and \sty{glossary-longragged} (\sectionref{sec:longraggedstyles}) packages.  Note that
these styles will only be available if you explicitly load
\sty{glossary-longbooktabs}:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage{glossaries}
\usepackage{glossary-longbooktabs}
\end{verbatim}
Note that you can't set these styles using the \pkgopt{style}
package option since the styles aren't defined until after
the \styfmt{glossaries} package has been loaded.

These styles are similar to the
\qt{header} styles in the \sty{glossary-long} and
\sty{glossary-ragged} packages, but they add the rules
provided by the \sty{booktabs} package, \ics{toprule}, \ics{midrule} and
\ics{bottomrule}. Additionally these styles patch the
\env{longtable} environment to check for instances of the group
skip occurring at a page break. If you don't want this patch to
affect any other use of \env{longtable} in your document, you can
scope the effect by only setting the style through the
\gloskey[printglossary]{style} key in the optional argument of
\cs{printglossary}. (The \pkgopt{nogroupskip} package option 
is checked by these styles.)

Alternatively, you can restore the original \env{longtable}
behaviour with:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsrestoreLToutput]
\cs{glsrestoreLToutput}
\end{definition}
For more information about the patch, see the documented code
(\texttt{glossaries-code.pdf}).

\begin{description}
\item[\glostyle{long-booktabs}] This style is similar to
the \glostyle{longheader} style but adds rules above and below the
header (\cs{toprule} and \cs{midrule}) and inserts a rule at the
bottom of the table (\cs{bottomrule}).

\item[\glostyle{long3col-booktabs}] This style is similar to
the \glostyle{long3colheader} style but adds rules as per
\glostyle{long-booktabs}.

\item[\glostyle{long4col-booktabs}] This style is similar to
the \glostyle{long4colheader} style but adds rules as above.

\item[\glostyle{altlong4col-booktabs}] This style is similar to
the \glostyle{altlong4colheader} style but adds rules as above.

\item[\glostyle{longragged-booktabs}] This style is similar to
the \glostyle{longraggedheader} style but adds rules as above.

\item[\glostyle{longragged3col-booktabs}] This style is similar to
the \glostyle{longragged3colheader} style but adds rules as above.

\item[\glostyle{altlongragged4col-booktabs}] This style is similar to
the \glostyle{altlongragged4colheader} style but adds rules as above.

\end{description}

\subsection{Supertabular Styles}
\label{sec:superstyles}

The styles described in this section are all defined in the package
\sty{glossary-super}. Since they all use the \env{supertabular}
environment, they are governed by the same parameters as that
environment.  Note that these styles will automatically be available
unless you use the \pkgopt{nosuper} or \pkgopt{nostyles} package
options.  In general, the \env{longtable} environment is better,
but there are some circumstances where it is better to use
\env{supertabular}.\footnote{e.g.\ with the \sty{flowfram}
package.} These styles fully justify the description and page list
columns.  If you want ragged right formatting instead, use the
analogous styles described in \sectionref{sec:superraggedstyles}.

\begin{description}
\item[super] The \glostyle{super} style uses the \env{supertabular}
environment (defined by the \sty{supertabular} package). It has two
columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second
column contains the description followed by the \gls{numberlist}.
The entry's symbol is ignored.
Sub groups are separated with a blank row. The width of the
first column is governed by the widest entry in that column. The
width of the second column is governed by the length
\ics{glsdescwidth}. Child entries have a similar format to the
parent entries except that their name is suppressed.

\item[superborder] The \glostyle{superborder} style is like
\glostyle{super} but has horizontal and vertical lines around it.

\item[superheader] The \glostyle{superheader} style is like
\glostyle{super} but has a header row.

\item[superheaderborder] The \glostyle{superheaderborder} style is
like \glostyle{superheader} but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.

\item[super3col] The \glostyle{super3col} style is like
\glostyle{super} but has three columns. The first column contains
the entry's name, the second column contains the description
and the third column contains the \gls{numberlist}. The
entry's symbol is ignored. The width of the
first column is governed by the widest entry in that column. The
width of the second column is governed by the length
\ics{glsdescwidth}. The width of the third column is governed by the
length \ics{glspagelistwidth}.

\item[super3colborder] The \glostyle{super3colborder} style is like
the \glostyle{super3col} style but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.

\item[super3colheader] The \glostyle{super3colheader} style is like
\glostyle{super3col} but has a header row.

\item[super3colheaderborder] The \glostyle{super3colheaderborder} style
is like the \glostyle{super3colheader} style but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.

\item[super4col] The \glostyle{super4col} style is like 
\glostyle{super3col} but has an additional column in which the
entry's associated symbol appears. This style is designed for
entries with brief single line descriptions. The column widths are governed by the
widest entry in the given column. Use \glostyle{altsuper4col}
for multi-line descriptions.

\item[super4colborder] The \glostyle{super4colborder} style is like
the \glostyle{super4col} style but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.

\item[super4colheader] The \glostyle{super4colheader} style is like
\glostyle{super4col} but has a header row.

\item[super4colheaderborder] The \glostyle{super4colheaderborder} style
is like the \glostyle{super4colheader} style but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.

\item[altsuper4col] The \glostyle{altsuper4col} style is like 
\glostyle{super4col} but allows multi-line descriptions and page
lists.
The width of the description column is governed by the length
\ics{glsdescwidth} and the width of the page list column is
governed by the length \ics{glspagelistwidth}. The width of the name 
and symbol columns is governed by the widest entry in the 
given column.

\item[altsuper4colborder] The \glostyle{altsuper4colborder} style is like
the \glostyle{super4colborder} style but allows multi-line descriptions
and page lists.

\item[altsuper4colheader] The \glostyle{altsuper4colheader} style is like
\glostyle{super4colheader} but allows multi-line descriptions and
page lists.

\item[altsuper4colheaderborder] The \glostyle{altsuper4colheaderborder}
style is like \glostyle{super4colheaderborder} but allows multi-line
descriptions and page lists.
\end{description}


\subsection{Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)}
\label{sec:superraggedstyles}

The styles described in this section are all defined in the package
\sty{glossary-superragged}. These styles are analogous to those
defined in \sty{glossary-super} but the multiline columns are left
justified instead of fully justified. Since these styles all use the
\env{supertabular} environment, they are governed by the same
parameters as that environment. The \sty{glossary-superragged}
package additionally requires the \sty{array} package.  Note that
these styles will only be available if you explicitly load
\sty{glossary-superragged}:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage{glossaries}
\usepackage{glossary-superragged}
\end{verbatim}
Note that you can't set these styles using the \pkgopt{style}
package option since the styles aren't defined until after
the \styfmt{glossaries} package has been loaded.

\begin{description}
\item[superragged] The \glostyle{superragged} style uses the
\env{supertabular} environment (defined by the
\sty{supertabular} package). It has two columns: the first column
contains the entry's name and the second column contains the (left
justified) description followed by the \gls{numberlist}.  The
entry's symbol is ignored.  Sub groups are separated with a blank
row. The width of the first column is governed by the widest entry
in that column. The width of the second column is governed by the
length \ics{glsdescwidth}. Child entries have a similar format to
the parent entries except that their name is suppressed.

\item[superraggedborder] The \glostyle{superraggedborder} style is
like \glostyle{superragged} but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.

\item[superraggedheader] The \glostyle{superraggedheader} style is
like \glostyle{superragged} but has a header row.

\item[superraggedheaderborder] The
\glostyle{superraggedheaderborder} style is like
\glostyle{superraggedheader} but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.

\item[superragged3col] The \glostyle{superragged3col} style is like
\glostyle{superragged} but has three columns. The first column
contains the entry's name, the second column contains the (left
justified) description and the third column contains the (left
justified) \gls{numberlist}. The entry's symbol is ignored. The
width of the first column is governed by the widest entry in that
column. The width of the second column is governed by the length
\ics{glsdescwidth}. The width of the third column is governed by the
length \ics{glspagelistwidth}.

\item[superragged3colborder] The \glostyle{superragged3colborder}
style is like the \glostyle{superragged3col} style but has
horizontal and vertical lines around it.

\item[superragged3colheader] The \glostyle{superragged3colheader}
style is like \glostyle{superragged3col} but has a header row.

\item[superragged3colheaderborder] The
\glostyle{superragged3colheaderborder} style is like
the above but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.

\item[altsuperragged4col] The \glostyle{altsuperragged4col} style is
like \glostyle{superragged3col} but has an additional column in
which the entry's associated symbol appears. The column widths for
the name and symbol column are governed by the widest entry in the
given column.

\item[altsuperragged4colborder] The
\glostyle{altsuperragged4colborder} style is like the
\glostyle{altsuperragged4col} style but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.

\item[altsuperragged4colheader] The
\glostyle{altsuperragged4colheader} style is like
\glostyle{altsuperragged4col} but has a header row.

\item[altsuperragged4colheaderborder] The
\glostyle{altsuperragged4colheaderborder} style is like
the above but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.

\end{description}

\subsection{Tree-Like Styles}
\label{sec:treestyles}

The styles described in this section are all defined in the package
\sty{glossary-tree}. These styles are designed for hierarchical
glossaries but can also be used with glossaries that don't have
sub-entries. These styles will display the entry's symbol if it
exists. Note that these styles will automatically be available
unless you use the \pkgopt{notree} or \pkgopt{nostyles} package
options. 

These styles all format the entry name using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glstreenamefmt]
\cs{glstreenamefmt}\marg{name}
\end{definition}
This defaults to \cs{textbf}\marg{name}, but note that \meta{name}
includes \ics{glsnamefont} so the bold setting in \cs{glstreenamefont}
may be counteracted by another font change in \cs{glsnamefont} (or
in \cs{acronymfont}). The tree-like styles that also display the
header use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glstreegroupheaderfmt]
\cs{glstreegroupheaderfmt}\marg{text}
\end{definition}
to format the heading. This defaults to
\cs{glstreenamefmt}\marg{text}. The tree-like styles that display
navigation links to the groups (such as \glostyle{indexhypergroup}), format
the navigation line using
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glstreenavigationfmt]
\cs{glstreenavigationfmt}\marg{text}
\end{definition}
which defaults to \cs{glstreenamefmt}\marg{text}. 

Note that this is
different from \cs{glslistnavigationitem}, provided with the styles
such as \glostyle{listhypergroup}, as that also includes \cs{item}.

With the exception of the \glostyle{alttree} style (and those
derived from it), the space before the description for top-level
entries is produced with
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glstreepredesc]
\cs{glstreepredesc}
\end{definition}
This defaults to \cs{space}.

With the exception of the \glostyle{treenoname} and
\glostyle{alttree} styles (and those derived from them), the 
space before the description for child
entries is produced with
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glstreechildpredesc]
\cs{glstreechildpredesc}
\end{definition}
This defaults to \cs{space}.

\begin{important}
Most of these styles are not designed for multi-paragraph 
descriptions. (The \glostyle{tree} style isn't too bad for
multi-paragraph top-level entry descriptions, or you can use the
\glostyle{index} style with the adjustment shown below.)
\end{important}

\begin{description}
\item[index] The \glostyle{index} style is similar to the way
indices are usually formatted in that it has a hierarchical
structure up to three levels (the main level plus two sub-levels).
The name is typeset in bold, and if the symbol is present it is set
in parentheses after the name and before the description.
Sub-entries are indented and also include the name, the symbol
in brackets (if present) and the description.  Groups are separated
using \ics{indexspace}.

Each main level item is started with
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glstreeitem]
\cs{glstreeitem}
\end{definition}
The level~1 entries are started with
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glstreesubitem]
\cs{glstreesubitem}
\end{definition}

The level~2 entries are started with
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glstreesubsubitem]
\cs{glstreesubsubitem}
\end{definition}

Note that the \glostyle{index} style automatically sets
\begin{verbatim}
\let\item\glstreeitem
\let\subitem\glstreesubitem
\let\subsubitem\glstreesubsubitem
\end{verbatim}
at the start of the glossary for backward compatibility.

The \glostyle{index} style isn't suitable for multi-paragraph
descriptions, but this limitation can be overcome by redefining
the above commands. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glstreeitem}{%
 \parindent0pt\par\hangindent40pt
 \everypar{\parindent50pt\hangindent40pt}}
\end{verbatim}

\item[indexgroup] The \glostyle{indexgroup} style is similar to
the \glostyle{index} style except that each group has a heading
obtained using \cs{glsgetgrouptitle}\marg{label},
which is described in \sectionref{sec:newglossarystyle}.

\item[indexhypergroup] The \glostyle{indexhypergroup} style is like 
\glostyle{indexgroup} but has a set of links to the glossary 
groups. The navigation line is the same as that for 
\glostyle{listhypergroup}, described above, but is formatted using
\cs{glstreenavigationfmt}.

\item[tree] The \glostyle{tree} style is similar to the
\glostyle{index} style except that it can have arbitrary levels.
(Note that \gls{makeindex} is limited to three levels, so
you will need to use \gls{xindy} if you want more than 
three levels.) Each sub-level is indented by 
\DescribeMacro{\glstreeindent}\cs{glstreeindent}. Note that the
name, symbol (if present) and description are placed in the
same paragraph block. If you want the name to be apart from the
description, use the \glostyle{alttree} style instead. (See below.)

\item[treegroup] The \glostyle{treegroup} style is similar to
the \glostyle{tree} style except that each group has a heading.

\item[treehypergroup] The \glostyle{treehypergroup} style is like 
\glostyle{treegroup} but has a set of links to the glossary 
groups. The navigation line is the same as that for 
\glostyle{listhypergroup}, described above, but is formatted using
\cs{glstreenavigationfmt}.

\item[treenoname] The \glostyle{treenoname} style is like
the \glostyle{tree} style except that the name for each sub-entry
is ignored.

\item[treenonamegroup] The \glostyle{treenonamegroup} style is 
similar to the \glostyle{treenoname} style except that each group 
has a heading.

\item[treenonamehypergroup] The \glostyle{treenonamehypergroup} 
style is like \glostyle{treenonamegroup} but has a set of links to 
the glossary groups. The navigation line is the same as that for 
\glostyle{listhypergroup}, described above, but is formatted using
\cs{glstreenavigationfmt}.

\item[alttree] The \glostyle{alttree} style is similar to the
\glostyle{tree} style except that the indentation for each level
is determined by the width of the text specified by
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glssetwidest}]
\cs{glssetwidest}\oarg{level}\marg{text}
\end{definition}
The optional argument \meta{level} indicates the level, where
0 indicates the top-most level, 1 indicates the first level 
sub-entries, etc. If \cs{glssetwidest} hasn't been used for a 
given sub-level, the level~0 widest text is used instead. If
\meta{level} is omitted, 0 is assumed.

As from v4.22, the \sty{glossary-tree} package also provides
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsfindwidesttoplevelname]
\cs{glsfindwidesttoplevelname}\oarg{glossary list}
\end{definition}
This iterates over all parentless entries in the given glossary
lists and determines the widest entry. If the optional argument is
omitted, all glossaries are assumed (as per \cs{forallglossaries}).

For example, to have the same name width for all glossaries:
\begin{verbatim}
\glsfindwidesttoplevelname
\setglossarystyle{alttree}
\printglossaries
\end{verbatim}
Alternatively, to compute the widest entry for each glossary
before it's displayed:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{%
  \glsfindwidesttoplevelname[\currentglossary]}
\setglossarystyle{alttree}
\printglossaries
\end{verbatim}

\begin{important}
These commands only affects the \glostyle{alttree} styles, including those 
listed below and the ones in the \sty{glossary-mcols} package.
If you forget to set the widest entry name, the description will
overwrite the name.
\end{important}

For each level, the name is placed to the left of the paragraph
block containing the symbol (optional) and the description. If the
symbol is present, it is placed in parentheses before the
description.

The name is placed inside a left-aligned \cs{makebox}. As from
v4.19, this can now be adjusted by redefining
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glstreenamebox]
\cs{glstreenamebox}\marg{width}\marg{text}
\end{definition}
where \meta{width} is the width of the box and \meta{text} is the
contents of the box. For example, to make the name right-aligned:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glstreenamebox}[2]{%
  \makebox[#1][r]{#2}%
}
\end{verbatim}

\item[alttreegroup] The \glostyle{alttreegroup} is like the
\glostyle{alttree} style except that each group has a heading.

\item[alttreehypergroup] The \glostyle{alttreehypergroup} style is 
like \glostyle{alttreegroup} but has a set of links to the glossary 
groups. The navigation line is the same as that for 
\glostyle{listhypergroup}, described above.

\end{description}

\subsection{Multicols Style}
\label{sec:mcolstyles}

The \sty{glossary-mcols} package provides tree-like styles that are
in the \env{multicols} environment (defined by the \sty{multicol}
package). The style names are as their analogous tree styles (as
defined in \sectionref{sec:treestyles}) but are prefixed with
\qt{mcol}.
For example, the \glostyle{mcolindex} style is essentially the
\glostyle{index} style but put in a \env{multicols} environment.
For the complete list, see \tableref{tab:mcols}. The
\sty{glossary-tree} package is automatically loaded by
\sty{glossary-mcols} (even if the \pkgopt{notree} package option is
used when loading \styfmt{glossaries}). The formatting commands
\cs{glstreenamefmt}, \cs{glstreegroupheaderfmt} and
\cs{glstreenavigationfmt} are all used by the corresponding
\sty{glossary-mcols} styles.

\begin{important}
Note that \sty{glossary-mcols} is not loaded by \styfmt{glossaries}. If
you want to use any of the multicol styles in that package you need
to load it explicitly with \cs{usepackage} and set the required glossary
style using \ics{setglossarystyle}.
\end{important}

The default number of columns is 2, but can be changed by redefining
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsmcols}]
\cs{glsmcols}
\end{definition}
to the required number. For example, for a three column glossary:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage{glossary-mcols}
\renewcommand*{\glsmcols}{3}
\setglossarystyle{mcolindex}
\end{verbatim}

\begin{table}[htbp]
\caption{Multicolumn Styles}
\label{tab:mcols}
\centering
\begin{tabular}{ll}
\bfseries
\sty{glossary-mcols} Style &
\bfseries
Analogous Tree Style\\
\glostyle{mcolindex} & \glostyle{index}\\
\glostyle{mcolindexgroup} & \glostyle{indexgroup}\\
\glostyle{mcolindexhypergroup} or \glostyle{mcolindexspannav} & \glostyle{indexhypergroup}\\
\glostyle{mcoltree} & \glostyle{tree}\\
\glostyle{mcoltreegroup} & \glostyle{treegroup}\\
\glostyle{mcoltreehypergroup} or \glostyle{mcoltreespannav} & \glostyle{treehypergroup}\\
\glostyle{mcoltreenoname} & \glostyle{treenoname}\\
\glostyle{mcoltreenonamegroup} & \glostyle{treenonamegroup}\\
\glostyle{mcoltreenonamehypergroup} or
\glostyle{mcoltreenonamespannav} & \glostyle{treenonamehypergroup}\\
\glostyle{mcolalttree} & \glostyle{alttree}\\
\glostyle{mcolalttreegroup} & \glostyle{alttreegroup}\\
\glostyle{mcolalttreehypergroup} or \glostyle{mcolalttreespannav} & \glostyle{alttreehypergroup}
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

The styles with a navigation line, such as
\glostyle{mcoltreehypergroup}, now have a variant (as from v4.22)
with \qt{hypergroup} replaced with \qt{spannav} in the style name.
The original \qt{hypergroup} styles place the navigation line at the
start of the first column. The newer \qt{spannav} styles put the
navigation line in the optional argument of the \env{multicols}
environment so that it spans across all the columns.

\subsection{In-Line Style}
\label{sec:inline}

This section covers the \sty{glossary-inline} package that supplies
the \glostyle{inline} style. This is a style that is designed for
in-line use (as opposed to block styles, such as lists or tables).
This style doesn't display the \gls{numberlist}.

You will most likely need to redefine \ics{glossarysection} with
this style. For example, suppose you are required to have your
glossaries and list of acronyms in a footnote, you can do:
\begin{verbatim}
 \usepackage{glossary-inline}

 \renewcommand*{\glossarysection}[2][]{\textbf{#1}: }
 \setglossarystyle{inline}
\end{verbatim}

\begin{important}
Note that you need to include \sty{glossary-inline} with
\cs{usepackage} as it's not automatically included by the
\styfmt{glossaries} package and then set the style using 
\ics{setglossarystyle}.
\end{important}

Where you need to include your glossaries as a footnote you can do:
\begin{verbatim}
\footnote{\printglossaries}
\end{verbatim}

The \glostyle{inline} style is governed by the following:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsinlineseparator}]
\ics{glsinlineseparator}
\end{definition}
This defaults to \qt{\texttt{\glsinlineseparator}} and is used between
main (i.e.\ level~0) entries.
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsinlinesubseparator}]
\ics{glsinlinesubseparator}
\end{definition}
This defaults to \qt{\texttt{\glsinlinesubseparator}} and is used between
sub-entries.
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsinlineparentchildseparator}]
\ics{glsinlineparentchildseparator}
\end{definition}
This defaults to \qt{\texttt{\glsinlineparentchildseparator}} and is used between
a parent main entry and its first sub-entry.
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glspostinline}]
\ics{glspostinline}
\end{definition}
This defaults to \qt{\texttt{\glsinlineseparator}} and is used at the end
of the glossary.
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsinlinenameformat]
\cs{glsinlinenameformat}\marg{label}\marg{name}
\end{definition}
This is used to format the entry name and defaults to 
\cs{glstarget}\marg{label}\marg{name}, where \meta{name} is provided
in the form \cs{glossentryname}\marg{label} and \meta{label} is the
entry's label. For example, if you want the name to appear in
\gls{smallcaps}:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glsinlinenameformat}[2]{\glstarget{#1}{\textsc{#2}}}
\end{verbatim}
Sub-entry names are formatted according to
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsinlinesubnameformat]
\cs{glsinlinesubnameformat}\marg{label}\marg{name}
\end{definition}
This defaults to \cs{glstarget}\marg{label}\verb|{}| so the
sub-entry name is ignored.

If the description has been suppressed (according to
\cs{ifglsdescsuppressed}) then 
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsinlineemptydescformat]
\cs{glsinlineemptydescformat}\marg{symbol}\marg{number list}
\end{definition}
(which defaults to nothing) is used,
otherwise the description is formatted according to
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsinlinedescformat]
\cs{glsinlinedescformat}\marg{description}\marg{symbol}\marg{number
list}
\end{definition}
This defaults to just \cs{space}\meta{description} so the symbol and
location list are ignored. If the description is missing (according
to \cs{ifglshasdesc}), then \cs{glsinlineemptydescformat} is used
instead.

For example, if you want a colon between the name and the
description:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glsinlinedescformat}[3]{: #1}
\end{verbatim}

The sub-entry description is formatted according to:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsinlinesubdescformat]
\cs{glsinlinesubdescformat}\marg{description}\marg{symbol}\marg{number
list}
\end{definition}
This defaults to just \meta{description}.

\section{Defining your own glossary style}
\label{sec:newglossarystyle}

\begin{important}
Commands like \cs{printglossary} are designed to produce content in
the PDF. If your intention is to design a style that doesn't print
any content (for example, to simply capture information) then you
are likely to experience unwanted side-effects. If you just want to
capture indexing information (such as locations) then a much better
approach is to use \gls{bib2gls}, which automatically stores this
information in dedicated fields when the entry is defined.
\end{important}

If the predefined styles don't fit your requirements, you can
define your own style using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\newglossarystyle}]
\cs{newglossarystyle}\marg{name}\marg{definitions}
\end{definition}
where \meta{name} is the name of the new glossary style (to be
used in \cs{setglossarystyle}). The second argument \meta{definitions}
needs to redefine all of the following:

\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{theglossary}]
\env{theglossary}
\end{definition}
This environment defines how the main body of the glossary should
be typeset. 

Note that this does not include the section heading,
the glossary preamble (defined by \ics{glossarypreamble}) or the
glossary postamble (defined by \ics{glossarypostamble}). For example,
the \glostyle{list} style uses the \env{description} environment,
so the \env{theglossary} environment is simply redefined to begin
and end the \env{description} environment.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glossaryheader}]
\cs{glossaryheader}
\end{definition}
This macro indicates what to do at the start of the main body
of the glossary. Note that this is not the same as 
\ics{glossarypreamble}, which should not be affected by changes in
the glossary style. The \glostyle{list} glossary style redefines
\ics{glossaryheader} to do nothing, whereas the \glostyle{longheader}
glossary style redefines \cs{glossaryheader} to do a header row.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsgroupheading}]
\cs{glsgroupheading}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This macro indicates
what to do at the start of each logical block within the main body
of the glossary. If you use \gls{makeindex} the glossary is
sub-divided into a maximum of twenty-eight logical blocks that are
determined by the first character of the \gloskey{sort} key (or
\gloskey{name} key if the \gloskey{sort} key is omitted). The
sub-divisions are in the following order: symbols, numbers, A,
\ldots, Z\@. If you use \gls{xindy}, the sub-divisions depend on
the language settings.

Note that the argument to \cs{glsgroupheading}
is a label \emph{not} the group title. The group title can be obtained
via
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsgetgrouptitle}]
\cs{glsgetgrouptitle}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This obtains the title as follows: if \meta{label} consists of a
single non-active character or \meta{label} is equal to
\texttt{glssymbols} or \texttt{glsnumbers} and
\cs{}\meta{label}\texttt{groupname} exists, this is taken to be the 
title, otherwise the title is just \meta{label}. (The \qt{symbols}
group has the label \texttt{glssymbols}, so the command 
\ics{glssymbolsgroupname} is used, and the \qt{numbers} group has the
label \texttt{glsnumbers}, so the command \ics{glsnumbersgrouptitle}
is used.) If you are using \gls{xindy}, \meta{label} may be an
active character (for example \o), in which case the title will be
set to just \meta{label}. You can redefine \cs{glsgetgrouptitle} if
this is unsuitable for your document.

A navigation hypertarget can be created using
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsnavhypertarget}]
\cs{glsnavhypertarget}\marg{label}\marg{text}
\end{definition}
This typically requires \cs{glossaryheader} to be redefined to use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsnavigation]
\cs{glsnavigation}
\end{definition}
which displays the navigation line.

For further details about \cs{glsnavhypertarget}, see
\ifpdf section~\ref*{sec:code:hypernav} in \fi the documented code 
(\texttt{glossaries-code.pdf}).

Most of the predefined glossary styles redefine \cs{glsgroupheading}
to simply ignore its argument.  The \glostyle{listhypergroup} style
redefines \cs{glsgroupheading} as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
\item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]}
\end{verbatim}
See also \cs{glsgroupskip} below. 

Note that command definitions within 
\ics{newglossarystyle} must use \verb|##1| instead of \verb|#1| etc.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsgroupskip}]
\cs{glsgroupskip}
\end{definition}
This macro determines what to do after one logical group but before
the header for the next logical group. The \glostyle{list} glossary
style simply redefines \cs{glsgroupskip} to be \ics{indexspace},
whereas the tabular-like styles redefine \cs{glsgroupskip} to
produce a blank row.

As from version 3.03, the package option \pkgopt{nogroupskip} can be
used to suppress this default gap for the predefined styles.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glossentry}]
\cs{glossentry}\marg{label}\marg{number list}
\end{definition}
This macro indicates what to do for each top-level (level~0) glossary entry.
The entry label is given by \meta{label} and the associated
\gls{numberlist} is given by \meta{number list}. You can redefine
\ics{glossentry} to use commands like \ics{glossentryname}\marg{label},
\ics{glossentrydesc}\marg{label} and \ics{glossentrysymbol}\marg{label} 
to display the name, description and symbol fields, or to access
other fields, use commands like \ics{glsentryuseri}\marg{label}.
(See \sectionref{sec:glsnolink} for further details.) You can also
use the following commands:

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentryitem}]
\cs{glsentryitem}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This macro will increment and display the associated counter for the
main (level~0) entries if the \pkgopt{entrycounter} or
\pkgopt{counterwithin} package options have been used. This macro
is typically called by \cs{glossentry} before \cs{glstarget}. 
The format of the counter is controlled by the macro
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsentrycounterlabel}]
\cs{glsentrycounterlabel}
\end{definition}

Each time you use a glossary entry it creates a hyperlink (if
hyperlinks are enabled) to the relevant line in the glossary.
Your new glossary style must therefore redefine
\cs{glossentry} to set the appropriate target. This
is done using
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glstarget}]
\cs{glstarget}\marg{label}\marg{text}
\end{definition}
where \meta{label} is the entry's label. Note that you
don't need to worry about whether the \sty{hyperref} package has
been loaded, as \cs{glstarget} won't create a target if
\cs{hypertarget} hasn't been defined.

For example, the \glostyle{list} style defines \cs{glossentry} as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
  \renewcommand*{\glossentry}[2]{%
    \item[\glsentryitem{##1}%
          \glstarget{##1}{\glossentryname{##1}}]
       \glossentrydesc{##1}\glspostdescription\space ##2}
\end{verbatim}

Note also that \meta{number list} will always be of the form
\begin{definition}
\ics{glossaryentrynumbers}\{\cs{relax}\\
\ics{setentrycounter}\oarg{Hprefix}\marg{counter name}\meta{format cmd}\marg{number(s)}\}
\end{definition}
where \meta{number(s)}
may contain \ics{delimN} (to delimit individual numbers) and/or
\ics{delimR} (to indicate a range of numbers). There may be 
multiple occurrences of 
\ics{setentrycounter}\oarg{Hprefix}\marg{counter name}\meta{format cmd}\marg{number(s)}, but note
that the entire number list is enclosed within the argument
of \ics{glossaryentrynumbers}. The user can redefine this to change
the way the entire number list is formatted, regardless of 
the glossary style. However the most common use of
\ics{glossaryentrynumbers} is to provide a means of suppressing the
number list altogether. (In fact, the \pkgopt{nonumberlist} option 
redefines \ics{glossaryentrynumbers} to ignore its argument.)
Therefore, when you define a new glossary style, you don't need
to worry about whether the user has specified the 
\pkgopt{nonumberlist} package option.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subglossentry}]
\cs{subglossentry}\marg{level}\marg{label}\marg{number list}
\end{definition}
This is used to display sub-entries.
The first argument, \meta{level}, indicates the sub-entry level.
This must be an integer from 1 (first sub-level) onwards. The
remaining arguments are analogous to those for
\ics{glossentry} described above.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glssubentryitem}]
\cs{glssubentryitem}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This macro will increment and display the associated counter for the
level~1 entries if the \pkgopt{subentrycounter} package option has
been used. This macro is typically called by \cs{subglossentry}
before \ics{glstarget}. The format of the counter is controlled by
the macro
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glssubentrycounterlabel}]
\cs{glssubentrycounterlabel}
\end{definition}

Note that \ics{printglossary} (which \ics{printglossaries} calls)
sets
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\currentglossary}]
\cs{currentglossary}
\end{definition}
to the current glossary label, so it's possible to create a glossary
style that varies according to the glossary type.

For further details of these commands, see \ifpdf
section~\ref*{sec:code:printglos} \fi \qt{Displaying the glossary}
in the documented code (\texttt{glossaries-code.pdf}).

\begin{example}{Creating a completely new style}{sec:exnewstyle}

If you want a completely new style, you will need to redefine all
of the commands and the environment listed above. 

For example, suppose you want each entry to start with a bullet point.
This means that the glossary should be placed in the \env{itemize}
environment, so \env{theglossary} should start and end that
environment. Let's also suppose that you don't want anything between
the glossary groups (so \ics{glsgroupheading} and \ics{glsgroupskip}
should do nothing) and suppose you don't want anything to appear
immediately after \verb|\begin{theglossary}| (so \ics{glossaryheader}
should do nothing). In addition, let's suppose the symbol should
appear in brackets after the name, followed by the description and
last of all the \gls{numberlist} should appear within square brackets
at the end. Then you can create this new glossary style, called, say,
\texttt{mylist}, as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
 \newglossarystyle{mylist}{%
 % put the glossary in the itemize environment:
 \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
   {\begin{itemize}}{\end{itemize}}%
 % have nothing after \begin{theglossary}:
 \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
 % have nothing between glossary groups:
 \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
 \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}%
 % set how each entry should appear:
 \renewcommand*{\glossentry}[2]{%
 \item % bullet point
 \glstarget{##1}{\glossentryname{##1}}% the entry name
 \space (\glossentrysymbol{##1})% the symbol in brackets
 \space \glossentrydesc{##1}% the description
 \space [##2]% the number list in square brackets
 }%
 % set how sub-entries appear:
 \renewcommand*{\subglossentry}[3]{%
   \glossentry{##2}{##3}}%
 }
\end{verbatim}
Note that this style creates a flat glossary, where sub-entries
are displayed in exactly the same way as the top level entries.
It also hasn't used \ics{glsentryitem} or \ics{glssubentryitem} so
it won't be affected by the \pkgopt{entrycounter},
\pkgopt{counterwithin} or \pkgopt{subentrycounter} package options.

Variations:
\begin{itemize}
\item You might want the entry name to be capitalised, in
which case use \ics{Glossentryname} instead of \ics{glossentryname}.

\item You might want to check if the symbol hasn't been set and omit
the parentheses if the symbol is absent. In this case you can use
\ics{ifglshassymbol} (see \sectionref{sec:utilities}):
\begin{verbatim}
 \renewcommand*{\glossentry}[2]{%
 \item % bullet point
 \glstarget{##1}{\glossentryname{##1}}% the entry name
 \ifglshassymbol{##1}% check if symbol exists
 {%
   \space (\glossentrysymbol{##1})% the symbol in brackets
 }%
 {}% no symbol so do nothing
 \space \glossentrydesc{##1}% the description
 \space [##2]% the number list in square brackets
 }%
\end{verbatim}
\end{itemize}
\end{example}

\begin{example}{Creating a new glossary style based on an
existing style}{sec:exadaptstyle}

If you want to define a new style that is a slightly modified
version of an existing style, you can use \ics{setglossarystyle}
within the second argument of \ics{newglossarystyle} followed by
whatever alterations you require. For example, suppose you want 
a style like the \glostyle{list} style but you don't want the extra
vertical space created by \ics{indexspace} between groups, then you
can create a new glossary style called, say, \texttt{mylist} as
follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossarystyle{mylist}{%
\setglossarystyle{list}% base this style on the list style
\renewcommand{\glsgroupskip}{}% make nothing happen 
                              % between groups
}
\end{verbatim} 
(In this case, you can actually achieve the same effect using the
\glostyle{list} style in combination with the package option
\pkgopt{nogroupskip}.)
\end{example}

\begin{example}{Example: creating a glossary style that uses the
\texorpdfstring{\gloskey{user1}}{user1}, \ldots, 
\texorpdfstring{\gloskey{user6}}{user6} keys}{sec:exuserstyle}

Suppose each entry not only has an associated symbol,
but also units (stored in \gloskey{user1}) and dimension
(stored in \gloskey{user2}). Then you can define a glossary style
that displays each entry in a \env{longtable} as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossarystyle{long6col}{%
 % put the glossary in a longtable environment:
 \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
  {\begin{longtable}{lp{\glsdescwidth}cccp{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
  {\end{longtable}}%
 % Set the table's header:
 \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
  \bfseries Term & \bfseries Description & \bfseries Symbol &
  \bfseries Units & \bfseries Dimensions & \bfseries Page List
  \\\endhead}%
 % No heading between groups:
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
 % Main (level 0) entries displayed in a row optionally numbered:
  \renewcommand*{\glossentry}[2]{%
    \glsentryitem{##1}% Entry number if required
    \glstarget{##1}{\glossentryname{##1}}% Name
    & \glossentrydesc{##1}% Description
    & \glossentrysymbol{##1}% Symbol
    & \glsentryuseri{##1}% Units
    & \glsentryuserii{##1}% Dimensions
    & ##2% Page list
    \tabularnewline % end of row
  }%
 % Similarly for sub-entries (no sub-entry numbers):
 \renewcommand*{\subglossentry}[3]{%
    % ignoring first argument (sub-level)
    \glstarget{##2}{\glossentryname{##2}}% Name
    & \glossentrydesc{##2}% Description
    & \glossentrysymbol{##2}% Symbol
    & \glsentryuseri{##2}% Units
    & \glsentryuserii{##2}% Dimensions
    & ##3% Page list
    \tabularnewline % end of row
  }%
 % Nothing between groups:
 \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}%
}
\end{verbatim}
\end{example}

\chapter[Xindy (Option 3)]{Xindy (\ifpdf\opt3\else Option 3\fi)}
\label{sec:xindy}

If you want to use \gls{xindy} to sort the glossary, you
must use the package option \pkgopt{xindy}:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[xindy]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
This ensures that the glossary information is written in 
\gls*{xindy} syntax.

\sectionref{sec:makeglossaries} covers how to use the external
\gls{indexingapp}, and \sectionref{sec:locationsyntax} covers the
issues involved in the location syntax. This section covers the
commands provided by the \styfmt{glossaries} package that allow you
to adjust the \gls{xindy} style file (\filetype{xdy}) and
parameters.

To assist writing information to the \gls{xindy} style
file, the \styfmt{glossaries} package provides the following
commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsopenbrace}]
\cs{glsopenbrace}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsclosebrace}]
\cs{glsclosebrace}
\end{definition}
which produce an open and closing brace. (This is needed because
\verb|\{| and \verb|\}| don't expand to a simple brace character
when written to a file.) Similarly, you can write a percent
character using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glspercentchar}]
\cs{glspercentchar}
\end{definition}
and a tilde character using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glstildechar}]
\cs{glstildechar}
\end{definition}
For example, a newline character is specified in a \gls{xindy} style
file using \verb|~n| so you can use \texttt{\cs{glstildechar} n}
to write this correctly (or you can do \verb|\string~n|).
A backslash can be written to a file using
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsbackslash}]
\cs{glsbackslash}
\end{definition}

In addition, if you are using a package that makes the double
quote character active (e.g. \sty{ngerman}) you can use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsquote}]
\cs{glsquote}\marg{text}
\end{definition}
which will produce \verb|"|\meta{text}\verb|"|. Alternatively,
you can use \verb|\string"| to write the double-quote character. 
This document assumes that the double quote character has not been
made active, so the examples just use \verb|"| for clarity.

If you want greater control over the \gls{xindy} style file than is
available through the \LaTeX\ commands provided by the
\styfmt{glossaries} package, you will need to edit the \gls*{xindy}
style file. In which case, you must use \ics{noist} to prevent the
style file from being overwritten by the \styfmt{glossaries}
package. For additional information about \gls*{xindy}, read the
\gls*{xindy} documentation. I'm sorry I can't provide any assistance
with writing \gls*{xindy} style files. If you need help, I recommend
you ask on the \gls*{xindy} mailing list
(\url{http://xindy.sourceforge.net/mailing-list.html}).

\section{Language and Encodings}
\label{sec:langenc}

When you use \gls{xindy}, you need to specify the language
and encoding used (unless you have written your own custom
\gls*{xindy} style file that defines the relevant alphabet
and sort rules). If you use \gls{makeglossaries},
this information is obtained from the document's auxiliary 
(\filetype{aux}) file.  The \gls{makeglossaries} script attempts to 
find the root language given your document settings, but in the 
event that it gets it wrong or if \gls*{xindy} doesn't support 
that language, then you can specify the required language using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GlsSetXdyLanguage}]
\cs{GlsSetXdyLanguage}\oarg{glossary type}\marg{language}
\end{definition}
where \meta{language} is the name of the language. The
optional argument can be used if you have multiple glossaries
in different languages. If \meta{glossary type} is omitted, it
will be applied to all glossaries, otherwise the language
setting will only be applied to the glossary given by
\meta{glossary type}.

If the \sty{inputenc} package is used, the encoding will be
obtained from the value of \ics{inputencodingname}. 
Alternatively, you can specify the encoding using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GlsSetXdyCodePage}]
\cs{GlsSetXdyCodePage}\marg{code}
\end{definition}
where \meta{code} is the name of the encoding. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsSetXdyCodePage{utf8}
\end{verbatim}

Note that you can also specify the language and encoding using
the package option 
\verb|xindy={language=|\meta{lang}\verb|,codepage=|\meta{code}\verb|}|.
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[xindy={language=english,codepage=utf8}]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}

If you write your own custom \gls{xindy} style file that 
includes the language settings, you need to set the language
to nothing:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsSetXdyLanguage{}
\end{verbatim}
(and remember to use \ics{noist} to prevent the style file from
being overwritten).

\begin{important}
The commands \cs{GlsSetXdyLanguage} and \cs{GlsSetXdyCodePage}
have no effect if you don't use \gls{makeglossaries}. If
you call \gls{xindy} without \gls*{makeglossaries} you
need to remember to set the language and encoding using the
\xdyopt{L} and \xdyopt{C} switches.
\end{important}

\section{Locations and Number lists}
\label{sec:xindyloc}

If you use \pkgopt{xindy}, the \styfmt{glossaries} package needs to
know which counters you will be using in the \gls{numberlist} in order to correctly format the \gls{xindy} style
file. Counters specified using the \pkgopt{counter} package option
or the \meta{counter} option of \ics{newglossary} are
automatically taken care of, but if you plan to use a different
counter in the \gloskey[glslink]{counter} key for commands like 
\ics{glslink}, then you need to identify these counters \emph{before} 
\ics{makeglossaries} using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GlsAddXdyCounters}]
\cs{GlsAddXdyCounters}\marg{counter list}
\end{definition}
where \meta{counter list} is a comma-separated list of counter names.

The most likely \ixindyattrs attributes used in the \gloskey[glslink]{format} 
key (\locfmt{textrm}, \locfmt{hyperrm} etc) are automatically added 
to the \gls{xindy} style file, but if you want to use another 
attribute, you need to add it using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GlsAddXdyAttribute}]
\cs{GlsAddXdyAttribute}\marg{name}
\end{definition}
where \meta{name} is the name of the attribute, as used in
the \gloskey[glslink]{format} key. 

Take care if you have multiple instances of the same location with
different formats. The duplicate locations will be discarded
according to the order in which the \ixindyattrs attributes are listed. Consider
defining semantic commands to use for primary references. For
example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand*{\primary}[1]{\textbf{#1}}
\GlsAddXdyAttribute{primary}
\end{verbatim}
Then in the document:
\begin{verbatim}
A \gls[format=primary]{duck} is an aquatic bird.
There are lots of different types of \gls{duck}.
\end{verbatim}
This will give the \verb|format=primary| instance preference over
the next use that doesn't use the \gloskey[glslink]{format} key.

\begin{example}{Custom Font for Displaying a Location}{ex:hyperbfit}
Suppose I want a bold, italic, hyperlinked location. I first need to define a
command that will do this:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand*{\hyperbfit}[1]{\textit{\hyperbf{#1}}}
\end{verbatim}
but with \gls{xindy}, I also need to add this as an allowed
\ixindyattrs attribute:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperbfit}
\end{verbatim}
Now I can use it in the optional argument of commands like
\ics{gls}:
\begin{verbatim}
Here is a \gls[format=hyperbfit]{sample} entry.
\end{verbatim}
(where \texttt{sample} is the label of the required entry).
\end{example}

\begin{important}
Note that \cs{GlsAddXdyAttribute} has no effect if \ics{noist} is
used or if \ics{makeglossaries} is omitted.
\cs{GlsAddXdyAttribute} must be used before \ics{makeglossaries}.
Additionally, \cs{GlsAddXdyCounters} must come before
\cs{GlsAddXdyAttribute}.
\end{important}

If the location numbers include formatting commands, then
you need to add a location style in the appropriate format using
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GlsAddXdyLocation}]
\cs{GlsAddXdyLocation}\oarg{prefix-location}\marg{name}\marg{definition}
\end{definition}
where \meta{name} is the name of the format and \meta{definition} is
the \gls{xindy} definition. The optional argument \meta{prefix-location}
is needed if \cs{theH}\meta{counter} either isn't defined or is
different from \cs{the}\meta{counter}.
Be sure to also read \sectionref{sec:locationsyntax} for some issues
that you may encounter.

\begin{important}
Note that \cs{GlsAddXdyLocation} has no effect if \ics{noist} is
used or if \ics{makeglossaries} is omitted.
\cs{GlsAddXdyLocation} must be used before \ics{makeglossaries}.
\end{important}

\begin{example}{Custom Numbering System for Locations}{ex:customloc}
Suppose I decide to use a somewhat eccentric numbering
system for sections where I redefine \cs{thesection} as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\thesection}{[\thechapter]\arabic{section}}
\end{verbatim}
If I haven't done "counter=section" in the package
option, I need to specify that the counter will be used as a
location number:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyCounters{section}
\end{verbatim}
Next I need to add the location style (\cs{thechapter} is assumed to
be the standard \verb"\arabic{chapter}"):
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyLocation{section}{:sep "[" "arabic-numbers" :sep "]"
  "arabic-numbers"
}
\end{verbatim}
Note that if I have further decided to use the \sty{hyperref}
package and want to redefine \cs{theHsection} as:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\theHsection}{\thepart.\thesection}
\renewcommand*{\thepart}{\Roman{part}}
\end{verbatim}
then I need to modify the \cs{GlsAddXdyLocation} code above to:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyLocation["roman-numbers-uppercase"]{section}{:sep "[" 
  "arabic-numbers" :sep "]" "arabic-numbers"
}
\end{verbatim}
Since \ics{Roman} will result in an empty string if the counter is
zero, it's a good idea to add an extra location to catch this:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyLocation{zero.section}{:sep "[" 
  "arabic-numbers" :sep "]" "arabic-numbers"
}
\end{verbatim}
This example is illustrated in the sample file
\samplefile{xdy2}.
\end{example}

\begin{example}{Locations as Dice}{ex:dice}
Suppose I want a rather eccentric page numbering system that's
represented by the number of dots on dice. The \sty{stix} package
provides \cs{dicei}, \ldots, \cs{dicevi} that represent the six
sides of a die. I can define a command that takes a number as its
argument. If the number is less than seven, the appropriate
\cs{dice}\meta{n} command is used otherwise it does \cs{dicevi} the
required number of times with the leftover in a final
\cs{dice}\meta{n}. For example, the number 16 is represented by
\verb|\dicevi\dicevi\diceiv| ($6+6+4=16$). I've called this command
\cs{tallynum} to match the example given earlier in 
\sectionref{sec:locationsyntax}:
\begin{verbatim}
\newrobustcmd{\tallynum}[1]{%
 \ifnum\number#1<7
  $\csname dice\romannumeral#1\endcsname$%
 \else
  $\dicevi$%
  \expandafter\tallynum\expandafter{\numexpr#1-6}%
 \fi
}
\end{verbatim}
Here's the counter command:
\begin{verbatim}
newcommand{\tally}[1]{\tallynum{\arabic{#1}}}
\end{verbatim}
The \ctr{page} counter representation (\cs{thepage}) needs to be
changed to use this command:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\thepage}{\tally{page}}
\end{verbatim}
The \cs{tally} command expands to \cs{tallynum} \marg{number} so
this needs a location class that matches this format:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyLocation{tally}{% 
 :sep "\string\tallynum\space\glsopenbrace"
 "arabic-numbers"
 :sep "\glsclosebrace"
}
\end{verbatim}
The space between \cs{tallynum} and \marg{number} is
significant to \gls{xindy} so \cs{space} is required.

Note that \cs{GlsAddXdyLocation}\marg{name}\marg{definition} will define 
commands in the form:
\begin{definition}
\cs{glsX}\meta{counter}"X"\meta{name}\marg{Hprefix}\marg{location}
\end{definition}
for each counter that has been identified either by the
\pkgopt{counter} package option, the \meta{counter} option for
\ics{newglossary} or in the argument of \ics{GlsAddXdyCounters}.
The first argument \meta{Hprefix} is only relevant when used with
the \sty{hyperref} package and indicates that \cs{theH}\meta{counter}
is given by \cs{Hprefix}"."\cs{the}\meta{counter}. 

The sample file \samplefile{xdy}, which comes with the \styfmt{glossaries}
package, uses the default \ctr{page} counter for locations, and it
uses the default \ics{glsnumberformat} and a custom \cs{hyperbfit}
format. A new \gls{xindy} location called \texttt{tallynum}, as
illustrated above, is defined to make the page numbers appear as
dice. In order for the location numbers to
hyperlink to the relevant pages, I~need to redefine the necessary
\cs{glsX}\meta{counter}"X"\meta{format} commands:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glsXpageXglsnumberformat}[2]{%
 \linkpagenumber#2%
}

\renewcommand{\glsXpageXhyperbfit}[2]{%
 \textbf{\em\linkpagenumber#2}%
}

\newcommand{\linkpagenumber}[2]{\hyperlink{page.#2}{#1{#2}}}
\end{verbatim}
Note that the second argument of \cs{glsXpageXglsnumberformat} is
in the format \cs{tallynum}\marg{n} so the line
\begin{verbatim}
 \linkpagenumber#2%
\end{verbatim}
does
\begin{alltt}
 \cs{linkpagenumber}\cs{tallynum}\marg{number}
\end{alltt}
so \cs{tallynum} is the first argument of \cs{linkpagenumber}
and \meta{number} is the second argument.
\end{example}

\begin{important}
This method is very sensitive to the internal definition of the
location command.
\end{important}

\begin{example}{Locations as Words not Digits}{ex:fmtcount}
Suppose I want the page numbers written as words
rather than digits and I~use the \sty{fmtcount} package to
do this. I~can redefine \ics{thepage} as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\thepage}{\Numberstring{page}}
\end{verbatim}
This \emph{used} to get expanded to \verb|\protect \Numberstringnum |\marg{n}
where \meta{n} is the Arabic page number. This means that I~needed to
define a new location with the form:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyLocation{Numberstring}{:sep "\string\protect\space
  \string\Numberstringnum\space\glsopenbrace"
  "arabic-numbers" :sep "\glsclosebrace"}
\end{verbatim}
and if I'd used the \cs{linkpagenumber} command from the previous
example, it would need \emph{three} arguments (the first being
\cs{protect}):
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\linkpagenumber}[3]{\hyperlink{page.#3}{#1#2{#3}}}
\end{verbatim}

The internal definition of \cs{Numberstring} has since changed
so that it now expands to \verb|\Numberstringnum |\marg{n}
(no \cs{protect}). This means that the location class definition
must be changed to:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyLocation{Numberstring}{% no \protect now!
  :sep "\string\Numberstringnum\space\glsopenbrace"
  "arabic-numbers" :sep "\glsclosebrace"}
\end{verbatim}
and \cs{linkpagenumber} goes back to only two arguments:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\linkpagenumber}[2]{\hyperlink{page.#2}{#1{#2}}}
\end{verbatim}
The other change is that \cs{Numberstring} uses
\begin{alltt}
\cs{the}\cs{value}\marg{counter}
\end{alltt}
instead of
\begin{alltt}
\cs{expandafter}\cs{the}\cs{csname} c@\meta{counter}\cs{endcsname}
\end{alltt}
so it hides \cs{c@page} from the location escaping mechanism 
(see \sectionref{sec:locationsyntax}). This means that the page
number may be incorrect if the indexing occurs during the output
routine.

A more recent change to \sty{fmtcount} (v3.03) now puts three
instances of \cs{expandafter} before \verb|\the\value| which
no longer hides \cs{c@page} from the location escaping mechanism, so
the page numbers should once more be correct. Further changes
to the \sty{fmtcount} package may cause a problem again.

\begin{important}
When dealing with custom formats where the internal definitions
are outside of your control and liable to change, it's best
to provide a wrapper command.
\end{important}

Instead of directly using \cs{Numberstring} in the definition of
\cs{thepage}, I can provide a custom command in the same form
as the earlier \cs{tally} command:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\customfmt}[1]{\customfmtnum{\arabic{#1}}}
\newrobustcmd{\customfmtnum}[1]{\Numberstringnum{#1}}
\end{verbatim}
This ensures that the location will always be written to
the indexing file in the form:
\begin{alltt}
:locref "\glsopenbrace\glsclosebrace\glsopenbrace\string\\customfmtnum \marg{n}\glsclosebrace"
\end{alltt}
So the location class can be defined as:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyLocation{customfmt}{
 :sep "\string\customfmtnum\space\glsopenbrace"
 "arabic-numbers" 
 :sep "\glsclosebrace"}
\end{verbatim}

The sample file
\samplefile{xdy3} illustrates this.
\end{example}

In the \gls{numberlist}, the locations are sorted according to the list
of provided location classes. The default ordering is:
\texttt{roman-page-numbers} (i, ii, \ldots), \texttt{arabic-page-numbers}
(1, 2, \ldots), \texttt{arabic-section-numbers} (for example, 1.1 if the
compositor is a full stop or 1-1 if the compositor is a
hyphen\footnote{see \ics{glsSetCompositor} described in
\sectionref{sec:setup}}), \texttt{alpha-page-numbers} (a, b, \ldots),
\texttt{Roman-page-numbers} (I, II, \ldots), \texttt{Alpha-page-numbers}
(A, B, \ldots), \texttt{Appendix-page-numbers} (for example, A.1 if the Alpha
compositor is a full stop or A-1 if the Alpha compositor is a
hyphen\footnote{see \ics{glsSetAlphaCompositor} described in
\sectionref{sec:setup}}), user defined location names (as specified
by \ics{GlsAddXdyLocation} in the order in which they were defined),
and finally \texttt{see} (cross-referenced entries).\footnote{With
\gls{glossaries-extra} \texttt{seealso} is appended to the end of
the list.} This ordering can be changed using:

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder]
\cs{GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder}\marg{location names}
\end{definition}
where each location name is delimited by double quote marks and
separated by white space. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder{
  "arabic-page-numbers"
  "arabic-section-numbers"
  "roman-page-numbers"
  "Roman-page-numbers"
  "alpha-page-numbers"
  "Alpha-page-numbers"
  "Appendix-page-numbers"
  "see"
}
\end{verbatim}
(Remember to add \verb|"seealso"| if you're using
\gls{glossaries-extra}.)

\begin{important}
Note that \cs{GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder} has no effect if 
\ics{noist} is used or if \ics{makeglossaries} is omitted.
\cs{GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder} must be used before 
\ics{makeglossaries}.
\end{important}

If a \gls{numberlist} consists of a sequence of consecutive 
numbers, the range will be concatenated. The 
number of consecutive locations that causes a range formation 
defaults to 2, but can be changed using:

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength]
\cs{GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength}\marg{n}
\end{definition}
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength{3}
\end{verbatim}
The argument may also be the keyword \texttt{none}, to indicate that
there should be no range formations. See the \gls{xindy}
manual for further details on range formations.

\begin{important}
Note that \cs{GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength} has no effect if \ics{noist}
is used or if \ics{makeglossaries} is omitted.
\cs{GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength} must be used before 
\ics{makeglossaries}.
\end{important}
See also \sectionref{sec:ranges}.

\section{Glossary Groups}
\label{sec:groups}

The glossary is divided into groups according to the first
letter of the sort key. The \styfmt{glossaries} package also adds
a number group by default, unless you suppress it in the
\pkgopt{xindy} package option. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[xindy={glsnumbers=false}]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
Any entry that doesn't go in one of the letter groups or the
number group is placed in the default group. If you want \gls{xindy}
to sort the number group numerically (rather than by a string sort)
then you need to use \gls{xindy}['s] \texttt{numeric-sort} module:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyStyle{numeric-sort}
\end{verbatim}

If you don't use \texttt{glsnumbers=false}, the default behaviour is to locate
the number group before the \qt{A} letter group. If you are not using a
Roman alphabet, you need to change this using:


\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\GlsSetXdyFirstLetterAfterDigits]
\cs{GlsSetXdyFirstLetterAfterDigits}\marg{letter}
\end{definition}
where \meta{letter} is the first letter of your alphabet. Take care
if you're using \sty{inputenc} as non-ASCII characters are actually
active characters that expand. (This isn't a problem with the native
\gls{UTF-8} engines and \sty{fontspec}.) The starred form will sanitize
the argument to prevent expansion.
Alternatively you can use:


\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\GlsSetXdyNumberGroupOrder]
\cs{GlsSetXdyNumberGroupOrder}\marg{relative location}
\end{definition}
to change the default
\begin{alltt}
:before \cs{string}"\meta{letter}\cs{string}"
\end{alltt}
to \meta{relative location}. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsSetXdyNumberGroupOrder{:after \string"Z\string"}
\end{verbatim}
will put the number group after the \qt{Z} letter group.
Again take care of active characters. There's a starred version
that sanitizes the argument (so don't use \cs{string} in it).
\begin{alltt}
\cs{GlsSetXdyNumberGroupOrder}*\{:after "\"O"\}
\end{alltt}

\begin{important}
Note that these commands have no effect if 
\ics{noist} is used or if \ics{makeglossaries} is omitted.
\cs{GlsSetXdyFirstLetterAfterDigits} must be used before 
\ics{makeglossaries}.\par
\end{important}


\chapter{Utilities}
\label{sec:utilities}

This section describes some utility commands. Additional commands
can be found in the documented code (glossaries-code.pdf).

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides extra utility commands.
See the \qt{Utilities} section of the \gls{glossaries-extra} manual.
\end{xtr}

\section{Loops}
\label{sec:loops}

\begin{important}
Some of the commands described here take a comma-separated list as
an argument. As with \LaTeX's \cs{@for} command, make sure your list
doesn't have any unwanted spaces in it as they don't get stripped.
(Discussed in more detail in
\href{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/admin/html/docsvlist.shtml#spacesinlists}{\S2.7.2 of \qt{\LaTeX\ for Administrative
Work}}.)
\end{important}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\forallglossaries}]
\cs{forallglossaries}\oarg{glossary list}\marg{cs}\marg{body}
\end{definition}
This iterates through \meta{glossary list}, a comma-separated list
of glossary labels (as supplied when the glossary was defined).
At each iteration \meta{cs} (which must be a control sequence) is
set to the glossary label for the current iteration and \meta{body}
is performed. If \meta{glossary list} is omitted, the default is to
iterate over all glossaries (except the ignored ones).

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\forallacronyms}]
\cs{forallacronyms}\marg{cs}\marg{body}
\end{definition}
This is like \cs{forallglossaries} but only iterates over the
lists of acronyms (that have previously been declared using
\ics{DeclareAcronymList} or the \pkgopt{acronymlists} package
option). This command doesn't have an optional argument. If you want
to explicitly say which lists to iterate over, just use the optional
argument of \cs{forallglossaries}.

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra}
package provides an analogous command
\ics*{forallabbreviationlists}.
\end{xtr}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\forglsentries}]
\cs{forglsentries}\oarg{glossary label}\marg{cs}\marg{body}
\end{definition}
This iterates through all entries in the glossary given by
\meta{glossary label}. At each iteration \meta{cs} (which must be a
control sequence) is set to the entry label for the current
iteration and \meta{body} is performed. If \meta{glossary label} is
omitted, \ics{glsdefaulttype} (usually the main glossary) is used.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\forallglsentries}]
\cs{forallglsentries}\oarg{glossary list}\marg{cs}\marg{body}
\end{definition}
This is like \cs{forglsentries} but for each glossary in
\meta{glossary list} (a comma-separated list of glossary labels). If
\meta{glossary list} is omitted, the default is the list of all
defined glossaries (except the ignored ones). At each iteration 
\meta{cs} is set to the entry label and \meta{body} is performed. 
(The current glossary label can be obtained using 
\cs{glsentrytype}\marg{cs} within \meta{body}.)

\section{Conditionals}
\label{sec:conditionals}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ifglossaryexists}]
\cs{ifglossaryexists}{\meta{label}}{\meta{true part}}{\meta{false
part}}
\end{definition}
This checks if the glossary given by \meta{label} exists. If it
does \meta{true part} is performed, otherwise \meta{false part}.
The unstarred form will do \meta{false part} for ignored glossaries. 
As from v4.46, there is now a starred form of this command which
will also consider ignored glossaries as existing. For example,
given:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{newignoredglossary}\mgroup{common}
\end{alltt}
then
\begin{verbatim}
\ifglossaryexists{common}{true}{false}
\ifglossaryexists*{common}{true}{false}
\end{verbatim}
will produce \qt{false true}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ifglsentryexists}]
\cs{ifglsentryexists}{\meta{label}}{\meta{true part}}{\meta{false
part}}
\end{definition}
This checks if the glossary entry given by \meta{label} exists. If it
does \meta{true part} is performed, otherwise \meta{false part}.
(Note that \cs{ifglsentryexists} will always be true after the
containing glossary has been displayed via \ics{printglossary}
or \ics{printglossaries} even if the entry is explicitly defined
later in the document. This is because the entry has to be defined
before it can be displayed in the glossary, see \sectionref{sec:techissues} for
further details.)

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsdoifexists}]
\cs{glsdoifexists}\marg{label}\marg{code}
\end{definition}
Does \meta{code} if the entry given by \meta{label} exists. If it
doesn't exist, an error is generated. (This command uses
\cs{ifglsentryexists}.)

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsdoifnoexists}]
\cs{glsdoifnoexists}\marg{label}\marg{code}
\end{definition}
Does the reverse of \cs{glsdoifexists}. (This command uses
\cs{ifglsentryexists}.)

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsdoifexistsorwarn}]
\cs{glsdoifexistsorwarn}\marg{label}\marg{code}
\end{definition}
As \cs{glsdoifexists} but issues a warning rather than an error if
the entry doesn't exist.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsdoifexistsordo}]
\cs{glsdoifexistsordo}\marg{label}\marg{code}\marg{else code}
\end{definition}
Does \meta{code} if the entry given by \meta{label} exists otherwise
generate an error and do \meta{else code}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\glsdoifnoexistsordo}]
\cs{glsdoifnoexistsordo}\marg{label}\marg{code}\marg{else code}
\end{definition}
Does \meta{code} if the entry given by \meta{label} doesn't exist otherwise
generate an error and do \meta{else code}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ifglsused}]
\cs{ifglsused}{\meta{label}}{\meta{true part}}{\meta{false
part}}
\end{definition}
See \sectionref{sec:glsunset}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ifglshaschildren}]
\cs{ifglshaschildren}{\meta{label}}{\meta{true part}}{\meta{false
part}}
\end{definition}
This checks if the glossary entry given by \meta{label} has any
sub-entries. If it does, \meta{true part} is performed, otherwise
\meta{false part}. This uses an inefficient method since this
information isn't stored.

\begin{bib2gls}
If you use \gls{bib2gls}, a more efficient method is to use the
\resourceopt{save-child-count} resource option and test the value of
the \field{childcount} field.
\end{bib2gls}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ifglshasparent}]
\cs{ifglshasparent}{\meta{label}}{\meta{true part}}{\meta{false
part}}
\end{definition}
This checks if the glossary entry given by \meta{label} has a parent
entry. If it does, \meta{true part} is performed, otherwise
\meta{false part}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ifglshassymbol}]
\cs{ifglshassymbol}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
\end{definition}
This checks if the glossary entry given by \meta{label} has had the
\gloskey{symbol} field set. If it has, \meta{true part} is performed,
otherwise \meta{false part}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ifglshaslong}]
\cs{ifglshaslong}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
\end{definition}
This checks if the glossary entry given by \meta{label} has had the
\gloskey{long} field set. If it has, \meta{true part} is performed,
otherwise \meta{false part}. This should be true for any entry that
has been defined via \ics{newacronym}.
There is no check for the existence of \meta{label}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ifglshasshort}]
\cs{ifglshasshort}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
\end{definition}
This checks if the glossary entry given by \meta{label} has had the
\gloskey{short} field set. If it has, \meta{true part} is performed,
otherwise \meta{false part}. This should be true for any entry that
has been defined via \ics{newacronym}.
There is no check for the existence of \meta{label}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ifglshasdesc}]
\cs{ifglshasdesc}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
\end{definition}
This checks if the \gloskey{description} field is non-empty for 
the entry given by \meta{label}. If it has, \meta{true part} is 
performed, otherwise \meta{false part}. Compare with:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ifglsdescsuppressed}]
\cs{ifglsdescsuppressed}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
\end{definition}
This checks if the \gloskey{description} field has been set to just
\ics{nopostdesc} for the entry given by \meta{label}. If it has, 
\meta{true part} is performed, otherwise \meta{false part}.
There is no check for the existence of \meta{label}.

For all other fields you can use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\ifglshasfield]
\cs{ifglshasfield}\marg{field}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false
part}
\end{definition}
This tests the value of the field given by \meta{field} for the entry
identified by \meta{label}. If the value is empty \emph{or the default
value}, then \meta{false part} is performed, otherwise \meta{true
part} is performed. If the field supplied is unrecognised \meta{false part}
is performed and a warning is issued. Unlike the above commands,
such as \cs{ifglshasshort}, an error occurs if the entry is
undefined.

As from version 4.23, within \meta{true part} you can use
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glscurrentfieldvalue]
\cs{glscurrentfieldvalue}
\end{definition}
to access the field value. This command is
initially defined to nothing but has
no relevance outside \meta{true part}. This saves re-accessing the
field if the test is true. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\ifglshasfield{useri}{sample}{, \glscurrentfieldvalue}{}
\end{verbatim}
will insert a comma, space and the field value if the
\gloskey{user1} key has been set for
the entry whose label is \texttt{sample}.

You can test if the value of the field is equal to a given string
using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\ifglsfieldeq]
\cs{ifglsfieldeq}\marg{label}\marg{field}\marg{string}\marg{true}\marg{false}
\end{definition}
In this case the \meta{field} must be the field name not the key
(see \tableref{tab:fieldmap}). If the field isn't recognised, an
error will occur. This command internally uses
\sty{etoolbox}'s \cs{ifcsstring} to perform the comparison. \emph{The
string is not expanded during the test.}

The result may vary depending on whether or not expansion is on for
the given field (when the entry was defined). For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}

\usepackage{glossaries}

\newcommand*{\foo}{FOO}

\newglossaryentry{sample1}{name={sample1},description={an example},
user1={FOO}}
\newglossaryentry{sample2}{name={sample2},description={an example},
user1={\foo}}

\begin{document}
\ifglsfieldeq{sample1}{useri}{FOO}{TRUE}{FALSE}.

\ifglsfieldeq{sample2}{useri}{FOO}{TRUE}{FALSE}.
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}
This will produce \qt{TRUE} in both cases since expansion is on, so
\cs{foo} was expanded to \qt{FOO} when \texttt{sample2} was defined.
If the tests are changed to:
\begin{verbatim}
\ifglsfieldeq{sample1}{useri}{\foo}{TRUE}{FALSE}.

\ifglsfieldeq{sample2}{useri}{\foo}{TRUE}{FALSE}.
\end{verbatim}
then this will produce \qt{FALSE} in both cases. Now suppose
expansion is switched off for the \gloskey{user1} key:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}

\usepackage{glossaries}

\newcommand*{\foo}{FOO}

\glssetnoexpandfield{useri}

\newglossaryentry{sample1}{name={sample1},description={an example},
user1={FOO}}
\newglossaryentry{sample2}{name={sample2},description={an example},
user1={\foo}}

\begin{document}
\ifglsfieldeq{sample1}{useri}{FOO}{TRUE}{FALSE}.

\ifglsfieldeq{sample2}{useri}{FOO}{TRUE}{FALSE}.
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}
This now produces \qt{TRUE} for the first case (comparing \qt{FOO}
with \qt{FOO}) and \qt{FALSE} for the second case (comparing
\qt{\cs{foo}} with \qt{FOO}).

The reverse happens in the following:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}

\usepackage{glossaries}

\newcommand*{\foo}{FOO}

\glssetnoexpandfield{useri}

\newglossaryentry{sample1}{name={sample1},description={an example},
user1={FOO}}
\newglossaryentry{sample2}{name={sample2},description={an example},
user1={\foo}}

\begin{document}
\ifglsfieldeq{sample1}{useri}{\foo}{TRUE}{FALSE}.

\ifglsfieldeq{sample2}{useri}{\foo}{TRUE}{FALSE}.
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}
This now produces \qt{FALSE} for the first case (comparing \qt{FOO}
with \qt{\cs{foo}}) and \qt{TRUE} for the second case (comparing
\qt{\cs{foo}} with \qt{\cs{foo}}).

You can test if the value of a field is equal to the replacement
text of a command using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\ifglsfielddefeq]
\cs{ifglsfielddefeq}\marg{label}\marg{field}\marg{command}\marg{true}\marg{false}
\end{definition}
This internally uses \sty{etoolbox}'s \cs{ifdefstrequal} command to
perform the comparison. The argument \meta{command} must be a macro.

For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}

\usepackage{glossaries}

\newcommand*{\foo}{FOO}

\glssetnoexpandfield{useri}

\newglossaryentry{sample1}{name={sample1},description={an example},
user1={FOO}}
\newglossaryentry{sample2}{name={sample2},description={an example},
user1={\foo}}

\begin{document}
\ifglsfielddefeq{sample1}{useri}{\foo}{TRUE}{FALSE}.

\ifglsfielddefeq{sample2}{useri}{\foo}{TRUE}{FALSE}.
\end{document}
\end{verbatim}
Here, the first case produces \qt{TRUE} since the value of the
\texttt{useri} field (\qt{FOO}) is the same as the replacement text
(definition) of \cs{foo} (\qt{FOO}). We have the result
\qt{\texttt{FOO}} is equal to \qt{\texttt{FOO}}.

The second case produces \qt{FALSE} since the value of the
\texttt{useri} field (\qt{\cs{foo}}) is not the same as the replacement
text (definition) of \cs{foo} (\qt{FOO}). No expansion has been
performed on the value of the \texttt{useri} field. We have the
result \qt{\cs{foo}} is not equal to \qt{\texttt{FOO}}.

If we add:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\FOO}{\foo}
\ifglsfielddefeq{sample2}{useri}{\FOO}{TRUE}{FALSE}.
\end{verbatim}
we now get \qt{TRUE} since the value of the
\texttt{useri} field (\qt{\cs{foo}}) is the same as the replacement
text (definition) of \cs{FOO} (\qt{\cs{foo}}). We have the result \qt{\cs{foo}}
is equal to \qt{\cs{foo}}.

There is a similar command that requires the control sequence name
(without the leading backslash) instead of the actual control sequence:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\ifglsfieldcseq]
\cs{ifglsfieldcseq}\marg{label}\marg{field}\marg{csname}\marg{true}\marg{false}
\end{definition}
This internally uses \sty{etoolbox}'s \cs{ifcsstrequal} command
instead of \cs{ifdefstrequal}.

\section{Fetching and Updating the Value of a Field}
\label{sec:fetchset}

In addition to the commands described in \sectionref{sec:glsnolink},
the following may also be used to fetch field information.
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsentrytype]
\cs{glsentrytype}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
Expands to the entry's glossary type. No existence check is
performed.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsentryparent]
\cs{glsentryparent}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
Expands to the label of the entry's parent. No existence check is
performed.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsentrysort]
\cs{glsentrysort}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
Expands to the entry's sort value. No existence check is performed.

You can fetch the value of a given field and store it in a control
sequence using:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsfieldfetch]
\cs{glsfieldfetch}\marg{label}\marg{field}\marg{cs}
\end{definition}
where \meta{label} is the label identifying the glossary entry,
\meta{field} is the field label (see \tableref{tab:fieldmap})
and \meta{cs} is the control sequence in which to store the value.
Remember that \meta{field} is the internal label and is not
necessarily the same as the key used to set that field in the
argument of \cs{newglossaryentry} (or the optional argument of
\cs{newacronym}). This command uses \cs{glsdoifexists} so an error
will occur if the entry hasn't been defined.

If you need to expand to the field value without expanding the
contents you can use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsunexpandedfieldvalue]
\cs{glsunexpandedfieldvalue}\marg{label}\marg{field}
\end{definition}
where \meta{label} is the label identifying the glossary entry,
\meta{field} is the internal field label (see
\tableref{tab:fieldmap}). If the entry doesn't exist or if the field
isn't defined or hasn't been set this expands to nothing.

You can change the value of a given field using one of the following
commands. Note that these commands only change the value of the
given field. They have no affect on any related field. For example,
if you change the value of the \gloskey{text} field, it won't modify the
value given by the \gloskey{name}, \gloskey{plural}, \gloskey{first} or any other related key.

In all the four related commands below, \meta{label} and
\meta{field} are as above and \meta{definition} is the new value 
of the field.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsfielddef]
\cs{glsfielddef}\marg{label}\marg{field}\marg{definition}
\end{definition}
This uses \cs{def} to change the value of the field (so it will be
localised by any grouping).

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsfieldedef]
\cs{glsfieldedef}\marg{label}\marg{field}\marg{definition}
\end{definition}
This uses \cs{edef} to change the value of the field (so it will be
localised by any grouping). Any fragile commands contained in the
\meta{definition} must be protected.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsfieldgdef]
\cs{glsfieldgdef}\marg{label}\marg{field}\marg{definition}
\end{definition}
This uses \cs{gdef} to change the value of the field.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsfieldxdef]
\cs{glsfieldxdef}\marg{label}\marg{field}\marg{definition}
\end{definition}
This uses \cs{xdef} to change the value of the field. Any fragile
commands contained in the \meta{definition} must be protected.


\chapter{Prefixes or Determiners}\label{sec:prefix}

The \sty{glossaries-prefix} package that comes with the
\styfmt{glossaries} package provides 
additional keys that can be used as prefixes. For example, if you
want to specify determiners (such
as \qt{a}, \qt{an} or \qt{the}). The \styfmt{glossaries-prefix}
package automatically loads the \styfmt{glossaries} package and has
the same package options.

The extra keys for \ics{newglossaryentry} are as follows:
\begin{description}
\item[\gloskey{prefix}] The prefix associated with the
\gloskey{text} key. This defaults to nothing.

\item[\gloskey{prefixplural}] The prefix associated with the
\gloskey{plural} key. This defaults to nothing.

\item[\gloskey{prefixfirst}] The prefix associated with the
\gloskey{first} key. If omitted, this defaults to the value of the
\gloskey{prefix} key.

\item[\gloskey{prefixfirstplural}] The prefix associated with the
\gloskey{firstplural} key. If omitted, this defaults to the value of
the \gloskey{prefixplural} key.
\end{description}

\begin{example}{Defining Determiners}{ex:determiners}
Here's the start of my example document:
\begin{verbatim}
\documentclass{article}

\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}
\usepackage[toc,acronym]{glossaries-prefix}
\end{verbatim}
Note that I've simply replaced \styfmt{glossaries} from previous
sample documents with \styfmt{glossaries-prefix}. Now for a sample
definition\footnote{Single letter words, such as \qt{a} and \qt{I}
should typically not appear at the end of a line, hence the
non-breakable space after \qt{a} in the \gloskey{prefix} field.}:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{sample}{name={sample},%
  description={an example},%
  prefix={a~},%
  prefixplural={the\space}%
}
\end{verbatim}
Note that I've had to explicitly insert a~space after the prefix
since there's no designated separator between the prefix and the
term being referenced. This not only means that you can vary between
a breaking space and non-breaking space, but also
allows for the possibility of prefixes that shouldn't have a~space, 
such as:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{oeil}{name={oeil},
  plural={yeux},
  description={eye},
  prefix={l'},
  prefixplural={les\space}}
\end{verbatim}
Where a space is required at the end of the prefix, you must use 
a~spacing command, such as \cs{space}, \verb*|\ | (backslash space) or
\verb|~| due to the automatic spacing trimming performed in
\meta{key}=\meta{value} options.

In the event that you always require a space between the prefix and
the term, then you can instead redefine
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsprefixsep]
\cs{glsprefixsep}
\end{definition}
to do a space. (This command does nothing by default.) For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glsprefixsep}{\space}
\end{verbatim}

The prefixes can also be used with acronyms. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym
 [%
   prefix={an\space},prefixfirst={a~}%
 ]{svm}{SVM}{support vector machine}
\end{verbatim}
\end{example}

The \sty{glossaries-prefix} package provides convenient commands to
use these prefixes with commands such as \ics{gls}. Note that the
prefix is not considered part of the \gls{linktext}, so it's not
included in the hyperlink (where hyperlinks are enabled). The
options and any star or plus modifier are passed on to the \glslike\
command. (See \sectionref{sec:glslink} for further details.)

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\pgls]
\cs{pgls}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This is inserts the value of the \gloskey{prefix} key (or
\gloskey{prefixfirst} key, on \gls{firstuse}) in front of
\cs{gls}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\Pgls]
\cs{Pgls}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
If the \gloskey{prefix} key (or \gloskey{prefixfirst}, on
\gls*{firstuse}) has been set, this displays the value of that key
with the first letter converted to upper case followed by
\cs{gls}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}. If that key hasn't
been set, this is equivalent to
\ics{Gls}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\PGLS]
\cs{PGLS}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
As \cs{pgls} but converts the prefix to upper case and uses
\ics{GLS} instead of \cs{gls}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\pglspl]
\cs{pglspl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
This is inserts the value of the \gloskey{prefixplural} key (or
\gloskey{prefixfirstplural} key, on \gls{firstuse}) in front of
\cs{glspl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\Pglspl]
\cs{Pglspl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
If the \gloskey{prefixplural} key (or \gloskey{prefixfirstplural}, on
\gls*{firstuse}) has been set, this displays the value of that key
with the first letter converted to upper case followed by
\cs{glspl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}. If that key hasn't
been set, this is equivalent to
\ics{Glspl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\PGLSpl]
\cs{PGLSpl}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert}
\end{definition}
As \cs{pglspl} but converts the prefix to upper case and uses
\ics{GLSpl} instead of \cs{glspl}.

\begin{example}{Using Prefixes}{ex:prefixes}
Continuing from Example~\ref{ex:determiners}, now that I've defined
my entries, I~can use them in the text via the above commands:
\begin{verbatim}
First use: \pgls{svm}. Next use: \pgls{svm}.
Singular: \pgls{sample}, \pgls{oeil}.
Plural: \pglspl{sample}, \pglspl{oeil}.
\end{verbatim}
which produces:
\begin{quote}
First use: a~support vector machine (SVM). Next
use: an SVM.
Singular: a~sample, l'oeil. Plural: the samples, les yeux.
\end{quote}
For a complete document, see \samplefile{-prefix}.
\end{example}

This package also provides the commands described below, none of
which perform any check to determine the entry's existence.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\ifglshasprefix]
\cs{ifglshasprefix}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
\end{definition}
Does \meta{true part} if the entry identified by \meta{label} has a
non-empty value for the \gloskey{prefix} key.

This package also provides the following commands:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\ifglshasprefixplural]
\cs{ifglshasprefixplural}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
\end{definition}
Does \meta{true part} if the entry identified by \meta{label} has a
non-empty value for the \gloskey{prefixplural} key.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\ifglshasprefixfirst]
\cs{ifglshasprefixfirst}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
\end{definition}
Does \meta{true part} if the entry identified by \meta{label} has a
non-empty value for the \gloskey{prefixfirst} key.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\ifglshasprefixfirstplural]
\cs{ifglshasprefixfirstplural}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
\end{definition}
Does \meta{true part} if the entry identified by \meta{label} has a
non-empty value for the \csoptfmt{prefix\-first\-plural} key.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsentryprefix]
\cs{glsentryprefix}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
Displays the value of the \gloskey{prefix} key for the entry given
by \meta{label}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsentryprefixfirst]
\cs{glsentryprefixfirst}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
Displays the value of the \gloskey{prefixfirst} key for the entry given
by \meta{label}.

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsentryprefixplural]
\cs{glsentryprefixplural}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
Displays the value of the \gloskey{prefixplural} key for the entry given
by \meta{label}. (No check is performed to determine if the entry
exists.)

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsentryprefixfirstplural]
\cs{glsentryprefixfirstplural}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
Displays the value of the \gloskey{prefixfirstplural} key for the entry given
by \meta{label}. (No check is performed to determine if the entry
exists.)

There are also variants that convert the first letter to upper
case\footnote{The earlier caveats about initial non-Latin characters
apply.}:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\Glsentryprefix]
\cs{Glsentryprefix}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\Glsentryprefixfirst]
\cs{Glsentryprefixfirst}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\Glsentryprefixplural]
\cs{Glsentryprefixplural}\marg{label}
\end{definition}

\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\Glsentryprefixfirstplural]
\cs{Glsentryprefixfirstplural}\marg{label}
\end{definition}

\begin{important}
As with analogous commands such as \ics{Glsentrytext}, these
commands aren't expandable so can't be used in PDF bookmarks.
\end{important}

\begin{example}{Adding Determiner to Glossary Style}{ex:plist}
You can use the above commands to define a new glossary style that
uses the determiner. For example, the following style is a slight
modification of the \glostyle{list} style that inserts the prefix
before the name:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossarystyle{plist}{%
  \setglossarystyle{list}%
  \renewcommand*{\glossentry}[2]{%
    \item[\glsentryitem{##1}%
          \glsentryprefix{##1}%
          \glstarget{##1}{\glossentryname{##1}}]
       \glossentrydesc{##1}\glspostdescription\space ##2}%
}
\end{verbatim}
If you want to change the prefix separator (\cs{glsprefixsep}) then
the following is better:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossarystyle{plist}{%
  \setglossarystyle{list}%
  \renewcommand*{\glossentry}[2]{%
    \item[\glsentryitem{##1}%
          \ifglshasprefix{##1}{\glsentryprefix{##1}\glsprefixsep}{}%
          \glstarget{##1}{\glossentryname{##1}}]
       \glossentrydesc{##1}\glspostdescription\space ##2}%
}
\end{verbatim}
The conditional is also useful if you want the style to use an
uppercase letter at the start of the entry item:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossarystyle{plist}{%
  \setglossarystyle{list}%
  \renewcommand*{\glossentry}[2]{%
    \item[\glsentryitem{##1}%
          \glstarget{##1}%
          {%
            \ifglshasprefix{##1}%
            {\Glsentryprefix{##1}\glsprefixsep\glossentryname{##1}}%
            {\Glossentryname{##1}}%
          }]
       \glossentrydesc{##1}\glspostdescription\space ##2}%
}
\end{verbatim}
\end{example}

\chapter{Accessibility Support}\label{sec:accsupp}

Limited accessibility support is provided by the accompanying
\sty{glossaries-accsupp} package, but note that this package is
experimental and it requires the \sty{accsupp} package 
which is also listed as experimental. This package automatically
loads the \sty{glossaries} package. Any options are passed to
\sty{glossaries} (if it hasn't already been loaded). For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[acronym]{glossaries-accsupp}
\end{verbatim}
This will load \sty{glossaries} with the \pkgopt{acronym} package
option as well as loading \sty{glossaries-accsupp}.

If you are using the \gls{glossaries-extra} extension package, you
need to load \gls{glossaries-extra} with the \pkgopt*{accsupp}
package option. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[abbreviations,accsupp]{glossaries-extra}
\end{verbatim}
This will load \gls{glossaries-extra} (with the
\pkgopt*{abbreviations} option), \sty{glossaries} and
\sty{glossaries-accsupp} and make appropriate patches to integrate
the accessibility support with the extension commands.

The \sty{glossaries-accsupp} package defines
additional keys that may be used when defining glossary entries.
The keys are as follows:
\begin{description}\raggedright
\item[{\gloskey{access}}] The replacement text corresponding to
the \gloskey{name} key.

\item[{\gloskey{textaccess}}] The replacement text corresponding
to the \gloskey{text} key.

\item[{\gloskey{firstaccess}}] The replacement text corresponding
to the \gloskey{first} key.

\item[{\gloskey{pluralaccess}}] The replacement text corresponding
to the \gloskey{plural} key.

\item[{\gloskey{firstpluralaccess}}] The replacement text corresponding
to the \gloskey{firstplural} key.

\item[{\gloskey{symbolaccess}}] The replacement text corresponding
to the \gloskey{symbol} key.

\item[{\gloskey{symbolpluralaccess}}] The replacement text corresponding
to the \gloskey{symbolplural} key.

\item[{\gloskey{descriptionaccess}}] The replacement text corresponding
to the \gloskey{description} key.

\item[{\gloskey{descriptionpluralaccess}}] The replacement text corresponding
to the \gloskey{descriptionplural} key.

\item[{\gloskey{longaccess}}] The replacement text corresponding to
the \gloskey{long} key (used by \ics{newacronym}).

\item[{\gloskey{shortaccess}}] The replacement text corresponding to
the \gloskey{short} key (used by \ics{newacronym}).

\item[{\gloskey{longpluralaccess}}] The replacement text corresponding to
the \gloskey{longplural} key (used by \ics{newacronym}).

\item[{\gloskey{shortpluralaccess}}] The replacement text corresponding to
the \gloskey{shortplural} key (used by \ics{newacronym}).

\item[{\gloskey{user1access}}] The replacement text corresponding to
the \gloskey{user1} key.

\item[{\gloskey{user2access}}] The replacement text corresponding to
the \gloskey{user2} key.

\item[{\gloskey{user3access}}] The replacement text corresponding to
the \gloskey{user3} key.

\item[{\gloskey{user4access}}] The replacement text corresponding to
the \gloskey{user4} key.

\item[{\gloskey{user5access}}] The replacement text corresponding to
the \gloskey{user5} key.

\item[{\gloskey{user6access}}] The replacement text corresponding to
the \gloskey{user6} key.
\end{description}
For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{tex}{name={\TeX},description={Document 
preparation language},access={TeX}}
\end{verbatim}
Now the \gls{linktext} produced by \verb|\gls{tex}| will be:
\begin{verbatim}
\BeginAccSupp{ActualText={TeX}}\TeX\EndAccSupp{}
\end{verbatim}
The sample file \samplefile{accsupp} illustrates the
\sty{glossaries-accsupp} package.

If you prefer to use \sty{accessibility} or \sty{tagpdf} instead of
\sty{accsupp} then you'll need to define \cs{gls@accsupp@engine} and
\cs{gls@accessibility} before loading \sty{glossaries-accsupp}. See
\ifpdf section~\ref*{sec:code:accsupp} \else the section
\qt{Accessibility Support}\fi in the documented code for further
details.

The PDF specification identifies three different types of
replacement text:
\begin{description}
\item[Alt] Description of some content that's non-textual (for
example, an image). A word break is assumed after the content.
\item[ActualText] A character or sequence of characters that
replaces textual content (for example, a dropped capital, a
ligature or a symbol). No word break is assumed after the content.
\item[E] Expansion of an abbreviation to avoid ambiguity (for
example, \qt{St} could be short for \qt{saint} or \qt{street}).
\end{description}

\begin{important}
Many PDF viewers don't actually support any type of replacement text. Some may
support \qt{ActualText} but not \qt{Alt} or \qt{E}. 
\href{https://pdfbox.apache.org/}{PDFBox}'s \qt{PDFDebugger} tool
can be used to inspect the PDF content to make sure that the
replacement text has been correctly set.
\end{important}

If you define abbreviations with \ics{newacronym}, the
\gloskey{shortaccess} field will automatically be set to:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsdefaultshortaccess]
\cs{glsdefaultshortaccess}\marg{long}\marg{short}
\end{definition}
With the base \styfmt{glossaries} package this just expands to
\meta{long}. With \gls{glossaries-extra} this expands to \meta{long}
(\meta{short}). This command must be fully expandable. It expands
when the abbreviation is defined.

As from \sty{glossaries-accsupp} v4.45, the helper command used to
identify the replacement text depends on the field name. Previous
versions just used:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsaccsupp]
\cs{glsaccsupp}\marg{replacement}\marg{content}
\end{definition}
for all fields. This is defined to use \texttt{ActualText}, which is
appropriate for symbols but not for abbreviations.

As from v4.45, there's a new helper command:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsfieldaccsupp]
\cs{glsfieldaccsupp}\marg{replacement}\marg{content}\marg{field}\marg{label}
\end{definition}
This will use \csmeta{gls}{field}{accsupp} if it's defined otherwise
it will just use \cs{glsaccsupp}. There are just two of these field
commands for \gloskey{short} and \gloskey{shortplural}:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsshortaccsupp]
\cs{glsshortaccsupp}\marg{replacement}\marg{content}
\end{definition}
which is like \cs{glsaccsupp} but uses \texttt{E} instead of
\texttt{ActualText} and
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsshortplaccsupp]
\cs{glsshortplaccsupp}\marg{replacement}\marg{content}
\end{definition}
which just does \cs{glsshortaccsupp}\marg{replacement}\marg{content}.
Note that \meta{field} indicates the \emph{internal} field name
(such as \texttt{shortpl}) not the key name (such as
\texttt{shortplural}). See \tableref{tab:fieldmap}.

Rather than explicitly using \ics{BeginAccSupp}, these helper
commands can use:
\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsaccessibility]
\cs{glsaccessibility}\oarg{options}\marg{tag}\marg{value}\marg{content}
\end{definition}
where \meta{tag} is one of \texttt{E}, \texttt{Alt} or
\texttt{ActualText}. The replacement text for \meta{content} should be provided in
\meta{value}.
This does:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{BeginAccSupp}\mgroup{\meta{tag}=\marg{value},\meta{options}}\meta{content}\ics{EndAccSupp}\mgroup{}
\end{alltt}
but it also provides debugging information if \pkgopt[showaccsupp]{debug} is used.
If you explicitly use \cs{BeginAccSupp} instead of this command then
the debugging support won't be available.

You can define your own custom helper commands for specific fields
that require them. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\glssymbolaccsupp}[2]{%
 \glsaccessibility[method=hex,unicode]{ActualText}{#1}{#2}%
}
\end{verbatim}
This definition requires the replacement text to be specified with
the hexadecimal character code. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{int}{name={int},description={integral},
  symbol={\ensuremath{\int}},symbolaccess={222B}
}
\end{verbatim}

If you are using \gls{glossaries-extra}, then \cs{glsfieldaccsupp}
will first test for the existence of
\csmetameta*{glsxtr}{category}{}{field}{accsupp}
and \csmeta*{glsxtr}{category}{accsupp} and then for
\csmeta{gls}{field}{accsupp}. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage{siunitx}
\usepackage[accsupp]{glossaries-extra}

\glsnoexpandfields

\newcommand{\glsxtrsymbolaccsupp}[2]{%
 \glsaccessibility[method=hex,unicode]{ActualText}{#1}{#2}%
}

\newcommand{\glsxtrunitaccsupp}[2]{\glsaccessibility{E}{#1}{#2}}

\newglossaryentry{cm}{name={\si{\centi\metre}},
 access={centimetre},
 description={centimetre},
 category=unit
}

\newglossaryentry{int}{name={\ensuremath{\int}},access={222B},
  description={integral},category={symbol}
}
\end{verbatim}
The above uses the \csmeta*{glsxtr}{category}{accsupp} form that
doesn't include the field name. Remember that if you want to supply
a command specifically for the \gloskey{name} field then it won't be
picked up by the \gloskey{text}, \gloskey{plural}, \gloskey{firstplural} and
\gloskey{first} fields. You'd need to supply them all. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\glsnameaccsupp}[2]{%
 \glsaccessibility[method=hex,unicode]{ActualText}{#1}{#2}%
}
\newcommand{\glstextaccsupp}{\glsnameaccsupp}
\newcommand{\glspluralaccsupp}{\glsnameaccsupp}
\newcommand{\glsfirstaccsupp}{\glsnameaccsupp}
\newcommand{\glsfirstplaccsupp}{\glsnameaccsupp}
\end{verbatim}

See \ifpdf section~\ref*{sec:code:accsupp} in \fi the documented code
(\texttt{glossaries-code.pdf}) for further details. I~recommend
that you also read the \sty{accsupp} documentation.  See also the
\sty{accessibility} and \sty{tagpdf} packages.

\chapter{Sample Documents}
\label{sec:samples}

The \styfmt{glossaries} package is provided with some sample
documents that illustrate the various functions. These should
be located in the \texttt{samples} subdirectory (folder) of the
\styfmt{glossaries} documentation directory. This location varies
according to your operating system and \TeX\ distribution. You
can use \texttt{texdoc} to locate the main glossaries documentation.
For example, in a
\href{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/novices/html/terminal.html}{terminal or command prompt}, type:
\begin{prompt}
texdoc -l glossaries
\end{prompt}
This should display a list of all the files in the \styfmt{glossaries}
documentation directory with their full pathnames. (The GUI version
of \texttt{texdoc} may also provide you with the information.)

If you can't find the sample files on your computer, they are also available
from your nearest CTAN mirror at
\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries/samples/}. 
Each sample file listed below has a hyperlink to the file's location on
the CTAN mirror.

The \gls{glossaries-extra} package and \gls{bib2gls}
provide some additional sample files. There are also examples in the
\gallery{}{Dickimaw Books Gallery}.

If you prefer to use \gls{UTF-8} aware engines (\texttt{xelatex} or
\texttt{lualatex}) remember that you'll need to switch from
\styfmt{fontenc} \& \styfmt{inputenc} to \styfmt{fontspec} where
appropriate.

\commandpromptnote
If you get any errors or unexpected results, check that you have up-to-date versions of
all the required packages. (Search the log file for lines starting
with \qt{\texttt{Package:\ }}.) Where \sty{hyperref} is loaded you will 
get warnings about non-existent references that look something like:
\begin{verbatim}
pdfTeX warning (dest): name{glo:aca} has been 
referenced but does not exist, replaced by a fixed one
\end{verbatim}
These warnings may be ignored on the first \LaTeX\ run. (The
destinations won't be defined until the glossary has been created.)

\section{Basic}
\label{sec:samplesbasic}

\exitem[minimal]{gls} This document is a
minimal working example. You can test your installation using this
file. To create the complete document you will need to do the
following steps:
  \begin{enumerate}
  \item Run \texttt{minimalgls.tex} through \LaTeX\ either by 
  typing
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex minimalgls
\end{prompt}
  in a terminal or by using the relevant button or menu item in
  your text editor or front-end. This will create the required 
  associated files but you will not see the glossary in the document.

  \item If you have Perl installed, run \gls{makeglossaries} on the document (\sectionref{sec:makeglossaries}). This can
  be done on a terminal by typing:
\begin{prompt}
makeglossaries minimalgls
\end{prompt}
  otherwise do:
\begin{prompt}
makeglossaries-lite minimalgls
\end{prompt}
  If for some reason you want to call \gls{makeindex} explicitly, you can do this
  in a terminal by typing (all on one line):
\begin{prompt}
makeindex -s minimalgls.ist -t minimalgls.glg -o minimalgls.gls minimalgls.glo
\end{prompt}
  See \sectionref{sec:makeindexapp} for further details on using 
   \gls*{makeindex} explicitly.

  Note that if the file name contains spaces, you will need to use
  the double-quote character to delimit the name.

  \item Run \texttt{minimalgls.tex} through \LaTeX\ again (as step~1)
  \end{enumerate}
You should now have a complete document. The number following
each entry in the glossary is the location number. By default, this 
is the page number where the entry was referenced.

The \pkgopt{acronym} package option creates a second glossary with
the label \texttt{acronym} (which can be referenced with
\cs{acronymtype}). If you decide to enable this option then there
will be a second set of glossary files that need to be processed by
\gls{makeindex}. If you use \gls{makeglossaries} or
\gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua} you don't need to worry about it, as
those scripts automatically detect which files need to be processed
and will run \gls{makeindex} (or \gls{xindy}) the appropriate number
of times.

If for some reason you don't want to use \gls{makeglossaries} or
\gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua} and you want the \pkgopt{acronym}
package option then the complete build process is:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex minimalgls
makeindex -s minimalgls.ist -t minimalgls.glg -o minimalgls.gls minimalgls.glo
makeindex -s minimalgls.ist -t minimalgls.alg -o minimalgls.acr minimalgls.acn
pdflatex minimalgls
\end{prompt}

There are three other files that can be used as 
\href{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/minexample/}{minimal working
examples}: \mirrorsamplefile{mwe-gls.tex}, \mirrorsamplefile{mwe-acr.tex} and
\mirrorsamplefile{mwe-acr-desc.tex}.

\glsxtrnote
If you want to try out the \gls{glossaries-extra} extension package,
you need to replace the package loading line:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[acronym]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries}}
\end{alltt}
with:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[acronym\strong{,\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods}}]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
Note the different default package options. (You may omit the
\pkgopt{acronym} package option in both cases if you only want a
single glossary.) The \gls{glossaries-extra} package internally
loads the base \styfmt{glossaries} package so you don't need to
explicitly load both (in fact, it's better to let
\gls{glossaries-extra} load \styfmt{glossaries}).

Next, replace:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{setacronymstyle}\mgroup{long-short}
\end{alltt}
with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[\strong{acronym}]\mgroup{long-short}
\end{alltt}
The optional argument \cat{acronym} identifies the category that
this style should be applied to. The \cs{newacronym} command
provided by the base \styfmt{glossaries} package is redefined by
\gls{glossaries-extra} to use \ics*{newabbreviation} with the category
set to \cat{acronym}.

If you prefer to replace \cs{newacronym} with \ics*{newabbreviation}
then the default category is \cat{abbreviation} so the style should
instead be:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[\strong{abbreviation}]\mgroup{long-short}
\end{alltt}
This is actually the default category if the optional argument is
omitted, so you can simply do:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}\mgroup{long-short}
\end{alltt}
The \abbrstyle{long-short} style is the default for the
\cat{abbreviation} category so you can omit this line completely if
you replace \cs{newacronym}. (The default style for the
\cat{acronym} category is \abbrstyle{short-nolong}, which only shows
the short form on \gls{firstuse}.)

As mentioned earlier, the \pkgopt{acronym} package option creates a
new glossary with the label \texttt{acronym}. This is independent of
the \cat{acronym} category.  You can use the \pkgopt{acronym}
package option with either \cs{newacronym} or \ics*{newabbreviation}.

You may instead prefer to use the \pkgopt*{abbreviations} package
option, which creates a new glossary with the label \texttt{abbreviations}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{abbreviations}},\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods}]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
This can again be used with either \cs{newacronym} or
\ics*{newabbreviation}, but the file extensions are different. This
isn't a problem if you are using \gls{makeglossaries} or
\gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua}. If you are explicitly calling
\gls{makeindex} (or \gls{xindy}) then you need to modify the file
extensions.
See the \gls{glossaries-extra} user manual for further details.

If you use both the \pkgopt{acronym} and \pkgopt*{abbreviations}
package options then \cs{newacronym} will default to the
\texttt{acronym} glossary and \ics*{newabbreviation} will default to
the \texttt{abbreviations} glossary.

\bibglsnote
If you want to try \gls{bib2gls}, you first need to convert the
document to use \gls{glossaries-extra} as described above. Then add
the \pkgopt*{record} package option. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record}},\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods}]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
Next you need to convert the entry definitions into the
\filetype{bib} format required by \gls{bib2gls}. This can easily be
done with \gls{convertgls2bib}. For example:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -{}-preamble-only minimalgls.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
This will create a file called \strong{\nolinkurl{entries.bib}}. Next, replace:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{makeglossaries}
\end{alltt}
with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=\strong{entries}]
\end{alltt}
Now remove all the entry definitions in the preamble
(\cs{longnewglossaryentry}, \cs{newglossaryentry} and \cs{newacronym}
or \cs{newabbreviation}). 

The abbreviation style command
must go before \ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}. For example (if you are
using \cs{newacronym}):
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\mgroup{long-short}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries]
\end{alltt}
Finally, replace:
\begin{verbatim}
\printglossaries
\end{verbatim}
with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{printunsrtglossaries}
\end{alltt}
The document build is now:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex minimalgls
bib2gls minimalgls
pdflatex minimalgls
\end{prompt}

\exitem{DB} This document illustrates how
to load external files containing the glossary definitions. It also
illustrates how to define a new glossary type. This document has the
\gls{numberlist} suppressed and uses \hyperref[sec:glsadd]{\ics{glsaddall}} to add all
the entries to the glossaries without referencing each one
explicitly. (Note that it's more efficient to use
\gls{glossaries-extra} and \gls{bib2gls} if you have a large number
of entries.) To create the document do:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleDB
makeglossaries sampleDB
pdflatex sampleDB
\end{prompt}
or
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleDB
makeglossaries-lite sampleDB
pdflatex sampleDB
\end{prompt}
The glossary definitions are stored in the accompanying files
\mirrorsamplefile{database1.tex} and \mirrorsamplefile{database2.tex}. If for some
reason you want to call \gls{makeindex} explicitly you must
have a separate call for each glossary:
\begin{enumerate}
\item Create the main glossary (all on one line):
\begin{prompt}
makeindex -s sampleDB.ist -t sampleDB.glg -o sampleDB.gls sampleDB.glo
\end{prompt}
\item Create the secondary glossary (all on one line):
\begin{prompt}
makeindex -s sampleDB.ist -t sampleDB.nlg -o sampleDB.not sampleDB.ntn
\end{prompt}
Note that both \gls{makeglossaries} and \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua} do
this all in one call, so they not only make it easier because you
don't need to supply all the switches and remember all the
extensions but they also call \gls{makeindex} the appropriate number of times.
\end{enumerate}

\bibglsnote
If you want to switch to using \gls{bib2gls} with \gls{glossaries-extra}, you can convert
\mirrorsamplefile{database1.tex} and \mirrorsamplefile{database2.tex} to \filetype{bib}
files using \gls{convertgls2bib}:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib database1.tex database1.bib
convertgls2bib database2.tex database2.bib
\end{prompt}
The document code then needs to be:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{documentclass}\mgroup{article}

\cs{usepackage}[colorlinks,plainpages=false]\mgroup{hyperref}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record}},\xtrfont{postdot}]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}

\strong{\ics{newglossary*}}\mgroup{punc}\mgroup{Punctuation Characters}

\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=\mgroup{database1},
 \strong{\xtrfont{selection}=all},\resourceopt{sort}=en]
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=\mgroup{database2},\strong{\xtrfont{type}=punc,}
 \strong{\xtrfont{selection}=all},\resourceopt{sort}=letter-case]

\cs{begin}\mgroup{document}
\xtrfont{\cs{print\strong{unsrt}glossaries}}
\cs{end}\mgroup{document}
\end{alltt}
Note that the \pkgopt{nonumberlist} package option has been omitted.
It's not needed because there are no locations in this amended
document (whereas in the original \samplefile{DB} locations are
created with \cs{glsaddall}). The starred \ics{newglossary*} is used
since the \gls{makeindex}/\gls{xindy} extensions are now irrelevant.

Instead of using \gls{makeglossaries} you need to use \gls{bib2gls} 
when you build the document:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleDB
bib2gls sampleDB
pdflatex sampleDB
\end{prompt}
Note that one \gls{bib2gls} call processes all the indexing (rather
than one call per glossary). Unlike \gls{makeindex} and \gls{xindy},
\gls{bib2gls} processes each resource set in turn, but the resource
sets aren't linked to a specific glossary. Multiple glossaries may
be processed in a single resource set or sub-blocks of a single
glossary may be processed by multiple resource sets. In this
example, there happens to be one resource set per glossary because
each glossary requires a different sort method. (A locale-sensitive
alphabetical sort for the first and a character code sort for the
second.)

If you want letter groups, you need to use the \bibglslongopt{group}
switch:
\begin{prompt}
bib2gls -{}-group sampleDB
\end{prompt}
and use an appropriate glossary style.

See also \bibglsgallery{sorting}, \bibglsbegin\ and the \gls{bib2gls} user manual.

\section{Acronyms and First Use}
\label{sec:sampleacronyms}

\exitem{Acr} This document has some
sample abbreviations. It also adds the glossary to the table of contents,
so an extra run through \LaTeX\ is required to ensure the document
is up to date:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleAcr
makeglossaries sampleAcr
pdflatex sampleAcr
pdflatex sampleAcr
\end{prompt}
(or use \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua}).

Note that if the glossary is at the start of the document
and spans across multiple pages, then this can cause the locations
to be shifted. In that case, an extra \gls{makeglossaries} and
\LaTeX\ call are required. In this particular example, the glossary
is at the end of the document so it's not a problem. It's also not a
problem for a glossary at the start of the document if the page
numbering is reset at the end of the glossary. For example, if the
glossary is at the end of the front matter in a book-style document.

This document uses \ics{ifglsused} to determine whether to use
\qt{a} or \qt{an} in:
\begin{alltt}
\ldots\ is \ics{ifglsused}\mgroup{svm}\mgroup{an}\mgroup{a} \cs{gls}\mgroup{svm} \ldots
\end{alltt}
This clumsy bit of code can be tidied up with the
\sty{glossaries-prefix} package. Since that package automatically
loads \styfmt{glossaries} and passes all its options to the base
package it's possible to do a simple replacement of:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[style=long,toc]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
with:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[style=long,toc]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-prefix}}
\end{alltt}
The definition of \texttt{svm} now needs an adjustment:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{newacronym}[description=\mgroup{statistical pattern recognition 
technique\string~\cs{protect}\cs{cite}\mgroup{svm}},
\strong{prefixfirst=\mgroup{a\string~},prefix=\mgroup{an\ics{space}}}
]\mgroup{svm}\mgroup{svm}\mgroup{support vector machine}
\end{alltt}
The clumsy text can now simply be changed to:
\begin{alltt}
\ldots\ is \ics{pgls}\mgroup{svm} \ldots
\end{alltt}

\glsxtrnote
If you want to convert this sample document to use \gls{glossaries-extra},
you may want the patched version of the styles provided in \sty{glossary-long}, 
in which case you can also add \pkgopt*{stylemods}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{stylemods},}style=long]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
If you want to suppress all the other glossary style packages with
\pkgopt{nostyles}, then you need to specify exactly which package
(or packages) that you do want:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{nostyles,}\xtrfont{stylemods\strong{=long}},style=long]\mgroup{glossaries-extra}
\end{alltt}
(Now that \gls{glossaries-extra} is being used, there are more
available \qt{long} styles in the \sty*{glossary-longextra} package,
which you may prefer.)

If you want to use \sty{glossaries-prefix}, you can either load it
after \gls{glossaries-extra} or (with at least
\gls{glossaries-extra} v1.42) you can simply use the
\pkgopt*{prefix} package option.

Note that the \pkgopt{toc} package option has been dropped. This is
the default with \gls{glossaries-extra}, so it doesn't need to be
specified now. The document build is now shorter:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleAcr
makeglossaries sampleAcr
pdflatex sampleAcr
\end{prompt}
The third \LaTeX\ call is no longer required to make the table of
contents up-to-date. This is because \gls{glossaries-extra} provides
boilerplate text on the first \LaTeX\ call when the glossary files
are missing. This means that the glossary header is added to the
\filetype{toc} file on the first \LaTeX\ call, whereas with just the
base \styfmt{glossaries} package, the header isn't present until the
second \LaTeX\ call. (As with just the base \styfmt{glossaries}
package, if the glossary occurs at the start of the document without
a page reset after it then part of the build process needs repeating
to ensure all referenced page numbers are up-to-date. This problem isn't
specific to the \sty{glossaries} package.)

The other different default setting is the post-description
punctuation. The base package has \pkgopt[false]{nopostdot} as the
default. This means that a full stop (period) is automatically
inserted after the description in the glossary. The extension
package has \pkgopt[true]{nopostdot} as the default. If you want the
original behaviour then you can use \pkgopt[false]{nopostdot} or the
shorter synonym \pkgopt*{postdot}. 

The \gls{glossaries-extra} package has different
abbreviation handling that's far more flexible than that provided by
the base \styfmt{glossaries} package. The style now needs to be set with
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle} instead of \ics{setacronymstyle}:
\begin{alltt}
\strong{\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\mgroup{long-short-sc}}
\ics{newacronym}\mgroup{svm}\mgroup{svm}\mgroup{support vector machine}
\end{alltt}
(Note the different style name \abbrstyle{long-short-sc} instead of
\acrstyle{long-sc-short} and the optional argument \cat{acronym}.) If you
prefer to replace \ics{newacronym} with \ics*{newabbreviation} then
omit the optional argument:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}\mgroup{long-short-sc}
\ics*{newabbreviation}\mgroup{svm}\mgroup{svm}\mgroup{support vector machine}
\end{alltt}
(The optional argument of \ics*{setabbreviationstyle} is the
category to which the style should be applied. If it's omitted, 
\cat{abbreviation} is assumed. You can therefore have different
styles for different categories.)

Finally, you need to replace \ics{acrshort}, \ics{acrlong} and
\ics{acrfull} and their variants with \ics*{glsxtrshort}, \ics*{glsxtrlong} and
\ics*{glsxtrfull} etc.

\exitem{AcrDesc} This is similar to
the previous example, except that the abbreviations have an associated
description. As with the previous example, the glossary is added to
the table of contents, so an extra run through \LaTeX\ is required:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleAcrDesc
makeglossaries sampleAcrDesc
pdflatex sampleAcrDesc
pdflatex sampleAcrDesc
\end{prompt}
This document uses the \pkgopt{acronym} package option, which
creates a new glossary used by \cs{newacronym}. This leaves the
default \texttt{main} glossary available for general terms. However,
in this case there are no general terms so the \texttt{main}
glossary is redundant. The \pkgopt{nomain} package option will
prevent its creation. Obviously, if you decide to add some terms
with \cs{newglossaryentry} you will need to remove the
\pkgopt{nomain} option as the \texttt{main} glossary will now be
required.

\glsxtrnote
As with the previous example, if you want to convert this document
to use \gls{glossaries-extra} you need to make a few modifications.
The most obvious one is to replace \texttt{glossaries} with
\texttt{glossaries-extra} in the \cs{usepackage} argument. Again you
can omit \pkgopt{toc} as this is the default for
\gls{glossaries-extra}. As in the previous example, you may want to
use the patched styles. This document uses \glostyle{altlist} which
is provided by \sty{glossary-list}, so the style can be patched with
\pkgopt*{stylemods}.
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[acronym,nomain,style=altlist\strong{,\xtrfont{stylemods}}]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
You may prefer to replace the \pkgopt{acronym} option with
\pkgopt*{abbreviations}, but this will change the file extensions.
If you use \gls{makeglossaries} or \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua} you
don't need to worry about it.

Again the style command needs to be changed:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\mgroup{long-short-sc-desc}
\end{alltt}
(Note the change in style name \abbrstyle{long-short-sc-desc}
instead of \acrstyle{long-sc-short-desc} and the optional argument \cat{acronym}.) 

As with the previous example, if
you prefer to use \ics*{newabbreviation} instead of \ics{newacronym}
then you need to omit the optional argument:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}\mgroup{long-short-sc-desc}
\end{alltt}
The original document uses:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics{glsseeitemformat}}[1]\mgroup{\%
 \ics{acronymfont}\mgroup{\ics{glsentrytext}\mgroup{\#1}}}
\end{alltt}
to ensure that the cross-references (from the \gloskey{see} key) use
the acronym font. The new abbreviation styles don't
use \ics{acronymfont} so this isn't appropriate with
\gls{glossaries-extra}. If you're using at least version 1.42 of
\gls{glossaries-extra}, you don't need to do anything as it
automatically redefines \ics{glsseeitemformat} to take the style
formatting into account. If you have an earlier version you can
redefine this command as follows:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics{glsseeitemformat}}[1]\mgroup{\%
 \ics{ifglshasshort}\mgroup{\#1}\mgroup{\ics*{glsfmttext}\mgroup{\#1}}\mgroup{\ics*{glsfmtname}\mgroup{\#1}}\%
}
\end{alltt}
This will just show the short form in the cross-reference. If you
prefer the name instead (which includes the short and long form) you can use:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics{glsseeitemformat}}[1]\mgroup{\ics*{glsfmtname}\mgroup{\#1}}
\end{alltt}

The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides two additional
cross-referencing keys \xtrgloskey{seealso} and \xtrgloskey{alias}, 
so \texttt{\gloskey{see}=\mgroup{[see also]\mgroup{svm}}}
can be replaced with a more appropriate key:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{newacronym}[description=\mgroup{Statistical pattern recognition 
technique using the ``kernel trick''},
\strong{\xtrgloskey{seealso}=\mgroup{svm}},
]\mgroup{ksvm}\mgroup{ksvm}\mgroup{kernel support vector machine}
\end{alltt}

Finally, as with the previous example, you need to replace
\ics{acrshort}, \ics{acrlong} and \ics{acrfull} etc with
\ics*{glsxtrshort}, \ics*{glsxtrlong} and \ics*{glsxtrfull} etc.

\bibglsnote
If you want to convert this document so that it uses \gls{bib2gls},
you first need to convert it to use \gls{glossaries-extra}, as above, 
but remember that you now need the \pkgopt*{record} option:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[acronym,nomain,style=altlist,\strong{\xtrfont{record},\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods}}]
\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
Now you need to convert the abbreviation definitions to the \filetype{bib}
format required by \gls{bib2gls}. This can be done with:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -{}-preamble-only sampleAcrDesc.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
If you retained \ics{newacronym} from the original example file,
then the new \nolinkurl{entries.bib} file will contain entries
defined with \atentry{acronym}. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{acronym}\mgroup{ksvm,
  description = \mgroup{Statistical pattern recognition technique
  using the ``kernel trick''},
  \xtrfont{seealso} = \mgroup{svm},
  short = \mgroup{ksvm},
  long = \mgroup{kernel support vector machine}
}
\end{alltt}
If you switched to \ics*{newabbreviation} then the entries will
instead be defined with \atentry{abbreviation}.

Next replace \cs{makeglossaries} with the resource command, but note
that the abbreviation style must be set first:
\begin{alltt}
\strong{\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\mgroup{long-short-sc-desc}}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries,\% terms defined in entries.bib
 \strong{\xtrfont{abbreviation-sort-fallback}=long}]
\end{alltt}
Another possibility is to make \atentry{acronym} behave as though it
was actually \atentry{abbreviation}:
\begin{alltt}
\strong{\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}\mgroup{long-short-sc-desc}}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries,\resourceopt{abbreviation-sort-fallback}=long\strong{,
 entry-type-aliases=\mgroup{acronym=abbreviation}}]
\end{alltt}
Note that the category is now \cat{abbreviation} not \cat{acronym} so the optional
argument of \ics*{setabbreviationstyle} needs adjusting.

If the \gloskey{sort} field is missing (which should usually be the
case), then both \atentry{acronym} and \atentry{abbreviation} will
fallback on the \gloskey{short} field (not the \gloskey{name} field,
which is usually set by the style and therefore not visible to
\gls{bib2gls}). For some styles, as in this example, it's more
appropriate to sort by the long form so the fallback is changed.
(Remember that you will break this fallback mechanism if you
explicitly set the sort value.) See the \gls{bib2gls} manual for
further details and other examples.

Remember to delete any \cs{newacronym} or \cs{newabbreviation} in
the \filetype{tex} file. 
Finally replace \cs{printglossary} with \ics*{printunsrtglossary}.
The document build is now:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleAcrDesc
bib2gls sampleAcrDesc
pdflatex sampleAcrDesc
\end{prompt}

Note that it's now much easier to revert back to the descriptionless
style used in \samplefile{Acr}:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\mgroup{\strong{long-short-sc}}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries\strong{,\resourceopt{ignore-fields}=description}]
\end{alltt}
With the other options it would be necessary to delete all the
\gloskey{description} fields from the abbreviation definitions in
order to omit them, but with \gls{bib2gls} you can simply instruct
\gls{bib2gls} to ignore the description. This makes it much easier
to have a large database of abbreviations for use across multiple
documents that may or may not require the description.

\exitem{Desc} This is similar to the
previous example, except that it defines the abbreviations using
\ics{newglossaryentry} instead of \ics{newacronym}. As with the
previous example, the glossary is added to the table of contents, so
an extra run through \LaTeX\ is required:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleDesc
makeglossaries sampleDesc
pdflatex sampleDesc
pdflatex sampleDesc
\end{prompt}
This sample file demonstrates the use of the \gloskey{first} and
\gloskey{text} keys but in general it's better to use
\ics{newacronym} instead as it's more flexible. For even greater
flexibility use \ics*{newabbreviation} provided by \gls{glossaries-extra}.
For other variations, such as showing the symbol on \gls{firstuse},
you may prefer to make use of the post-link category hook. For
examples, see the section \qt{Changing the Formatting} in \bibglsbegin.

\exitem{FnAcrDesc} This document has some sample abbreviations that
use the \acrstyle{footnote-sc-desc} acronym style. As with the previous example, 
the glossary is added to the table of contents, so an extra run through 
\LaTeX\ is required:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleFnAcrDesc
makeglossaries sampleFnAcrDesc
pdflatex sampleFnAcrDesc
pdflatex sampleFnAcrDesc
\end{prompt}
\glsxtrnote
If you want to convert this sample document to use
\gls{glossaries-extra}, then you just need to follow the same steps
as for \samplefile{Acr} with a slight modification. This time the 
\abbrstyle{short-sc-footnote-desc} abbreviation style is needed:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\mgroup{short-sc-footnote-desc}
\end{alltt}
The command redefinitions (performed with \cs{renewcommand}) should
now all be deleted as they are no longer applicable.

You may prefer to use the \abbrstyle{short-sc-postfootnote-desc}
style instead. There are subtle differences between the \abbrstyle{postfootnote} and
\abbrstyle{footnote} set of styles. Try changing the abbreviation style to
\abbrstyle{short-sc-footnote} and compare the location of the footnote marker
with the two styles.

This modified sample file now has a shorter build:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleFnAcrDesc
makeglossaries sampleFnAcrDesc
pdflatex sampleFnAcrDesc
\end{prompt}
This is because the \gls{glossaries-extra} package produces
boilerplate text when the glossary file is missing (on the first
\LaTeX\ run) which adds the glossary title to the table of contents
(\filetype{toc}) file.

\exitem{CustomAcr} This document has some sample abbreviations with a
custom acronym style. It also adds the glossary to the table of
contents, so an extra run through \LaTeX\ is required:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleCustomAcr
makeglossaries sampleCustomAcr
pdflatex sampleCustomAcr
pdflatex sampleCustomAcr
\end{prompt}
This is a slight variation on the previous example where the name is
in the form \meta{long} (\meta{short}) instead of \meta{short}
(\meta{long}), and the \gloskey{sort} key is set to the long form
instead of the short form.  On \gls{firstuse}, the footnote text is
in the form \meta{long}: \meta{description} (instead of just the
long form). This requires defining a new acronym
style that inherits from the \acrstyle{footnote-sc-desc} style.

\glsxtrnote
The conversion to \gls{glossaries-extra} starts in much the same way
as the previous examples:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[acronym,nomain,\strong{\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods},}style=altlist]
\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
The abbreviation styles have associated helper commands that may be
redefined to make minor modifications. These redefinitions should be
done before the abbreviations are defined.

The \abbrstyle{short-sc-footnote-desc} abbreviation style is the closest match
to the requirement, so replace the \cs{setacronymstyle} command
with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\mgroup{short-sc-footnote-desc}
\end{alltt}
Again, you may prefer \abbrstyle{short-sc-postfootnote-desc}. Both
styles use the same helper commands.

Next some adjustments need to be made to fit the new requirements.
The name needs to be \meta{long} (\meta{short}):
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrfootnotedescname}}\mgroup{\%
  \cs{protect}\strong{\ics*{glslongfont}\mgroup{\cs{the}\ics{glslongtok}}}\%
  \cs{protect}\ics*{glsxtrfullsep}\mgroup{\cs{the}\ics{glslabeltok}}\%
  \cs{protect}\ics*{glsxtrparen}\mgroup{\cs{protect}\strong{\ics*{glsabbrvfont}\mgroup{\cs{the}\ics{glsshorttok}}}}\%
}
\end{alltt}
This command expands when the abbreviations are defined so take care
to \cs{protect} commands that shouldn't be expanded at that point,
and make sure that the token registers that store the label, long
and short values are able to expand. Similarly the sort value needs
adjusting:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrfootnotedescsort}}\mgroup{\strong{\cs{the}\ics{glslongtok}}}
\end{alltt}
The footnote for all the footnote abbreviation styles is produced
with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsxtrabbrvfootnote}\marg{label}\marg{text}
\end{alltt}
where \meta{text} is the singular or plural long form, depending on
what command was used to reference the abbreviation (\cs{gls},
\cs{glspl} etc). This can simply be redefined as:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrabbrvfootnote}}[2]\mgroup{\ics{footnote}\mgroup{\%
  \#2: \ics{glsentrydesc}\mgroup{\#1}}}
\end{alltt}
This will mimic the result from the original sample document.

You may prefer to replace \verb|#2| with a reference to a
specific field (or fields). For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrabbrvfootnote}}[2]\mgroup{\ics{footnote}\mgroup{\%
 \ics*{Glsfmtlong}\mgroup{\#1} (\ics*{glsfmtshort}\mgroup{\#1}): \ics{glsentrydesc}\mgroup{\#1}.}}
\end{alltt}
As with the earlier \samplefile{AcrDesc}, you need to remove or change the redefinition of
\ics{glsseeitemformat} since \cs{acronymfont} is no longer appropriate.

In the original \texttt{sampleCustomAcr.tex} source code, I started
the description with a capital:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym[description={Statistical pattern recognition 
technique using the ``kernel trick''},
see={[see also]{svm}},
]{ksvm}{ksvm}{kernel support vector machine}
\end{verbatim}
This leads to a capital letter after the colon in the footnote,
which is undesirable, but I would like to have the description start
with a capital in the glossary. The solution to this problem is
easy with \gls{glossaries-extra}. I start the description with a
lowercase letter and set the \attr{glossdesc} attribute to
\optfmt{firstuc}:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{acronym}\mgroup{glossdesc}\mgroup{firstuc}
\end{alltt}
The abbreviation definitions are modified slightly:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{newacronym}[description=\mgroup{\strong{s}tatistical pattern recognition 
technique using the ``kernel trick''},
\strong{\xtrgloskey{seealso}=\mgroup{svm}},
]\mgroup{ksvm}\mgroup{ksvm}\mgroup{kernel support vector machine}
\end{alltt}
Note the use of the \xtrgloskey{seealso} key, which is only
available with \gls{glossaries-extra}.

If you prefer to use \ics*{newabbreviation} instead of
\ics{newacronym}, then the category needs to be
\cat{abbreviation} rather than \cat{acronym}:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{\strong{abbreviation}}\mgroup{glossdesc}\mgroup{firstuc}
\end{alltt}
and the style command needs to be adjusted so that it omits the
optional argument. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}\mgroup{short-sc-postfootnote-desc}
\end{alltt}

\exitem{-FnDesc} This example
defines a custom display format that puts the description in a
footnote on \gls{firstuse}.
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-FnDesc
makeglossaries sample-FnDesc
pdflatex sample-FnDesc
\end{prompt}
In order to prevent nested hyperlinks, this document uses the
\pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst} package option (otherwise the footnote
marker hyperlink would be inside the hyperlink around the
\gls{linktext} which would result in a nested hyperlink).

\glsxtrnote
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package has category post-link hooks that
make it easier to adjust the formatting. The post-link hook is
placed after the hyperlink around the \gls{linktext}, so a hyperlink
created by \ics{footnote} in the post-link hook won't cause a nested
link. This means that the \pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst} option isn't
required:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods}]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}

\begin{important}
Never use commands like \cs{gls} or \cs{glsdesc} in the post-link
hook as you can end up with infinite recursion. Use commands that
don't themselves have a post-link hook, such as \cs{glsentrydesc} or
\cs{glossentrydesc}, instead.
\end{important}

In the original \texttt{sample-FnDesc.tex} file, the format was
adjusted with:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics{glsentryfmt}}\mgroup{\%
  \ics{glsgenentryfmt}
  \ics{ifglsused}\mgroup{\ics{glslabel}}\mgroup{}\mgroup{\ics{footnote}\mgroup{\ics{glsentrydesc}\mgroup{\ics{glslabel}}}}%
}
\end{alltt}
This can be changed to:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsdefpostlink}
\mgroup{general}\% category label
\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrifwasfirstuse}\mgroup{\ics{footnote}\mgroup{\ics{glsentrydesc}\mgroup{\ics{glslabel}}}}\mgroup{}}
\end{alltt}
This sets the post-link hook for the \cat{general} category
(which is the default category for entries defined with \ics{newglossaryentry}). If I
added some abbreviations (which have a different category) then this
change wouldn't apply to them.

The first paragraph in the document is:
\begin{verbatim}
First use: \gls{sample}.
\end{verbatim}
So the PDF will have the word \qt{sample} (the \gls{linktext}
created by \verb|\gls{sample}|) as a hyperlink to the entry in the
glossary followed by the footnote marker, which is a hyperlink to
the footnote. This is then followed by the sentence terminator. 
\qt{First use: sample\textsuperscript{1}.}

It would look tidier if the footnote marker could be shifted after
the full stop. \qt{First use: sample.\textsuperscript{1}} 
This can easily be achieved with a minor modification:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsdefpostlink}
\mgroup{general}\% category label
\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrifwasfirstuse}
 \mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrdopostpunc}\mgroup{\ics{footnote}\mgroup{\ics{glsentrydesc}\mgroup{\ics{glslabel}}}}}\%
 \mgroup{}\%
}
\end{alltt}
You may prefer to use \ics{glossentrydesc} instead of
\ics{glsentrydesc}. This will obey the \attr{glossdesc} attribute.
If you append \ics{glspostdescription}, you can also pick up the
\pkgopt*{postdot} package option. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{general}\mgroup{glossdesc}\mgroup{firstuc}

\ics*{glsdefpostlink}
\mgroup{general}\% category label
\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrifwasfirstuse}
 \mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrdopostpunc}\mgroup{\ics{footnote}\mgroup{\%
    \strong{\ics{glossentrydesc}}\mgroup{\ics{glslabel}}\strong{\ics{glspostdescription}}}}}\%
 \mgroup{}\%
}
\end{alltt}
Alternatively, you could just use \ics{Glsentrydesc} and explicitly
append the full stop.

\exitem{-custom-acronym}
This document illustrates how to define your own acronym style if
the predefined styles don't suit your requirements.
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-custom-acronym
makeglossaries sample-custom-acronym
pdflatex sample-custom-acronym
\end{prompt}
In this case, a style is defined to show the short form in the text
with the long form and description in a footnote on \gls{firstuse}.
The long form is used for the \gloskey{sort} value.
The short form is displayed in \gls{smallcaps} in the main part of the
document but in uppercase in the list of acronyms. (So it's a slight
variation of some of the examples above.) The \gloskey{name} is set
to the long form (starting with an initial capital) followed by the
all caps short form in parentheses. The final requirement is that
the inline form should show the long form followed by the short form
in parentheses.

\glsxtrnote
As with \samplefile{FnAcrDesc}, the \abbrstyle{short-sc-footnote-desc}
and \abbrstyle{short-sc-postfootnote-desc} abbreviation styles produce 
almost the required effect so one of those can be used as a starting point. 
However the final requirement doesn't fit. It's now necessary to actually define a custom
abbreviation style, but it can mostly inherit from the
\abbrstyle{short-sc-footnote-desc} or \abbrstyle{short-sc-postfootnote-desc} style:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{newabbreviationstyle}\mgroup{custom-fn}\%
\mgroup{\%
  \ics*{GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleSetup}\mgroup{short-sc-footnote-desc}\%
}\%
\mgroup{\%
  \ics*{GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleFmts}\mgroup{short-sc-footnote-desc}\%
  \cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrinlinefullformat}}[2]\mgroup{\%
    \strong{\ics*{glsfirstlongfootnotefont}}\mgroup{\strong{\ics*{glsaccesslong}\mgroup{\#\#1}}\%
       \ics*{ifglsxtrinsertinside}\#\#2\cs{fi}}\%
     \ics*{ifglsxtrinsertinside}\cs{else}\#\#2\cs{fi}\ics*{glsxtrfullsep}\mgroup{\#\#1}\%
    \ics*{glsxtrparen}\mgroup{\strong{\ics*{glsfirstabbrvscfont}\mgroup{\ics*{glsaccessshort}\mgroup{\#\#1}}}}\%
  }\%
  \cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrinlinefullplformat}}[2]\mgroup{\%
    \strong{\ics*{glsfirstlongfootnotefont}}\mgroup{\strong{\ics*{glsaccesslongpl}\mgroup{\#\#1}}\%
       \ics*{ifglsxtrinsertinside}\#\#2\cs{fi}}%
    \ics*{ifglsxtrinsertinside}\cs{else}\#\#2\cs{fi}\ics*{glsxtrfullsep}\mgroup{\#\#1}\%
    \ics*{glsxtrparen}\mgroup{\strong{\ics*{glsfirstabbrvscfont}\mgroup{\ics*{glsaccessshortpl}\mgroup{\#\#1}}}}\%
  }%
  \cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{Glsxtrinlinefullformat}}[2]\mgroup{\%
    \strong{\ics*{glsfirstlongfootnotefont}}\mgroup{\strong{\ics*{Glsaccesslong}\mgroup{\#\#1}}\%
       \ics*{ifglsxtrinsertinside}\#\#2\cs{fi}}\%
     \ics*{ifglsxtrinsertinside}\cs{else}\#\#2\cs{fi}\ics*{glsxtrfullsep}\mgroup{\#\#1}\%
    \ics*{glsxtrparen}\mgroup{\strong{\ics*{glsfirstabbrvscfont}\mgroup{\ics*{glsaccessshort}\mgroup{\#\#1}}}}\%
  }\%
  \cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{Glsxtrinlinefullplformat}}[2]\mgroup{\%
    \strong{\ics*{glsfirstlongfootnotefont}}\mgroup{\strong{\ics*{Glsaccesslongpl}\mgroup{\#\#1}}\%
       \ics*{ifglsxtrinsertinside}\#\#2\cs{fi}}\%
    \ics*{ifglsxtrinsertinside}\cs{else}\#\#2\cs{fi}\ics*{glsxtrfullsep}\mgroup{\#\#1}\%
    \ics*{glsxtrparen}\mgroup{\strong{\ics*{glsfirstabbrvscfont}\mgroup{\ics*{glsaccessshortpl}\mgroup{\#\#1}}}}\%
  }\%
}
\end{alltt}
(See the \gls{glossaries-extra} user manual for further details.)

This new custom style now needs to be set:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\mgroup{custom-fn}
\end{alltt}
Remember that if you decide to use \ics*{newabbreviation} instead 
of \ics{newacronym} then the category will be \cat{abbreviation} not \cat{acronym}:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}\mgroup{custom-fn}
\end{alltt}
This custom style simply adjusts the inline full form. There are other
adjustments to be made that apply to the inherited style. (The alternative is to
design a new style from scratch.) The footnote contains the long form followed by the
description. This is the same as the modification to an earlier
example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrabbrvfootnote}}[2]\mgroup{\ics{footnote}\mgroup{\#2:
\ics{glsentrydesc}\mgroup{\#1}.}}
\end{alltt}
As with \samplefile{CustomAcr}, if you specifically
want the singular long form then you can ignore the second argument.
For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrabbrvfootnote}}[2]\mgroup{\ics{footnote}
 \mgroup{\ics*{Glsfmtlong}\mgroup{\#1}: \ics{glsentrydesc}\mgroup{\#1}.}}
\end{alltt}

The \gloskey{name} now needs to be the long form followed by the
short form in parentheses, but note the new requirement that the
short form should now be in all capitals not \gls{smallcaps} and the
long form should start with a capital letter.
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrfootnotedescname}}\mgroup{\%
  \cs{protect}\ics*{glsfirstlongfootnotefont}
    \mgroup{\ics{makefirstuc}\mgroup{\cs{the}\ics{glslongtok}}}
  (\cs{protect}\ics{MakeTextUppercase}\mgroup{\cs{the}\ics{glsshorttok}})\%
}
\end{alltt}
The inherited abbreviation style uses the short form as the 
\gloskey{sort} value by default. This needs to be changed to the long form:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrfootnotedescsort}}\mgroup{\cs{the}\strong{\ics{glslongtok}}}
\end{alltt}

\begin{bib2gls}
If you want to switch to using \gls{bib2gls}, remember to set the
abbreviation style before the resource command and change the
default sort fallback field to \gloskey{long}, as with
\samplefile{AcrDesc}.
\end{bib2gls}

\exitem{-dot-abbr} This document illustrates how to use the base
post link hook to adjust the space factor after abbreviations.
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-dot-abbr
makeglossaries sampledot-abbrf
pdflatex sample-dot-abbr
\end{prompt}
This example creates a custom storage key that provides a similar
function to \gls{glossaries-extra}['s] \xtrgloskey{category} key.

\glsxtrnote
This example is much simpler with \gls{glossaries-extra}. The custom
storage key, which is defined using:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{glsaddstoragekey}\mgroup{abbrtype}\mgroup{word}\mgroup{\cs{abbrtype}}
\end{alltt}
can now be removed.

The \xtrgloskey{category} key is set to \texttt{initials} for
the initialisms (which are defined with the custom \cs{newacr}
command). The abbreviation styles can be set with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\mgroup{long-short}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[initials]\mgroup{long-short}
\end{alltt}
The \attr{discardperiod} attribute will discard any full stop
(period) following commands like \cs{gls}:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{initials}\mgroup{discardperiod}\mgroup{true}
\end{alltt}
(If you want to use the \attr{noshortplural} attribute then you will
also need to set the \attr{pluraldiscardperiod} attribute.)

The \gls{firstuse} is governed by the \attr{retainfirstuseperiod}
attribute. If set, the period won't be discarded if it follows the
\gls{firstuse} of commands like \cs{gls}. This is useful for styles
where the \gls{firstuse} doesn't end with the short form. In this
case, the \gls{firstuse} of the \abbrstyle{long-short} style ends
with a closing parenthesis, so the end of sentence might be clearer
if the period is retained:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{initials}\mgroup{retainfirstuseperiod}\mgroup{true}
\end{alltt}

The \attr{insertdots} attribute can automatically insert dots into
the short form with a final space factor adjustment:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{initials}\mgroup{insertdots}\mgroup{true}
\end{alltt}

The custom helper command defined in the example needs to be
slightly modified:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}*\mgroup{\cs{newabbr}}[1][]\mgroup{\%
 \strong{\ics*{newabbreviation}}[\strong{\xtrfont{category}}=initials,\#1]}
\end{alltt}
The definitions need to be slightly modified to work with the
\attr{insertdots} attribute:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newabbr}\mgroup{eg}\mgroup{\strong{eg}}\mgroup{eg}
\cs{newabbr}\mgroup{ie}\mgroup{\strong{ie}}\mgroup{ie}
\cs{newabbr}\mgroup{bsc}\mgroup{\strong{B\mgroup{Sc}}}\mgroup{Bachelor of Science}
\cs{newabbr}\mgroup{ba}\mgroup{\strong{BA}}\mgroup{BA}
\cs{newabbr}\mgroup{agm}\mgroup{\strong{AGM}}\mgroup{AGM}
\end{alltt}
(This makes it much easier to change your mind if you decide at a
later date to omit the dots, especially if you are storing all your
definitions in a file that's shared across multiple documents, but
note the need to group \qt{Sc}.)

The \qt{laser} definition remains unchanged:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym{laser}{laser}{light amplification by stimulated
emission of radiation}
\end{verbatim}
The remaining code in the preamble must now be removed. (It will
interfere with \gls{glossaries-extra}['s] category post-link hooks.)
No change is required in the document body.

See the \gls{glossaries-extra} user manual for further details about
category attributes and post-link hooks.

\exitem{-font-abbr} This document illustrates how to have different fonts
for abbreviations within the style. The document build is:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-font-abbr
makeglossaries sample-font-abbr
pdflatex sample-font-abbr
\end{prompt}
The acronym mechanism provided by the base \styfmt{glossaries}
package isn't well suited to having a mixture of styles. This
example provides a workaround that involves defining a new storage
key with \ics{glsaddstoragekey} that's used to hold the font
declaration (such as \cs{em}).
\begin{verbatim}
\glsaddstoragekey{font}{}{\entryfont}
\end{verbatim}
A new custom acronym style is defined that fetches the font
information from this new key so that it can be applied to the
abbreviation. Some helper commands are also provided to define the
different types of abbreviation:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand*{\newitabbr}[1][]{\newacronym[font=\em,#1]}
\newcommand*{\newupabbr}{\newacronym}

\newitabbr{eg}{e.g.}{exempli gratia}
\newupabbr{bsc}{BSc}{Bachelor of Science}
\end{verbatim}
This makes the \gls{firstuse} of \verb|\gls{eg}| appear as \qt{exempli
gratia (\emph{e.g.})} whereas the \gls{firstuse} of \verb|\gls{bsc}|
is \qt{Bachelor of Science (BSc)}.

\glsxtrnote
This example document is much simpler with \gls{glossaries-extra}.
First the \cs{usepackage} command needs adjusting:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods}]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
The custom storage key can now be removed and also the custom
acronym style. Now replace the \ics{setacronymstyle} line with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\mgroup{long-short-em}
\end{alltt}
and change the definition of the helper commands:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}*\mgroup{\cs{newitabbr}}\mgroup{\ics{newacronym}}
\cs{newcommand}*\mgroup{\cs{newupabbr}}\mgroup{\strong{\ics*{newabbreviation}}}
\end{alltt}
Note that the \verb|font=\em,| part has been removed from the
definition of the first command and the second command uses
\ics*{newabbreviation} instead of \ics{newacronym}. This means that
\cs{newitabbr} will default to
\xtrgloskey{category}\csoptfmt{=acronym} and \cs{newupabbr} will
default to \xtrgloskey{category}\csoptfmt{=abbreviation}. The
default style for the \cat{abbreviation} category is
\abbrstyle{long-short}, which is the required style for this
example. This just means that only the \cat{acronym} category needs
to have the style set (with the above \ics*{setabbreviationstyle}
command).

Finally, the \ics{acrshort}, \ics{acrlong} and \cs{acrfull} commands
need to be replaced with \ics*{glsxtrshort}, \ics*{glsxtrlong} and
\ics*{glsxtrfull}.

You may notice that the spacing after \qt{e.g\@.} and \qt{i.e\@.}
isn't correct. This is similar to the \samplefile{-dot-abbr} example
where the space factor needs adjusting. In this case I've inserted
the dots manually (rather than relying on the \attr{insertdots}
attribute). You can either remove the dots and use \attr{insertdots}
with \attr{discardperiod}:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{acronym}\mgroup{insertdots}\mgroup{true}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{acronym}\mgroup{discardperiod}\mgroup{true}

\cs{newitabbr}\mgroup{eg}\mgroup{\strong{eg}}\mgroup{exempli gratia}
\cs{newitabbr}\mgroup{ie}\mgroup{\strong{ie}}\mgroup{id est}
\end{alltt}
Or you can manually insert the space factor adjustment and only use
the \attr{discardperiod} attribute:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{acronym}\mgroup{discardperiod}\mgroup{true}

\cs{newitabbr}\mgroup{eg}\mgroup{e.g.\strong{\ics{@}}}\mgroup{exempli gratia}
\cs{newitabbr}\mgroup{ie}\mgroup{i.e.\strong{\ics{@}}}\mgroup{id est}
\end{alltt}

You don't have to use the \cat{acronym} category. You may prefer a
different label that fits better semantically. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[\strong{latinabbr}]\mgroup{long-short-em}
\cs{newcommand}*\mgroup{\cs{new\strong{latin}abbr}}[1][]\mgroup{\ics*{newabbreviation}[\xtrfont{category}=\strong{latinabbr},\#1]}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{\strong{latinabbr}}\mgroup{insertdots}\mgroup{true}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{\strong{latinabbr}}\mgroup{discardperiod}\mgroup{true}

\cs{new\strong{latin}abbr}\mgroup{eg}\mgroup{e.g.\strong{\ics{@}}}\mgroup{exempli gratia}
\cs{new\strong{latin}abbr}\mgroup{ie}\mgroup{i.e.\strong{\ics{@}}}\mgroup{id est}
\end{alltt}

\section{Non-Page Locations}
\label{sec:samplecounter}

\exitem{Eq} This document illustrates how
to change the location to something other than the page number. In
this case, the \ctrfmt{equation} counter is used since all glossary
entries appear inside an \env{equation} environment. To create
the document do:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleEq
makeglossaries sampleEq
pdflatex sampleEq
\end{prompt}
The \styfmt{glossaries} package provides some location formats, such
as \ics{hyperrm} and \ics{hyperbf}, that allow the locations in the \gls{numberlist}
to hyperlink to the appropriate place in the document (if
\sty{hyperref} has been used). Since it's not possible to include
the hyperlink name in the indexing information with \gls{makeindex}
and \gls{xindy}, the \styfmt{glossaries} package has to reform the
name from a prefix and the location value.

Unfortunately it's not always possible to split the link name into a
prefix and location.  That happens with the \ctrfmt{equation}
counter in certain classes, such as the \clsfmt{report} class (which
is used in this example). This means that it's necessary to redefine
\ics{theHequation} so that it has a format that fits the requirement:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*\theHequation{\theHchapter.\arabic{equation}}
\end{verbatim}
If you don't do this, the equation locations in the glossary won't
form valid hyperlinks.

Each glossary entry represents a mathematical symbol. This means
that with \optsto13 it's necessary to use the \gloskey{sort} key.
For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{Gamma}\mgroup{name=\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{Gamma}(z)},
description=Gamma function,\strong{sort=Gamma}}
\end{alltt}

\bibglsnote
If you want to switch to using \gls{bib2gls}, the first change you
need to make is to switch from explicitly loading
\styfmt{glossaries} to loading \gls{glossaries-extra} with the
\pkgopt*{record} package option. If \pkgopt+{only}{record} (or
\pkgopt*{record} without a value) is used, then the above
redefinition of \cs{theHequation} is still required. If
\pkgopt+{nameref}{record} is used instead then the redefinition of
\cs{theHequation} isn't required. You may also want to use the
\pkgopt*{stylemods} and \pkgopt*{postdot} options:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\strong{\xtrfont{record=nameref}},\xtrfont{stylemods},\xtrfont{postdot}},
 ucmark,style=long3colheader,counter=equation]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
The entries now need to be converted into the \filetype{bib} format required 
by \gls{bib2gls}, which can be done with \gls{convertgls2bib}:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -{}-preamble-only sampleEq.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
This will create a file called \nolinkurl{entries.bib} that starts:
\begin{alltt}
\% Encoding: UTF-8
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{Gamma,
  name = \mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{Gamma}(z)}},
  description = \mgroup{Gamma function}
}
\end{alltt}
You may prefer to change \atentry{entry} to \atentry{symbol}. (This
should be easy to do with your text editor's search and replace
function.)

Note that the \gloskey{sort} key has been omitted. This is because
it typically shouldn't be used. The difference between using
\atentry{entry} and \atentry{symbol} is that with \atentry{entry}
the sort value will be obtained from the \gloskey{name} but with
\atentry{symbol} the sort value will be obtained from the label.
If you explicitly use the \gloskey{sort} key then you will break
this behaviour. (If you try this example out, notice the difference
in the ordering if you switch between \atentry{entry} and
\atentry{symbol}. See also \bibglsgallery{sorting}.)

Next replace \cs{makeglossaries} with:
\begin{alltt}
\strong{\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries]}
\end{alltt}
If you have used \pkgopt+{nameref}{record} then you can remove the
redefinition of \cs{theHequation}. Next remove all the lines
defining the glossary entries (since they're now defined in the
\filetype{bib} file). 

Finally, replace \ics{printglossary} with \ics*{printunsrtglossary}:
\begin{alltt}
\strong{\ics*{printunsrtglossary}}[title=\mgroup{Index of Special Functions and 
Notations}]
\end{alltt}
The rest of the document remains unchanged (unless you want to use
\ics*{glsxtrfmt} as described in the following example).

\exitem{EqPg} This is similar to the previous example, but the \glspl{numberlist} are a
mixture of page numbers and equation numbers. This example adds the
glossary to the table of contents, so an extra \LaTeX\ run is
required:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleEqPg
makeglossaries sampleEqPg
pdflatex sampleEqPg
pdflatex sampleEqPg
\end{prompt}
As with the previous example, entries are defined like this:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{Gamma}{name=\ensuremath{\Gamma(z)},
description=Gamma function,sort=Gamma}
\end{verbatim}
The \pkgopt[equation]{counter} package option is used to set the
default indexing counter to \ctrfmt{equation}. This means that it
has to be changed for indexing outside of any numbered equation. For
example:
\begin{verbatim}
\glslink[format=hyperbf,counter=page]{Gamma}{gamma function}
\end{verbatim}
I've set the \gloskey[glslink]{format} to \locfmt{hyperbf} to indicate that
this is a primary reference. (Note that I'm using \ics{hyperbf} not
\ics{textbf} in order to include a hyperlink in the location.)

The \gls{linktext} here is almost identical to the
description. The only difference is that the description starts with
a capital. If it started with a lowercase character instead, I could
simply use \ics{glsdesc} instead of \ics{glslink}. If I change the
entry descriptions so that they all start with a lowercase letter
then I would need to create a custom glossary style that used
\ics{Glossentrydesc} instead of \ics{glossentrydesc}.

\glsxtrnote
If I switch to using \gls{glossaries-extra} I wouldn't need a new
glossary style. Instead I could just use the \attr{glossdesc}
attribute to perform the case change. Remember that the first change
to make is to replace \styfmt{glossaries} with
\gls{glossaries-extra}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[style=long3colheader,\strong{\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods}},
            counter=equation]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
The entries are now all defined so that the description starts with
a lowercase letter (except for the descriptions that start with a
proper noun). For example:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{Gamma}\mgroup{name=\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{Gamma}(z)},
description=\strong{g}amma function,sort=Gamma}
\end{alltt}
The \attr{glossdesc} attribute needs setting:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{general}\mgroup{glossdesc}\mgroup{firstuc}
\end{alltt}
This means that I can now use \ics{glsdesc} instead of \ics{glslink}.

It's a bit cumbersome typing \texttt{[format=hyperbf,counter=page]}
for each primary reference, but \gls{glossaries-extra} provides a
convenient way of having a third modifier for commands like \cs{gls}
and \cs{glstext}. This needs to be a single punctuation character
(but not \texttt{*} or \texttt{+} which are already in use). For
example:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrSetAltModifier}\mgroup{\strong{!}}\mgroup{format=hyperbf,counter=page}
\end{alltt}
Now \texttt{\ics{glsdesc}\strong{!}\mgroup{Gamma}} is equivalent to:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{glsdesc}[format=hyperbf,counter=page]\mgroup{Gamma}
\end{alltt}
So the text at the start of the \qt{Gamma Functions} chapter is now
just:
\begin{alltt}
The \ics{glsdesc}!\mgroup{Gamma} is defined as
\end{alltt}
which is much more compact. Similar changes can be made for the
other instance of \ics{glslink} where the \gls{linktext} is just
the description:
\begin{alltt}
The \ics{glsdesc}!\mgroup{erf} is defined as
\end{alltt}

There are three other instances of \ics{glslink}, such as:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{glslink}\mgroup{Gamma}\mgroup{\cs{Gamma}(x+1)}
\end{alltt}
If I just use \verb|\gls{Gamma}| then I would get $\Gamma(z)$ as the
\gls{linktext}. For entries like this that represent functions with
variable parameters it would be more convenient (and help with
consistency) if a command was available to easily replace the
parameters.

With the base \styfmt{glossaries} package, one simple solution that
works for this example is to save just the function symbol in the 
\gloskey{symbol} field, for example:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{Gamma}\mgroup{name=\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{Gamma}(z)},
\strong{symbol=\mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{Gamma}}},}
description=gamma function,sort=Gamma}
\end{alltt}
and then use:
\begin{alltt}
\strong{\ics{glssymbol}}\mgroup{Gamma}\strong[(\cs{Gamma}(x+1))\strong]
\end{alltt}
(which includes the function parameter inside the \gls{linktext}) or just:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{glssymbol}\mgroup{Gamma}(\cs{Gamma}(x+1))
\end{alltt}
(which has the function parameter after the \gls{linktext}).
This is a convenient approach where the extra material can simply
follow the symbol, and it can also be used with \gls{glossaries-extra}.

The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides another possibility. It
requires a command that takes a single argument, for example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\Gammafunction}[1]{\Gamma(#1)}
\end{verbatim}
The control sequence name (the command name without the leading
backslash) is stored in the field identified by the command \ics*{GlsXtrFmtField}
(this should be the internal field name not the key name, see \tableref{tab:fieldmap}). The
default is \field{useri} which corresponds to the \gloskey{user1}
key. This means that the \texttt{Gamma} entry would need to be
defined with \texttt{user1=Gammafunction}. With this approach, each
function entry would need a separate associated command.

Another approach is to store the parameterless function in the
\gloskey{symbol} key (as earlier) and have a more generic command that uses this
symbol. This requires the entry label, which can be obtained with
\cs{glslabel} within the \gls{linktext}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}\mgroup{\cs{entryfunc}}[1]\mgroup{\ics{glsentrysymbol}\mgroup{\ics{glslabel}}(\#1)}
\end{alltt}
(Obviously, this command can't be used outside of the \gls{linktext}
or post-link hooks since it uses \ics{glslabel}.)

So the entry now needs the parameterless function in 
\gloskey{symbol} and the control sequence name of this generic
command in \gloskey{user1}. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{Gamma}\mgroup{name=\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{Gamma}(z)},
\strong{symbol=\mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{Gamma}}},user1=entryfunc,}
description=gamma function,sort=Gamma}
\end{alltt}
(This doesn't need to be done for the \texttt{C} and \texttt{G}
entries since they're constants not functions.)

You may want to consider providing helper commands to make the
functions easier to define. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\func}[2]{#1(#2)}
\newcommand{\entryfunc}[1]{\func{\glsentrysymbol{\glslabel}}{#1}}
\newcommand{\newfunc}[5][]{%
 \newglossaryentry{#2}{name={\ensuremath{\func{#3}{#4}}},
   symbol={#3},
   user1={entryfunc},
   description={#5},
   sort={#2},#1
 }%
}
\end{verbatim}
The entries can now be defined using this custom \cs{newfunc}
command. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newfunc{Gamma}{\Gamma}{z}{gamma function}
\newfunc[sort=gamma1]{gamma}{\gamma}{\alpha,x}{lower 
  incomplete gamma function}
\newfunc[sort=Gamma2]{iGamma}{\Gamma}{\alpha,x}{upper 
  incomplete gamma function}
\end{verbatim}

Note that in \cs{newfunc} the \gloskey{symbol} key doesn't have its value
encapsulated with \ics{ensuremath} so \cs{glssymbol} will need to explicitly be
placed in math mode. If you switch to a glossary style that displays
the symbol, you will either need to adjust the definition of
\cs{newfunc} to use \ics{ensuremath} in the \gloskey{symbol} field
or you can add the encapsulation with the \attr{glosssymbolfont}
attribute.

Now \verb|\glslink{Znu}{Z_\nu}| can simply be replaced with
\texttt{\ics{glssymbol}\mgroup{Znu}} (no parameter is required in
this case). For the other cases, where the parameter is different
from that given in the \gloskey{text} field (which is obtained from
the \gloskey{name}), you can use \ics*{glsxtrfmt}. For example, 
\texttt{\cs{glslink}\mgroup{Gamma}\mgroup{\cs{Gamma}(x+1)}} can now be replaced with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsxtrfmt}\mgroup{Gamma}\mgroup{x+1}
\end{alltt}
This effectively works like \cs{glslink} but omits the post-link hook.
(See the \gls{glossaries-extra} user manual for further details.)

\begin{important}
Don't use \ics*{glsxtrfmt} within the argument of another \ics*{glsxtrfmt} command
(or inside any other \gls{linktext}).
\end{important}

Similarly \verb|\glslink{Gamma}{\Gamma(\alpha)}|
can now be replaced with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsxtrfmt}\mgroup{Gamma}\mgroup{\cs{alpha}}
\end{alltt}
Note that it's still possible to use:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{glssymbol}\mgroup{Gamma}[(\cs{alpha})]
\end{alltt}
You may prefer to define a helper command that makes it easier to
switch between your preferred method. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand*{\Fn}[3][]{\glssymbol[#1]{#2}[(#3)]}
\end{verbatim}
or:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}*\mgroup{\cs{Fn}}[3][]\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrfmt}[\#1]\mgroup{\#2}\mgroup{\#3}}
\end{alltt}

\bibglsnote
If you want to convert this example so that it works with \gls{bib2gls}, first
convert it to use \gls{glossaries-extra} (as described above), and
then follow the instructions from \samplefile{Eq}. The
\gls{convertgls2bib} application recognises \cs{newcommand} so it
will be able to parse the custom \cs{newfunc} commands.

Note that \gls{bib2gls} allows you to separate the locations in the \gls{numberlist}
into different groups according to the counter used for the
location. This can be done with the \resourceopt{loc-counters}
resource option. It's also possible to identify primary formats
(such as \locfmt{hyperbf} used in this example) using the
\resourceopt{primary-location-formats} option. The primary locations
can then be given a more prominent position in the
\gls{numberlist}.  See the \gls{bib2gls} user manual for further
details.

\exitem{Sec} This document also
illustrates how to change the location to something other than the
page number. In this case, the \texttt{section} counter is used.
This example adds the glossary to the table of contents, so an extra
\LaTeX\ run is required:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleSec
makeglossaries sampleSec
pdflatex sampleSec
pdflatex sampleSec
\end{prompt}
Note that there are conflicting location formats, which trigger a
warning from \gls{makeindex}:
\begin{verbatim}
## Warning (input = sampleSec.glo, line = 6; output = 
sampleSec.gls, line = 9):
   -- Conflicting entries: multiple encaps for the same page 
under same key.

## Warning (input = sampleSec.glo, line = 2; output = 
sampleSec.gls, line = 10):
   -- Conflicting entries: multiple encaps for the same page 
under same key.
\end{verbatim}
This is the result of indexing an entry multiple times for the same
location\footnote{\gls{makeindex} assumes that the location is a
page number} with different values of the \gloskey[glslink]{format} key. In this case, 
it's caused by three references to the \texttt{ident} entry in section~2.1:
\begin{verbatim}
\gls[format=hyperit]{ident}
\glspl{ident} % default format=glsnumberformat
\gls*[format=hyperbf]{ident}
\end{verbatim}

If you use the \gls{makeglossaries} Perl script it will detect the warnings in the
\gls{makeindex} transcript file and attempt to fix the conflict by
removing entries from the \filetype{glo} file:
\begin{verbatim}
Multiple encaps detected. Attempting to remedy.
Reading sampleSec.glo...
Writing sampleSec.glo...
Retrying
\end{verbatim}
(Range formats have highest precedence. The default \locfmt{glsnumberformat}
has the lowest precedence.)

If you use \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua} or call
\gls{makeindex} directly then the problem won't be fixed and the
glossary will end up with the rather odd \gls{numberlist} for the
identity matrix entry consisting of three references to section 2.1:
the first in the default font, followed by bold (\locfmt{hyperbf})
and then italic (\locfmt{hyperit}), which results in 2.1,
\textbf{2.1}, \textit{2.1}.  If you use \gls{makeglossaries} then
only the bold entry (\textbf{2.1}) will be present. 

If you switch to \gls{xindy}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{xindy},style=altlist,toc,counter=section]\mgroup{glossaries}
\end{alltt}
then the conflict will be resolved using the number format attribute
list order of priority. In this case, \locfmt{glsnumberformat} has
the highest priority. This means that only the upright medium weight entry
(2.1) will be present. The simplest way of altering this is to
provide your own custom format. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}*\mgroup{\strong{\cs{primary}}}[1]\mgroup{\ics{hyperit}\mgroup{\#1}}
\ics{GlsAddXdyAttribute}\mgroup{\strong{primary}}
\end{alltt}
and change \verb|\gls[format=hyperit]| to \texttt{\cs{gls}[format=\strong{primary}]} etc.
This will give \csoptfmt{\gloskey[glslink]{format}=\locfmt{primary}} the highest priority.
(It's also better practice to provide this kind of semantic command.)

With \gls{bib2gls}, you can supply rules to deal with location format
conflicts, as illustrated below.

\bibglsnote
In order to switch to \gls{bib2gls}, first replace
\styfmt{glossaries} with \gls{glossaries-extra}, and add the \pkgopt*{record} 
package option. Remember that \gls{glossaries-extra} has a different
set of defaults and you may also want to patch the predefined base styles.
For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[style=altlist,\strong{\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods}},counter=section]
\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}

The entry definitions now need to be converted into \gls{bib2gls}
format and saved in a \filetype{bib} file (say, \texttt{entries.bib}). You can use 
\gls{convertgls2bib}:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -{}-preamble-only sampleSec.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt} 

Next replace \ics{makeglossaries} with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[src=entries]
\end{alltt}
and remove all the \cs{newglossaryentry} commands.

Finally, replace \ics{printglossaries} with \ics*{printunsrtglossaries}.
The document build is now:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleSec
bib2gls sampleSec
pdflatex sampleSec
\end{prompt}
As with the original example, there's still a location format
conflict, which \gls{bib2gls} warns about:
\begin{verbatim}
Warning: Entry location conflict for formats: hyperbf and hyperit
Discarding: {ident}{}{section}{hyperbf}{2.1}
Conflicts with: {ident}{}{section}{hyperit}{2.1}
\end{verbatim}
This means that it has discarded the bold location and kept the
italic one. (As with \gls{makeglossaries}, range formats have the
highest priority and \locfmt{glsnumberformat} has the lowest.)

It would be better if the conflict could be merged into
a single location that was both bold and italic. To achieve this,
it's first necessary to define a command that produces this effect:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}*\mgroup{\ics{hyperbfit}}[1]\mgroup{\cs{textbf}\mgroup{\cs{hyperit}\mgroup{\#1}}}
\end{alltt}
Now \gls{bib2gls} needs to be invoked with the appropriate mapping
with the \bibglslongopt{map-format} or \bibglsopt{m} switch:
\begin{prompt}
bib2gls -m \glsquote{hyperbf:hyperbfit,hyperit:hyperbfit} sampleSec
\end{prompt}
If you are using \app{arara} the directive should be:
\begin{alltt}
\% arara: bib2gls: \mgroup{ mapformats: [ [hyperbf, hyperbfit],
\% arara: -{}-> [hyperit, hyperbfit] ] }
\end{alltt}

If you try out this example, notice the difference between
\pkgopt+{only}{record} and \pkgopt+{nameref}{record}. If you use the
latter, the locations will now be the section titles rather than the
section numbers. If you use the \optfmt{nameref} setting you can customize the
location by defining the command:
\begin{alltt}
\csmeta*{glsxtr}{counter}{locfmt}\marg{location}\marg{title}
\end{alltt}

In this case the counter is \ctrfmt{section}, so the command should be 
\ics*{glsxtrsectionlocfmt}. It takes two arguments: the first is the
location and the second is the title. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrsectionlocfmt}}[2]\mgroup{\ics{S}\#1 \#2}
\end{alltt}
(The only command of this type that is defined by default is the one
for the \ctrfmt{equation} counter, \ics*{glsxtrequationlocfmt}.) Make sure 
that you have at least version 1.42 of \gls{glossaries-extra}.

\section{Multiple Glossaries}
\label{sec:samplestype}

See also \samplefile{Sort} in \sectionref{sec:samplessort}, which
has three glossaries.

\exitem{Ntn} This document illustrates
how to create an additional glossary type. This example adds the
glossary to the table of contents, so an extra \LaTeX\ run is
required:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleNtn
makeglossaries sampleNtn
pdflatex sampleNtn
pdflatex sampleNtn
\end{prompt}
Note that if you want to call \gls{makeindex} explicitly instead of
using the \gls{makeglossaries} or \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua}
scripts then you need to call \gls{makeindex} twice:
\begin{enumerate}
\item Create the main glossary (all on one line):
\begin{prompt}
makeindex -s sampleNtn.ist -t sampleNtn.glg -o sampleNtn.gls sampleNtn.glo
\end{prompt}
\item Create the secondary glossary (all on one line):
\begin{prompt}
makeindex -s sampleNtn.ist -t sampleNtn.nlg -o sampleNtn.not sampleNtn.ntn
\end{prompt}
\end{enumerate}
This document creates a new glossary using:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{newglossary}[nlg]\mgroup{notation}\mgroup{not}\mgroup{ntn}\mgroup{Notation}
\end{alltt}
This defines a glossary that can be identified with the label
\texttt{notation} with the default title \qt{Notation}. The other
arguments are the file extensions required with \optsand23. For those
two options, the \styfmt{glossaries} package needs to know the input
and output files required by \gls{makeindex} or \gls{xindy}. 

(The optional argument is the file extension of the indexing transcript
file, which \styfmt{glossaries} doesn't need to know about, but it
writes the information to the \filetype{aux} file for the benefit of
\gls{makeglossaries} and \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua}.)

If you switch to a different indexing option then these file extensions
aren't required, in which case it's simpler to use the starred form:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{newglossary*}\mgroup{notation}\mgroup{Notation}
\end{alltt}

This example uses a label prefixing system\footnote{If you use
\sty{babel} with a language that makes the colon character
\texttt{:} active you will need to change the prefix.}\ to differentiate
between the different types of entries. For example, the term
\qt{set} is defined as:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{gls:set}{name=set,
description={A collection of distinct objects}}
\end{verbatim}
and the set notation is defined as:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{not:set}{type=notation,
name={\ensuremath{\mathcal{S}}},
description={A \gls{gls:set}},sort={S}}
\end{verbatim}
Notice that the latter description contains \cs{gls}. This means
you shouldn't use \ics{glsdesc} with this entry otherwise you will
end up with nested links.

\glsxtrnote
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides a command for use in
within field values to prevent nested \gls{linktext}:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsxtrp}\marg{field}\marg{label}
\end{alltt}
There are convenient shortcuts for common fields:
\texttt{\ics*{glsps}\marg{label}} (for the \gloskey{short} field) and 
\texttt{\ics*{glspt}\marg{label}} (for the \gloskey{text}
field). So the set notation definition can be modified:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{not:set}\mgroup{type=notation,
name=\mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{mathcal}\mgroup{S}}},
description=\mgroup{A \strong{\ics*{glspt}\mgroup{gls:set}}},sort={S}}
\end{alltt}
This will stop the inner reference from causing interference if you use \ics{glsdesc}.
It will also suppress indexing within the glossary but will have a
hyperlink (if \styfmt{hyperref} is used).

The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides a way of defining
commands like \cs{gls} that automatically insert a prefix. For
example:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsxtrnewgls}\mgroup{not:}\mgroup{\cs{sym}}
\ics*{glsxtrnewglslike}\mgroup{gls:}\mgroup{\cs{term}}\mgroup{\cs{termpl}}\mgroup{\cs{Term}}\mgroup{\cs{Termpl}}
\end{alltt}
(there's no point providing commands for plural or case-changing with
symbols).  Now \verb|\gls{not:set}| can be replaced with \verb|\sym{set}| and
\verb|\gls{gls:set}| can be replaced with \verb|\term{set}|.

\bibglsnote
These two commands are primarily provided for the benefit of \gls{bib2gls} as
the information is written to the \filetype{aux} file. This allows
\gls{bib2gls} to recognise the custom commands if they have been
used in the \filetype{bib} files. When combined with
\resourceopt{label-prefix} and \resourceopt{ext-prefixes} (see
below) this makes it much simpler to change the prefixes if
necessary.

If you want to convert this document to use \gls{bib2gls}, remember
that you need the \pkgopt*{record} or \pkgopt+{nameref}{record}
option. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record},}\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods}]\mgroup{glossaries-extra}
\end{alltt}
As with earlier examples, \gls{convertgls2bib} can be used to
convert the entry definitions into the required \filetype{bib} format.
You may prefer to split the entries into separate files according to
type.\footnote{Requires at least \gls{bib2gls} v2.0.} This is useful 
if you want to reuse a large database of
entries across multiple documents as it doesn't lock you into using
a specific glossary.  For example:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -{}-split-on-type -{}-preamble-only sampleNtn.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
This will create a file called \nolinkurl{entries.bib} that contains
the entries that didn't have a \gloskey{type} assigned in the original
file, such as:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{gls:set,
  name = \mgroup{set},
  description = \mgroup{A collection of distinct objects}
}
\end{alltt}
It will also create a file called \nolinkurl{notation.bib} that
contains the entries that had the \gloskey{type} set to
\texttt{notation} in the original file, such as:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{not:set,
  name = \mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{mathcal}\mgroup{S}}},
  description = \mgroup{A \ics*{glspt}\mgroup{gls:set}}
}
\end{alltt}
Note that the \gloskey{type} field has been removed. The above entry
in the \nolinkurl{notation.bib} file references a term in the
\nolinkurl{entries.bib} file. It's possible to strip all the
prefixes from the \filetype{bib} files and get \gls{bib2gls} to
automatically insert them. In which case, this cross-reference needs
adjusting to indicate that it's referring to an entry in another
file. This can be done with one of the special
\xtrfont{\texttt{ext\meta{n}.}}\ prefixes:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{\strong{set},
  name = \mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{mathcal}\mgroup{S}}},
  description = \mgroup{A \ics*{glspt}\mgroup{\strong{\xtrfont{ext1.}}set}}
}
\end{alltt}
The corresponding term in the \nolinkurl{entries.bib} file is now:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{\strong{set},
  name = \mgroup{set},
  description = \mgroup{A collection of distinct objects}
}
\end{alltt}

Now you can replace \cs{makeglossaries} with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=\mgroup{entries},\strong{\xtrfont{label-prefix}=\mgroup{gls:}}]
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=\mgroup{notation},\resourceopt{type}=notation,
 \strong{\xtrfont{label-prefix}=\mgroup{not:},\xtrfont{ext-prefixes}=\mgroup{gls:}}]
\end{alltt}
Remove all the \cs{newglossaryentry} definitions and replace \cs{printglossaries} with
\ics*{printunsrtglossaries}.

Regardless of how many resource sets the document contains, only one
\gls{bib2gls} call is required:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleNtn
bib2gls sampleNtn
pdflatex sampleNtn
\end{prompt}

You may notice that the ordering in the notations list has changed
from the original. This is because the \gloskey{sort} field was
automatically removed by \gls{convertgls2bib}, so the entries are
now sorted according to the \gloskey{name} field (since they are
defined with \atentry{entry}). You can use your text editor's search
and replace function to replace all instances of \atentry{entry}
with \atentry{symbol} in the \nolinkurl{notations.bib} file so that,
for example, the \texttt{set} definition becomes:
\begin{alltt}
\strong{\atentry{symbol}}\mgroup{set,
  name = \mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{mathcal}\mgroup{S}}},
  description = \mgroup{A \ics*{glspt}\mgroup{\xtrfont{ext1.}set}}
}
\end{alltt}
Now these \atentry{symbol} entries will be sorted according to their
label. (The original label in the \filetype{bib} file, not the
prefixed label.) This will put them in the same order as the original
document. (See the \qt{Examples} chapter of
the \gls{bib2gls} user manual for examples of varying the sorting
and also \bibglsgallery{sorting}.)

\exitem{-dual} This document
illustrates how to define an entry that both appears in the list of
acronyms and in the main glossary. To create the document do:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-dual
makeglossaries sample-dual
pdflatex sample-dual
\end{prompt}
This defines a custom command \ics{newdualentry} that defines two entries at once (a
normal entry and an abbreviation). It uses \ics{glsadd} to ensure
that if one is used then the other is automatically indexed:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand*{\newdualentry}[5][]{%
  % main entry:
  \newglossaryentry{main-#2}{name={#4},%
  text={#3\glsadd{#2}},%
  description={#5},%
  #1% additional options for main entry
  }%
  % abbreviation:
  \newacronym{#2}{#3\glsadd{main-#2}}{#4}%
}
\end{verbatim}
A sample dual entry is defined with this command:
\begin{verbatim}
\newdualentry{svm}% label
  {SVM}% abbreviation
  {support vector machine}% long form
  {Statistical pattern recognition technique}% description
\end{verbatim}
This defines an acronym with the label \texttt{svm} that can be
referenced with \verb|\gls{svm}| but it also defines an entry with
the label \texttt{main-svm}. This isn't used in the document with
\cs{gls} but it's automatically added from the
\texttt{\cs{glsadd}\mgroup{main-svm}} in the short form of
\texttt{svm}.

For this trivial document, this kind of dual entry is redundant and
unnecessarily leads the reader down a trail, first to the list of
acronyms and from there the reader then has to go to the main
glossary to look up the description. It's better to simply include
the description in the list of acronyms.

\bibglsnote
If you want to switch over to \gls{bib2gls}, first change to
\gls{glossaries-extra}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record}},\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods},acronym]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
Next, the definition needs to be converted to the \filetype{bib}
format required by \gls{bib2gls}. If you do:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -{}-preamble-only sample-dual.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
then \gls{convertgls2bib} will report the following:
\begin{verbatim}
Overriding default definition of \newdualentry with custom 
definition. (Change \newcommand to \providecommand if you want 
\newdualentry[options]{label}{short}{long}{description}
converted to @dualabbreviationentry.)
\end{verbatim}
This is because \gls{convertgls2bib} has its own internal definition
of \cs{newdualentry}, but if it encounters a new definition that
will override its default. If you want to retain
\gls{convertgls2bib}['s] definition (recommended) then just replace
\cs{newcommand} with \cs{providecommand} in the document source and
rerun \gls{convertgls2bib}.

With \cs{providecommand}, the new \nolinkurl{entries.bib} file
created by \gls{convertgls2bib} contains:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{dualabbreviationentry}\mgroup{svm,
  short = \mgroup{SVM},
  description = \mgroup{Statistical pattern recognition technique},
  long = \mgroup{support vector machine}
}
\end{alltt}
If \cs{newcommand} is retained, it will instead contain:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{main-svm,
  name = \mgroup{support vector machine},
  description = \mgroup{Statistical pattern recognition technique},
  text = \mgroup{SVM\cs{glsadd}\mgroup{svm}}
}

\atentry{acronym}\mgroup{svm,
  short = \mgroup{SVM\cs{glsadd}\mgroup{main-svm}},
  long = \mgroup{support vector machine}
}
\end{alltt}
In the first case, \gls{bib2gls} creates two linked entries using
its primary-dual mechanism. In the second case, \gls{bib2gls}
creates two entries that simply reference each other.

Assuming that your \nolinkurl{entries.bib} file just contains
\atentry{dualabbreviationentry}, 
now replace \cs{makeglossaries} with:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries,\% entries.bib
  \resourceopt{type}=acronym,\resourceopt{dual-type}=main,\resourceopt{dual-prefix}=\mgroup{main-}]
\end{alltt}

Then remove the definition of \cs{newdualentry} and the entry
definition. Finally, replace \cs{printglossaries} with
\ics*{printunsrtglossaries}.
The document build is:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-dual
bib2gls sample-dual
pdflatex sample-dual
\end{prompt}

If, instead, your \nolinkurl{entries.bib} file contains separate
\atentry{entry} and \atentry{acronym}, then you need:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\mgroup{long-short}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries]
\end{alltt}
If you need \glspl{numberlist}, the document build is now
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-dual
bib2gls sample-dual
pdflatex sample-dual
bib2gls sample-dual
pdflatex sample-dual
\end{prompt}
and this time \gls{bib2gls} complains about the use of \ics{glsadd}
within the \gloskey{short} and \gloskey{text} fields as this can be
problematic. (The extra \gls{bib2gls} and \LaTeX\ calls are
to ensure the \gls{numberlist} is up to date for the
\texttt{main-svm} entry, which can only be indexed with \cs{glsadd}
after \texttt{svm} has been defined.)

Dual entries make much more sense when one entry is for a glossary
with the description displayed but no \gls{numberlist}, and the
other is for the index without the description but with a
\gls{numberlist}. This can be created with by replacing
\atentry{dualabbreviationentry} with \atentry{dualindexabbreviation}:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{dualindexabbreviation}\mgroup{svm,
  description = \mgroup{Statistical pattern recognition technique},
  short = \mgroup{SVM},
  long = \mgroup{support vector machine}
}
\end{alltt}
This can be mixed with \atentry{index} terms for example:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{index}\mgroup{machlearn,
   name=\mgroup{machine learning}
}
\end{alltt}
The document needs modifying:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{documentclass}\mgroup{article}

\ics{usepackage}[\xtrfont{record},\xtrfont{postdot},
 nostyles,\xtrfont{stylemods}=\mgroup{\xtrfont{bookindex},list},\% only want bookindex and list styles
 acronym]\mgroup{glossaries-extra}

\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}\mgroup{long-short-desc}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries,\% entries.bib
 \resourceopt{dual-type}=acronym,
 \xtrfont{label-prefix}=\mgroup{\strong{idx.}},\resourceopt{dual-prefix}=\mgroup{},
 \resourceopt{combine-dual-locations}=\mgroup{primary}]

\ics*{glsxtrnewglslike}\mgroup{\strong{idx.}}\mgroup{\strong{\cs{idx}}}\mgroup{\cs{idxpl}}\mgroup{\cs{Idx}}\mgroup{\cs{Idxpl}}

\cs{begin}\mgroup{document}
\cs{gls}\mgroup{svm} and \strong{\cs{idx}}\mgroup{machlearn}.

\ics*{printunsrtglossary}[type=\acronymtype,style=altlist]
\ics*{printunsrtglossary}[style=bookindex,title=\mgroup{Index}]
\cs{end}\mgroup{document}
\end{alltt}
See the \gls{bib2gls} manual for further details.

\exitem{-langdict} This document
illustrates how to use the glossaries package to create English
to French and French to English dictionaries. To create the document
do:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-langdict
makeglossaries sample-langdict
pdflatex sample-langdict
\end{prompt}
This example uses the \pkgopt{nomain} package option to prevent the
creation of the \texttt{main} glossary. This means that the document
must provide its own glossaries:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossary[glg]{english}{gls}{glo}{English to French}
\newglossary[flg]{french}{flx}{flo}{French to English}
\end{verbatim}
This means that if you want to call \gls{makeindex} explicitly
you need to take these new extensions into account:
\begin{prompt}
makeindex -s sample-langdict.ist -t sample-langdict.glg -o sample-langdict.gls sample-langdict.glo
makeindex -s sample-langdict.ist -t sample-langdict.flg -o sample-langdict.flx sample-langdict.flo
\end{prompt}
As with the previous example, this document provides a custom
command that defines two related entries:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand*{\newword}[4]{%
  \newglossaryentry{en-#1}{type=english,name={#2},description={#3 #4}}%
  \newglossaryentry{fr-#1}{type=french,name={#3 #4},text={#4},sort={#4},
    description={#2}}%
}
\end{verbatim}
This has the syntax:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newword}\marg{label}\marg{english}\marg{determiner}\marg{french}
\end{alltt}
(Note that this trivial example doesn't take plurals into account.)
This custom command will define two terms with labels \texttt{en-\meta{label}} (for
the English term) and \texttt{fr-\meta{label}} (for the French term).
So
\begin{verbatim}
\newword{cat}{cat}{le}{chat}
\end{verbatim}
is equivalent to:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{en-cat}{type=english,name={cat},description={le chat}}
\newglossaryentry{fr-cat}{type=french,name={le chat},sort={chat},
  description={cat}}
\end{verbatim}

Unlike the previous example (\samplefile{-dual}), there's no link
between these two entries. If the document only uses
\verb|\gls{en-cat}|, then the \texttt{en-cat} entry will appear in the
\texttt{english} glossary but the \texttt{fr-cat} entry won't
appear in the \texttt{french} one.

\bibglsnote
If you want to switch to \gls{bib2gls} then you first need to
convert the document so that it uses \gls{glossaries-extra}, but
include the \pkgopt*{prefix} option to ensure that
\sty{glossaries-prefix} is also loaded:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record},\xtrfont{prefix}},\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods},nomain]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
You don't need to worry about file extensions now, so it's simpler
to use the starred form of \cs{newglossary}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossary}\strong{*}\mgroup{english}\mgroup{English to French}
\cs{newglossary}\strong{*}\mgroup{french}\mgroup{French to English}
\end{alltt}
Next the entries need to be converted to the \filetype{bib} format
required by \gls{bib2gls}:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -{}-only-preamble sample-langdict.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
This creates the file \nolinkurl{entries.bib} that contains entries
defined like:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{en-cat,
  name = \mgroup{cat},
  description = \mgroup{le chat},
  type = \mgroup{english}
}

\atentry{entry}\mgroup{fr-cat,
  name = \mgroup{le chat},
  description = \mgroup{cat},
  text = \mgroup{chat},
  type = \mgroup{french}
}
\end{alltt}
(Note that the \gloskey{sort} field has been omitted.)

This would be more flexible, and much briefer, if these entries were
defined using \gls{bib2gls}['s] dual entry system combined with the
\sty{glossaries-prefix} package:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{dualentry}\mgroup{cat,
  name = \mgroup{chat},
  description = \mgroup{cat},
  \gloskey{prefix} = \mgroup{le},
  \gloskey{prefixplural} = \mgroup{les}
}
\end{alltt}
Similarly for the \qt{chair} entry:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{dualentry}\mgroup{chair,
  name = \mgroup{chaise},
  description = \mgroup{chair},
  \gloskey{prefix} = \mgroup{la},
  \gloskey{prefixplural} = \mgroup{les}
}
\end{alltt}

With \atentry{dualentry}, the English and French terms are now
automatically linked from \gls{bib2gls}['s] point of view. If only one
is referenced in the document, the other will also be added by default.

Now that the determiner has been moved out of the description, it
won't show in the glossary. However, it's possible to include it by
providing a command to encapsulate the description (which can also
apply the language change as well).

\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries,\% entries.bib
 \xtrfont{append-prefix-field}=\mgroup{space},
 \resourceopt{category}=\mgroup{same as type},\resourceopt{dual-category}=\mgroup{same as type},
 \xtrfont{label-prefix}=\mgroup{en-},\resourceopt{dual-prefix}=\mgroup{fr-},
 \resourceopt{type}=english,\resourceopt{dual-type}=french,
 \resourceopt{sort}=en,\resourceopt{dual-sort}=fr]

\cs{newcommand}\mgroup{\cs{FrEncap}}[1]\mgroup{\%
 \ics{foreignlanguage}\mgroup{french}\mgroup{\ics{glsentryprefix}\mgroup{\ics{glscurrententrylabel}}\#1}}
\cs{newcommand}\mgroup{\cs{EnEncap}}[1]\mgroup{\ics{foreignlanguage}\mgroup{english}\mgroup{\#1}}

\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{english}\mgroup{glossnamefont}\mgroup{EnEncap}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{english}\mgroup{glossdescfont}\mgroup{FrEncap}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{french}\mgroup{glossnamefont}\mgroup{FrEncap}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{french}\mgroup{glossdescfont}\mgroup{EnEncap}
\end{alltt}

Remember to remove \cs{makeglossaries}, the definition of \cs{newword} and
the entry definitions from the document preamble, and 
replace \cs{printglossary} with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{printunsrtglossary}
\end{alltt}

Other refinements that you might like to make include using
\ics*{glsxtrnewglslike} so you don't have to worry about the label
prefix (\qt{en-} and \qt{fr-}).

\exitem{-index} This document uses
the \styfmt{glossaries} package to create both a glossary and an
index. This requires two \gls{makeglossaries} (or
\gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua}) calls to ensure the
document is up to date:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-index
makeglossaries sample-index
pdflatex sample-index
makeglossaries sample-index
pdflatex sample-index
\end{prompt}

\section{Sorting}
\label{sec:samplessort}

\exitem{People} This document illustrates how you can hook into the
standard sort mechanism to adjust the way the sort key is set. This
requires an additional run to ensure the table of contents is
up-to-date:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex samplePeople
makeglossaries samplePeople
pdflatex samplePeople
pdflatex samplePeople
\end{prompt}
This provides two commands for typesetting a name:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\sortname}[2]{#2, #1}
\newcommand{\textname}[2]{#1 #2}
\end{verbatim}
where the first argument contains the forenames and the second is the
surname. The first command is the one required for sorting the name
and the second is the one required for displaying the name in the
document. A synonym is then defined:
\begin{verbatim}
\let\name\textname
\end{verbatim}
This command defaults to the display name command (\cs{textname})
but is temporarily redefined to the sort name command (\cs{sortname})
within the \gloskey{sort} field assignment hook:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}\mgroup{\ics{glsprestandardsort}}[3]\mgroup{\%
 \strong{\cs{let}\cs{name}\cs{sortname}}
 \cs{edef}\#1\mgroup{\cs{expandafter}\cs{expandonce}\cs{expandafter}\mgroup{#1}}\%
 \strong{\cs{let}\cs{name}\cs{textname}}
 \ics{glsdosanitizesort}
}
\end{alltt}
The people are defined using the custom \cs{name} command:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{joebloggs}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{\strong{\cs{name}}\mgroup{Joe}\mgroup{Bloggs}},
 description=\mgroup{\cs{nopostdesc}}}
\end{alltt}
Since \cs{name} is temporarily changed while the \gloskey{sort} key
is being assigned, the sort value for this entry ends up as
\qt{Bloggs, Joe}, but the name appears in the document as \qt{Joe Bloggs}.

\bibglsnote
If you want to use \gls{bib2gls}, you first need to convert the
document to use \gls{glossaries-extra} but make sure you include the
\pkgopt*{record} option:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record}},\xtrfont{stylemods},style=listgroup]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
Next it's necessary to convert the entry definitions to the
\filetype{bib} format required by \gls{bib2gls}. You can simply do:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -{}-preamble-only samplePeople people.bib
\end{prompt}
which will create a file called \nolinkurl{people.bib} that contains
definitions like:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{joebloggs,
  name = \mgroup{\cs{name}\mgroup{Joe}\mgroup{Bloggs}},
  description = \mgroup{\ics{nopostdesc}}
}
\end{alltt}
However, you may prefer to use the \texttt{-{}-index-conversion}
(\texttt{-i}) switch:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -i -{}-preamble-only samplePeople people.bib
\end{prompt}
This will discard the \gloskey{description} field and use
\atentry{index} instead of \atentry{entry} if the
\gloskey{description} is either empty or simply set to \ics{nopostdesc} or
\ics*{glsxtrnopostpunc}. The \nolinkurl{people.bib} file now
contains definitions like:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{index}\mgroup{joebloggs,
  name = \mgroup{\cs{name}\mgroup{Joe}\mgroup{Bloggs}}
}
\end{alltt}
Regardless of which approach you used to create the \filetype{bib}
file, you now need to edit it to provide a definition of the custom
\cs{name} command for \gls{bib2gls}['s] use:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{preamble}\mgroup{"\strong{\ics{providecommand}}\mgroup{\cs{name}}[2]\mgroup{\#2, \#1}"}
\end{alltt}
Note the use of \cs{providecommand} instead of \cs{newcommand}.

In the document (\nolinkurl{samplePeople.tex}) you now need to
delete \cs{makeglossaries}, the definitions of \cs{sortname},
\cs{textname}, \cs{name}, \cs{glsprestandardsort}, and all the entry
definitions. Then add the following to the document preamble:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}\mgroup{\cs{name}}[2]\mgroup{\#1 \#2}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=people]
\end{alltt}
Next, use your text editor's search and replace function to
subsitute all instances of \cs{glsentrytext} in the chapter
headings with \ics*{glsfmttext}. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{chapter}\mgroup{\strong{\ics*{glsfmttext}}\mgroup{joebloggs}}
\end{alltt}
Finally, replace \cs{printunsrtglossaries} with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{printunsrtglossaries}
\end{alltt}
The document build is now:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex samplePeople
bib2gls samplePeople
pdflatex samplePeople
pdflatex samplePeople
\end{prompt}
The third \LaTeX\ call is required to ensure that the PDF bookmarks
are up to date, as the entries aren't defined until after the
\gls{bib2gls} run (which is why you have to use \ics*{glsfmttext}
instead of \cs{glsentrytext}).

This again leads to a list sorted by surname. The reason this works
is because \gls{bib2gls} only sees the definition of \cs{name}
provided in \atentry{preamble}, but the document uses the definition
of \cs{name} provided before \cs{GlsXtrLoadResources}. The use of
\ics{providecommand} in \atentry{preamble} prevents \cs{name} from 
being redefined within the document.

See also the \qt{Examples} chapter of the \gls{bib2gls} user manual,
which provides another \qt{people} example.

\exitem{Sort} This is another document that illustrates how to hook
into the standard sort mechanism. An additional run is required to
ensure the table of contents is up-to-date:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleSort
makeglossaries sampleSort
pdflatex sampleSort
pdflatex sampleSort
\end{prompt}
This document has three glossaries (\texttt{main}, \texttt{acronym}
and a custom \texttt{notation}), so if you want to use
\gls{makeindex} explicitly you will need to have three
\gls{makeindex} calls with the appropriate file extensions:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleSort
makeindex -s sampleSort.ist -t sampleSort.alg -o sampleSort.acr sampleSort.acn
makeindex -s sampleSort.ist -t sampleSort.glg -o sampleSort.gls sampleSort.glo
makeindex -s sampleSort.ist -t sampleSort.nlg -o sampleSort.not sampleSort.ntn
pdflatex sampleSort
pdflatex sampleSort
\end{prompt}
It's much simpler to just use \gls{makeglossaries} or \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua}.

In this example, the sort hook is adjusted to ensure the list of
notation is sorted according to the order of definition. A new
counter is defined to keep track of the entry number:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcounter{sortcount}
\end{verbatim}
The sort hook is then redefined to increment this counter and assign
the sort key to that numerical value, but only for the
\texttt{notation} glossary. The other two glossaries have their sort
keys assigned as normal:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glsprestandardsort}[3]{%
  \ifdefstring{#2}{notation}%
  {%
     \stepcounter{sortcount}%
     \edef#1{\glssortnumberfmt{\arabic{sortcount}}}%
  }%
  {%
     \glsdosanitizesort
  }%
}
\end{verbatim}
This means that \gls{makeindex} will sort the notation in numerical order.

\glsxtrnote
If you want to convert this document to use \gls{glossaries-extra},
a much simpler approach is available with its hybrid method. First
change the package loading line to:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods},acronym]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
Either remove \cs{setacronymstyle} and replace all instances of
\cs{newacronym} with \ics*{newabbreviation} or replace:
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{long-short}
\end{verbatim}
with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\mgroup{long-short}
\end{alltt}

The custom counter and redefinition of \cs{glsprestandardsort} can now
be removed. The file extensions for the custom \texttt{notation}
glossary are no longer relevant so the glossary definition can be
changed to:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossary\strong{*}}\mgroup{notation}\mgroup{Notation}
\end{alltt}
The \ics{makeglossaries} command now needs to be adjusted to
indicate which glossaries need to be processed by \gls{makeindex}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{makeglossaries}\strong{[main,acronym]}
\end{alltt}
Finally, \ics{printglossaries} needs to be replaced with:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{printglossary}
\cs{printacronyms}
\cs{print\strong{noidx}glossary}[type=notation\strong{,sort=def}]
\end{alltt}
Note that the \texttt{notation} glossary, which hasn't been listed in the optional
argument of \cs{makeglossaries}, must be displayed with \ics{printnoidxglossary}.

This means that \gls{makeindex} only needs to process the
\texttt{main} and \texttt{acronym} glossaries. No actual sorting is
performed for the \texttt{notation} glossary because, when used with
\printnoidxglosskey[def]{sort}, \cs{printnoidxglossary} simply
iterates over the list of entries that have been indexed.

The document build doesn't need the third \LaTeX\ call now (since
none of the glossaries extend beyond a page break):
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleSort
makeglossaries sampleSort
pdflatex sampleSort
\end{prompt}
This time \gls{makeglossaries} will include the message:
\begin{verbatim}
only processing subset 'main,acronym'
\end{verbatim}
This means that although \gls{makeglossaries} has noticed the \texttt{notation} glossary, 
it will be skipped.

If you are explicitly calling \gls{makeindex} then you need to drop the call
for the \texttt{notation} glossary:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleSort
makeindex -s sampleSort.ist -t sampleSort.alg -o sampleSort.acr sampleSort.acn
makeindex -s sampleSort.ist -t sampleSort.glg -o sampleSort.gls sampleSort.glo
pdflatex sampleSort
\end{prompt}

\bibglsnote
If you prefer to use \gls{bib2gls}, the package loading line needs
to be changed to:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record}},\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods},acronym]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
Next the entry definitions need to be convert to the \filetype{bib}
format required by \gls{bib2gls}.

For this example, it's simpler to split the entries into different files according
to the glossary type. This can be done with the
\texttt{-{}-split-on-type} or \texttt{-t} switch:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -t -{}-preamble-only sampleSort.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
This will create three files:
\begin{description}
\item[\nolinkurl{entries.bib}] which contains the entries that were
defined with \ics{newglossaryentry}. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{gls:set,
  name = {set},
  description = {A collection of distinct objects}
}
\end{alltt}

\item[\nolinkurl{abbreviations.bib}] which contains the entries that
were defined with \ics{newacronym}. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{acronym}\mgroup{zfc,
  short = \mgroup{ZFC},
  long = \mgroup{Zermelo-Fraenkel set theory}
}
\end{alltt}
If you changed \ics{newacronym} to \ics*{newabbreviation} then
\atentry{abbreviation} will be used instead:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{abbreviation}\mgroup{zfc,
  short = \mgroup{ZFC},
  long = \mgroup{Zermelo-Fraenkel set theory}
}
\end{alltt}

\item[\nolinkurl{notation.bib}] which contains the entries that were
defined with \texttt{\gloskey{type}=notation}. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{not:set,
  name = \mgroup{\$\cs{mathcal}\mgroup{S}\$},
  description = \mgroup{A set},
  text = \mgroup{\cs{mathcal}\mgroup{S}}
}
\end{alltt}
You may prefer to replace \atentry{entry} with \atentry{symbol}
in this file.
\end{description}
\emph{After} the definition of the \texttt{notation} glossary
(\cs{newglossary}), add:
\begin{alltt}
\% abbreviation style must be set first:
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\mgroup{long-short}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=\mgroup{entries,abbreviations}]
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=\mgroup{notation},\% notation.bib
 \strong{\xtrfont{type}=notation},\resourceopt{sort}=\strong{unsrt}]
\end{alltt}
Delete the remainder of the preamble (\cs{makeglossaries} and entry
definitions).

Finally, replace the lines that display the glossaries with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{printunsrtglossaries}
\end{alltt}
The build process is now:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleSort
bib2gls sampleSort
pdflatex sampleSort
\end{prompt}

In this case, I have one resource command that processes two
glossaries (\texttt{main} and \texttt{acronym}) at the same time.
The entries in these glossaries are ordered alphabetically.
The second resource command processes the \texttt{notation} glossary but
the entries in this glossary aren't sorted (and so will appear in
the order of definition within the \filetype{bib} file).

See also \samplefile{Ntn}, \bibglsgallery{sorting} and the \gls{bib2gls} user manual
for more examples.

\section{Child Entries}
\label{sec:samplesparent}

\exitem{} This document illustrates some of
the basics, including how to create child entries that use the same
name as the parent entry. This example adds the glossary to the
table of contents and it also uses \ics{glsrefentry}, so an extra \LaTeX\ 
run is required:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample
makeglossaries sample
pdflatex sample
pdflatex sample
\end{prompt}
You can see the difference between word and letter ordering if you
add the package option \pkgopt[letter]{order}. (Note
that this will only have an effect if you use
\gls{makeglossaries} or \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua}.
If you use \gls{makeindex} explicitly, you will need to use the
\mkidxopt{l} switch to indicate letter ordering.)

One of the entries has its name encapsulated with a semantic command:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}\mgroup{\strong{\cs{scriptlang}}}[1]\mgroup{\cs{textsf}\mgroup{\#1}}

\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{Perl}\mgroup{name=\strong{\cs{scriptlang}}\mgroup{Perl},\strong{sort=Perl,}
description=\mgroup{A scripting language}}
\end{alltt}
This means that this entry needs to have the \gloskey{sort} key set
otherwise \gls{makeindex} will assign it to the \qt{symbol} letter
group, since it starts with a backslash (which \gls{makeindex}
simply treats as punctuation).

The homograph entries \qt{glossary} and \qt{bravo} are defined as
sub-entries that inherit the name from the parent entry. The parent
entry doesn't have a description, but with the default
\pkgopt[false]{nopostdot} setting this will lead to a spurious dot.
This can be removed by adding \ics{nopostdesc} to the description,
which suppresses the post-description hook for that entry.

Since the child entries have the same name as the parent, this means
that the child entries will have duplicate sort values unless the
default is changed with the \gloskey{sort} key:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{glossary}\mgroup{name=glossary,
 description=\mgroup{\strong{\ics{nopostdesc}}},plural=\mgroup{glossaries}}

\ics{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{glossarycol}\mgroup{
 description=\mgroup{collection of glosses},
 \strong{sort=\mgroup{2},}
 parent=\mgroup{glossary}\% parent \emph{label}
}

\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{glossarylist}\mgroup{
 description=\mgroup{list of technical words},
 \strong{sort=\mgroup{1},}
 parent=\mgroup{glossary}\% parent \emph{label}
}
\end{alltt} 
(Remember that the entries are sorted hierarchically.) This will
place \texttt{glossarylist} before \texttt{glossarycol}, but both
will come immediately after their parent \texttt{glossary} entry.

\glsxtrnote
If you switch to using \gls{glossaries-extra}, remember that the
default package options are different:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods}},style=treenonamegroup,order=word,
  subentrycounter]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}

You may now want to consider replacing \ics{nopostdesc} in the
descriptions with \ics*{glsxtrnopostpunc} (using your
text editor's search and replace function). This suppresses the
post-description punctuation but not the category post-description
hook.

You may have noticed that some of the descriptions include the
plural form, but it's not done very consistently. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{cow}{name=cow,
  plural=cows,% not required as this is the default
  user1=kine,
  description={(\emph{pl.}\ cows, \emph{archaic} kine) an adult
female of any bovine animal} 
}
\end{verbatim}
which has the parenthetical material at the start of the
description with emphasis,
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{bravocry}{
  description={cry of approval (pl.\ bravos)},
  sort={1},
  parent={bravo}
}
\end{verbatim}
which has the parenthetical material at the end of the
description without emphasis even though it's a regular plural,
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{bravoruffian}{
  description={hired ruffian or killer (pl.\ bravoes)},
  sort={2},
  plural={bravoes},
  parent=bravo}
\end{verbatim}
which has the parenthetical material at the end of the
description without emphasis, and
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{glossary}{name=glossary,
  description={\nopostdesc},
  plural={glossaries}}
\end{verbatim}
which doesn't show the plural in the description.

With \gls{glossaries-extra}, you can remove this parenthetical
material and implement it using the category post-description hook instead. 
For example, the above definitions become:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{cow}{name=cow,
  user1=kine,
  description={an adult female of any bovine animal} 
}

\newglossaryentry{bravocry}{
  description={cry of approval},
  sort={1},
  parent={bravo}
}

\newglossaryentry{bravoruffian}{
  description={hired ruffian or killer},
  sort={2},
  plural={bravoes},
  parent=bravo}
\end{verbatim}
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{glossary}\mgroup{name=glossary,
  description=\mgroup{\strong{\ics*{glsxtrnopostpunc}}},
  plural=\mgroup{glossaries}}
\end{alltt}
The post-description hook for the \cat{general} category can now be
set:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsdefpostdesc}\mgroup{general}\mgroup{\%
\codecomment{\% Has the user1 key been set?}
  \ics*{glsxtrifhasfield}\mgroup{useri}\mgroup{\ics{glscurrententrylabel}}\%
  \mgroup{\cs{space}(\cs{emph}\mgroup{pl.}\cs{ }\ics{glsentryplural}\mgroup{\ics{glscurrententrylabel}},
    \cs{emph}\mgroup{archaic} \ics{glscurrentfieldvalue})\%
  }\%
  \mgroup{\%
\codecomment{\% The user1 key hasn't been set. Is the plural the same as the
\% singular form with the plural suffix appended?}
    \ics*{GlsXtrIfXpFieldEqXpStr}\mgroup{plural}\mgroup{\ics{glscurrententrylabel}}\%
    \mgroup{\ics{glsentrytext}\mgroup{\ics{glscurrententrylabel}}\ics{glspluralsuffix}}\%
    \mgroup{\%
\codecomment{\% Sibling check with \gls{bib2gls} (see below)}
    }\%
    \mgroup{\%
\codecomment{\% The plural isn't the default. Does this entry have a parent?}
      \cs{ifglshasparent}\mgroup{\cs{glscurrententrylabel}}%
      \mgroup{\%
\codecomment{\% This entry has a parent.
\% Are the plurals for the child and parent the same?}
        \ics*{GlsXtrIfXpFieldEqXpStr}\mgroup{plural}\mgroup{\cs{glscurrententrylabel}}\%
        \mgroup{\cs{glsentryplural}\mgroup{\cs{glsentryparent}\mgroup{\cs{glscurrententrylabel}}}}\%
        \mgroup{}\% \codecomment{child and parent plurals the same}
        \mgroup{\%
          \cs{space}(\cs{emph}\mgroup{pl.}\cs{ }\cs{glsentryplural}\mgroup{\cs{glscurrententrylabel}})\%
        }\%
      }%
      \mgroup{\cs{space}(\cs{emph}\mgroup{pl.}\cs{ }\ics{glsentryplural}\mgroup{\ics{glscurrententrylabel}})}\%
    }\%
  }\%
}
\end{alltt}
(If you try this example out, notice the difference for the
\texttt{glossary} entry if you use \cs{nopostdesc} and then
replace it with \ics*{glsxtrnopostpunc}.)
See the \gls{glossaries-extra} user manual for further details and
also \bibglsbegin.

The \qt{bravo} homographs are an oddity where the singular form is
identical but the plural is different (\qt{bravos} and
\qt{bravoes}). In the original, both descriptions included the
plural term. The above modifications drop the display of the regular
\qt{bravos} plural (for the \texttt{bravocry} term) and only show 
the \qt{bravoes} plural (for the \texttt{bravoruffian} term). In this
particular case it might be useful to show the regular plural in
order to highlight the difference.

While it's straightforward to access an entry's parent label (with
\ics{glsentryparent}) it's much harder to access entry's children or
siblings. The \ics{ifglshaschildren} command has to iterate over all
entries to determine if any have a parent that matches the given
label. This is obviously very time-consuming if you have a large
database of entries. It also doesn't provide a way of determining
whether or not the child entries have been indexed.

With \gls{bib2gls}, it's possible to save this information with the
\resourceopt{save-child-count} and \resourceopt{save-sibling-count},
which not only save the total but also save the child or sibling
labels in an \sty{etoolbox} internal list. This makes the
information much faster to access and also only includes the labels of
those entries that have actually been indexed.

In the above, the comment line:
\begin{alltt}
\codecomment{\% Sibling check with \gls{bib2gls} (see below)}
\end{alltt}
indicates where to put the extra code. If you switch to
\gls{bib2gls} and make sure to use \resourceopt{save-sibling-count}
then you can insert the following code in the block above where that
comment is:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrIfFieldNonZero}\mgroup{siblingcount}\mgroup{\cs{glscurrententrylabel}}\%
\mgroup{\% \codecomment{\xtrfield{siblingcount} field value non-zero}
 \ics*{glsxtrfieldforlistloop} \% \codecomment{iterate over internal list}
 \mgroup{\cs{glscurrententrylabel}}\% \codecomment{entry label}
 \mgroup{siblinglist}\% \codecomment{label of field containing list}
 \mgroup{\cs{siblinghandler}}\% \codecomment{loop handler}
}\%
\mgroup{}\% \codecomment{\xtrfield{siblingcount} field value 0 or empty or missing}
\end{alltt}
This uses a custom handler that's defined as follows:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}\mgroup{\cs{siblinghandler}}[1]\mgroup{\%
  \ics*{GlsXtrIfXpFieldEqXpStr}*\mgroup{plural}\mgroup{\cs{glscurrententrylabel}}\%
  \mgroup{\cs{glsentryplural}\mgroup{\#1}}\%
  \mgroup{}\% \codecomment{current entry's plural same as sibling's plural}
  \mgroup{\%
    \cs{space}(\cs{emph}\mgroup{pl.}\cs{ }\cs{glsentryplural}\mgroup{\cs{glscurrententrylabel}})\%
    \ics{listbreak}
  }%
}
\end{alltt}
The \cs{listbreak} command is provided by \sty{etoolbox} and is used
for prematurely exiting a loop. The handler tests if the sibling's
\gloskey{plural} field is identical to the current entry's \gloskey{plural}
field. If they are the same, it does nothing. If they are different,
it displays the current entry's plural and breaks the loop.

Note that this assumes that the parent entry hasn't had the plural
form explicitly set to \qt{bravoes} instead of the default
\qt{bravos}. In that case, the parent entry would show the plural
but the \texttt{bravoruffian} child entry wouldn't show the plural (since
this case would led to the empty code block identified with the
comment \qt{child and parent plurals the same}). The \qt{bravoes}
plural form would instead be shown for the parent, which wouldn't
look right.

If you don't use \gls{bib2gls} or if you use it without the
\resourceopt{save-sibling-count} resource option then the sibling
information won't be available.

\bibglsnote
In order to switch to using \gls{bib2gls}, it's first necessary to
switch to using \gls{glossaries-extra} (as above). Remember that the
\pkgopt*{record} option is required:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record},}\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods},style=treenonamegroup,
subentrycounter]\mgroup{glossaries-extra}
\end{alltt}
Next the entry definitions need to be converted to the
\filetype{bib} format required by \gls{bib2gls}. This can be done
with \gls{convertgls2bib}:
\begin{alltt}
convertgls2bib -{}-preamble-only sample.tex entries.
\end{alltt}
The semantic command may be moved to the \filetype{bib} file to
ensure it's defined:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{preamble}\mgroup{"\cs{providecommand}\mgroup{\cs{scriptlang}}[1]\mgroup{\cs{textsf}\mgroup{\#1}}"}
\end{alltt}

The \gloskey{sort} field typically shouldn't be set when using
\gls{bib2gls}, so \gls{convertgls2bib} strips it. 
If the \gloskey{sort} field is missing, \gls{bib2gls} will obtain it
from the sort fallback for that entry type. In this case,
\atentry{entry} has the \gloskey{name} field as the sort fallback.
If this is also missing then its value is obtained from the parent's
\gloskey{name} field (see \bibglsgallery{sorting} for other examples).

Therefore the \qt{Perl} entry is simply defined as:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{Perl,
  name = \mgroup{\cs{scriptlang}\mgroup{Perl}},
  description = \mgroup{A scripting language}
}
\end{alltt}
This isn't a problem for \gls{bib2gls}. In this case, the command
has been provided in the \atentry{preamble}, but \gls{bib2gls}
strips font information so the sort value becomes \texttt{Perl}. 
If the definition isn't placed in \atentry{preamble} then
\gls{bib2gls} will simply ignore the command (as \gls{xindy} does)
so the sort value will still end up as \texttt{Perl}.

The homograph entries have also had their \gloskey{sort} fields omitted:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{glossarycol,
  parent = \mgroup{glossary},
  description = \mgroup{collection of glosses}
}

\atentry{entry}\mgroup{glossarylist,
  parent = \mgroup{glossary},
  description = \mgroup{list of technical words}
}
\end{alltt}

This means that the sort value for both these child entries is
\qt{glossary}. When \gls{bib2gls} encounters identical sort values
it acts according to its \resourceopt{identical-sort-action} setting.
The default action is to sort by the label using a simple string
comparison. In this case, it would put \texttt{glossarycol} before
\texttt{glossarylist}. In the original document, the \gloskey{sort}
value was manually chosen to ensure that the entries are ordered
according to \gls{firstuse}.  This ordering can easily be obtained
by changing \gls{bib2gls}['s] identical sort action (requires at
least \gls{bib2gls} v2.0):
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=\mgroup{entries},\strong{\xtrfont{identical-sort-action}=use}]
\end{alltt}
This command should replace \cs{makeglossaries}. If you want the
sibling information (see earlier), then you need to remember to add
\resourceopt{save-sibling-count} to the list of options.

Note that this is a better solution than in the original example. If
I edit the document so that \texttt{glossarycol} is used first, then
the ordering will be updated accordingly, but with the original
example, the \gloskey{sort} keys would need to be manually changed.

The remainder of the preamble (that is, the definition of
\cs{scriptlang} and all the entry definitions) should now be
removed.

Finally, replace \cs{printglossaries} with \ics*{printunsrtglossaries}.
The document build is now:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample
bib2gls -{}-group sample
pdflatex sample
pdflatex sample
\end{prompt}
Note use of the \bibglslongopt{group} (or \bibglsopt{g}) switch, which is needed
to support the \glostyle{treenonamegroup} style. The third \LaTeX\
call is needed because the document contains \ics{glsrefentry}.

Note that you can't use the \pkgopt[letter]{order} package option
with \gls{bib2gls}. Instead use the \resourceopt[none]{break-at}
resource option:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=\mgroup{entries},\xtrfont{identical-sort-action}=use,
  \strong{\xtrfont{break-at}=none}
]
\end{alltt}

\exitem{-inline} This document is
like \texttt{sample.tex}, above, but uses the \glostyle{inline}
glossary style to put the glossary in a footnote. The document build
is:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-inline
makeglossaries sample-inline
pdflatex sample-inline
pdflatex sample-inline
\end{prompt}
If you want to convert this document to \gls{glossaries-extra},
follow the same procedure as above. If you want to use \gls{bib2gls}
then you don't need the \bibglslongopt{group} switch since no letter
groups are required.

\exitem{tree} This document illustrates
a hierarchical glossary structure where child entries have different
names to their corresponding parent entry. To create the document
do:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampletree
makeglossaries sampletree
pdflatex sampletree
\end{prompt}
The document uses the \glostyle{alttreehypergroup} glossary style,
which needs to know the widest name for each hierarchical level.
This has been assigned manually in the preamble with
\ics{glssetwidest}:
\begin{verbatim}
\glssetwidest{Roman letters} % level 0 widest name
\glssetwidest[1]{Sigma}      % level 1 widest name
\end{verbatim}
(Level~0 is the top-most level. That is, entries that don't have a
parent.) It's possible to get \styfmt{glossaries} to compute the
widest top-level entry with \ics{glsfindwidesttoplevelname} but this
will iterate over all top-level entries, regardless of whether or
not they appear in the glossary. If you have a large database of
entries, this will firstly take time and secondly the width may be
too large due to an unindexed entry with a big name.

This sample document doesn't require any of the tabular styles so I've
prevented those packages from being loaded with \pkgopt{nolong} and
\pkgopt{nosuper}. The reduces the overall package loading.
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[style=alttreehypergroup,\strong{nolong,nosuper}]
\mgroup{glossaries}
\end{alltt}
(This example glossary is actually better suited for one of the
topic styles provided with \sty*{glossary-topic}, see below.)

This is obviously a contrived example since it's strange to have the
symbol names (such as \qt{Sigma}) in the glossary. The purpose is to
demonstrate the \glostyle{alttreehypergroup} with an entry that's
noticeably wider than the others in the same hierarchical level. A
more sensible document would have the symbol in the \gloskey{name}
key.

\glsxtrnote
If you want to switch to \gls{glossaries-extra}, then you can
instead use a combination of \pkgopt{nostyles} and
\pkgopt*{stylemods}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[style=alttreehypergroup,\xtrfont{postdot},\strong{nostyles,
\xtrfont{stylemods=tree}}]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
The \pkgopt*{stylemods} package not only patches the original styles
provided by the base \styfmt{glossaries} package (such as
\sty{glossary-tree} used in this example) but also provides extra
helper commands. In this case, it provides additional commands to
calculate the widest name. For example, instead of manually setting
the widest entry with \ics{glssetwidest}, you could add the
following before the glossary:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsFindWidestUsedTopLevelName}
\ics*{glsFindWidestUsedLevelTwo}
\end{alltt}
This will only take into account the entries that have actually been
used in the document, but it can still be time-consuming if you have
a large number of entries.

\begin{important}
Note that the glossary must be at the end of the document (after all
required entries have been used) with this method. The alternative
is to perform the calculation at the end of the document and save
the results in the \filetype{aux} file for the next run.
\end{important}

This example document is using top-level entries for topics without
descriptions. This means that the descriptions simply contain
\ics{nopostdesc} to prevent the post-description punctuation from
being automatically inserted. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{greekletter}{name={Greek letters},
text={Greek letter},
description={\nopostdesc}}
\end{verbatim}
With \gls{glossaries-extra}, you can convert this to
\ics*{glsxtrnopostpunc} which will prevent the post-description
punctuation without interfering with the category post-description
hook.

In order to distinguish between the child entries, which are
symbols, and the parent entries, which are topics, it's useful to
give these two different types of entries different categories. The
topics can use the default \cat{general} category, but the symbol
entries can be assigned to a different category. The value of the
\xtrgloskey{category} key must be a label. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{C}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{C},
description=\mgroup{Euler's constant},
\strong{\xtrfont{category}=symbol,}
parent=romanletter}
\end{alltt}

There is some redundancy caused by a parenthetical note after the \gls{firstuse} in some
of the symbol entries. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{pi}{name={pi},
text={\ensuremath{\pi}},
first={\ensuremath{\pi} (lowercase pi)},
description={Transcendental number},
parent=greekletter}
\end{verbatim}
With \gls{glossaries-extra} this can be dealt with through the category post-link hook:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsdefpostlink}\mgroup{symbol}\mgroup{\%
  \ics*{glsxtrifwasfirstuse}
  \mgroup{\% first use
    \ics*{glsxtrifhasfield}\mgroup{useri}\mgroup{\ics{glslabel}}\%
    \mgroup{ (\ics{glscurrentfieldvalue})}\mgroup{}\%
  }\% 
  \mgroup{}\% not first use
}
\end{alltt}
The parenthetical material is now stored in the \gloskey{user1} key.
For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{sigma}\mgroup{name={Sigma},
text=\mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}{\cs{Sigma}}},
\strong{user1=\mgroup{uppercase sigma},}
description=\mgroup{Used to indicate summation},
parent=greekletter}
\end{alltt}
The category post-description link is also set to ensure that the symbol is
displayed after the description in the glossary:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsdefpostdesc}\mgroup{symbol}\mgroup{\cs{space}
  (\$\ics{glsentrytext}\mgroup{\ics{glscurrententrylabel}}\$)}
\end{alltt}
These modifications only affect entries with the
\xtrgloskey{category} set to \cat{symbol}.

With \gls{glossaries-extra}, it's now possible to use the topic
styles provided with the \sty*{glossary-topic} package:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[style=\strong{\xtrfont{topic}},\xtrfont{postdot},\strong{nostyles,\xtrfont{stylemods=\mgroup{tree\strong{,topic}}}}]
\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
The \xtrglostyle{topic} style is designed for this kind of hierarchy
where all the top-level entries don't have descriptions. This means
that the \ics{nopostdot} and \ics*{glsxtrnopostpunc} commands aren't
required. The top-level entries can simply be defined as:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{greekletter}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{Greek letters},
text=\mgroup{Greek letter}, description=\mgroup{}}

\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{romanletter}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{Roman letters},
text=\mgroup{Roman letter}, description=\mgroup{}}
\end{alltt}
I've now loaded both the \sty{glossary-tree} and
\sty{glossary-topic} packages
(via \pkgopt*{stylemods}\optfmt{\dequals\mgroup{tree\dcomma topic}}). The
\sty{glossary-topic} package can be used without
\sty{glossary-tree}, in which case it will behave more like the
normal \glostyle{tree} rather than \glostyle{alttree} styles (but
with different indentation and no description in the top-level).
However, if you use \ics{glssetwidest} (provided by
\sty{glossary-tree}) then the \xtrglostyle{topic} style will behave
more like \glostyle{alttree}.

Since there's no description for the top-level entries, the
\xtrglostyle{topic} style ignores the widest name setting for the
top-level, so I can just have the level~1 setting:
\begin{verbatim}
\glssetwidest[1]{Sigma}
\end{verbatim}

\bibglsnote
If you want to convert this document so that it uses \gls{bib2gls},
you first need to convert it to using \gls{glossaries-extra}, as
described above, but remember that you now need the \pkgopt*{record}
option.
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record},}style=topic,\xtrfont{postdot},nostyles,\xtrfont{stylemods=\mgroup{tree,topic}}]
\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
Next convert the entries to the \filetype{bib} format required by
\gls{bib2gls}:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -{}-preamble-only sampletree.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
Now replace \cs{makeglossaries} with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries,\strong{\xtrfont{set-widest}}]
\end{alltt}
I've used the \resourceopt{set-widest} option here to get
\gls{bib2gls} to compute the widest name. (Obviously, it can only do
this if it can correctly interpret any commands contained in the
\gloskey{name} field.)

This means that the \ics{glssetwidest} commands can now be removed
completely. All the \cs{newglossaryentry} commands also need to be removed from
the preamble. Finally, \cs{printunsrtglossaries} needs to be
replaced with \ics*{printunsrtglossaries}. The document build is now:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampletree
bib2gls sampletree
pdflatex sampletree
\end{prompt}

This produces the same result as with just \gls{glossaries-extra}
and \gls{makeglossaries}. However, there are some modifications that
can be made to the \filetype{bib} file to make it neater. 

The top-level entries are defined as:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{greekletter,
  name = \mgroup{Greek letters},
  description = \mgroup{},
  text = \mgroup{Greek letter}
}

\atentry{entry}\mgroup{romanletter,
  name = \mgroup{Roman letters},
  description = \mgroup{},
  text = \mgroup{Roman letter}
}
\end{alltt}
This is a direct translation from the \cs{newglossaryentry} commands
(after switching to the \xtrglostyle{topic} style). There's a more
appropriate entry type:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{indexplural}\mgroup{greekletter,
  text = \mgroup{Greek letter}
}

\atentry{indexplural}\mgroup{romanletter,
  text = \mgroup{Roman letter}
}
\end{alltt}
The \atentry{indexplural} entry type doesn't require the
\gloskey{description} and will set the \gloskey{name} field to the
same as the \gloskey{plural} field. Since the \gloskey{plural} field
hasn't been set it's obtained by appending \qt{s} to the
\gloskey{text} field.

Now let's assume that the symbol entries are defined in a more
rational manner, with the actual symbol in the \gloskey{name} field.
For example:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{sigma,
  user1 = \mgroup{uppercase sigma},
  parent = \mgroup{greekletter},
  description = \mgroup{Used to indicate summation},
  \strong{name = \mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{Sigma}}}},
  category = \mgroup{symbol}
}

\atentry{entry}\mgroup{C,
  parent = \mgroup{romanletter},
  name = \mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{C}},
  description = \mgroup{Euler's constant},
  category = \mgroup{symbol}
}
\end{alltt}
The category post-description hook (provided with
\ics*{glsdefpostdesc}) should now be removed from the document.

If you make these changes and rebuild the document, you'll find that
the order has changed. Now the \texttt{sigma} entry is before the
\texttt{pi} entry. This is because \gls{bib2gls} is obtaining the
sort values from the \gloskey{name} field, which is the sort
fallback for \atentry{entry}. This means that the sort values end up
as $\Sigma$ and $\pi$ (\gls{bib2gls} recognises the commands
\ics{Sigma} and \ics{pi} and converts them to the Unicode characters
0x1D6F4 and 0x1D70B).

If you change \atentry{entry} to \atentry{symbol} then you will once
again get the order from the original example (\texttt{pi} before
\texttt{Sigma}). This is because the sort fallback for
\atentry{symbol} is the label not the \gloskey{name}. (Remember that
the sort fallback is only used if the \gloskey{sort} field isn't
set. If you explicitly set the \gloskey{sort} field then no fallback
is required. See \bibglsgallery{sorting}.)

You can further tidy the \filetype{bib} file by removing the
\xtrgloskey{category} fields. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{symbol}\mgroup{sigma,
  user1 = \mgroup{uppercase sigma},
  parent = \mgroup{greekletter},
  description = \mgroup{Used to indicate summation},
  name = \mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{Sigma}}}
}
\end{alltt}
You can then assign the \xtrgloskey{category} in the resource set:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries,\xtrfont{set-widest},\strong{\xtrfont{category}=\mgroup{same as entry}}]
\end{alltt}
This means that all the entries defined with \atentry{symbol} will
have the \xtrgloskey{category} set to \texttt{symbol} and all the
entries defined with \atentry{indexplural} will have the
\xtrgloskey{category} set to \texttt{indexplural}. (Only the
\cat{symbol} category is significant in this example.)

You can make the \filetype{bib} files even more flexible by
introducing field and entry aliases with \resourceopt{field-aliases}
and \resourceopt{entry-type-aliases}. See the \gls{bib2gls} manual
for further details.

\section{Cross-Referencing}
\label{sec:samplescrossref}

\exitem{-crossref}
This document illustrates how to cross-reference entries in the
glossary.
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-crossref
makeglossaries sample-crossref
pdflatex sample-crossref
\end{prompt}
The document provides a command \ics{alsoname} to produce some fixed text, which can be
changed as appropriate (usually within a language hook):
\begin{verbatim}
\providecommand{\alsoname}{see also}
\end{verbatim}
I've used \cs{providecommand} as some packages define this command.
This is used to create a \qt{see also} cross-reference with the
\gloskey{see} key:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{apple}{name=apple,description={firm, round fruit},
see=[\alsoname]{pear}}

\newglossaryentry{marrow}{name={marrow},
 description={long vegetable with thin green skin and white flesh},
 see={[\alsoname]courgette}}
\end{verbatim}

Note that \qt{marrow} is included in the glossary even though it
hasn't been referenced in the text. This is because the
\gloskey{see} key automatically triggers \ics{glssee} which indexes
the term. This behaviour is intended for documents where only the
terms that are actually required in the document are defined. It's
not suitable for a large database of terms shared across multiple
documents that may or may not be used in a particular document. In
that case, you may want to consider using \gls{glossaries-extra}
(see below).

\glsxtrnote
This example is quite simple to convert to \gls{glossaries-extra}.
If you want the dot after the description, you need the
\pkgopt[false]{nopostdot} or \pkgopt*{postdot} package option. You
may also want to consider using the \pkgopt*{stylemods} option.

In order to prevent the \qt{marrow} entry from being automatically
being added to the glossary as a result of the cross-reference, you
can use \pkgopt+{false}{autoseeindex} to prevent the automatic
indexing triggered by the \gloskey{see} key (or the
\xtrgloskey{seealso} key provided by \gls{glossaries-extra}).

\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{autoseeindex}=false},\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods}]\mgroup{glossaries-extra}
\end{alltt}
The document build is the same, but now the \qt{marrow} and
\qt{zucchini} entries aren't present in the document.

Note that the \qt{fruit} entry is still included even though it
hasn't been used in the document. This is because it was explicitly
indexed with \ics{glssee} not via the \gloskey{see} key.

The entries that contains \texttt{see=[\cs{alsoname}]}
can be converted to use the \xtrgloskey{seealso} key:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{apple}\mgroup{name=apple,description=\mgroup{firm, round fruit},
\strong{\xtrfont{seealso}=\mgroup{pear}}}

\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{marrow}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{marrow},
 description=\mgroup{long vegetable with thin green skin and white flesh},
 \strong{\xtrfont{seealso}=\mgroup{courgette}}}
\end{alltt}
(The provided \cs{alsoname} definition may be removed.)

The original example redefines the cross-referencing format to use
\gls{smallcaps}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}\mgroup{\ics{glsseeitemformat}}[1]\mgroup{\cs{textsc}\mgroup{\ics{glsentryname}\mgroup{\#1}}}
\end{alltt}
This will still produce the desired effect with \gls{glossaries-extra} for 
this simple example but, as with \samplefile{AcrDesc},
this redefinition isn't necessary if you have at least
\gls{glossaries-extra} v1.42.

\bibglsnote
If you want to switch to \gls{bib2gls} then you first need to switch
to \gls{glossaries-extra}, as described above, but you now need the
\pkgopt*{record} option but no longer need the
\pkgopt+{false}{autoseeindex} option:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record}},\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods}]\mgroup{glossaries-extra}
\end{alltt}
Next the entry definitions need to be converted to the
\filetype{bib} format required by \gls{bib2gls}.
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib sample-crossref.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
If you have at least v2.0 then \gls{convertgls2bib} will absorb the
cross-referencing information supplied by:
\begin{verbatim}
\glssee{fruit}{pear,apple,banana}
\end{verbatim}
into the \texttt{fruit} definition:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{fruit,
  see = \mgroup{pear,apple,banana},
  name = \mgroup{fruit},
  description = \mgroup{sweet, fleshy product of plant containing seed}
}
\end{alltt}
Now remove \cs{makeglossaries} and all the entry definition commands
(including \cs{glssee} from the preamble) and add:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries.bib]
\end{alltt}
Finally, replace \cs{printglossaries} with
\ics*{printunsrtglossaries}. The document build is now:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-crossref
bib2gls sample-crossref
pdflatex sample-crossref
\end{prompt}
The glossary now contains: apple, banana, courgette and pear. Note
that it doesn't contain fruit, zucchini or marrow.

Now change the selection criteria:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries.bib,
 \strong{\xtrfont{selection}=\mgroup{recorded and deps and see}}]
\end{alltt}
The glossary now includes fruit, zucchini and marrow.

The fruit and zucchini use the \gloskey{see} key which is a simple
redirection for the reader. There's no \gls{numberlist} for either
of these entries. Whereas marrow uses the \xtrgloskey{seealso} key,
which is typically intended as a supplement to a \gls{numberlist}
but in this case there are no locations as marrow hasn't been used
in the text.

With at least v2.0, there's an alternative:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries.bib,
 \resourceopt{selection}=\mgroup{recorded and deps and see\strong{ not also}}]
\end{alltt}
In this case, the glossary includes fruit and zucchini but not marrow.


\section{Custom Keys}
\label{sec:samplescustomkeys}

\exitem{-newkeys} This document illustrates how add custom keys
(using \ics{glsaddkey}). There are two custom keys \texttt{ed}, where
the default value is the \gloskey{text} field with \qt{ed} appended,
and \texttt{ing}, where the default value is the \gloskey{text}
field with \qt{ing} appended. Since the default value in both cases
references the \gloskey{text} field, the starred version
\cs{glsaddkey*} is required to ensure that the default value is expanded on
definition if no alternative has been provided.

The entries are then defined as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{jump}{name={jump},description={}}

\newglossaryentry{run}{name={run},%
 ed={ran},%
 ing={running},
 description={}}

\newglossaryentry{waddle}{name={waddle},%
 ed={waddled},%
 ing={waddling},%
 description={}}
\end{verbatim}

Each custom key is provided a set of commands analogous to
\cs{glsentrytext}, that allows the key value to be accessed, and
\cs{glstext} that allows the key value to be access with indexing
and hyperlinking (where applicable).

If you find yourself wanting to create a lot of custom keys that
produce minor variations of existing keys (such as different tenses)
you may find it simpler to just use \cs{glsdisp}. When editing the
document source, it's usually simpler to read:
\begin{verbatim}
The dog \glsdisp{jump}{jumped} over the duck.
\end{verbatim}
than
\begin{verbatim}
The dog \glsed{jump} over the duck.
\end{verbatim}

\bibglsnote
If you want to convert this document to use \gls{bib2gls}, you first
need to switch to \gls{glossaries-extra}, but remember that you need
the \pkgopt*{record} option:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record}}]{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
Next convert the entry definitions to the \filetype{bib} format
required by \gls{bib2gls}:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -{}-index-conversion -{}-preamble-only sample-newkeys.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
The \texttt{-{}-index-conversion} switch requires at least v2.0 and
will convert entries without a description (or where the description
is simply \ics{nopostdesc} or \ics*{glsxtrnopostpunc}) to
\atentry{index} instead of \atentry{entry}. This means that the
new \nolinkurl{entries.bib} file will contain:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{index}\mgroup{jump,
  name = \mgroup{jump}
}

\atentry{index}\mgroup{run,
  ing = \mgroup{running},
  name = \mgroup{run},
  ed = \mgroup{ran}
}

\atentry{index}\mgroup{waddle,
  ing = \mgroup{waddling},
  name = \mgroup{waddle},
  ed = \mgroup{waddled}
}
\end{alltt}
Now replace \cs{makeglossaries} with
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries]
\end{alltt}
and delete the \cs{newglossaryentry} commands. Finally replace
\cs{printglossaries} with \ics*{printunsrtglossaries}.

The document build is now:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-newkeys
bib2gls sample-newkeys
pdflatex sample-newkeys
\end{prompt}
Note that there's no need for the \pkgopt{nonumberlist} package
option when you don't use \gls{bib2gls}['s] \texttt{-{}-group}
switch.
 
\exitem{-storage-abbr} This document illustrates how add custom
storage keys (using \cs{glsaddstoragekey}). The document build is:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-storage-abbr
makeglossaries sample-storage-abbr
pdflatex sample-storage-abbr
\end{prompt}

The custom storage key is called \texttt{abbrtype} which defaults
to \texttt{word} if not explicitly set. Its value can be accessed
with the provided custom command \cs{abbrtype}.
\begin{alltt}
\ics{glsaddstoragekey}\mgroup{abbrtype}\mgroup{word}\mgroup{\cs{abbrtype}}
\end{alltt}
A custom abbreviation style is then defined that checks the value of
this key and makes certain adjustments depending on whether or not
its value is the default \texttt{word}.

This essentially forms a very similar function to the
\gls{glossaries-extra} package's \xtrgloskey{category} key, which is
also defined as a storage key:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{glsaddstoragekey}\mgroup{category}\mgroup{general}\mgroup{\ics*{glscategory}}
\end{alltt}

\glsxtrnote
This document is much simpler with the \gls{glossaries-extra}
package:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{documentclass}\mgroup{article}
\cs{usepackage}[\xtrfont{postdot}]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\cs{makeglossaries}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[\strong{acronym}]\mgroup{short-long}
\ics{newacronym}\mgroup{radar}\mgroup{radar}\mgroup{radio detecting and ranging}
\ics{newacronym}\mgroup{laser}\mgroup{laser}\mgroup{light amplification by stimulated
emission of radiation}
\ics{newacronym}\mgroup{scuba}\mgroup{scuba}\mgroup{self-contained underwater breathing
apparatus}

\ics*{newabbreviation}\mgroup{dsp}\mgroup{DSP}\mgroup{digital signal processing}
\ics*{newabbreviation}\mgroup{atm}\mgroup{ATM}\mgroup{automated teller machine}

\cs{begin}\mgroup{document}

First use: \cs{gls}\mgroup{radar}, \cs{gls}\mgroup{laser}, \cs{gls}\mgroup{scuba}, \cs{gls}\mgroup{dsp},
\cs{gls}\mgroup{atm}.

Next use: \cs{gls}\mgroup{radar}, \cs{gls}\mgroup{laser}, \cs{gls}\mgroup{scuba}, \cs{gls}\mgroup{dsp},
\cs{gls}\mgroup{atm}.

\cs{printglossaries}
\cs{end}\mgroup{document}
\end{alltt}

\exitem{-storage-abbr-desc} An extension of the previous example
where the user needs to provide a~description.

\exitem{-chap-hyperfirst} This document illustrates how to add
a~custom key using \cs{glsaddstoragekey} and hook into the \glslike\
and \glstextlike\ mechanism used to determine whether or not to
hyperlink an entry.
The document build is:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-chap-hyperfirst
makeglossaries sample-chap-hyperfirst
pdflatex sample-chap-hyperfirst
\end{prompt}
This example creates a storage key called \texttt{chapter} used to store the chapter 
number.
\begin{alltt}
\ics{glsaddstoragekey}\mgroup{\strong{chapter}}\mgroup{0}\mgroup{\strong{\cs{glschapnum}}}
\end{alltt}
It's initialised to 0 and the \ics{glslinkpostsetkeys} hook is used
to check this value against the current chapter number. If the
values are the same then the hyperlink is switched off, otherwise
the key value is updated unless the hyperlink has been switched off
(through the optional argument of commands like \cs{gls} and \cs{glstext}).
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics{glslinkpostsetkeys}}\mgroup{\%
 \cs{edef}\cs{currentchap}\mgroup{\cs{arabic}\mgroup{chapter}}\%
 \cs{ifnum}\cs{currentchap}=\strong{\cs{glschapnum}}\mgroup{\cs{glslabel}}\cs{relax}
  \cs{setkeys}\mgroup{glslink}\mgroup{hyper=false}\%
 \cs{else}
  \ics{glsifhyperon}\mgroup{\ics{glsfieldxdef}\mgroup{\cs{glslabel}}\mgroup{\strong{chapter}}\mgroup{\cs{currentchap}}}\mgroup{}\%
 \cs{fi}
}
\end{alltt}
Since this key isn't intended for use when the entry is being
defined, it would be more appropriate to simply use an internal
field that doesn't have an associated key or helper command, but
\ics{glsfieldxdef} requires the existence of the field. The
\gls{glossaries-extra} package provides utility commands designed to
work on internal fields that don't have an associated key and may
not have had a value assigned.

\glsxtrnote
If you want to switch to \gls{glossaries-extra} you need to change
the package loading line:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\xtrfont{postdot}]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
The custom storage key (provided with \cs{glsaddstoragekey}) can be
removed, and the \ics{glslinkpostsetkeys} hook can be changed to:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\ics{glslinkpostsetkeys}}\mgroup{\%
 \cs{edef}\cs{currentchap}\mgroup{\cs{arabic}\mgroup{chapter}}\%
 \strong{\ics*{GlsXtrIfFieldEqNum}*}\mgroup{\strong{chapter}}\mgroup{\cs{glslabel}}\mgroup{\cs{currentchap}}
 \mgroup{\%
   \cs{setkeys}\mgroup{glslink}\mgroup{hyper=false}\%
 }\%
 \mgroup{%
   \ics{glsifhyperon}\mgroup{\strong{\ics*{xGlsXtrSetField}}\mgroup{\cs{glslabel}}\mgroup{\strong{chapter}}\mgroup{\cs{currentchap}}}\mgroup{}\%
 }%
}
\end{alltt}
The field name is still called \texttt{chapter} but there's no
longer an associated key or command.

\section{Xindy (Option 3)}
\label{sec:samplesxindy}

Most of the earlier \gls{makeindex} sample files can be adapted to
use \gls{xindy} instead by adding the \pkgopt{xindy} package option.
Situations that you need to be careful about are when the sort value
(obtained from the \gloskey{name} if the \gloskey{sort} key is
omitted) contains commands (such as \verb|name={\pi}|) or is identical 
to another value (or is identical after \gls{xindy} has stripped all
commands and braces). This section describes sample documents that
use features which are unavailable with \gls{makeindex}.

\exitem{xdy} The document uses UTF8 encoding (with the
\sty{inputenc} package). This is information that needs to be passed
to \gls{xindy}, so the encoding is picked up by \gls{makeglossaries}
from the \filetype{aux} file.

By default, this document will create a \gls{xindy} style file called 
\nolinkurl{samplexdy.xdy}, but if you uncomment the lines
\begin{verbatim}
\setStyleFile{samplexdy-mc}
\noist
\GlsSetXdyLanguage{}
\end{verbatim}
it will set the style file to \texttt{samplexdy-mc.xdy} instead.
This provides an additional letter group for entries starting with
\qt{Mc} or \qt{Mac}. If you use \gls{makeglossaries} or
\gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua}, you don't
need to supply any additional information. If you don't use
\gls*{makeglossaries}, you will need to specify the required
information. Note that if you set the style file to
\nolinkurl{samplexdy-mc.xdy} you must also specify \ics{noist},
otherwise the \styfmt{glossaries} package will overwrite
\nolinkurl{samplexdy-mc.xdy} and you will lose the \qt{Mc} letter
group.

To create the document do:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex samplexdy
makeglossaries samplexdy
pdflatex samplexdy
\end{prompt}
If you don't have Perl installed then you can't use 
\gls{makeglossaries}, but you also can't use \gls{xindy}!
However, if for some reason you want to call 
\gls{xindy} explicitly instead of using \gls{makeglossaries} (or
\gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua}):
\begin{itemize}
\item if you are using the default style file \nolinkurl{samplexdy.xdy}, then
do (no line breaks):
\begin{prompt}
xindy -L english -C utf8 -I xindy -M samplexdy -t samplexdy.glg -o samplexdy.gls samplexdy.glo
\end{prompt}
\item if you are using \nolinkurl{samplexdy-mc.xdy}, then do
(no line breaks):
\begin{prompt}
xindy -I xindy -M samplexdy-mc -t samplexdy.glg -o samplexdy.gls samplexdy.glo
\end{prompt}
\end{itemize}

This document creates a new command to use with the
\gloskey[glslink]{format} key in the optional argument of commands
like \cs{gls} to format the location in the \gls{numberlist}.
The usual type of definition when a hyperlinked location is required
should use one of the \csmeta{hyper}{xx}{} commands listed in
\tableref{tab:hyperxx}:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand*{\hyperbfit}[1]{\textit{\hyperbf{#1}}}
\end{verbatim}
Unfortunately, this definition doesn't work for this particular
document and some adjustments are needed (see below). As a result of
the adjustments, this command doesn't actually get used by \TeX,
even though \texttt{hyperbfit} is used in the
\gloskey[glslink]{format} key. It does, however, need to be
identified as an attribute so that \gls{xindy} can recognise it:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperbfit}
\end{verbatim}
This will add information to the \filetype{xdy} file when it's
created by \cs{makeglossaries}. If you prevent the creation of this
file with \ics{noist} then you will need to add the attribute to
your custom \filetype{xdy} file (see the provided
\nolinkurl{samplexdy-mc.xdy} file).

In order to illustrate unusual location formats, this sample
document provides a command called \cs{tallynum}\marg{n} that represents its
numerical argument with a die or dice where the dots add up to \meta{n}:
\begin{verbatim}
\newrobustcmd*{\tallynum}[1]{%
 \ifnum\number#1<7
  $\csname dice\romannumeral#1\endcsname$%
 \else
  $\dicevi$%
  \expandafter\tallynum\expandafter{\numexpr#1-6}%
 \fi
}
\end{verbatim}
This command needs to be robust to prevent it from being expanded
when it's written to any of the auxiliary files. The \ics{dicei},
\ldots, \cs{dicevi} commands are provided by the \sty{stix}
package, so that needs to be loaded.

An associated command \cs{tally}\marg{counter} is defined that
formats the value of the named \meta{counter} according to
\cs{tallynum}:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand*{\tally}[1]{\tallynum{\arabic{#1}}}
\end{verbatim}
(This shouldn't be robust as it needs the counter value to expand.)
The page numbers are altered to use this format (by redefining \ics{thepage}).

This custom location format also needs to be identified in the
\filetype{xdy} file so that \gls{xindy} can recognise it and
determine how to form ranges if required.
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyLocation{tally}{% tally location format
 :sep "\string\tallynum\space\glsopenbrace"
 "arabic-numbers" 
 :sep "\glsclosebrace"
}
\end{verbatim}
Again this information is written to the \filetype{xdy} file by
\cs{makeglossaries} so if you use \cs{noist} then you need to
manually add it to your custom \filetype{xdy} file.

When \gls{xindy} creates the associated glossary files, the
locations will be written using: 
\begin{alltt}
\csmetameta{glsX}{counter}{X}{format}{}\marg{hyper-prefix}\marg{location}
\end{alltt}
In this case:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{glsXpageXglsnumberformat}\mgroup{}\mgroup{\cs{tallynum}\marg{number}}
\end{alltt}
or
\begin{alltt}
\cs{glsXpageXhyperbfit}\mgroup{}\mgroup{\cs{tallynum}\marg{number}}
\end{alltt}
This means that although \cs{hyperbf} is designed to create
hyperlinked locations, the presence of \cs{tallynum} interferes with
it.
In order to make the hyperlinks work correctly, the definitions of
\cs{glsXpageXhyperbfit} need to be redefined in order to grab the
number part in order to work out the location's numeric value. If
the value of \cs{tally} is changed so that it expands differently
then these modifications won't work.

Remember that in both cases, the second argument \verb|#2| is in the
form \cs{tally}\marg{n}:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand{\glsXpageXglsnumberformat}[2]{%
 \linkpagenumber#2%
}
\renewcommand{\glsXpageXhyperbfit}[2]{%
 \textbf{\em\linkpagenumber#2}%
}
\end{verbatim}
These need a command that can grab the actual number and correctly encapsulate
it:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\linkpagenumber}[2]{\hyperlink{page.#2}{#1{#2}}}
\end{verbatim}

If you want to try out the \nolinkurl{samplexdy-mc.xdy} file, the
entries starting with \qt{Mac} or \qt{Mc} will be placed in their
own \qt{Mc} letter group. Ideally it should be possible to do this
simply with \ics{GlsAddLetterGroup} (and not require a custom
\filetype{xdy} file) but unfortunately the \qt{M} letter
group will have already been defined and take precedence over
\qt{Mc}, which is why a custom file is required and the normal
language module must be suppressed:
\begin{verbatim}
\setStyleFile{samplexdy-mc}
\noist
\GlsSetXdyLanguage{}
\end{verbatim}

This \qt{Mc} group is suitable for names like
\qt{Maclaurin} but not for \qt{Mach}. To prevent this, the
\gloskey{sort} key for that value is set to lower case:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{mach}{name={Mach, Ernst},
first={Ernst Mach},text={Mach},
sort={mach, Ernst},
description={Czech/Austrian physicist and philosopher}}
\end{verbatim}

\bibglsnote
If you want to convert this document so that it uses \gls{bib2gls},
you first need to switch to \gls{glossaries-extra} and use the
\pkgopt*{record} package option:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record}},\xtrfont{postdot}]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
The \gls{xindy}-only commands can now all be removed
(attribute \cs{GlsAddXdyAttribute}, location \cs{GlsAddXdyLocation},
language \cs{GlsSetXdyLanguage}, location encapsulators 
\csmetameta{glsX}{counter}{X}{format}{}
and the custom helper \cs{linkpagenumber}).
Also \cs{noist} and \cs{setStyleFile} aren't relevant with
\gls{bib2gls} and so should be removed.

The definitions of \cs{hyperbfit} should be retained (as well as
\cs{tallynum}, \cs{tally} and the redefinition of \cs{thepage}).

The entries all need to be converted to the \filetype{bib} format
required by \gls{bib2gls}.
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -{}-preamble-only samplexdy.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
Next replace \cs{makeglossaries} with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries]
\end{alltt}
and remove all the entry definitions from the preamble. Use the
search and replace function on your text editor to replace all
instances of \ics{glsentryfirst} with \ics*{glsfmtfirst}, and all
instances of \ics{glsentryname} with \ics*{glsfmtname}.

Finally, replace \ics{printglossaries} with \ics*{printunsrtglossaries}.
The document build is now:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex samplexdy
bib2gls -{}-group samplexdy
pdflatex samplexdy
\end{prompt}

This results in a slightly different ordering from the original
document (without the \qt{Mc} letter group). In the original
example, \qt{Mach number} was listed before \qt{Mach, Ernest}. The
modified document now has \qt{Mach, Ernest} before \qt{Mach number}.
This difference is due to \gls{bib2gls}['s] default
\resourceopt[word]{break-at} setting, which marks word boundaries
with the pipe (\texttt{|}) character, so the sort values for
\gls{bib2gls} are \texttt{Mach|Earnest|} and \texttt{Mach|number|}.
See the \gls{bib2gls} manual for further details of this option, and
also see the examples chapter of that manual for alternative
approaches when creating entries that contain people's names.

If you want the \qt{Mc} letter group, it can be obtained by
providing a custom sort rule:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries,
   \resourceopt{sort}=\strong{custom},
   \strong{\xtrfont{sort-rule}}=\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrcontrolrules}
   ;\ics*{glsxtrspacerules};\ics*{glsxtrnonprintablerules}
   ;\ics*{glsxtrcombiningdiacriticrules},\ics*{glsxtrhyphenrules}
   <\ics*{glsxtrgeneralpuncrules}<\ics*{glsxtrdigitrules}
   <a,A<b,B<c,C<d,D<e,E<f,F<g,G<h,H<i,I<j,J<k,K<l,L\strong{<Mc=Mac}<m,M<o,O
   <p,P<q,Q<r,R<s,S<t,T<u,U<v,V<r,R<s,S<t,T<u,U<v,V<w,W<x,X<y,Y<z,Z
   }
]
\end{alltt}
Unfortunately, as with \gls{xindy}, this puts \qt{Mach} into the
\qt{Mc} letter group.

One way to get around this problem is to define a custom command to
help identify genuine \qt{Mc}/\qt{Mac} prefixes with names that
happen to start with \qt{Mac}. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{mcadam,
  name = \mgroup{\strong{\cs{Mac}\mgroup{Mc}}Adam, John Loudon},
  description = \mgroup{Scottish engineer},
  text = \mgroup{McAdam},
  first = \mgroup{John Loudon McAdam}
}

\atentry{entry}\mgroup{maclaurin,
  name = \mgroup{\strong{\cs{Mac}\mgroup{Mac}}laurin, Colin},
  description =\mgroup{Scottish mathematician best known for the
\cs{gls}\mgroup{maclaurinseries}},
  text = \mgroup{Maclaurin},
  first = \mgroup{Colin Maclaurin}
}
\end{alltt}
but not for \qt{Mach}:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{mach,
  name = \mgroup{Mach, Ernst},
  description = \mgroup{Czech/Austrian physicist and philosopher},
  text = \mgroup{Mach},
  first = \mgroup{Ernst Mach}
}
\end{alltt}
With \LaTeX, this command should simply do its argument:
\begin{verbatim}
\newcommand{\Mac}[1]{#1}
\end{verbatim}
However, when \gls{bib2gls} works out the \gloskey{sort} value, it
needs to be defined with something unique that won't happen to occur
at the start of another term. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\providecommand{\Mac}[1]{MC}
\end{verbatim}
(Remember that \resourceopt[word]{break-at} will strip spaces
and punctuation so don't include them unless you switch to
\resourceopt[none]{break-at}.)

So add the first definition of \cs{Mac} to the \filetype{tex} file and modify
\nolinkurl{entries.bib} so that it includes the second definition:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{preamble}\mgroup{"\cs{providecommand}\mgroup{\cs{Mac}}[1]\mgroup{MC}"}
\end{alltt}
Then modify the \qt{Mc}/\qt{Mac} entries as appropriate (see the
above \qt{McAdam} and \qt{Maclaurin} examples).

The custom sort rule needs to be modified:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries,
   \strong{\xtrfont{write-preamble}=false,}
   \resourceopt{sort}=custom,
   \resourceopt{sort-rule}=\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrcontrolrules}
   ;\ics*{glsxtrspacerules};\ics*{glsxtrnonprintablerules}
   ;\ics*{glsxtrcombiningdiacriticrules},\ics*{glsxtrhyphenrules}
   <\ics*{glsxtrgeneralpuncrules}<\ics*{glsxtrdigitrules}
   <a,A<b,B<c,C<d,D<e,E<f,F<g,G<h,H<i,I<j,J<k,K<l,L\strong{<MC}<m,M<o,O
   <p,P<q,Q<r,R<s,S<t,T<u,U<v,V<r,R<s,S<t,T<u,U<v,V<w,W<x,X<y,Y<z,Z
   }
]
\end{alltt}
This will create a \qt{Mc} letter group that only includes the names
that start with the custom \cs{Mac} command.

Other alternatives include moving \atentry{preamble} into a separate
\filetype{bib} file, so that you can choose whether or not to
include it. See the \qt{Examples} chapter of the \gls{bib2gls} user
manual for further examples.

\exitem{xdy2} This document illustrates
how to use the \styfmt{glossaries} package where the location
numbers don't follow a standard format. This example will only work
with \gls{xindy}. To create the document do:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex samplexdy2
makeglossaries samplexdy2
pdflatex samplexdy2
\end{prompt}
The explicit \gls{xindy} call is:
\begin{prompt}
xindy -L english -C utf8 -I xindy -M samplexdy2 -t samplexdy2.glg -o samplexdy2.gls samplexdy2.glo
\end{prompt}
This example uses the \texttt{section} counter with \gls{xindy}:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[xindy,counter=section]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
The document employs an eccentric section numbering system for
illustrative purposes. The section numbers are prefixed by the
chapter number in square brackets:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\thesection}{[\thechapter]\arabic{section}}
\end{verbatim}
Parts use Roman numerals:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\thepart}{\Roman{part}}
\end{verbatim}
The section hyperlink name includes the part:
\begin{verbatim}
\renewcommand*{\theHsection}{\thepart.\thesection}
\end{verbatim}
This custom numbering scheme needs to be identified in the
\filetype{xdy} file:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyLocation["roman-numbers-uppercase"]{section}{:sep "["
  "arabic-numbers" :sep "]" "arabic-numbers"
}
\end{verbatim}
If the part is 0 then \cs{thepart} will be empty (there isn't a zero
Roman numeral). An extra case is needed to catch this:
\begin{verbatim}
\GlsAddXdyLocation{zero.section}{:sep "["
  "arabic-numbers" :sep "]" "arabic-numbers"
}
\end{verbatim}
Note that this will stop xindy giving a warning, but the location
hyperlinks will be invalid if no \cs{part} is used.

\bibglsnote
If you want to switch to \gls{bib2gls}, you first need to switch to
\gls{glossaries-extra} but remember to use \pkgopt*{record} instead
of \pkgopt{xindy}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record}},counter=section]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
Next remove the \cs{GlsAddXdyLocation} commands and convert the
entry definitions to the \filetype{bib} format required by
\gls{bib2gls}:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -{}-preamble-only samplexdy2.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
Now replace \cs{makeglossaries} with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries]
\end{alltt}
and remove the \cs{newglossaryentry} commands.
Finally, replace \cs{printglossaries} with \ics*{printunsrtglossaries}.

The document build is:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex samplexdy2
bib2gls samplexdy2
pdflatex samplexdy2
\end{prompt}

With unusual numbering systems, it's sometimes better to use \pkgopt+{nameref}{record}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record}=nameref},counter=section]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
In this case, the locations will be the actual section headings,
rather than the section number. In order to make the number appear
instead you need to define:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}*\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrsectionlocfmt}}[2]\mgroup{\#1}
\end{alltt}
(Make sure you have at least v1.42 of \gls{glossaries-extra}.) See
also the earlier \samplefile{Sec}. 

\exitem{xdy3} This document is very similar to 
\samplefile{xdy} but uses the command \cs{Numberstring} from the
\sty{fmtcount} package to format the page numbers instead of the
\cs{tally} command from the earlier example.

\exitem{utf8} This is another example
that uses \gls{xindy}. Unlike \gls{makeindex},
\gls{xindy} can cope with \glspl{nonlatinchar}. This
document uses \gls{UTF-8} encoding. To create the document do:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleutf8
makeglossaries sampleutf8
pdflatex sampleutf8
\end{prompt}
The explicit \gls{xindy} call is
(no line breaks):
\begin{prompt}\raggedright
xindy -L english -C utf8 -I xindy -M sampleutf8 -t sampleutf8.glg -o sampleutf8.gls sampleutf8.glo
\end{prompt}

If you remove the \pkgopt{xindy} option from \texttt{sampleutf8.tex} 
and do:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleutf8
makeglossaries sampleutf8
pdflatex sampleutf8
\end{prompt}
or
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleutf8
makeglossaries-lite sampleutf8
pdflatex sampleutf8
\end{prompt}
you will see that the entries that start with an \gls{exlatinchar}
now appear in the symbols group, and the word \qt{man\oe uvre} is now 
after \qt{manor} instead of before it. If you want to explicitly
call \gls{makeindex} (no line breaks):
\begin{prompt}
makeindex -s sampleutf8.ist -t sampleutf8.glg -o sampleutf8.gls sampleutf8.glo
\end{prompt}

\bibglsnote
If you want to switch to \gls{bib2gls}, you first need to switch to
\gls{glossaries-extra} but replace \pkgopt{xindy} with
\pkgopt*{record}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record}},\xtrfont{postdot},\xtrfont{stylemods},style=listgroup]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
Note that you don't need the \pkgopt{nonumberlist} option with
\gls{bib2gls}. You can instruct \gls{bib2gls} to simply not save the
\glspl{numberlist}, but in this case there won't be any locations as
there's no actual indexing.

The entries need to be converted to the \filetype{bib} format
required by \gls{bib2gls}:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -{}-preamble-only -{}-texenc UTF-8 -{}-bibenc UTF-8 sampleutf8.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
Note the first line of the \nolinkurl{entries.bib} file:
\begin{alltt}
\% Encoding: UTF-8
\end{alltt}
This is the encoding of the \filetype{bib} file. It doesn't have to
match the encoding of the \filetype{tex} file, but it's generally
better to be consistent. When \gls{bib2gls} parses this file, it
will look for this encoding line.
(If the \texttt{-{}-texenc} and \texttt{-{}-bibenc} switches aren't
used, \gls{convertgls2bib} will assume your system's default
encoding. See the \gls{bib2gls} manual for further details.)

Next replace \cs{makeglossaries} with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries,\resourceopt{selection}=\strong{all}]
\end{alltt}
and remove all the \cs{newglossaryentry} commands.

Iterative commands like \ics{glsaddall} don't work with
\gls{bib2gls}.  Instead, you can select all entries using the
\resourceopt[all]{selection} option.
This is actually better than \cs{glsaddall}, which enforces
the selection of all entries by indexing each entry. As a result,
with \gls{makeindex} and \gls{xindy} (and \opt1), every entry will
have the same location (which is the location of the \cs{glsaddall}
command, in this case page~1). With \resourceopt[all]{selection},
\gls{bib2gls} will automatically selection all entries even if they
don't have any records (indexing information) so in this case there
are no \glspl{numberlist}.

Finally, replace \cs{printglossaries} with
\ics*{printunsrtglossaries}. The build process is now:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sampleutf8
bib2gls -{}-group sampleutf8
pdflatex sampleutf8
\end{prompt}
\gls{bib2gls} picks up the encoding of the \filetype{tex} file from
the \filetype{aux} file:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsxtr@texencoding}\mgroup{utf8}
\end{alltt}
If you experience any encoding issues, check the \filetype{aux} file for
this command and check the \filetype{bib} file for the encoding
comment line. Also check \gls{bib2gls}['s] \filetype{glg} transcript file
for encoding messages, which should look like:
\begin{verbatim}
TeX character encoding: UTF-8
\end{verbatim}

The document language, if it has been set, is also added to the \filetype{aux} file when
the \pkgopt{record} option is used. In this case, no language
package has been used, so \gls{bib2gls} will fallback on the system's default
locale. If no sort method is set, the entries will be sorted
according to the document language, if set, or the default locale.
You can specify a specific locale using the \resourceopt{sort} key
with a locale tag identifier. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries,\resourceopt{selection}=\strong{all},\strong{\xtrfont{sort}=de-CH-1996}]
\end{alltt}
(Swiss German new orthography) or:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries,\resourceopt{selection}=\strong{all},\strong{\xtrfont{sort}=is}]
\end{alltt}
(Icelandic).

\section{No Indexing Application (Option 1)}
\label{sec:samplesnoidx}

\exitem{-noidxapp} This document illustrates how to use the
\styfmt{glossaries} package without an external \gls{indexingapp} (\opt1).
To create the complete document, you need to do:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-noidxapp
pdflatex sample-noidxapp
\end{prompt}
Note the need to group the accent command that occurs at the start
of the \gloskey{name}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{elite}\mgroup{\%
  name=\mgroup{\strong{\mgroup{\ics{'}e}}lite},
  description=\mgroup{select group of people}
}
\end{alltt}
This is necessary to allow the term to work with \ics{Gls}.
Notice also how the \glspl{numberlist} can't be compacted into
ranges. For example, the list \qt{1, 2, 3} would be converted to
\qt{1--3} with a proper indexing application (\optsor23 or, with
\gls{glossaries-extra}, \opt4).

The larger the list of entries, the longer the document build time.
This method is very inefficient for large glossaries. See
\gallery{glossaries-performance.shtml}{Gallery: glossaries performance} for a comparison.

\exitem{-noidxapp-utf8} As the previous example, except that it uses
the \sty{inputenc} package.
To create the complete document, you need to do:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-noidxapp-utf8
pdflatex sample-noidxapp-utf8
\end{prompt}
This method is unsuitable for sorting languages with
\glspl{exlatinalph} or \glspl{nonlatinalph}. Use \optsor34 instead.

\section{Other}
\label{sec:samplesother}

\exitem{4col} This document illustrates
a four column glossary where the entries have a symbol in addition
to the name and description. To create the complete document, you
need to do:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample4col
makeglossaries sample4col
pdflatex sample4col
\end{prompt}
or
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample4col
makeglossaries-lite sample4col
pdflatex sample4col
\end{prompt}
The vertical gap between entries is the
gap created at the start of each group. This can be suppressed
using the \pkgopt{nogroupskip} package option. (If you switch to
\gls{bib2gls}, simply omit the \texttt{-{}-group} command line option.)

This example uses the \glostyle{long4colheaderborder}. This style
doesn't allow multi-line descriptions. You may prefer to use
\glostyle{altlong4colheaderborder} with long descriptions. However,
in either case a style that uses \sty{booktabs} is preferable. For
example, \glostyle{long4col-booktabs} or
\glostyle{altlongragged4col-booktabs}. Note that this requires
\sty{glossary-longbooktabs}, which needs to be explicitly loaded.
The style can only be set once this package has been loaded:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}\mgroup{glossaries}
\cs{usepackage}\mgroup{glossary-longbooktabs}
\cs{setglossarystyle}\mgroup{altlongragged4col-booktabs}
\end{alltt}

\glsxtrnote
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides a more compact way of
doing this with the \pkgopt*{stylemods} option:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[style=altlongragged4col-booktabs,\xtrfont{stylemods}=\strong{longbooktabs}]
\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package provides additional styles,
including more \qt{long} styles with the \sty*{glossary-longextra}
package. For example, the \xtrglostyle{long-name-desc-sym-loc}
style:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[style=\strong{\xtrfont{long-name-desc-sym-loc}},\xtrfont{stylemods}=\strong{longextra}]
\mgroup{glossaries-extra}
\end{alltt}
If you use the \pkgopt*{stylemods} option with an argument, you may
prefer to use it with \pkgopt{nostyles} to prevent unwanted styles
from being automatically loaded. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[style=\xtrfont{long-name-desc-sym-loc},\strong{\xtrfont{nostyles},}\xtrfont{stylemods}=longextra]
\mgroup{glossaries-extra}
\end{alltt}
See also the
\gallery{glossaries-styles/}{gallery of predefined styles}.

\exitem{-numberlist} This document illustrates how to reference the
\gls{numberlist} in the document text. This requires an additional
\LaTeX\ run:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-numberlist
makeglossaries sample-numberlist
pdflatex sample-numberlist
pdflatex sample-numberlist
\end{prompt}
This uses the \pkgopt{savenumberlist} package option, which enables 
\ics{glsentrynumberlist} and \ics{glsdisplaynumberlist}
(with limitations).  The location counter is set to
\texttt{chapter}, so the \gls{numberlist} refers to the chapter
numbers.
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[savenumberlist,counter=chapter]{glossaries}
\end{verbatim}
The \gls{numberlist} can't be obtained until \gls{makeindex} (or
\gls{xindy}) has created the glossary file. The \gls{numberlist} is
picked up when this file is input by \cs{printglossary} and is then
saved in the \filetype{aux} file so that it's available on the next
\LaTeX\ run.

This document contains both commands:
\begin{alltt}
This is a \cs{gls}\mgroup{sample} document. \cs{Glspl}\mgroup{sample}
are discussed in chapters~\strong{\ics{glsdisplaynumberlist}}\mgroup{sample}
(or \strong{\ics{glsentrynumberlist}}\mgroup{sample}).
\end{alltt}
Without \sty{hyperref}, the first list shows as \qt{1--3, 5 \& 6}
and the second list shows as \qt{1--3, 5, 6}.

Note that you can't use \ics{glsdisplaynumberlist} with
\sty{hyperref} and \optsor23. If you do, you will get the warning:
\begin{verbatim}
Package glossaries Warning: \glsdisplaynumberlist doesn't work with 
hyperref.
Using \glsentrynumberlist instead
\end{verbatim}
Now both lists show as \qt{1--3, 5, 6}.

If you switch to \opt1 (replace \cs{makeglossaries} with
\cs{makenoidxglossaries} and replace \cs{printglossaries} with
\cs{printnoidxglossaries}), then the document build is simply:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-numberlist
pdflatex sample-numberlist
\end{prompt}
Now \ics{glsdisplaynumberlist} works with \sty{hyperref},
however there are no ranges, so the first list shows as \qt{1,
2, 3, 5, \& 6} and the second list shows as \qt{1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}.

\bibglsnote
If you want to switch to \gls{bib2gls}, you first need to switch to
\gls{glossaries-extra} (at least v1.42) but remember to include the \pkgopt{record}
option:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record}},counter=chapter]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
Note that the \pkgopt{savenumberlist} option is no longer required.
Next convert the entry to the \filetype{bib} format required by
\gls{bib2gls}:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib sample-numberlist.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
Replace \cs{makeglossaries} with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries.bib]
\end{alltt}
and remove the \cs{newglossaryentry} command from the document
preamble. Finally, replace \cs{printglossaries} with
\ics*{printunsrtglossaries}. The build process is now:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-numberlist
bib2gls sample-numberlist
pdflatex sample-numberlist
\end{prompt}
Now both ranges and hyperlinks work. The first list shows \qt{1--3,
5, \& 6} and the second list shows \qt{1--3, 5, 6}. You can also
use:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsxtrfieldformatlist}\mgroup{sample}\mgroup{loclist}
\end{alltt}
which will show the complete list without ranges \qt{1, 2, 3, 5 \&
6}.

This method works much better than using the \pkgopt{savenumberlist}
option because \gls{bib2gls} saves the formatted \gls{numberlist} in the
\xtrfield{location} field (which is an internal field provided by
\gls{glossaries-extra} for the benefit of \gls{bib2gls}) and the
unformatted \gls{numberlist} in the \field{loclist} internal field (which is
also used by \opt1).

With \optsand23, both \gls{makeindex} and \gls{xindy} simply create a
file containing the commands to typeset the glossary, which is input
by \cs{printglossary}. This means that it's quite hard to gather
information obtained by the \gls{indexingapp}.

\gls{bib2gls}, on the other hand, doesn't write a file containing
the glossary. It writes a file containing the entry definitions and
uses internal fields to save the indexing information. The glossary is
then displayed with \ics*{printunsrtglossary}, which simply iterates
over all defined entries and fetches the required information from
those internal fields.

The \ics{glsdisplaynumberlist} and \ics{glsentrynumberlist} commands
are redefined by \sty{glossaries-extra-bib2gls} to simply access the
\xtrfield{location} field.
However, if you want a complete list without ranges you can use:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{glsxtrfieldformatlist}\mgroup{sample}\mgroup{loclist}
\end{alltt}
In this example, this produces \qt{1, 2, 3, 5 \& 6}. 

Note the difference if you use the \pkgopt+{nameref}{record} package
option instead of just \pkgopt*{record}.

\exitem{-nomathhyper} This document illustrates how to selectively
enable and disable entry hyperlinks in \ics{glsentryfmt}. The
document build is:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-nomathhyper
makeglossaries sample-nomathhyper
pdflatex sample-nomathhyper
\end{prompt}
This disables the hyperlinks for the main glossary with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{GlsDeclareNoHyperList}\mgroup{main}
\end{alltt}
and then redefines \cs{glsentryfmt} so that it adds a hyperlink if
not in maths mode and the hyperlinks haven't been forced off (with
the \texttt{\gloskey[glslink]{hyper}\dequals false} key).

\glsxtrnote
If you want to switch to \gls{glossaries-extra}, then you can
instead use the hook that comes before the keys are set. The
preamble is much simpler:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}

\cs{makeglossaries}

\cs{renewcommand}\mgroup{\strong{\ics*{glslinkpresetkeys}}}\mgroup{\%
 \cs{ifmmode} \cs{setkeys}\mgroup{glslink}\mgroup{hyper=false}\cs{fi}
}

\% entry definition
\end{alltt}

\exitem{-entryfmt} This document illustrates how to change the
way an entry is displayed in the text. (This is just a test
document. For a real document, I recommend you use the \sty{siunitx}
package to typeset units.) The document build is:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-entryfmt
makeglossaries sample-entryfmt
pdflatex sample-entryfmt
\end{prompt}
This redefines \ics{glsentryfmt} to add the symbol on
\gls{firstuse}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{renewcommand}*\mgroup{\cs{glsentryfmt}}\mgroup{\%
  \ics{glsgenentryfmt}
  \ics{ifglsused}\mgroup{\cs{glslabel}}\mgroup{}\mgroup{\cs{space} (\strong{\ics{glsentrysymbol}}\mgroup{\cs{glslabel}})}\%
}
\end{alltt}
Note the use of \cs{glsentrysymbol} \emph{not} \cs{glssymbol} (which
would result in nested \gls{linktext}).

\glsxtrnote
If you want to switch to the \gls{glossaries-extra} package, you can
make use of the category post-link hook instead:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\xtrfont{stylemods},style=tree]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}

\cs{makeglossaries}

\ics*{glsdefpostlink}\mgroup{\strong{unit}}\mgroup{\ics*{glsxtrpostlinkAddSymbolOnFirstUse}}

\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{distance}\mgroup{
\xtrfont{category}=\mgroup{\strong{unit}},
name=distance,
description=\mgroup{The length between two points},
symbol=\mgroup{km}}
\end{alltt}
Note that in this case the symbol is now outside of the hyperlink.

\exitem{-prefix} This document illustrates the use of the
\sty{glossaries-prefix} package. An additional run is required to
ensure the table of contents is up-to-date:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-prefix
makeglossaries sample-prefix
pdflatex sample-prefix
pdflatex sample-prefix
\end{prompt}
Remember that the default separator between the prefix and \cs{gls}
(or one of its variants) is empty, so if a space is required it must
be inserted at the end of the prefix. However, the \sty{xkeyval}
package (which is used to parse the \meta{key}\dequals\meta{value}
lists) trims leading and trailing space from the values, so an
ordinary space character will be lost.
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{sample}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{sample},
  description=\mgroup{an example},
  prefix=\mgroup{a\strong{~}},
  prefixplural=\mgroup{the\strong{\cs{space}}}%
}

\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{oeil}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{oeil},
  plural=\mgroup{yeux},
  description=\mgroup{eye},
  prefix=\mgroup{l'},
  prefixplural=\mgroup{les\strong{\cs{space}}}}
\end{alltt}

\glsxtrnote
If you want to convert this example to use \gls{glossaries-extra},
then (as from v1.42) you can use the \pkgopt*{prefix} option:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{prefix}},\xtrfont{postdot},acronym]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
(Alternatively load \sty{glossaries-prefix} after
\gls{glossaries-extra}.) The rest of the document is the same as for
the base \styfmt{glossaries} package, unless you want to switch to
using \gls{bib2gls}.

\bibglsnote
If you want to switch to \gls{bib2gls}, first switch to
\gls{glossaries-extra} (as above) but make sure you include the
\pkgopt*{record} package option:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\strong{\xtrfont{record}},\xtrfont{prefix},\xtrfont{postdot},acronym]\mgroup{glossaries-extra}
\end{alltt}
Next convert the entries into the \filetype{bib} format required by
\gls{bib2gls}:
\begin{prompt}
convertgls2bib -{}-preamble-only sample-prefix.tex entries.bib
\end{prompt}
Replace \cs{makeglossaries} with
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[acronym]\mgroup{long-short}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries]
\end{alltt}
remove the entry definitions from the preamble, and replace
\begin{alltt}
\cs{printglossary}[style=plist]
\cs{printacronyms}
\end{alltt}
with
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{printunsrtglossary}[style=plist]
\ics*{printunsrtacronyms}
\end{alltt}
The document build is now:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-prefix
bib2gls sample-prefix
pdflatex sample-prefix
\end{prompt}

With \gls{bib2gls} v2.0+, you don't need to manually insert the spaces at
the end of the prefixes. Instead you can instruct \gls{bib2gls} to
insert them. To try this out, remove the trailing \verb|~| and
\cs{space} from the \nolinkurl{entries.bib} file:
\begin{alltt}
\atentry{entry}\mgroup{sample,
  prefix = \mgroup{a},
  name = \mgroup{sample},
  description = \mgroup{an example},
  prefixplural = \mgroup{the}
}

\atentry{entry}\mgroup{oeil,
  plural = \mgroup{yeux},
  prefix = \mgroup{l'},
  name = \mgroup{oeil},
  description = \mgroup{eye},
  prefixplural = \mgroup{les}
}

\atentry{acronym}\mgroup{svm,
  prefixfirst = \mgroup{a},
  prefix = \mgroup{an},
  short = \mgroup{SVM},
  long = \mgroup{support vector machine}
}
\end{alltt}
Now add the \resourceopt[\mgroup{space or nbsp}]{append-prefix-field}
resource option:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{GlsXtrLoadResources}[\resourceopt{src}=entries,\strong{\xtrfont{append-prefix-field}=\mgroup{space or nbsp}}]
\end{alltt}
See the \gls{bib2gls} manual for further details.

\exitem{accsupp} This document uses the \sty{glossaries-accsupp} package 
(see \sectionref{sec:accsupp}). That package automatically loads
\styfmt{glossaries} and passes all options to the base package. So
you can load both packages at once with just:
\begin{verbatim}
\usepackage[acronym]{glossaries-accsupp}
\end{verbatim}
This provides additional keys that aren't available with just the
base package, which may be used to provide replacement text. The
replacement text is inserted using \sty{accsupp}'s
\ics{BeginAccSupp} and \ics{EndAccSupp} commands. See the
\sty{accsupp} package for further details of those commands.

Note that this example document is provided to demonstrate
\sty{glossaries-accsupp} as succinctly as possible. The resulting
document isn't fully accessible as it's not tagged. See the
\sty{accessibility} and \sty{tagpdf} packages for further
information about tagging documents.

It's not essential to use \sty{glossaries-accsupp}. You can simply insert the replacement
text directly into the field values. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{Drive}{
 name={\BeginAccSupp{Actual=Drive}Dr.\EndAccSupp{}},
 description={Drive}
}
\newglossaryentry{image}{name={sample image},
 description={an example image},
 user1={\protect\BeginAccSupp{Alt={a boilerplate image used in
  examples}}\protect\includegraphics
  [height=20pt]{example-image}\protect\EndAccSupp{}}
}
\end{verbatim}
However, this can cause interference (especially with
case-changing). With \sty{glossaries-accsupp} it's possible to
obtain the field values without the accessibility information if
required. (If in the future \cs{includegraphics} is given extra
options to provide replacement text then the image example here
won't be necessary. However, the example can be adapted for images
created with \TeX\ code.)

The acronym style is set using:
\begin{verbatim}
\setacronymstyle{long-short}
\end{verbatim}
The first abbreviation is straightforward:
\begin{verbatim}
\newacronym{eg}{e.g.}{for example}
\end{verbatim}
The \gloskey{shortaccess} replacement text is automatically set to
the long form. The next abbreviation is awkward as the long form contains
formatting commands which can't be included in the replacement text.
This means that the \gloskey{shortaccess} key must be supplied:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newacronym}[\strong{shortaccess}=\mgroup{TiKZ ist kein Zeichenprogramm}]
\mgroup{tikz}\mgroup{Ti\cs{emph}\mgroup{k}Z}\mgroup{Ti\cs{emph}\mgroup{k}Z ist \cs{emph}\mgroup{kein} Zeichenprogramm}
\end{alltt}
In the above two cases, the short form obtained in \cs{gls} will use
the \qt{E} PDF element.

By way of comparison, there are some entries that are technically 
abbreviations but are defined using \ics{newglossaryentry} instead
of \ics{newacronym}. The replacement text is provided in the
\gloskey{access} key:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{Doctor}\mgroup{name=Dr,description=\mgroup{Doctor},\strong{access}=\mgroup{Doctor}}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{Drive}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{Dr.},plural=\mgroup{Drvs},description=\mgroup{Drive},
  \strong{access}=\mgroup{Drive}}
\end{alltt}
These will use PDF's \qt{ActualText} element (not \qt{E}).

The next entry is a symbol (the integration symbol $\int$). This
could be defined simply as:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{int}{name={int},description={integral},
 symbol={\ensuremath{\int}}}
\end{verbatim}
and then referenced in the text like this:
\begin{verbatim}
Symbol: \gls{int} (\glssymbol{int}).
\end{verbatim}
This results in the text \qt{Symbol: integral ($\int$).} However if you
copy and paste this from the PDF you will find the resulting text is
\qt{Symbol: int (R).} This is what's actually read out by the
text-to-speech system.

It would be better if the actual text was the Unicode character
0x222B. This would not only assist the text-to-speech system but
also make it easier to copy and paste the text. The simplest method
is to identify the character by its hexadecimal code, but in order
to do this the \ics{BeginAccSupp} command needs to have the options adjusted.

In order to determine whether to use \qt{E}, \qt{ActualText} or
\qt{Alt} for a particular field, \sty{glossaries-accsupp} will check
if the command \csmeta{gls}{field}{accsupp} exists (where
\meta{field} is the internal field label, see \tableref{tab:fieldmap}). Only two of
these commands are predefined: \ics{glsshortaccsupp} and
\ics{glsshortplaccsupp}, which is why the \gloskey{shortaccess}
field uses \qt{E}. If the given command doesn't exist then the
generic \ics{glsaccsupp} command is used instead.

This means that in order to simply set \gloskey{symbolaccess} to the
hexadecimal character code, I need to provide a command called
\ics{glssymbolaccsupp}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}\mgroup{\cs{gls\strong{symbol}accsupp}}[2]\mgroup{\%
 \ics{glsaccessibility}[\strong{method=hex,unicode}]\mgroup{\strong{ActualText}}\mgroup{\#1}\mgroup{\#2}\%
}
\end{alltt} 
Now I can adjust the definition of the \texttt{int} entry:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{int}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{int},description=\mgroup{integral},
  symbol=\mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{int}}},\strong{symbolaccess=\mgroup{222B}}
}
\end{alltt}

The final entry has an image stored in the \gloskey{user1} key. (The
image file is provided with the \sty{mwe} package.) This should use
\qt{Alt} instead of \qt{ActualText} so I need to define
\ics{glsuseriaccsupp}:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}\mgroup{\cs{gls\strong{useri}accsupp}}[2]\mgroup{\%
  \ics{glsaccessibility}\mgroup{\strong{Alt}}\mgroup{\#1}\mgroup{\#2}\%
}
\end{alltt}
The image description is provided in the \gloskey{user1access} key:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{sampleimage}\mgroup{name=\mgroup{sample image},
 description=\mgroup{an example image},
 user1=\mgroup{\cs{protect}\ics{includegraphics}[height=20pt]\mgroup{example-image}},
 \strong{user1access}=\mgroup{a boilerplate image used in examples}
}
\end{alltt}
(Note the need to protect the fragile \ics{includegraphics}. The alternative is
to use \cs{glsnoexpandfields} before defining the command. See
\sectionref{sec:expansion}.)

If you try this example and inspect the PDF\footnote{You can either
uncompress the PDF file and view it in a text editor or you can use
a tool such as the PDFDebugger provided with 
\href{https://pdfbox.apache.org/}{PDFBox}.}\ then you will find
content like:
\begin{verbatim}
/Span << /ActualText (Doctor) >> BDC
  BT
    /F8 9.9626 Tf
    73.102 697.123 Td
    [ (Dr) ] TJ
  ET
EMC
\end{verbatim}
This shows that \qt{ActualText} was used for \verb|\gls{Doctor}|.
The integral symbol ($\int$) created with \verb|\glssymbol{int}| is:
\begin{verbatim}
/Span << /ActualText (\376\377"+) >> BDC
  BT
    /F1 9.9626 Tf
    97.732 650.382 Td
    [ (R) ] TJ
  ET
EMC
\end{verbatim} 
Again, \qt{ActualText} has been used, but the character code has
been supplied. The image created with \verb|\glsuseri{sampleimage}| is:
\begin{verbatim}
/Span << /Alt (a boilerplate image used in examples) >> BDC
  1 0 0 1 106.588 618.391 cm
  q
    0.08301 0 0 0.08301 0 0 cm
    q
      1 0 0 1 0 0 cm
      /Im1 Do
    Q
  Q
EMC
\end{verbatim}
This shows that \qt{Alt} has been used.

The first use of \verb|\gls{eg}| produces the long form (not
reproduced here) followed by the short form:
\begin{verbatim}
/Span << /E (for example) >> BDC
  BT
    /F8 9.9626 Tf
    161.687 563.624 Td
    [ (e.g.) ] TJ
  ET
EMC
\end{verbatim}
The subsequent use also has the \qt{E} element:
\begin{verbatim}
/Span << /E (for example) >> BDC
  BT
    /F8 9.9626 Tf
    118.543 551.669 Td
    [ (e.g.) ] TJ
  ET
EMC
\end{verbatim}
Similarly for \verb|\acrshort{eg}|. You can also use the
\pkgopt[showaccsupp]{debug} package option. This will show the
replacement text in the document, but note that this is the content before
it's processed by \cs{BeginAccSupp}.

If the \ics{setacronymstyle} command is removed (or commented out)
then the result would be different. The \gls{firstuse} of \cs{gls} uses \qt{E} for
the short form but the subsequent use has \qt{ActualText} instead.
This is because without \ics{setacronymstyle} the original acronym
mechanism is used, which is less sophisticated than the newer
acronym mechanism that's triggered with \ics{setacronymstyle}.

\begin{important}
If you want to convert this example so that it uses
\gls{glossaries-extra}, make sure you have at least version 1.42 of
the extension package.
\end{important}

\glsxtrnote
If you want to convert this example so that it uses
\gls{glossaries-extra}, you need to replace the explicit loading of
\sty{glossaries-accsupp} with an implicit load through the
\pkgopt*{accsupp} package option:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{usepackage}[\xtrfont{abbreviations},\strong{\xtrfont{accsupp}}]\mgroup{\strong{glossaries-extra}}
\end{alltt}
I'm switching from \ics{newacronym} to \ics*{newabbreviation}, which
means that the default category is \cat{abbreviation} and also the
file extensions are different. If you are using \gls{makeglossaries}
or \gls{makeglossaries-lite.lua} you don't need to worry about it.
However, if you're not using those helper scripts then you will need
to adjust the file extensions in your document build process.

The style command \texttt{\cs{setacronymstyle}\mgroup{long-short}} needs
to be replaced with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{setabbreviationstyle}\mgroup{long-short}
\end{alltt}
This is actually the default so you can simply delete the
\cs{setacronymstyle} line. Substitute the two instances of
\ics{newacronym} with \ics*{newabbreviation}. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\strong{\ics*{newabbreviation}}\mgroup{eg}\mgroup{e.g.}\mgroup{for example}
\end{alltt}
Note that for the \texttt{tikz} entry you can now remove the explicit assignment of
\gloskey{shortaccess} with \gls{glossaries-extra} v1.42 as it will
strip formatting commands like \cs{emph}: 
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{newabbreviation}
 \mgroup{tikz}\mgroup{Ti\cs{emph}\mgroup{k}Z}\mgroup{Ti\cs{emph}\mgroup{k}Z ist \cs{emph}\mgroup{kein} Zeichenprogramm}
\end{alltt}
It's also necessary to replace \cs{acrshort}, \cs{acrlong} and \cs{acrfull} with
\ics*{glsxtrshort}, \ics*{glsxtrlong} and \ics*{glsxtrfull}.

You may notice a slight difference from the original example. The
\gloskey{shortaccess} field now shows \meta{long} (\meta{short})
instead of just \meta{long}. This is because \gls{glossaries-extra}
redefines \ics{glsdefaultshortaccess} to include the short form.   

Now that the extension package is being used, there are some other
modifications that would tidy up the code and fix a few issues.

The \qt{Doctor} and \qt{Drive} entries should really be defined as
abbreviations but they shouldn't be expanded on first use. The
\abbrstyle{short-nolong} style can achieve this and it happens to be
the default style for the \cat{acronym} category. This means that
you can simply replace the \qt{Doctor} definition with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{newacronym}\mgroup{Doctor}\mgroup{Dr}\mgroup{Doctor}
\end{alltt}
The \gls{firstuse} of \verb|\gls{Doctor}| is just \qt{Dr}.  This
means that the \qt{E} element will be used instead of \qt{ActualText}.
Now I don't need to supply the accessibility text as its obtained
from the long form.

The \qt{Drive} entry can be similarly defined but it has the awkward
terminating full stop. This means that I had to omit the end of
sentence terminator in:
\begin{verbatim}
\gls{Doctor} Smith lives at 2, Blueberry \gls{Drive}
\end{verbatim}
This looks odd when reading the document source and it's easy to
forgot. This is very similar to the situation in the
\samplefile{-dot-abbr} example. I can again use the
\attr{discardperiod} attribute, but I need to assign a different
category so that it doesn't interfere with the \qt{Doctor} entry.

The category is simply a label that's used in the construction of
some internal command names. This means that it must be fully
expandable, but I can choose whatever label I like (\cat{general},
\cat{abbreviation}, \cat{acronym}, \cat{index}, \cat{symbol} and
\cat{number} are used by various commands provided by
\gls{glossaries-extra}).

In this case, I've decided to have a category called \texttt{shortdotted} 
to indicate an abbreviation that ends with a
dot but only the short form is shown on \gls{firstuse}:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[shortdotted]\mgroup{short-nolong-noreg}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{shortdotted}\mgroup{discardperiod}\mgroup{true}
\ics*{newabbreviation}[category=shortdotted]\mgroup{Drive}\mgroup{Dr.\cs{@}}\mgroup{Drive}
\end{alltt}
In the \samplefile{-dot-abbr} example, I also used the
\attr{insertdots} attribute to automatically insert the dots and add
the space factor (which is adjusted if \attr{discardperiod} discards
a period). In this case I'm inserting the dot manually so I've also
added the space factor with \ics{@} in case the abbreviation is used
mid-sentence. For example:
\begin{verbatim}
\gls{Doctor} Smith lives at 2, Blueberry \gls{Drive}. Next sentence.

\gls{Doctor} Smith lives at 2, Blueberry \gls{Drive} end of sentence.
\end{verbatim}
(The spacing is more noticeable if you first switch to a monospaced
font with \cs{ttfamily}.)

The \qt{e.g.}\ abbreviation similarly ends with a dot. It's not
usual to write \qt{for example (e.g.)}\ in a document, so it really
ought to have the same \texttt{shortdotted} category, but it has a
long-short form for illustrative purposes in this test document. In
this case I need to choose another category so that I can apply a
different style. For example:
\begin{alltt}
\ics*{setabbreviationstyle}[longshortdotted]\mgroup{long-short}
\ics*{glssetcategoryattribute}\mgroup{longshortdotted}\mgroup{discardperiod}\mgroup{true}
\ics*{newabbreviation}[category=longshortdotted]\mgroup{e.g.}\mgroup{e.g.\cs{@}}\mgroup{for
example}
\end{alltt}

To further illustrate categories, let's suppose the symbol and image
should be in the \gloskey{name} field instead of the
\gloskey{symbol} and \gloskey{user1} fields. Now the
\cs{glssymbolaccsupp} and \cs{glsuseriaccsupp} commands won't be
used. I can't deal with both cases if I just provide
\cs{glsnameaccsupp}. 

I could provide category-field versions, such as
\xtrfont{\cs{glsxtrsymbolnameaccsupp}}, but remember that this only covers
accessing the \gloskey{name} field, which is typically only done in
the glossary. I would also need similar commands for the
\gloskey{first}, \gloskey{firstplural}, \gloskey{text} and
\gloskey{plural} keys. This is quite complicated, but since I don't
need to worry about any of the other fields it's simpler to just
provide the \csmeta*{glsxtr}{category}{accsupp} version:
\begin{alltt}
\cs{newcommand}\mgroup{\xtrfont{\cs{glsxtr\strong{symbol}accsupp}}}[2]\mgroup{\%
 \ics{glsaccessibility}[method=hex,unicode]\mgroup{ActualText}\mgroup{\#1}\mgroup{#2}\%
}
\cs{newcommand}\mgroup{\xtrfont{\cs{glsxtr\strong{image}accsupp}}}[2]\mgroup{\%
  \ics{glsaccessibility}\mgroup{Alt}\mgroup{\#1}\mgroup{\#2}\%
}

\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{int}\mgroup{\strong{\xtrfont{category}=symbol},
  \strong{name}=\mgroup{\cs{ensuremath}\mgroup{\cs{int}}},\strong{access}=\mgroup{222B},
  description=\mgroup{integral}
}

\cs{newglossaryentry}\mgroup{sampleimage}\mgroup{\strong{\xtrfont{category}=image},
 description=\mgroup{an example image},
 \strong{name}=\mgroup{\cs{protect}\cs{includegraphics}[height=20pt]\mgroup{example-image}},
 \strong{access}=\mgroup{a boilerplate image used in examples}
}
\end{alltt}
If it's necessary to provide support for additional fields, then the
category-field command \csmetameta*{glsxtr}{category}{}{field}{accsupp} could be used to
override the more general category command \csmeta*{glsxtr}{category}{accsupp}.

\exitem{-ignored} This document defines an ignored glossary for
common terms that don't need a definition. The document build is:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-ignored
makeglossaries sample-ignored
pdflatex sample-ignored
\end{prompt}
A new \qt{ignored} glossary is defined with:
\begin{alltt}
\ics{newignoredglossary}\mgroup{common}
\end{alltt}
There are no associated files with an ignored glossary. An entry is defined with 
this as its glossary type:
\begin{verbatim}
\newglossaryentry{commonex}{type=common,name={common term}}
\end{verbatim}
Note that the \gloskey{description} key isn't required. This term
may be referenced with \cs{gls} (which is useful for consistent
formatting) but it won't be indexed.

\exitem{-entrycount} This document uses \ics{glsenableentrycount}
and \ics{cgls} (described in \sectionref{sec:enableentrycount})
so that acronyms only used once don't appear in the list of
acronyms. The document build is:
\begin{prompt}
pdflatex sample-entrycount
pdflatex sample-entrycount
makeglossaries sample-entrycount
pdflatex sample-entrycount
\end{prompt}
Note the need to call \LaTeX\ twice before \gls{makeglossaries}, and
then a final \LaTeX\ call is required at the end.

\begin{xtr}
The \gls{glossaries-extra} package has additions that extend this
mechanism and comes with some other sample files related to entry counting.
\end{xtr}

\begin{bib2gls}
If you switch to \gls{bib2gls} you can use record counting instead.
See the \gls{bib2gls} manual for further details.
\end{bib2gls}

\chapter{Troubleshooting}
\label{sec:trouble}

In addition to the sample files listed in \sectionref{sec:samples}, 
the \styfmt{glossaries} package comes with some minimal example
files, \texttt{minimalgls.tex}, \texttt{mwe-gls.tex},
\texttt{mwe-acr.tex} and \texttt{mwe-acr-desc.tex}, which can be
used for testing. These should be located in the \texttt{samples}
subdirectory (folder) of the \styfmt{glossaries} documentation
directory. The location varies according to your operating system
and \TeX\ installation.  For example, on my Linux partition it can
be found in \texttt{/usr\slash local\slash texlive\slash
2014\slash texmf-dist\slash doc\slash latex\slash glossaries/}.
The \gls{makeglossariesgui} application can also be used to test for
various problems.
Further information on debugging \LaTeX\ code is available at
\url{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/minexample/}.

If you have any problems, please first consult the 
\urlfootref{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/faqs/glossariesfaq.html}{\styfmt{glossaries} FAQ}. If that
doesn't help, try posting your query to somewhere like the
\texttt{comp.text.tex} newsgroup, the 
\urlfootref{https://latex.org/forum/}{\LaTeX\ Community Forum} or 
\urlfootref{https://tex.stackexchange.com/}{\TeX\ on StackExchange}. 
Bug reports can be submitted via 
\urlfootref{https://www.dickimaw-books.com/bug-report.html}{my package bug report form}. 

\PrintIndex

\end{document}
